Service Schedule Manual JR ROYCE Rolls-Royce & Bentley Motor Cars

ROLLS Service Schedule Manual JR ROYCE Rolls-Royce & Bentley motor cars

Rolls-Royce Silver Spirit Rolls-Royce Silver Spur Rolls-Royce Camargue Rolls-Royce and Bentley Corniche Bentley Eight Bentley Mulsanne Bentley Mulsanne Turbo Bentley Turbo R Bentley Continental Cars built from the following vehicle identification number (VIN) *SCAZS0000ACH01001*

TSD4406

April 1985 _./ Printed and Published by Rolls-Royce Motors limited Crewe Cheshire CW1 3PL England

The information in this document is correct at the time of going to print but in view of the Company's continuing efforts to develop and improve its products it may have become out of date by the time you read it and you should, therefore, refer to the Company's service information sheets. The information given here must not be taken as forming part of or establishing any contractual or other commitment by Rolls-Royce Motors Limited and no warranty or representation concerning the information is given.

April 1985 SERVICi: SCHEDULE MANUAL

Introduction

This manual has been compiled to assist Service Throughout the manual reference is made to the Personnel responsible tor the maintenance of Rolls· right-hand and left·hand side of the car, this is Royce and Bentley motor cars (except Rolls-Royce determined when sitting in the driver's seat. Phantom VI) built from vehicle identification number In order to identify the two banks of engine (VIN)°*SCAZSOOOOACHO 1001* . For information cylinders, it should be noted that 'A' bank of cylinders relating to Phantom VI motor cars reference should be is on the right-hand side and ·a· bank on the left-hand made to Service Schedule Manual publication number side when viewed from the driver's seat. TSD 4117. Service Personnel at Rolls-Royce Motors Limited Information relating to any subsequent are always prepared to answer queries or give advice modification will be circulated by the issue of either on individual servicing problems. When making an amended pages or service information sheets. enquiry it is essential that the full vehicle identification publication number TSO 4446. number {VIN) is quoted. At the beginning of each chapter is an issue record sheet showing the issue of sections and Important amended pages. When a section or amended page is When obtaining information for a particular model issued a new issue record sheet will also be attached. always refer to the appropriate Chapter and/or Section This record sheet will record the amendment. thus contents page (see samples). providing an up-to-date record of sections and pages.

Chapter contents page

Section contents page

Contents Pages Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur Cars from vehicle identification number SCAZSOOOOACH01001 B1·3 81-3 B1·3 81·3

TSD 4406

Printed in England April 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 All communications should be addressed to one of the following depending upon the car's domicile.

Rolls-Royce Motors Limited Crewe Cheshire CWt 3PL England Telephone: 0270 255155 Telex: 36121 Telegraphic address: Roycru Crewe

Rolls-Royce Motors International SA 39 Boulevard de Graney 1006 Lausanne Switzerland Telephone: Lausanne (021} 275363 Telex: 454216 RRM CH Telegraphic address: Rollsint Lausanne

Rolls-Royce Motors Inc. P.O. Box 476 ,Lyndhurst New Jersey 07071 USA Telephone: (201} 460-9600 Telex: 427788 Telegraphic address: RRM Inc LYND

Rolls-Royce Motor Cars Limited 3870 Griffith Street St-Laurent Quebec H4T 1 A7 Canada Telephone: (514) 342-4332 Telex: 05 824130

Rolls-Royce Motor Cars Limited Suite 165 10551 Shellbridge Way Richmond BC V6X 2W8. Canada .Telephone: (604) 278-4724 Telex: 04 355815

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL

Contents

Chapter A Capacities and Lubricants

Chapter B Service schedule procedures

Chapter C Service schedules Cars other than those conforming to an Australian, Japanese, North American, or Middle East Countries specification

Chapter D Service schedules Cars conforming to Australian specifications

Chapter E Service schedules Cars conforming to Japanese specifications

Chapter F Seivice schedules Cars conforming to North American specifications

ChapterG Service schedules Cars conforming to Middle East Countries specffications

TSO 4406

Printed in England February 1984 © Rolls•Royce Motors Limited 1984 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Chapter A

Capacities and Lubricants

Contents Sections Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur Capacities Al Al A1 A1 A1 A1 Lubricants Countries other than USA and Canada A2 A2/1 A2 A2/1 A2 A2 USA and Canada A3 A3 A3

TSD4406

Printed in England April 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Chapter A

Issue record sheet 1 November 1 985

The dates quoted below refer to the issue date of individual pages within this chapter.

Sections Page No. Contents 1 Nov 85 Apr 85 Apr85 Nov85 2 Apr 85 Apr85 Nov85 3 45 ------6 7 8 ,o9 ------.------1 1 12 13 14,s ------16 17 18 19 ______~ 20 21 22 23 2425 ------~ 26 27 28 2930 ------~ 31 32 33 34 ______~ 35 36 37 38 39 ______~ 40 41 42 43 44 ______~ 45 46 47 48

TSO 4406

Printed in England © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section A1 A1 - 1

Capacities

Metric Imperial us A Brake 'and ho;ght control system • All cars other than those with series height control systems 4,0 litres 7.0 pt 8.4 pt •Cars with series height control systems 5.0 litres 8.8 pt 10,5 pt

Cooling system 16,0 litres 28.0 pt 33.6 pt

Engine - All cars except those fitted with an engine oil cooler Without changing oil filter 8,40 litres 14.8 pt 17.7 pt When changing oil filter 9,40 litres 16.5 pt 19.8 pt

Engine - Cars frtted with an engine oil cooler Sump 8.40 litres 14.8 pt 17.7 pt Filter 1,0 litres 1. 75 pt 2.1 pt Cooler 0,50 litres 0,9 pt 1.0 pt Total 9,90 litres 17.4 pt 20.8 pt Note When changing the oil filter the oil loss from the oil cQOler is negligible.

Final drive unit 2,30 litres 4.0 pt 4.8 pt

Fuel tank 108,0 litres 23.75 gal 28.5 gal

Steering system 0,75 litres 1.33 pt 1.66 pt

Torque converter Transmission (dry) 10,6P litres 18.7 pt 22.5 pt When changing fluid in sump only 2.80 litres 5.0 pt 6.0 pt When changing fluid in sump and renewing intake strainer 4,50 litres 8.0 pt 9.6 pt

Combined windscreen/headlamp washer reservoir 5,0 litres 8.8 pt 10.5 pt

Independent headlamp washer reservoir 6.5 litres 11.5 pt 13.7 pt

Independent windscreen washer reservoir 5,0 litres 8.8 pt 10.5 pt

Power operated hood reservoir 0,43 litres 0.75 pt 0.9 pt

•ears with series height control systems. Bentlli!Y Turbo Rand all four door cars from 1986 model year except Rolls-Royce cars conforming to a Japanese or North American specification.

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1 985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section A2 A2·1

Lubricants All cars except BeRtley Mulsanne Turbo and Bentley Turbo R

tEngine, tSU Carburetter dampers, Hand Castro! ® oiling points Castrol TO Dexron 11

BP Duckhams BP Super Viscostatic D·Matic ATF (Dexron II} BP Visco 2000 BP Visco-Nova Esso BP Visco Route Esso ATF Dexron II BP Visco Coranda BP Pilote 2500 Gulf BP Pilote 3000 Gulf Automatic Transmission Fluid (Dexron) BP Strato Mobil Castro! Mobil ATF 220 (Dex,on) Castrol GTX Castrol GTX-2 Turbo Tested Shell Castrolite Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron II

Duckhams Texaco Duckhams Hypergrade Texamatic Fluid 9226 (Dexron II)

Esso *Also approved any Dexron Transmission Fluid. UNI FLO+ Esso SUPERLUBE + Drive-shaft ball and trunnion joints (if fitted), Mobil Final drive unit, Rack and pinion steering unit Mobil Super BP Shell BP Gear Oil EP 90 Shell Super Motor Oil (20W/50) BP Multigear FE SOW/90 Shell Super Motor Oil ( 1 5W/50) BP Multigear FE 85W/140 Shell Super Motor Oil (1 SW/40) Shell Super Motor Oil ( 1 OW/40) Castrol Shell Gemini Castrol Hypoy EP 90 Castro! Hypoy B EP 90 Silkolene Castrol Hypoy C Chatsworth 20W/30 Duckhams t Recommended engine oil grades for cars operating in Hypoid 90 S low temperatures. For constant operation in ambient temperatures of Esso between 0°C and -23"C (32"F and -1 O"F) use a Esso Gear Oil GX 85W/90 1OW/30 grade oil. Esso Gear Oil GX SOW For constant operation in ambient temperatures of -23°C. (-10°F) and below, use a SW/20 grade oil. Gulf Gulf Multi Purpose Gear Lubricant SOW/90

*Torque converter transmission, *Steering Mobil pump Mobilube HD 90

BP Shell BP Autran DXII Shell Spirax 90 EP

TSO 4406

Printed in England April 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 A2-2

Front and rear hubs, Drive-shaft outer Esso universal joints (if fitted), Propeller shaft Esso Nuto H22 universal joints (if applicable) Mobil BP Mobil DTE 11 BP Energrease L2 Mobil DTE 12 Mobil DTE 13 Castrol Castrol LM Grease Shell Shell Tellus Oil 22 Duckhams Shell Tellus Oil 23 LB 10 Grease Gulf Esso Gulf Hydrasil 22 Multi-purpose Grease

Gulf Gulfcrown Grease No. 2 EP

Mobil Mobilgrease MP

Shell ;Shell Retinax A

f First preference

Rear drive-shaft constant velocity joints (if fitted), Height control valve operating rod ball joints, Steering joints (if applicable), Parking brake linkage clevis and fulcrum pins

Rocol MTS 1000 Grease

Fuel tank drain plug

Rocol MV3 Rocol AS Spray

Parking brake inner cable

Midland Silicones MS44 Grease

Refrigeration compressor

Frigidaire 525 Viscosity Oil

~ Hydraulic Brakes and Automatic ~ height control system

Castro! Castro! Hydraulic System Mineral Oil

Power operated hood reservoir BP BP Energol HLP22

Castro! Castrol Hyspin VG22

April 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section A2/1 A2/1·1

Lubricants Bentley Mulsanne Turbo and Bentley Turbo R

t Engine, Hand oiling po!nts Shell Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron II BP BP Super Viscostatic Texaco BP Visco 2000 Texamatic Fluid 9226 (Dexron II)

Castrot •Also approved any Dexron Transmission Fluid Castrol GTX Castrol GTX-2 Turbo Tested Final drive unit, Rack and pinion steering unit

Duckhams BP Duckhams Hypergrade BP Gear Oil 90 EP BP Multigear FE SOW/90 Esso BP Multigear FE 85W/140 Esso SUPERLUBE + Castrol Mobil <;astrol Hypoy EP 90 Mobil Super Castrol Hypoy B EP 90 Castrol Hypoy C Shell Shell Super Motor Oil (20W/50} Duckhams Shell Super Motor Oil (15W/50} Hypoid 90 S Shell ~uper Motor Oil (15W/40) Shell 'Gemini Esso Esso Gear Oil GX 85W/90 tRecommended engine oil grades for cars operating in Esso Gear Oil GX SOW low temperatures. For constant operation in ambient temperatures of Gulf between o·c and -23°C (32°F and-10°F) use a Gulf Multi Purpose Gear Lubricant SOW/90 1 OW/30 grade oil. For constant ·operation in ambient temperatures of Mobil -23°C {-10°F) and below, use a 5W/20 grade oil. Mobilube HD 90

*Torque converter transmission, •steering Shell pump Shell Spirax 90 EP

BP Front and rear hubs, Propeller shaft universal BP Autran DX II joints

Castrol ® BP Castrol TO Oextron 11 BP Energrease L2

Duckhams Castrol D-Matic ATF (Dexron II) Castro! LM Grease

Esso Duckhams Es~o ATF (Dexron II) LB 10 grease

Gulf Esso Gulf Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron Multi-purpose Grease

Mobil Gulf Mobil ATF 220 (Dexron) Gulfcrown Grease No. 2 EP

TSD 4406

Printed in England April 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 A2/1-2

Mobil Mobilgrease MP

Shell tShell Retinax A

*First preference

Rear drive-shaft constant velocity joints, Height control valve operating rod ball joints, Parking brake linkage clevis and fulcrum pins

Rocol MTS 1 000 Grease

Fuel tank drain plug

Rocol MV3 Rocol AS Spray

Parking brake inner cable

Midlands Silicones MS44 Grease ) Refrigeration compressor

Frigidaire 525 Viscosity Oil

&.. Hydraulic brakes and Automatic ~ height control system

Castro! Castrol Hydraulic System Mineral Oil

•, i

April 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section A3 A3·1

Lubricants All cars except Bentley Mulsanne Turbo and Bentley Turbo R

tEngine, Hand oiling points Shell Shell Donax T6 BP ATF Dexron BP Super Viscostatic 1OW/ 40 Texaco Castrol Texamatic Fluid 9226 (Dexron II) Castrol GTX (USA) *Also approved any Oexron Transmission Fluid Castrol XLR (Canada) Final Rack Duckhams drive unit, and pinion steering unit Duckhams Hypergrade BP Exxon/Imperial BP Gear Oil 90 EP UNIFLO BP Multigear FE BOW/90 BP Multig~ar FE 85W/140 Mobil Mobil Super Castrol Castrol Hypoy SOW/90 Shell Castrol Hypoy C SOW/90 Fire and Ice (USA) Super Plus (Canada) Duckhams Duckhams Hypoid Gear Oil 80W/90 EP

tRecornmended engine oil grades for cars operating in Exxon/Imperial low temperatures. Esso Gear Oil GX 85W/140 For constant operation in ambient temperatures of Esso Gear Oil GX SSW/90 between o·c and-23"C {32°.f and-tO"F). use a Esso gear Oil GX SOW/90 10W/30 grade oil. Esso Gear Oil GX SOW For constant operation in ambient temperatures of Esso Gear Oil GX 90W -23°C (-1 O"F) and below. use a SW/20 grade oil. Gulf Gulf Multi Purpose Lubricant 80W/90 •Torque converter transmission, *Steering pump Mobil Mobilube HD 90 BP BP Autran DX II Shell Shell Spirax 90 EP Castrol ® Castro! TQ Oexron 11 Front and rear hubs, Propeller shaft universal joints (if applicable) Ouckhams l;)-Matic ATF (Dexron II) BP BP Energrease L2 Exxon/Imperial Esso ATF Dexron II Castrol Castrol MP Grease Guff Castrol LM Grease Gulf Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron Castro! Wheel Bearing Grease {Canada)

Mobil Ouckhams Mobil ATF 220 (Dexron) Duckhams LB 10

TS04406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 A3·2

Exxon/(mperial Ronex MP Esso Unitol

Gulf Gulfcrown Grease No. 2 EP

Mobil Mobilgrease MP

Shell Shell Darina AX

Rear drive-shaft constant velocity joints, Height control valve operating rod ball joints, Steering joints, (if applicable), Parking brake linkage clevis and fulcrum pins

Rocol MTS 1000 Grease

Fuel tank drain plug

Rocol MV3 Rocol AS Spray

Parking brake inner cable

Midlands Silicones MS 44 Grease

Refrigeration compressor

Frigidaire 525 Viscosity Oil

~ Hydraulic brakes and Automatic ~ height control system

Castro! Castrol Hydraulic System Mineral Oil

Power operated hood reservoir BP BP Energol HLP 22

Esso Esso Nuto H22

Mobil Mobil DTE 11 Mobil DTE 12 Mobil DTE 13

Shell Shell Tellus Oil 22 Shell Tellus Oil 23

Gulf ~ulf Harmony 22 AW

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section A4 A4 • 1

Lubricants Bentley Mulsanne Turbo

·tEngine, Hand oiling points Final drive unit, Rack and Pinion steering unit BP BP BP Super Viscostatic BP Gear Oil 90 EP BP Gear Oil FE SOW/90 EP Castro! BP Gear Oil FE 85W/140·EP Castrol GTX Castro! GTX·2 Turbo Tested Castrol Castrol Hypoy EP 90 Duckhams Castrol Hypoy B EP 90 Duckhams 'Q' Motor Oil Castrol Hypoy C

Esso Duckhams Esso SUPERLUBE Hypoid 90 S

Mobil Esso Mobil Super Esso Gear Oil GX 85W/140 Esso Gear Oil GX 80W/90 Shell Shell Super Motor Oil (20W/50) Mobil Shell Super Motor Oil ( 1 5W/50) · Mobilube HD 90 Shell Super Motor Oil (15W/40) Shell tRecommended engine oil grades for cars operating in Shell Spirax 90 EP low temperatures. For constant operation in ambient temperatures of Front and rear hubs. Propeller shaft universal between 0°C and -23°C use a 1 OW/30 grade oil. joints For constant operation in ambient temperatures of -23°C and below. use a 5W/20 grade oil. BP BP Energrease L2 •Torque converter transmission, *Steering pump Castro! BP Castrol LM Grease BP Autran DX II Duckhams LB 10 Grease Castro! Castrol TO Dexron ® II Esso Multi-purpose Grease H Duckhams D-Matic ATF (Dexron II) Mobil Esso "-'.'lobilgrease MP Esso Automatic Transmission Fluid (Dexron) Shetl Mobil t:Shell Retinax A Mobil ATF 220 (Oexron) t:First preference Shell Rear drive-shaft constant velocity joints, Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron II Height control valve operating rod ball joints,Parking brake linkage clevis and Texaco fulcrum pins Texamatic Fluid 9226 {Dexron II) ·Also approved any Oexron Transmission Fluid. Aocol MT$ 1000 Grease

TSD 4406

Printed in England April 1982 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1982 A4· 2

Fuel tank drain plug Rocol MV3 Rocol AS. Spray

Parking brake inner cable Midland Silicones MS44 Grease

Refrigeration compressor

Frigidaire 525 Viscosity Oil

& Hydraulic brakes and Automatic ~ height control system BP BP Hydraulic LHM

Castro! ;Castrol Hydraulic System Mineral Oil

Mobil Mobil Fluid LHM

Shell Shell LHM Fluid (S.8214)

Hydraulic System Mineral (LHM) is also supplied by Esso, Total, Lockheed, Antar,Agig. Cofran, Elf, lgol, Motul. and Stop.

;First preference

April 1982 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Chapter B

Service schedule procedures

Contents Sections Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur Cars other than those conforming to an Australian, Japanese, North American, or Middle East specification B1 81/l 81 Bl/1 B1 81 Cars conforming to an Australian specification. 1981/85 model year 82 82 82 Cars conforming to an Australian specification. 1986 model year 82/1 Cars conforming to a Japanese specification B3 B3 B3 Cars conforming to a North American specification B4 B4 84 Cars conforming to a Middle East specification prior to 1 984 model year B1 B1/1 B1 B1 Cars conforming to a Middle East specification. 1984 model year 85 B1/1 B1 B1 Cars conforming to a Middle East specification from 1985 model year 85 B5/1 B5 B5/1 B5 B5

TSO 4406

Prinied in England July 1985 © Rolls-Rovce Motors Limited 1 985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Chapter B

Issue record sheet 1 June 1986

The dates quoted below refer to the issue date of individual pages within this chapter.

Sections 81 B1/1 B2 82/1 B3 84 B5 85/1 Page No. Contents 1 Apr 85 Apr 85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jun 86 Jul 85 Jul 85 2 3 Nov85 Apr 85 Jun 85 Ju185 Jul 85 Jun 86 Jul 85 Jul85 4 Nov85 Nov84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jun 86 Jul 85 Jul 85 5 Nov 85 Nov 84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jun 86 Jul85 Jul85 6 Nov 85 Nov84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 7 Nov85 Nov85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 8 Nov85 Nov 84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jul 85 Jul 85 9 Nov 85 Nov 84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jut 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 10 Nov 85 Nov 84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul85 11 Nov85 Nov 84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 12 Nov85 Apr 85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 13 Nov85 Nov84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Ju/85 Jul 85 Jul 85 14 Nov85 Apr 85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 15 .Nov 85 Nov 84 Jun 85 Jul85 Jul85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 16 Nov85 Nov 84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jul 85 Jul85 17 Nov85 Nov84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 18 Nov85 Nov84 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jul 85 Jul85 19 Nov85 Apr 85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Juf85 Jul 85 Jul 85 20 Nov85 Nov 85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jul 85 Jul 85 21 Nov85 Nov85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 22 Nov85 Nov85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jul 85 Jul 85 23 Nov85 Apr 85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 24 Nov85 ·Nov 85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 25 Nov85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 26 Nov85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jul85 Jul 85 27 Nov 85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul85 Jul 85 28 Nov 85 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 29 Jun 85 Jul 8 5 Jul 85 Jul 85 30 Jun 85 Jul 85 Jul 85 . 31 Jun 85 Jul 85 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

TS04406

Printed in England © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1986 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section Bl 81 -1

Service schedule procedures

Contents Pages Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur Cars from vehicle identification B1·3 B1·3 B1-3 B1-3 number * SCAZSOOOOACH01001 *

_) TS04406

Printed in England April 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81 81-3

Service schedule procedures From vehicle identification number *SCAZS0000ACH01001*

/JJ. wARNING

Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids {Castro! RR363, Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, pipes, etc. that they are suitable for a mineral oil Fig. B1 -1 Engine oil filter location system. For details of correct component identification {right-hand drive cars} reference should be made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Engine Always ensure that a sealed container of Weekly or every 800 kilometres (500 miles) Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted whichever is the earlier; check the engine oil by means adjacent to the battery. of the dipstick; top-up if necessary. Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the systems when work is being carried out. Lamp units Weekly; check the lamp units for 9peration; rectify any General information faults. The information contained in this chapter should be used in conjunction with the Service Schedule Charts Tyre pressures and Workshop Manuals. Weekly; check the tyre pressures including the spare; The following are the Workshop Manual adjust if necessary. publications to which reference should be made. Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Bentley Eight, and Windscreen and headlamp washer reservoirs Mulsanne, from vehicle identification number (VIN) Weekly; check the washer fluid level; top-up if *SCAZSOOOOACHO 1001* and Corniche/Continental necessary. from (VIN) *SCAZD0006CCH05037* publication number TSD 4400. Hydraulic reseTVoirs Corniche prior to vehicle identification number Monthly; check the level of hydraulic mineral oil in the (VJN)-.¥SCAZD0006CCH05037:¥and Camargue, reservoirs. publication number TSD 4200. Depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping Where reference is made to 1985 model year the brake pedal until the low brake pressure warning cars the information is applicable to Silver Spirit. Silver panels on the facia illuminate. Continue to pump the Spur, and Mulsanne from vehicle identification number pedal tor at least a further 20 applications to ensure (VIN)'>t-SCAZS42A3FCX12001* and Bentley Eight complete depressurization. Start and run the engine from (VIN) *SCB2S800XFCH12013*. for four minutes with the car unladen, prior to checking the level. Top-up if necessary to the indicated Car protection maximum level. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Prior to commencing a service schedule, the car Oil (LHM). Refer to page 81-17 for further should be suitably protected. For this purpose car information before carrying out this operation. protection kit RH 2662, wing covers RH 2684, and wing cover liners RH 2685 should be used. Engine cooling system Regular maintenance Every three months; check the coolant level. If In addition to the service schedules listed, the necessary top-up with the correct anti-freeze/water following maintenance should be carried out mixture (see page B1·9)

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B1·4

Engine Remove the filter by unscrewing it from the engine 1 Change the engine oil in an anti·clockwise direction {see figs. B 1-1 and B 1 • 2). The sump should be drained when the engine is warm, Thoroughly clean the filter seating face on the preferably after the car has completed a run. engine. To drain the oil, position the car over a pit or on a Lightly smear the rubber sealing ring on the new ramp. filter with clean engine oil. Screw the filter onto the Place a container in position beneath the drain plug pedestal until the rubber seal contacts the sealing face. situated on the right-hand side of the sump. Remove then tighten the filter a further half turn; do not over· the drain plug and allow the oil to drain from the sump. tighten. Do not flush the sump with paraffin or petrol. Fill the engine with clean engine oil until the MAX Fit the drain plug ensuring that the washer is level is reached on the dipstick. Run the engine and correctly positioned and in good condition. check the filter joint for leakage. Fill the engine sump with recommended lubricant Carry out the full oil level check procedure as until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick (see described under Check the engine oil level. Check the engine oil level). 3 Check the engine oil level 2 Renew the engine oil filter In order to obtain an accurate indication of the oil level. Drain the engine oil as described under Change the ensure that the car is standing on level ground. Check engine oil. the engine oil by means of the dipstick marked ENGINE Place a container under the filter to collect any oil (see fig. 81 -3). that may be spilt. It is recommended that the oil level is checked when the engine is cold. If the engine has been running, sufficient time should elapse after it has stopped to allow the oil to drain into the sump. Do not check the oil level with the engine running. To replenish the sump with oil, open the filler cap marked ENGINE (see fig. 81-3). Add clean oil to the engine and after allowing sufficient time for the oil to reach the sump, check that the oil is up to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. Important On engine lubrication systems incorporating a thermostacilly controlled oil cooler, if the oil has been drained from the engine the following additional procedure must be carried out to ensure the correct oil level is obtained. Carry out the normal topping-up procedure as described previously to obtain the maximum oil level reading on the dipstick. Drive the car to enable the engine oil to attain the temperature required to actuate the oil cooler Fig. 81·2 Engine oil filter location thermostat (1986 model year left-hand drive cars) To ascertain that the thermostat has actuated. a rise in the temperature of the oil cooler return pipe situated adjacent t·~ the air intake filler can be felt This temperature rise occurs as hot oil begins to flow from the oil filter housing. where the thermostat is situated, to the oil cooler mounted in front of the coolant radiator matrix. Do not attempt to attain the required engine oil temperature rise with the car stationary. When it has been ascertained that the engine oil has been passing through the cooler, thus filling this part of the lubrication system, check the oil level in the normal manner as described previously.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81 81·5

Always renew both belts in a matched pair, even if only one belt is faulty. Two belt tension loads are specified; a new belt load for replacement (new) belts and a retensioning load for belts which are satisfactory for further service. The belt tension must be checked at a point midway between two pulleys (see fig. 81·4) by use of a belt tension meter or by applying a spring balance to give a 9,50 mm (0.375 in) belt deflection at a specified load. The variation in the spring balance loads for similar belt tension meter loads is due to the varying lengths of belt between individual belt centres. Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent belt slip.

Crankshaft to coolant pump Load may be applied on either side of the belt run.

New belt load Belt tension meter 2 7.2 kgf to 31, 7 kgf (60 lbf to 70 lbf) Spring balance 7,5 kgf to 8,2 kgf Fig. 81 ·4 Engine drive belt adjustment and ( 16.5 lbf to 18 lbf) tension check points Retensioning load Belt tension meter 22,7 kgf to 27,2 kgf (50 lbf to 60 lbf) Spring balance 6.8 kgf to 7,5 kgf (15 lbf to 16.5 lbf)

The tension of this matched pair of belts is adjusted by altering the position of the jockey pulley ( see fig. B1 • 4). Slacken the nut and the setscrew securing the jockey pulley arm. Pivot the jockey pulley to adjust the belt tension then tighten the nut and setscrew. Check the belt tension and repeat the adjustment procedure if necessary.

Coolant pump to alternator Load may be applied on either side of the belt run. New belt load Belt tension meter 36,3 kgf to 40.8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf) Spring balance 5,0 kgf to 5.9 kgf ( 11 lbf to 1 3 lbf) Fig. B1·5 Air filter (SU carburetters) Retensioning load Belt tension meter 31, 7 kgf to 36,3 kgf adjustment slot. Check the belt and repeat adjustment (70 lbf to 80 lbf) if necessary. Spring balance 4, 1 kgf to 5,0 kgf When the tension is correct. finally tighten the (9 lbf to 11 lbf} remaining setscrews and check the tension again.

The tension of the belt is adjusted by altering the Crankshaft to steering pump/refrigeration position of the alternator (see fig. B 1 ·4). compressor Slacken the setscrew securing the alternator at the Load must be applied on the top run of the belts. upper mounting point. Each belt to be checked individually. Slacken the setscrew securing the adjustment strut to the front mounting plate and the nut and bolt New belt load in the adjustment slot. Pivot the alternator to adjust Belt tension meter 40,8 kgf to 45.4 kgf the belt tension then tighten the nut and bolt in the (90 lbf to 100 lbf)

TSD 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 81·6

Spring balance 6,3 kgf to 7,7 kgf ( 1 4 lbf to 1 7 lbf)

Retensioning load Belt tension meter 36.3 kgf to 40,8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf) Spring balance 4, 1 kgf to 6,3 kgf (9 lbf to 14 lbf)

The tension of this matched pair of belts is adjusted by altering the position of the steering pump (see fig. 81 ·4). Slacken the setscrew in the steering pump mounting bracket slot situated below the pump pulley. Slacken the pump pivot setscrew and the union on the supply hose at the rear of the pump. Fig. 81 ·6 Air filter ( Solex carburetter) Pivot the pump to adjust the belt tension then tighten the setscrew in the adjustment slot. Check the belt tension and adjust again if necessary. When the tension is correct tighten the pivot setscrew and again check the belt tension. Finally tighten the supply hose connection; ensuring that the hose does not foul on other components. On left-hand drive cars position the hose so that the soft rubber protective sleeve has clearance or minimal contact with the coolant pump to manifold elbow.

5 Renew the air filter element Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Bentley Eight, and Mulsanne The air filter element is situated in the air intake housing at the front right·hand side of the engine compartment (see fig. B1·5). To gain access to the element, release the two toggle clips retaining the air blending valve housing to the air cleaner housing. Carefully free the joint and move the housing away from the air cleaner. Unscrew the worm drive clip securing the carburetter intake hose to the air cleaner housing. Detach the hose. Support the air cleaner housing and release the three toggle clips securing the housing to the valance. Carefully free the joint, then move the housing towards the engine and withdraw the housing and air filter element from the car. Remove the filter element from the housing. Fig. B1 · 7 Crankcase breather tube flame trap Ensure that the inside of the air cleaner housing (SU carburetters) (both the sections removed and the fixed sections in the valance) is clean. Inspect the joint seals for serviceability. Renew if necessary. Two types of filter element have been 'fitted, a tubular type, open at both ends or a conical type with the small end of the cone closed. Dependent on the type of filter element to be fitted proceed as follows.

Tubular type Enter the new element into the wing valance. Fit the air cleaner housing to the valance. Ensure Fig. B1 ·8 Crankcase breather tube flame trap that it is located inside the valance retaining clamp {Solex carburetter) ring. Hold the rubber seal in position over the housing

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section Bl 81-7

spigot by placing the fingers of one hand through the air intake aperture and onto the seal. To allow the housing to pass over the end of the filter, it will be necessary to slightly withdraw the element during this operation. Whilst ensuring that both the air filter element and sealing ring are correctly positioned on the housing spigot fit the assembly to the wing valance. Align the three housing toggle clips with their respective securing points. Fasten the toggle clips. Fit the remaining components by reversing the removal procedure.

Conical type Locate the large end of the new filter element Fig. B1 -9 Choke butterfly housing adapter onto the locating spigot on the inside of the removable (SU carburetters) half of the housing. Carefully position the housing and filter onto the valance allowing the filter to pass into the valance Remove the cover from the windscreen wiper mounted section of the housing. Locate the small mechanism (if fitted). (blank) end of the filter into the spigot in the valance Disconnect the breather hose from the flame trap housing. Align the three housing toggle clips with their housing. respective securing points. Special care should be Remove the three setscrews from the housing taken during these operations to ensure that the paper cover and remove the cover. element is not damaged during insertion. Remove the circlip retaining the gauze filter Ensure that the filter is correctly positioned on the situated on the underside of the housing cover. location spigots, then secure the three toggle clips. It Thoroughly clean the gauze with a suitable is essential that the filter is correctly located on the cleaning solvent and blow dry with compressed air. spigots before the toggle clips are fastened down. Ensure that the breather pipe and housing are also otherwise there is a serious risk of crushing the filter clean. element. Fit the filter gauze and housing cover by reversing Fit the remaining components by reversing the the removal procedure. removal procedure. Corniche/Continental and Camargue Corniche/Continental and Camargue On cars fitted with a Solex carburetter the flame trap The air filter element is situated in the air silencer filter gauze is situated in the crankcase breather pipe housing above the carburetter. at its connection to the engine oil filler pedestal (see To remove the element, unscrew the knurled nut fig. 81·8). situated on top of the air silencer, then unscrew the To clean the filter gauze, first remove the three reach nuts retaining the top cover (see fig. setscrew securing the breather pipe to the oil filler B1·6). pedestal. Remove the cover and lift out the paper element. Withdraw the connection from the pedestal; Fit a new element and secure the top cover. collect the gauze and adapter connection. Note Thoroughly clean the components in a suitable When fitting the top cover. ensure that the word Front cleaning solvent and then blow dry with compressed marked on the cover is towards the front of the car. air. then tighten the knurled nut by hand only. Renew the sealing rings if required and fit the Overtightening the nut can distort the carburetter components by reversing the removal procedure. body. Torque tighten the three reach nuts to 0, 7 kgf m 7 Clean the choke butterfly housing adapter (5 lbf ft). (SU carburetters) The adapter is situated on the choke butterfly housing 6 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame trap and is part of the crankcase breather system (see fig. Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Bentley Eight, and Mulsanne 81-9). The engine crankcase is ventilated through a breather To clean the adapter remove the retaining tube connected to the carburetter air induction system. setscrew and detach the adapter from the breather A flame trap in the form of a filter gauze is fitted into pipe. the system at the rear of 'A' bank cylinder (see fig. Clean the adapter using a recommended cleaning 81- 7) and should be cleaned as follows. solvent and ensure that the holes are free of Withdraw the windscreen wiper relay (wiper 3, obstruction; blow dry using dry compressed air. see fig B 1 • 19A) situated adjacent to the windscreen Ensuring that the 'O' ring is in good condition, fit washer reservoir. the adapter by reversing the removal procedure.

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 81-8

8 Clean the air cleaner breather housing 10 Renew the sparking plugs connection (Solex carburetter} Sparking plug type Champion RN l 2 Y or Remove the air cleaner element as described in Renew RN 12 YC. the air filter element. Plug gap setting 0,76 mm (0.030 in) Disconnect and withdraw the crankcase breather Note pipe from the underside of the air silencer housing The heat range of these sparking plugs has been (see fig. B1·10). increased to include the range previously covered by Throughly clean the air cleaner breather housing the RN14Y sparking plug. using a recommended cleaning solvent; blow dry Where RN14Y sparking plugs have been using dry compressed air. previously quoted. the RN 1 2Y or RN12YC sparking Fit the components by reversing the removal plug may be used as a replacement. procedure. It is recommended that the plugs are used in engine sets, and not mixed. 9 Check the carburetter damper oil level Before removing the sparking plugs the (SU carburetters) surrounding area should be thoroughly cleaned to The upper portion of the guide spindle, attached to the prevent the ingress of foreign matter when the plugs air valve piston in each carburetter is hollow and are removed. should contain the same type of oil as used in the Fit the new plugs ensuring that the gaps are engine. correctly set and that each plug is fitted with a sealing To check the oil level. unscrew the cap and washer. withdraw the damper from the air valve piston (see fig. Torque tighten each plug to between 18 Nm and 81-11 ). Top-up the damper reservoir with clean 23 Nm (1,8 kgf m and 2.3 kgf m, 13 lbf ft and engine oil to approximately 13 mm (0.50 in) from the 1 7 lbf ft). top of the tube. Fit the damper into the tube and screw the cap firmly into position. 11 lubricate the distributor Lubrication of the spindle is the only routine maintenance required. To carry out this operation remove the moulded top cover of the distributor and the rotor arm. Do not remove the cover from the distributor baseplate {see fig.Bl-12). Lubricate the spindle shaft bearings by applying two drops of engine oil to the felt pad situated beneath the rotor arm. On distributors not fitted with a felt pad beneath the rotor, lubrication is not necessary. Clean and fit the rotor arm.

W259 Clean the terminal posts and cover. then fit the cover ensuring that it is correctly located on the distributor base. Fig. 81·10 Air cleaner breather connection (Solex carburetter) 12 Lubricate the accelerator and carburetter linkage Lubricate all the accelerator and carburetter linkage ball joint pivots and clevis pins. Examine the ball knuckle joints for wear and adjust if necessary. Renew any worn clevis pins. Examine the linkage for correct operation. For details of linkage setting procedures, reference should be made to Chapter K of the appropriate Workshop Manual.

13 Check the choke operation and choke stove pipe flow Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Bentley Eight, and Mulsanne Apply the parking brake and ensure that the gear range selector lever is in the Park position. Remove the gear range thermal cut-out from the fuseboard. Start and run the engine until the normal operating temperature is attained. Stop the engine. Connect an impulse tachometer to the engine in Fig. B1-11 SU carburetter damper accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B1 B1·9

Disconnect the stove pipe union at the intake elbow and connect a flowmeter to the pipe using connector RH 8945. The flowmeter must be a rotameter type capable of measuring 2,9 cu m/hr ( 1 00 cu ft/hr). Start and run the engine at idle speed (650 rpm); observe the flowmeter, a correct reading is between 0,8 cu m/hr and 0,9 cu m/hr (28 cu ft/hr and 32 cu ft/hr). If the reading is below 0,8 cu m/hr (28 cu ft/hr) check the stove pipes and union for leaks or blockage. If the reading is in excess of 0,9 cu m/hr (32 cu ft/hr) fit a new restrictor in the choke bi-metal housing ( see fig. B 1• 13 J. To fit a new restrictor. replace the union in the bi·metal housing, then test for correct stove pipe flow.

14 Check the float chamber depression Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, Bentley Eight, and Mulsanne For details of the procedure necessary to carry out this operation reference should be made to Chapter K of Fig. B1 -12 Distributor lubrication point (if the appropriate Workshop Manual. applicable)

15 Check the ignition timing For details of the ignition timing settings and procedures reference should be made to Chapter M of the appropriate Workshop Manual.

16 Check the engine idle speed For full details of carburetter settings reference should be made to Chapter K of the appropriate Workshop Manual.

17 Check the choke idle speed For details of choke fast idle settings reference should be made to Chapter K of the appropriate Workshop Manual.

Engine cooling system 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration The cooling system is filled initially with a coolant solution comprising equal parts of UT 184 (BP-Hythe Chemicals) or Prestone II and water. This mixture gives frost protection down to a temperature of -3 7°C. Fig. B1 -13 Choke stove pipe restrictor The coolant should contain fifty percent of an approved anti-freeze at all times. This not only provides frost protection but also prevents corrosion of may be inaccurate where reading above 40% are the coolant passages. and raises the boiling expected, it is recommended that a refractometer is temperature of the coolant. used. The anti-freeze concentration should be checked For details refer to Chapter L of the appropriate in both the expansion bottle (where fitted) and the Workshop Manual. radiator. If a refractometer is not available. and a If the strength of the coolant requires increasing, hydrometer has to be used a scale reading of between sufficient coolant should be drained from the radiator 1 ,06 and 1,07 should be obtained with the coolant at and replaced with undiluted anti·freeze (see fig. room temperature for the mixture to be correct. B 1 • 14). Afterwards run the engine until normal operating temperature is attained and the anti-freeze 2 Check the coolant level has become thoroughly mixed with the coolant. Stop Warning the engine and again check the concentration in the Both types of cooling system become pressurized radiator. during engine running, therefore, extreme care An acceptable level of anti-freeze concentration is should be taken when removing the radiator cap between 45% and 50%. Therefore. as a hydrometer from a warm or hot radiator.

TSD 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited , 985 81-10

Cars fitted with a coolant expansion bottle If the engine is hot ensure that the coolant level (see fig. B1-15). in the translucent expansion bottle is at the MAX mark. Top-up if necessary and replace the expansion Routine check bottle cap. To check the level outside a normal service schedule If the engine is cold ensure that the coolant level (e.g. Regular maintenance) and when no cooling/ in the translucent expansion bottle is half-way between heating system fault is reported or suspected, proceed the MIN and MAX marks. Top-up if necessary and as follows. replace the expansion bottle cap. If the coolant level in the expansion bottle is either below the MIN mark or there is no coolant in the Pints L1\1n Ump• expansion bottle, carry out the following Full check procedure.

the MIN mark. ..I Ensure that the engine is not hot (to allow safe A removal of the radiator cap). Carefully remove the radiator cap. Check the coolant level in the radiator. This should be halfway up the filler neck. If the coolant level in the radiator is correct, fit the radiator cap. 15 Top-up the coolant in the expansion bottle in 10 0 ,5 OS accordance with the Routine check procedure. 11((. -4!, ...co -3,0 .,~ - 20 - 15 -10 If the coolant level in the radiator is low but visible •F .sot -40 .10 10 20 I ·30 I -20 1 I I and no cooling/heating system fault is reported or s·s" SOI< 45% 40% 35% 301' isr. ior. C S605 suspected top-up the system using the following procedure. If however the coolant is not visible or a Fig. 81 -14 Anti-freeze correction chart to give a coolant/heating system leak is reported or suspected. 50% solution the system should have any faults rectified and then A Acceptable service range of be pressure tested prior to carrying out the topping-up concentration procedure. B Freezing point of coolant Top-up the radiator until the coolant is halt-way up C Percentage concentration the filler neck. D Volume of 100% anti-freeze to be Start and run the engine. added to maintain a 50% solution after Turn the air conditioning system function control removal of the same volume of old fully clockwise to the defrost position. coolant Set the air conditioning system override switch to the AUTO position. Allow at least one minute for the air conditioning system to stabilize. then check to ensure that all air is being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). This procedure opens the heater system water tap. Run the engine, without the radiator pressure cap fined, until normal operating temperature is attained. Top-up the coolant level in the radiator during this time. Switch off the engine. Fit the radiator cap. Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in accordance with the Routine check procedure.

Cars not fitted with a coolant expansion bottle Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position Fig. B1 -15 Coolant expansion bottle and apply the parking brake.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81 B1·11

Remove the gear range selector cut·out from the fuseboard. Start the engine and turn the air conditioning function control clockwise to the defrost position and set the upper system mode override switch to the AUTO position. Allow approximately one minute for the system to attain the required setting. then check that all air is being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). This procedure opens the heater water tap and ensures that the cooling system can be correctly checked. Switch ott the ignition. Remove the radiator cap. If the engine is hot, muffle the cap with a thick cloth and gradually turn the cap anti-clockwise until the pressure is reduced, then remove the cap. If the coolant level is low, top-up the radiator header tank with the correct anti-freeze/water mixture. The correct level is when the coolant reaches the rubber seal in the filler neck. Fit the filler cap.

3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness Fig. 81·16 Oil pressure switches Examine all the coolant hose connections for signs of leakage and check the worm drive clips for tightness. Never overtighten a clip in an attempt to seal a leaking connection. In the event of a hose connection leaking when the worm drive clip has been tightened. drain the cooling system to a level below the leaking hose. Remove and inspect the hose and its connecting component for signs of damage. if necessary renew the faulty component and refill the system with coolant as described in Renew the coolant.

4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses Inspect all coolant hoses for signs of deterioration. cracking. weak spots. etc. Any faulty hose should be removed and a new hose fitted. When renewing a Fig. B1 · 17 Crankcase drain plug ('B' bank hose always ensure that it does not foul other shown) components and that it is not kinked so as to cause complete or partial restriction of coolant flow. 6 Renew the coolant 5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose Drive the car onto a ramp: move the gear range Drain the coolant system as described in Renew the selector to the Park position and apply the parking coolant. but do not remove the engine crankcase drain brake. Remove the gear range selector cut·out from plugs. Disconnect the heater tap feed hose from the the fuseboard. engine and heater tap; remove the hose. Disconnect the Lucar connection from the Fit the new hose; ensure that the hose is free pressure switch situated on the oil filter mounting (see from any sharp bends that may restrict coolant flow. fig. B1·16). Fill the engine coolant system as described in Switch on the ignition and rotate the air Renew the coolant. conditioning function switch to the windscreen defrost Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the position, also set the upper system mode override gear range selector lever is in the Park position. switch to the AUTO position. Remove the gear range selector cut·out from the Wait approximately one minute for the system to ruseboard. attain the required setting and observe that all th~ air Start and run the engine; check the coolant hose is being directed to the windscreen. This procedure for leaks. opens the heater water tap and ensures the system Switch off the ignition and fit the gear range can be completely drained. selector cut-out. Switch off the ignition.

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B1·12

Place a container beneath the radiator drain tap to Fit a waste pipe to the upper (inlet) connection of collect the coolant. Connect a length of hose onto the the radiator. drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. Apply mains water under pressure through the Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator lower (outlet) connection of the radiator. This should pressure cap. remove all loose sediment in approximately 30 Open the radiator drain tap and allow the coolant minutes. to drain from the radiator. Do not under any circumstances use an When the radiator has completely drained place a alkaline compound or detergent to clean the container beneath the crankcase drain plugs. Remove system. Such compounds have a detrimental the drain plugs from the crankcase (see fig. B1 -17) chemical action on aluminium alloys. and allow the residue of coolant to drain from the Remove the engine coolant drain plugs from the crankcase. crankcase. Renew the washers on the drain plugs and fit the Remove the thermostat as described in Renew the plugs into the crankcase. thermostat, then replace the cover. To drain the coolant remaining in the expansion Fit a suitable pipe to the drain plug aperture and bottle (if applicable). disconnect the connection hose apply mains water pressure to each aperture in turn. from the radiator and allow the coolant to drain from Flush for approximately 30 minutes, or until the the expansion bottle into the container. water runs clear of foreign matter. When the coolant has drained connect the hose to Fit the drain plugs and a new thermostat by the radiator. reversing the procedure for removal. Check all hoses for serviceability and renew as To flush the heater systems, detach the heater at necessary. the water tap and disconnect the return hose at the Fill the systems with fresh coolant of the specified coolant pump. concentration as follows. Fit a waste pipe to the disconnected heater feed Ensure the radiator drain tap is closed. hose. Slowly fill the radiator with coolant. thus reducing Flush the matrix for approximately 30 minutes. the possibility of air locks in the system. Examine the coolant hoses for deterioration or Start and run the engine for a minimum of 10 damage and renew as necessary. minutes with the radiator pressure cap removed. After Connect all hoses and fill the system with the running for five minutes ensure that warm air is recommended coolant mixture as described under passing up the windscreen from the demister ducts. Renew the coolant. Top-up the radiator as necessary to ensure there is always coolant in the top tank of the radiator. Ensure 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator and that the thermostat has opened; indicated by a rapid refrigeration condenser warming of the top radiator hose. Using a pressure hose pipe. flush the radiator matrix Switch off the engine and top-up the radiator to and condenser matrix. half-way up the filler neck. Fit the cap. Hold the nose of the hose pipe close to the back On cars fitted with a coolant expansion bottle (see of the radiator matrix and allow the water to pass fig. B 1-1 5), fill the bottle to a level midway between between the veins of the matrix. Slowly move the hose the maximum and minimum levels indicated on the over the whole matrix area until all foreign matter tank. (insects, etc.) have been flushed clear. Care must be Start and run the engine until normal engine taken to ensure that the end of the hose does not running temperature is attained; switch off the engine damage the matrix face during this operation. and top-up the expansion bottle to the maximum level. Allow the engine to cool. Carefully remove the 9 Renew the thermostat radiator pressure cap and ensure the radiator is Disconnect the battery completely full of coolant. Top-up to half-way up the Place a container beneath the radiator. Attach a radiator filler neck if necessary. Fit the radiator filler cap. length of hose to the radiator drain tap to direct the Connect the Lucar connection previously coolant into the container. disconnected from the pressure switch adjacent to the Carefully remove the radiator pressure cap. oil filter {see fig. B1-16). Open the radiator drain tap and allow sufficient Note coolant to drain from the system for the coolant level For the coolant system to operate correctly, i.e. for to fall below that of the thermostat housing. Close the coolant to pass into the expansion bottle when hot and drain tap and remove the hose previously attached. be drawn back in the radiator during cooling, the top Disconnect the electrical connector from the of the radiator must not contain an air pocket. thermostat housing cover. Remove the bolt from the air intake elbow and the 7 Reverse flush the coolant system four setscrews from the thermostat housing cover. Drain the engine coolant system as described in Collect the bracket. Renew the coolant. Remove the thermostat housing cover. The cover Remove the top and bottom hoses from the can be moved away from the housing without radiator matrix. detaching the outlet hose.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81 81-13

Lift the thermostat from the housing (see fig. Bt-18). Remove the old gasket material fn;im the thermostat housing and cover. Ensure that no material enters the thermostat housing. Check that the two faces are·clean and dry. Insert a new thermostat into the housing. Place a new gasket in position on the housing and fit the cover and air intake elbow bracket. Connect the elbow to the bracket. Connect the electrical connection removed from the thermostat housing. Top-up the cooling system with the correct coolant mixture as described under Renew the coolant.

Torque converter transmission It is essential when adding fluid to, or working on the torque converter transmission that great attention is paid to cleanliness. The smallest partical of dirt in the transmission fluid could interfere with the correct operation of the unit. It is also important that only an approved fluid is used (see Chapter A).

1 Check the transmission fluid level The fluid level can only be checked accurately when the car is standing on a level surface, the engine is running at idle speed. and transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature approximately 77°C (170°F). The dipstick and filler tube are situated on the right-hand side of the engine compartment. On Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Bentley Eight. and Mulsanne cars. remove the protective cover (if fitted) from the windscreen wiper mechanism to gain access to the dipstick. Ensure that the following safety Fig. 81·18 Thermostat housing assembly procedure is undertaken to isolate the mechanism prior to removing the cover. Ensure that the windscreen wiper control switch situated on the facia is in the off position. Remove a After this initial check a further check should be windscreen wiper relay, preferably number three. carried out as follows. situated adjacent to the windscreen washer reservoir Drive the car for approximately 24 kilometres ( see fig. B 1- 1 9). To remove the relay pull it vertically ( 15 miles) of highway/motorway driving or 16 from its mounting. kilometres ( 10 miles) of city driving. This should Always clean the top of the dipstick before ensure the transmission has reached normal operating removing it from the titler tube. temperature. As an initial check. the fluid level may be checked It is essential that this temperature is after starting from cold as follows. attained. Do not top-up the fluid level to the MAX Apply the parking brake. mark on the dipstick when the fluid is only warm. as Start and run the engine for three to four minutes this will result in an overflow situation when the at fast-idle speed, with the gear range selector in the normal operating temperature is attained. Overfilling Park position. Reduce the engine speed to slow idle. will result in fluid being discharged from the Whilst sitting in the driving seat firmly apply the transmission breather pipe. footbrake and move the gear range selector through Position the car on a level surface, firmly apply the the full range of gear positions pausing briefly in each parking brake and select Park with the gear selector range. Return the selector to the Park position. lever. Immediately check the fluid level with the engine Carry out the procedure described for the initial running at idle speed. check. The level should be up to the circular dimple With the transmission fluid at normal operating situated below the FILL mark on the dipstick or 10 temperature the level of the fluid should be between mm (0.375 il'l) below the MIN mark, dependent on the FILL and MAX HOT marks or the MIN and MAX the type of dipstick fitted (see fig. Bl-19). marks ( see fig. B 1-19) dependent on the type of Top-up to this level if necessary. dipstick fitted.

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors limited 1 985 81-14

If necessary add fluid by pouring it down the filler tube, with the engine still running. until the fluid is to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill When the fluid level is correct, switch off the engine and fit the windscreen wiper mechanism cover and relay.

2 Renew the transmission fluid Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Place a clean container having a minimum capacity of 3 litres (5 Imp pt. 6 US pt) under the nut which secures the transmission fluid filler tube to the sump (see fig. 81 -20). From within the engine compartment. remove the transmission dipstick as described under Check the transmission fluid level. Slacken the setscrew securing the filler tube to the engine. Unscrew the nut securing the filler tube to the side of the transmission sump (see fig. B1-20). Withdraw the filler tube from the sump and move it to one side to allow the fluid to drain into the container. After draining the sump, ensure that the filler tube is clean then fit it to the sump and tighten the nut. C Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip to the engine. Add 2,8 litres (5 Imp pt. 6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump, pouring the fluid down the filler tube. Check the fluid level as described under Check the transmission fluid level.

D A03'6 3 Fit a new intake strainer Drain the transmission sump as described under the Fig. 81-19 Transmission filler tube and dipstick heading, Renew the transmission fluid, then proceed A Removing the windscreen wiper as follows. mechanism cover. The arrow indicates Remove the setscrews securing the transmission the wiper relay removed sump and lower the sump. B Withdrawing the dipstick from the Drain the fluid from the sump and discard the filler tube gasket. C Original dipstick markings Unscrew the setscrew securing the intake strainer D Revised dipstick markings and pipe assembly to the transmission; remove the strainer assembly (see fig. 81-21 ). Remove the intake pipe from the strainer and discard the strainer. Clean the transmission sump and the intake pipe with paraffin and dry with compressed air. Fit a new ·o· ring to the intake pipe and lubricate the ·o· ring with clean transmission fluid. Ensure that a new rubber seal is fitted to the pipe bore in the new intake strainer, then fit the intake pipe into the strainer. Fit the intake strainer and pipe assembly to th~ transmission and torque tighten the securing setscrew to 14 Nm ( 1.4 kgf m, 1 0 lbf ft). Fit the transmission sump using a new gasket and torque tighten th~ sump setscrews to 16 Nm ( 1, 7 kgf m. 12 lbf ft). Fit the oil filler tube into the sump and tighten the nut. Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip Fig. 81-20 Transmission drain point to the engine.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81 81·15

Add 4,5 litres (8 Imp pt. 9.6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump, pouring the fluid down the filler tube, then follow the fluid level checking procedure described under Check the transmission fluid level.

Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints (if applicable) A grease nipple is fitted to the universal joint at each end of the shaft (see fig. 81 ·22). Using a suitable grease gun, lubricate each joint Fig. B1 ·21 Transmission intake strainer removal with an approved grease. On cars fitted with a rubber jointed propeller shaft. lubrication is not required.

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Remove the level plug located in the rear face of the final drive casing. The oil in the casing should be up to the level plug orifice. If necessary, top-up with an approved oil. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint washer.

3 Lubricate the drive·shaft universal joints (if applicable) On cars with a grease nipple fitted to the universal joint at the outer end of each drive-shaft (see fig. B 1·24), using a suitable grease gun, lubricate each universal joint with approved grease.

4 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint covers The drive-shaft joints enclosed by convoluted seals are filled with lubricant on initial assembly. If upon inspection a seal is found to be leaking or damaged the joint should be inspected and a new seal fitted as described in Chapter J of the appropriate Workshop Fig. 81 ·23 Final drive drain and finer/level Manual. points

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B1·16

Steering system 1 Check the steering pump fluid level Remove the filler cap from the steering pump reservoir and check that the fluid level is at least up to the FULL COLD mark on the integral dipstick. If necessary. top up to this level with approved fluid (see fig. 81-25). Start and run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. approximately 77°C, then stop the engine. Remove the filler cap and check the fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, add an approved fluid to Fig. 81 ·24 Drive-shaft universal joint grease point raise the level to the FULL HOT mark on the dipstick; do not overfill. Ensure that the filler cap is securely replaced.

2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints (if applicable) If grease nipples are fitted to the ball joints at the ends of the track rods (see fig. B1·26),they should be lubricated until a slight swelling of the joint seal is evident. Take care not to damage or displace the seals.

3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers Examine the condition of the rubber cover seals on the Fig. B1·25 Steering pump filler/dipstick ball joints (see fig. B1·26). If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition, new parts should be fitted as ·necessary. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

4 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the rack and pinion unit and check the tightness of the seal clips. If the seals are satisfactory. tighten the clips as necessary. If the convoluted seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the rack and pinion unit should be Fig. B1 ·26 Track rod ball joints removed from the car and new seals fitted. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers The front suspension ball joints (see fig. 81-27) are packed with grease on initial assembly and should not normally require attention between service overhauls unless the rubber seal covers are damaged. If on inspection the covers. are found to be damaged or in poor condition. the ball joints should be removed and new joints and seals fitted as necessary. For full information refer to Chapter H of the Workshop Manual.

2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted seals Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the Fig. B1 -27 Front suspension ball joints rear suspension s1ruts ( see fig. B 1·28).

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section Bl B1-17

If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the struts should be removed, as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. and new seals fitted.

3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints Position the car on a ramp or over a pit then disconnect the actuation links from the height control valves and rear suspension trailing arms at the ball joints (see fig. B1 -29). Note from which side each link is taken. Clean the ball joints then lubricate with an approved grease. Do not alter the length of the actuation link. Connect Jhe actuation link to the height control valve and the trailing arm. Adjust the joints to obtain complete movement without free play.

Brake and hydraulic systems

WARNING

In order to protect against claims of liability for hydraulic system contamination. it is recommended that the hydraulic system mineral oil is tested for contamination prior to work being undertaken. preferably in the presence of the owner or his/her Fig. 81·29 Height control valve actuation link representative. joints It is important that the test is carried out even when the hydraulic system mineral oil is to be renewed as this will not prevent the deterioration of To carry out contamination tests. a kit is available components which have been in contact with from Rolls-Royce Motors Limited part number contaminated mineral oil. RH 2841 and should be used as follows. Brake fluids and mineral oil are immiscible and Switch on the ignition and depressurize the with large amounts of contamination separation of the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until fluids will occur on standing, due to the greater both low pressure warning panels illuminate. Continue density of the conventional fluids. A further indication to pump the pedal for at least a further 20 applications of the mixing of conventional brake.fluid and mineral to ensure that all the accumulator mineral oil is oil is its cloudy appearance. returned to the reservoir.

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1905 B1·18

Clean the area around each hydraulic reservoir Shake each sample taken to ensure it is well mixed. filler cap and then remove the cap. Pour 10 ml of each sample into clean test tubes Ensure that the components in the test kit are (do not mix the samples together). clean and dry. Using the dispenser. add two drops of the red dye Using the sampling tube provided, extract 50 ml solution contained in the kit into each 10 ml sample. of mineral oil from the top and bottom of each Cork the test tubes and shake them thoroughly. reservoir. Leave the samples to settle for at least 30 Place the samples into individual dean dry minutes. containers. Examine each sample.

1 Check the reservoir mineral oil level The mineral oil reservoirs for the hydraulic systems are located in the engine compartment (see fig. 81·30). To check the oil level. first depressurize the hydraulic systems by p\Jmping the brake pedal until the two warning panels illuminate. Start and run the engine for approximately four minutes with the car unladen to charge the systems and then stop the Fig. B1 ·30 Access to the hydraulic systems engine. The mineral oil in both reservoirs should be up reservoirs to the FULL '!larks on the level indicator plate. A Original filler cap If the reservoirs require topping·up, ensure that B Specialized filler cap the tops of the reservoirs and the filler caps are clean,

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81 B1·19

then add an approved hydraulic system mineral oii (see Chapter A} as necessary. It is important that only an approved hydraulic system mineral oil is used and that exceptional cleanliness is observed when topping-up the hydraulic systems. Under no circumstances should a conventional (i.e. RR363 or Universal type) brake fluid be used. After topping•up, ensure that the filler caps are clean then fit them securely to the reservoirs, or insert the blanking plug dependent on the type of filler cap fitted. Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic System Mineral Oil, for system replenishment, are fitted adjacent to the car battery. Fig. 81 ·31 Hydraulic accumulator to body hoses 2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the appropriate Workshop Manual and proceed as follows. Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic systems by attaching a tube to each bleed point then opening the bleed screws and allowing the mineral oil to drain from the circuits. The bleed screws are located on each accumulator, on each pair of brake calipers, on the deceleration conscious pressure limiting valve and on each inner rear wing from the rear suspension strut. A drain tube is not required at the accumulator bleed screws as these are an integral part of the accumulators and when opened allow the mineral oil to flow from the accumulator spheres back to the reservoirs. Drain the mineral oil from the reservoirs and clean the reservoirs as described in Chapter G of the Fig. 81 ·32 Trailing arm to body hydraulic hoses Workshop Manual. After the system has completely drained. close all described in Chapter G of the appropriate Workshop the bleed screws and ensure that any disturbed pipes Manual. are connected and correctly torque tightened. Fill the reservoirs with fresh hydraulic system 4 Renew the accumulator to body and trailing mineral oil (see fig. B 1·30 and Chapter A) until the arms to body hoses. levels in the reservoirs are slightly above the topping· Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in up marks on the indicator plate. Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as Run the engine for four minutes, with the car follows. unladen, then top·up to the FULL level mark; never Fit a hose clamp to each of the intermediate hoses allow the mineral oil levels to fall below the minimum of the accumulator return pipes to prevent the flow of level marks. mineral oil from the rese,voirs. Check for leaks, especially around the unions of Thoroughly clean the areas around the any pipes which have been disturbed. connections of the two accumulator to body and Finally, bleed the hydraulic systems as described trailing arms to body hoses (see figs. B 1·31 and in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. B1·32}. Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic Remove the respective hoses noting the following System Mineral Oil, for system replenishment, are points. fitted adjacent to the battery. To avoid contamination fit the new hose immediately after removing the old one; alternatively 3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and fit approved blanks to the open ports until the new hoses hoses are fitted. Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and check the Before fitting a new hose ensure that it is condition of the hydraulic system pipes and hoses. thoroughly clean and conforms with the hydraulic Examine the metal pipes for signs of corrosion, systems mineral oil requirements. particularly those in an exposed position. When fitting the new hoses, ensure that they are Examine the hoses for chafing or surface cracking. routed to clear other components and that clearance is Faulty pipes and hoses should be replaced as maintained during full suspension movement.

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls·Aovce Motors limited 1985 81·20

Tighten the pipe nuts to the torque settings given Fit the road wheels and lower the car. in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. If new brake pads have been fitted, an initial After fining the new hoses, check for leaks and running-in period of between 1 100 kilometres and bleed the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G 1300 kilometres (700 miles and 800 miles) should of the Workshop Manual. be observed. During this running-in period the brakes should not be applied harshly or for prolonged periods 5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses from high speeds except in an emergency. Towards To renew the hydraulic system hoses follow the same the end of the running~in period. the force with which basic procedure described under the heading Renew the brakes are applied may be progressively increased. the accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses. 7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust excluders (when changing brake pads) 6 Check the brake disc pads for wear The condition of the caliper dust seals should be Remove the wheel discs and slacken the wheel nuts checked whenever the brake pads are removed. approximately half a turn. Inspect the seals for signs of damage, heat Jack up the car and suppon with stands and sill hardening or general deterioration and renew if blocks. necessary. Remove the road wheels and examine all the disc When fitting new seals, ensure that the seal brake pad linings. retaining clips are correctly located. The brake pads must be renewed when the brake pad linings are worn to within 3, 18 mm (0. 125 in) of 8 Renew the brake caliper seals the steel backing plates. The pads should also be To renew the caliper piston seals it is necessary to renewed if this minimum thickness is likely to be remove the brake calipers from the car. achieved before the next service check. To renew the For full instructions. refer to Chapter G of the brake pads, refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Workshop Manual. Manual. If new brake pads are to be fitted which have 9 Check the parking brake pads for wear different recommended linings from those on the old Securely chock the front wheels then raise the rear of pads, the disc faces should be cleaned prior to fitting the car. Place sill blocks under the rear body sills and the new pads. All traces of the old pad lining material also suppon the rear trailing arms. Do not allow the should be removed by hand rotating the disc whilst suspension struts to support the full suspension load. applying coarse grade emery cloth to the disc faces. Remove the rear wheels and release the parking Do not emery the disc faces radially. brake to the off position. Always ensure that the pads fined to all six brake Disconnect the caliper actuation rod from the calipers have the same type and grade of pad lining. ca Iiper lever (see fig. B 1• 3 3 ). Unscrew and remove the caliper adjuster and collect the adjuster clicker plate. Unhook the pad retention springs from each pad, 1 2 noting the larger spring is fined to the inner pad. Remove the pads from the caliper. Check the thickness of the lining material on each pad. Pads which are worn to within 1,6 mm (0.062 in) or less of the steel backing plate should be renewed. To fit the pads, attach the retention springs then locate the pads into position and hook the springs onto the caliper. Complete the assembly by reversing the removal procedure, then adjust the calipers as described under the heading Adjust the parking brake. Note If new parking brake pads have been fitted, the following bedding-in procedure should be carried out 6 5 4 W290 after adjusting the parking brake. Drive the car at approximately 48 km/h {30 mile/h) Fig. B1 ·33 Parking brake mechanism and apply the parking brake to bring the car to rest; it 1 Actuation rod is imponant that this is done gently and progressively. 2 Centralizing straps The parking brake must not be applied fully and no 3 Parking brake pads attempt should be made to lock the wheels. This 4 Brake disc operation should be carried out nine times. allowing at 5 Adjuster clicker block least one minute to elapse between stops to prevent 6 Adjuster the discs overheating.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section Bl B1·21

Finally adjust the caliper as described under the heading Adjust the parking brake.

10 Adjust the parking brake Ensure that the parking brake is in the off position. Adjust the rear cables at the adjusters {see fig. B1·34) so that the caliper operating levers return to their off-stops under the influence of their return springs with no appreciable slackness in the cables. Note The cables must be adjusted so that the equaliser link on the intermediate linkage (see fig. B1 -34) lies at right angles with the centre line of the car with the parking brake in the off position. To check the cable adjustment, adjust both rear cables at the equaliser link until the caliper off-stops are just clear of the calipers. Measure the gap produced at each off·stop and lengthen the cables by this amount. With the cables correctly adjusted, check that the centralizing straps (see fig. B1·33) are pushing the pads away from the discs when the parking brake is in the off position. If not, remove the nut and bolt securing the straps. bend the straps outwards (i.e. away from the disc) then refit them. Ensure that the straps are pushed downwards towards the adjusting Fig. B1 -34 Parking brake rear cable adjustment nut whilst tightening the nut and bolt securing them to point the caliper. Check that the distance between the pad and the disc are the same on each side of the caliper; if not. reset the centralizing straps. Raise each rear wheel in turn so that it is free to rotate and adjust each caliper as follows. Turn the caliper adjuster (see fig. 81-33) clockwise until the pads just grip the disc; at this point it should only just be possible to rotate the road wheel by hand. Turn the adjuster anti-clockwise a quarter turn (i.e. three clicks on the nut) to obtain the minimum clearance between the pads and disc.

11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Lubricate the parking brake linkage clevis pins, fulcrum pins and the rear cable adjusters with approved grease.

Fuel system Safety precautions It is important that before a fuel line is opened or the fuel tank drained or siphoned. that the workshop ~ safety precautions given in Chapter A of the Workshop !\ Manual are strictly observed. 1 A B V\' 288 1 Renew the main filter element The main fuel filter; situated on the car body underframe. contains a disposable element. fig. B1 -35 Main fuel filter Dependent on the type of filter fitted (see fig. B1 -35) the following procedure should be carried out to renew the filter element. Blank off the pipe connections to prevent loss of fuel. Type A Remove the setscrew securing the filter mounting Disconnect the inlet and outlet pipes from the filter top bracket to the body crossmember; lower the filter from cover. the car.

TSD 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1 985 B1-22

Remove the three screws securing the filter bowl Remove the retaining bolt from the centre of the clamping ring. Separate the bowl from the filter head. filter bowl. Drain any fuel from the bowl and withdraw the Separate the bowl from the filter head. element. Type A and B Type B Clean the filter bowl using clean fuel. Place a clean container beneath the filter to collect any Fit a new element and sealing rings by reversing fuel spillage. the respective removal procedure noting the following. Do not overtighten the bowl securing bolt or clamp retaining screws. Tighten the screws evenly. After fitting the filter to the car. examine the fuel system for leakage and rectify as necessery. When carrying out the above operation at the 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or four years and subsequent periods, the intank fuel filter situated on the underside of the fuel tank, (see fig. 81-36) should also be removed and cleaned as follows. Disconnect the battery. Drain or siphon the fuel tank. Place a container beneath the fuel intank filter to collect the residue of fuel from the tank when the filter is removed. X470 Disconnect the hose from the intank filter outlet pipe. Fig. B1 -36 I ntank fuel filter Remove the circlip retaining the filter and carefully withdraw the filter from the tank. Clean the filter mesh by washing in clean fuel. Examine the filter for serviceability and renew if necessary. Fit the filter by reversing the removal procedure. Always use a new seal on the filter body. Ensure that the fuel drained from the fuel tank is free from foreign matter. then return it to the fuel tank. Check the fuel filter and any pipe connections that have been disconnected for leaks.

2 Clean the carburetter fuel inlet filter (Solex carburetter) Carry out this operation when the engine is cold. Unscrew the fuel inlet pipe at the fuel inlet adapter (see fig. 81 -37). Remove the fuel inlet adapter from the carburetter, discard the sealing washer. Withdraw the fuel filter, taking care not to lose the Fig. B1 -37 Fuel inlet filter ( Sol ex carburetter) small spring situated at the inner end. Clean the filter by washing it in clean fuel. Fit the filter by reversing the removal procedure noting the following. Ensure that the spring is located correctly on the inner end of the filter with the larger diameter of the spnng seated on the filter. Always fit a new sealing washer to the inlet adapter. On completion check for any fuel leaks and rectify as necessary.

3 Fit new paper filter elements to the carburetter fuel inlet {SU carburetters) Carry out this operation when the engine is co:d. A paper filter element is fitted into the fuel intake filter housing on each carburetter. To renew a filter Fig. B1 -38 Fuel inlet filter (SU carburetters) element proceed as follows.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81 B1·23

Remove the two screws from the top of the filter housing (see fig. 81 -38). Using a % in U~lF bolt screwed into the threaded hole in the plug, lih the plug from the housing. Withdraw the spring, retainer and filter element from the housing; discard the filter element. Fit the new filter element by reversing the removal procedure noting the following. Ensure that the new filter element is fitted with its open end towards the seating face in the housing. Fit a new sealing ring to the sealing plug. On completion check for any fuel leaks and rectify as necessary.

4 Renew the fuel mixture weakening device filter (SU carburetters) The filter is situated on the left-hand valance of the Fig. B1 -39 Fuel mixture weakening device filter engine compartment (see fig. 81 -39). To remove the filter, disconnect the outlet hose To check the specific gravity of the battery electrolyte and then remove the two setscrews retaining the filter assembly to the valance; discard the filter assembly. on these models, it is necessary to remove the battery Fit a new filter assembly by reversing the removal from the car as follows. Ensure the ignition is switched procedure. off, then disconnect the battery leads. Remove the battery clamp and lift the battery from its cradle. 5 Fit a new filler head to fuel tank hose Battery electrolyte specific gravity check To enable the filler head to fuel tank hose to be (applicable to batteries with removeable cell vent renewed, it is necessary to remove the rear suspension covers} Remove the vent covers from the top of the gas spring. For details of the procedure required battery. reference should be made to Chapter K of the Using hydrometer check the specific gravity of appropriate Workshop Manual. a the electrolyte in each cell and compare the readings obtained with the following tables. 6 Examine all flexible fuel pipes Carefully examine all the flexible fuel pipes throughout Caution The electrolyte in the battery is a corrosive acid. Do not the fuel system. Renew any pipes which have become allow the electrolyte to come into contact with the damaged or deteriorated to an unserviceable condition. eyes. skin, fabric or paintwork. Flush any contacted Check the complete fuel system for leaks and areas immediately and thoroughly with water. If the rectify as necessary. eyes are affected, flush for at least 1 5 minutes and obtain prompt medical attention. 7 Test fuel pump for efficiency To carry out this operation, it is necessary to remove Chloride battery the fuel pump from the car. For details of the removal Air temperature below 32°C (90°F} and test procedure reference should be made to Chapter K of the appropriate Workshop Manual. Specific Gravity Condition of Battery 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged Electrical system 1.090 to 1. 110 Fully discharged 1 Check the state of charge of the battery Silver Spirit, Silver Spur. Bentley Eight, late Corniche, Air temperature above 32°C (90°F) Continental. and Mulsanne cars. The battery is situated in the luggage compartment Specific Gravity Condition of Battery stowage well. To gain access to the battery, turn back 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged the carpet from the right-hand side of the luggage 1.1 50 to 1.170 Half discharged compartment. Lift out the stowage well lid and the 1.070 to 1.090 Fully discharged cover from around the battery. Lucas or Varta battery Early Corniche and Camargue cars The battery is mounted on the right·hand side of the Air temperature below 27°C (80°F) luggage compartment. To gain access to the battery turn back the carpet and remove the trim from around Specific Gravity Condition of Battery the battery. the trim is secured by contact strip on the 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged Corniche and two turn fasteners on Camargue. Unclip 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged the battery cover retaining strap and lift off the cover. 1.090 to 1. 110 Fully discharged

TSD 4406

Printed in England November 1 985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B1-24

Air temperature above 2 7•c (80°F) Disconnect the battery leads and using hot water or a dilute solution of ammonia carbonate, wash them Specific Gravity Condition of Battery thoroughly until all corrosive has been removed. Finally 1.220 to 1 .240 Fully charged wash with clean water to remove the ammonia 1.1 30 to 1 . 1 50 Half discharged carbonate solution. 1.050 to \.070 Fully discharged Remove any corrosive deposit from the terminal posts using a cloth moistened with ammonia If the specific gravity reading of all the cells are carbonate solution then wash with clean water. uniform and within the range 1.240 to 1.270 the Dry the battery leads and terminal posts. Connect battery is in an acceptable state of charge. If the the battery leads to the terminal posts. Liberally coat readings are uniform but below 1.220 the battery the terminals with petroleum jelly. should be recharged. Always remove the battery from the car for recharging. 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation If the specific gravity of the electrolyte in one cell Actuate the respective switches and check for lamp differs markedly from the others (i.e. the reading is illumination and function i.e. hazard warning and turn 0.040 or more, lower than the remainder). then a flashers, headlamp dip/main beam, headlamp flash. defect must be suspected and rectified as necessary. When checking the fog lamps the main lighting Battery electrolyte level check switch must be on. Ensure that the battery is in a high state of charge Cars with front fog lamps fitted (see battery electrolyte specific gravity check). In the Park position the front lamps must be The level of the battery electrolyte in each cell switched on before the rear fog lamps will illuminate. should be approximately 5 mm (0.250 in) above the On cars other than those conforming to a Swiss tops of the separators ( Lucas or Varta battery) or specification when only the rear fog lamps are contacting the blue bar situated above the separators switched on with the main lighting switch in the Head (Chloride battery). position, these lamps should extinguish when the If the electrolyte level is low top-up using distilled headlamps are switched to main beam. If both front water until the level is attained. Do not overfill. and rear fog lamps are in use the rear fog lamps Always ensure the top of the battery is clean prior should remain illuminated. to removal of the vent covers. On cars conforming to a Swiss specification, the front and rear fog lamps should only illuminate Battery voltage check together when the main lighting switch is in the Park Sealed for life (maintenance free) batteries position. If the switch is turned to the Head position, The state of charge on this type of battery can only be the front fog lamps should extinguish when the checked by taking a voltage reading across the battery headlamps are on dipped beam. When main headlamp terminals using a digital voltmeter or multimeter. The beam is selected both front and rear fog lamps should instrument must be accurate to within 0.1 volts. extinguish. Before a reading is taken on batteries that have Cars without front fog lamps recently received a charge. the residual effect of the The rear fog lamps will only illuminate when the surface charge on the battery plates must be removed main lighting switch is in the Head position and the to avoid a false reading. headlamps are on dipped beam. When main beam is The surlace charge can be removed by applying selected the rear fog lamps should extinguish. an electrical load to the battery e.g. by connecting a The respective facia tell-tales should also be high rate discharge tester for 1 5 seconds or, if the checked for illumination during these operations. battery is connected to the car by switching on the With the lighting in the Park and Head positions, headlamps for one minute. before a reading is taken. switch on the ignition. Check the facia instruments for To ascertain the state of charge of the battery, illumination; the panel illumination dimming switch compare the reading with the following table. should also be checked for correct operation.

Voltage State of charge 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation 1 2.8 volts 1 00% Before carrying out the following checks firmly apply 12.6 volts 82% the parking brake; ensure the gear range selector is in 12.5 volts 75% the Park position and remove the gear range selector 1 2.4 volts 60% cut-out from the fuseboard. A minimum reading of 12.5 volts (75% charge) is acceptable. Below this reading the battery should be Ignition and oil warning lamps recharged. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position, the ignition and oil pressure warning lamps should illuminate. Start 2 Clean and check the battery terminals the engine. both lamps should extinguish; switch off The top of the battery should always be kept clean and the ignition. dry. When the ignition key is turned to the ACC If corrosion of the battery leads or terminals has position the ignition warning lamp only should occured it should be removed as follows. illuminate. )

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81 B1·25

Warning panel cluster lamps Operate the map lamp switch; the front section of Move the gear range selector lever to the D position the front passengers roof lamp should illuminate. (do not insert the gear range selector cut-out). On cars fitted with vanity mirror illumination move Apply the footbrake then turn the ignition key to the switch to the mirror position. Lower the the start position. All the warning panel cluster lamps passengers sun visor; the lamp situated above the should illuminate. With the ignition held in the start visor should illuminate. position, turn the main lighting switch to the Park and Withdraw the visor from its retaining clip; the Head positions; the intensity of illumination of the ice lamp should extinguish. The lamp should also and low fuel warning panels should reduce. Switch off extinguish when the visor is moved to its raised the ignition and lighting switch. position, even when the switch is on. The two hydraulic system pressure warning tamps The operation of the rear roof lamps should be should also be checked as follows. checked by operating the switches situated on the rear Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. compartment vanity mirror surrounds, or rear quarter Depressurize the hydraulic systems by actuating panel (Bentley Eight cars) or situated on the arm rest the brake pedal between 50 and 60 times. The two (Camargue cars). brake pressure warning panels should illuminate. On cars other than Camargue. press the upper When the lamps have illuminated start and run portion or front portion ( Bentley Eight) of the three the engine. Both lamps should extinguish after position switch. The front section of the respective approximately two minutes indicating that the roof lamp should illuminate. Pressing the lower portion hydraulic systems are pressurized. Switch off the or rear portion (Bentley Eight) should illuminate the ignition. rear section of both rear lamps. With the switch in the central position both lamps should be off. Repeat the Fasten seat belt warning lamp operation on the opposite side of the car. To check the seat belt warning lamp, open and close On Camargue cars press the outer of the two each door in turn; observe the lamp operation. switches situated in the arm rest; this should The seat belt warning panel should illuminate illuminate the rear section of both rear roof lamps. whenever a door is opened and extinguish Pressing the inner switch should illuminate the front approximately seven seconds after the door is closed. section of the respective roof lamps. Repeat the Note operation on the opposite side of the car. All doors must be fully closed for the lamp to Corniche Saloon cars extinguish (i.e. not on first catch) Ensure the doors are fully closed and the interior lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the Hazard warning indicator rear section of the four roof lamps should illuminate. Depress the hazard warning switch. check that all the Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain turn indicators and the facia warning lamp are flashing. illuminated for approximately seven seconds then extinguish. Repeat the check with the passenger door. 5 Check all interior lamps for operation When carrying out these checks also ensure that the Cars other than Corniche/Continental door open warning lamp and step lamp are illuminated Ensure all the doors are fully closed and the interior when the door is open. lights are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the Check the operation of the rear compartment roof rear section of the central roof lamps should illuminate. lamps by operating the three position switch situated Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain in each arm rest ensuring that the car doors are closed. illuminated for approximately seven seconds. Press the outer section of the switch, the front From 1985 model year cars the rear roof lamps section of the respective roof lamp should illuminate. and footwell lamps should also illuminate when the Press the inner section of the switch, the rear section door is opened. If the gear selector lever is moved of both rear roof lamps should illuminate. With the from the Park position on these cars, with the ignition switch in the central position both roof lamps should key in the RUN position, the lamps will extinguish be off. Repeat the check on the opposite switch. immediately all the doors are closed. Check the front compartment roof lamps as When carrying out these operations also check described in the section for cars. other than Corniche. that the door open warning lamp and step lamp are Corniche Convertible and Continental cars illuminated with the door in the open position; these Seven interior lamps are provided. one in each door, lamps should extinguish immediately the door is fully two in the hood above the rear window. one in the closed. front face of each rear seat outer arm rest and one Repeat the check on the remaining doors. above the facia stowage companment. Note Open the driver·s door; both roof lamps, the lamp If the doors are only closed to the first catch position in each rear seat arm rest and the lamp in each door the lamps should remain illuminated. should illuminate. Fully close the door, the lamps Check the operation of the front companment should all extinguish, except the rear roof lamps which personal lamps as follows. should remain illuminated for approximately seven Withdraw the main lighting switch; the front seconds. Repeat this procedure with the passenger section of the driver's roof lamp should illuminate. door.

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 81-26

Withdraw the main lighting switch; both rear roof the wiper arm and press it firmly into the location clip. lamps should illuminate. On the passenger side of the windscreen, lift the Operate the facia switch marked MAP; the lamp wiper arm from the windscreen and pivot the blade situated above the facia stowage compartment should backwards through 90°. Press the small release tag, illuminate. situated on the underside of the blade pivot block and With the doors closed. operate the switches push the blade out of the crooked end of the wiper situated in the end of the arm rest. The rear roof lamp arm. Withdraw the wiper blade from the arm. Fit the rear compartment arm rest lamp situated on the same new blade by reversing the removal procedure. side of the car as the switch should illuminate. Note Care must be taken during these operations. 6 Check the horns for operation Ensure that the wiper arm is not allowed to spring Examine the electrical connections to each horn to back onto the windscreen when the blade has been ensure they are in good condition. Clean the horns and removed or damage to the windscreen could occur. remove any foreign matter that may have collected in On cars fitted with headlamp wash/wipe brushes, the horn trumpets. examine the brushes for wear or damage and renew if Switch on the ignition; press the horn button necessary. several times to ensure the horn button is making a To renew a brush, carefully remove the retaining good contact and that both horns are functioning nut from the spindle. Note the position of the brush correctly each time it is pressed. then withdraw it from the splined spindle . Fit the new brush by reversing the removal procedure ensuring 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp that the brush is in the correct park position. washer reseivoir Dependent on the time of manufacture. the 9 Check the windscreen and headlamp windscreen and headlamp wash systems will utilize wash/wipe for correct operation either a single reservoir for both functions or two Before carrying out the following check ensure that the independent reservoirs. windscreen is clean. The combined (single) reservoir and the Switch on the ignition and press the windscreen windscreen wash reservoir of the independent wash/wipe switch. The windscreen wipers should systems should be topped·up to their maximum levels operate and the fluid from the washer jets should using the correct mixture of washer fluid and water. impinge on the windscreen approximately 419 mm The independent headlamp wash reservoir should ( 16.5 in) from the centre line of the windscreen and be topped-up to its maximum level with clean water. 190 mm (7.5 in} below the windscreen top finisher. During winter conditions, a solution of 30% The wash/wipe function should continue until the isopropyl alcohol and 70% water should be used. This switch is released. mixture will provide frost protection down to a On release of the push button switch the washer temperature of approximately -10°C ( 14°F). should cease while the wipers should continue for Topping-up levels approximately four strokes before returning to the park Combined reservoir. position. Bottom of filler neck Turn the main lighting switch to the HEAD Independent reservoirs position. The headlamps cleaning function will only Bottom of filler neck on both reservoirs. operate when the headlamps are illuminated. Press the wash/wipe switch. The headlamp brushes and washer 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper jets should operate until the switch is released, the blades and headlamp wash brushes (if fitted). brush giving one full wipe cycle after the jet flow has Lift the wiper" arms from the windscreen and inspect ceased. them for wear or damage. Renew the blades if On cars fitted with power wash jets (no brushes) necessary. the jets should only operate for half a second when To renew a wiper blade one of the following the wash/wipe switch is depressed. To repeat the methods should be carried out dependent on the type wash it will be necessary to release then depress the of blade to wiper arm attachment. switch again. However, the windscreen wash/wipe On early cars lift the wiper arm away from the function will continue to operate as described windscreen then press the small tab situated in the previously while the switch is held depressed. end of the arm to release the blade retaining catch. Pull the blade from the arm and fit the new blade. 10 Check the alternator for correct operation Check that the new blade is secured by the retaining For details of the alternator test procedure and brush catch then return the blade to the windscreen. renewal, reference should be made to Chapter M of To renew a wiper blade on later cars procede as the Workshop Manual. follows. Drivers side of the windscreen. Lift the wiper arm 11 Check the condition of the starter motor from the windscreen. Press the top half of the blade brushes and pinion forward until the blade is released from its location clip For details of the procedure required to carry out the on the wiper arm. To fit the new blade. position it on inspection of the starter motor brushes and pinion,

November 1 985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B1 B1-27

reference should be made to Chapter M of the Workshop Manual.

Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from obstruction Check the air intake grilles and foam fitters, situated behind the car bonnet, for obstruction (i.e. leaves, dirt etc.). If necessary carefully remove the grille retaining screws. lift the grilles from the body and clean out the air intake ducts: also ensure the air intake duct drain tubes are free from obstruction.

2 Check the refrigeration system for correct operation For details of the procedure required to carry out this Fig. 81 -40 Power operated hood reservoir operation reference should be made to Chapter C of the Workshop Manual. wheel carrier lowering bolt head. Remove the inflation trap cover; if a spare wheel retainer is fitted, it should be released Body Rotate the spare wheel bolt anti-clockwise until 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat the carrier is fully lowered. Remove the spare wheel belts from the carrier. The following checks should be carried out on the Lubricate the carrier lowering bolt using a retractable seat belts. recommended lubricant. Raise and lower the carrier to Fully withdraw the seat belt from the real; distribute the lubricant over the full length of the examine the webbing for any signs of wear or damage. carrier bolt. Allow the belt to return to the stowed position. Check the condition of the spare wheel as To check the operation of the retractable belt, fit described under the heading Wheels. the belt and then give the webbing of the diagonal belt Fit the spare wheel onto the carrier. Ensure that a sharp pull. Ensure that the belt locks and then the inflation valve is in line with the inflation trap in returns to the normal roller action immediately the belt the luggage compartment floor, then fully raise the is released. carrier. With the fastening tongue of the belt locked in the Fasten the spare wheel retainer (if fitted),and fit retaining clasp; ensure the tongue is securely held and the tyre inflation trap rubber and carpet. is released immediately the red release button is operated. 4 Check the fluid level in the power operated The alternative method of checking the seat belts hood reservoir is to select an open stretch of road, then, when the Convertible cars road is free from any potential danger, accelerate the The level of the fluid in the hydraulic pump reservoir car to 24 km/h ( 1 5 mile/h) and brake sharply from must be checked with the hood in the fully open this speed; ensure that the belt locks and then (down} position. subsequently releases. If this method of test is used. it The fluid reservoir is situated adjacent to the will be necessary to carry a passenger to enable the stowage recess below the luggage compartment floor passenger seat belts to be tested. Check the rear seat similar to that shown in figure 81-40. lap belt (if fitted) for condition and correct locking and To gain access to the reservoir, turn back the release. carpet on the right-hand side of the luggage Report any defects to the owner. compartment to expose the recess covers; remove the When seat belt replacement is necessary only covers. belts approved by Rolls-Royce Motors Limited should Unscrew the reservoir filler cap and check the be fitted. fluid level. The correct level is 25 mm ( 1.0 in) below the filler neck. 2 Check that all body drains are free from If necessary toi:rup the reservoir with an approved obstruction fluid. Under no circumstances must a caster oil Examine the body drain holes; remove any foreign based fluid be used. matter that may be obstructing the holes. Take care not to damage the paintwork. Wheels 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt 1 Check all tyre pressures Turn back the carpet on the luggage compartment Check the tyre pressures including the spare when the floor to expose the spare wheel inflation trap and spare tyres are cold: adjust if necessary. The inflation

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1 985 B1·28 pressure of the spare tyre should be adjusted to the highest tyre pressure (i.e. rear wheel}. Do not check pressures when the tyres are warm (e.g. after the vehicle has been driven). Always ensure that the valve caps are fitted after checking. On wheels fitted with aluminium tyre inflation valves, always ensure that an aluminium valve cap is fitted. The fitting of a differing metal cap will result in corrosion and prevent cap removal.

2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres Examine the tyres, including the spare, for any signs of damage or tyre wall cracking etc. Carefully remove any stones or other objects that may be lodged in the tyre treads. Check the depth of tread at several points around each wheel using a tread depth gauge. To enable a visual check to be made, tread depth indicators are incorporated into the tyre construction. These indicators are integral moulded ribs, spaced at inteivals around the circumference of the tyre and extend across the full width of the tread in all primary grooves. When one or more of these indicators are flush with the tread, only 1,6 mm (0.062 in) or less of tread depth remains, and a new tyre is required. If the condition of the tyres is not satisfactory or the tread depths do not conform to the legal requirements of the country in which the car is operating. the owner should be notified and asked to authorize the fitting of new tyres. For full information on tyre fitting, balancing. etc. reference should be made to Chapter R of the appropriate Workshop Manual.

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance On completion of the respective service schedule operations, carefully road test the car for satisfactory performance. If new brake pads have been fitted, the running-in and bedding procedures should be carried out as described under, Check the brake disc pads for wear and Check the parking brake pads for wear. When the road test has been completed, the car should be fully inspected for any leaks, fouls. etc., and rectified as necessary. The transmission fluid level, should be finally checked immediately after the test, while the fluid is at normal running temperature and topped·up if necessary (see Check the transmission fluid level). Ensure that all controls. door handles, steering wheel, etc. are clean and that any dirt which may be attributed to the service schedule is completely removed.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B 1/ 1 81 / 1-1

Service schedule procedures

Contents Pages Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur Bentley Mulsanne Turbo cars from vehicle identification number * SCBZSOT05CCH04233 * 81/1-3 Bentley Turbo R cars from vehicle identification number *SCBZS0T0XFCH12834* B1/1·3

J TSD 4406 Printed in England April 1985 © Rolls•Royce Motors Limited t 985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B 1/1 B1/1·3

Service schedule procedures Bentley Mu lsanne Turbo and Bentley Turbo R

WARNI NG

Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids (Castro! RR363. Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, pipes, etc. that they are suitable for a mineral oil system. For details of correct component identification reference should be made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Always ensure that a sealed container of Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted adjacent to the battery. Fig. B1/1·1 Engine sump drain plug Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the systems when work is being carried out. Windscreen and headlamp washer reservoirs Weekly; check the washer fluid level: toirup if General information necessary. The information contained in this chapter should be used in conjunction with the Service Schedule Chart Hydraulic reservoirs (see Chapter C) and Workshop Manual publication Monthly; check the level of hydraulic mineral oil in the number TSD 4400. reservoirs. Depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping Car protection the brake pedal until the low brake pressure warning Prior to commencing a service schedule, the car panels on the facia illuminate. Continue to pump the should be suitably protected. For this purpose car . pedal for at least a further 20 applications to ensure protection kit RH 2662, wing covers RH 2684, and complete depressurization. Start and run the engine wing cover liners RH 2685 should be used. for four minutes with the car unladen, prior to checking the level. Toirup if necessary to the indicated Regular maintenance maximum level. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral In addition to the service schedules listed, the Oil ( LHM). Refer to page B 1/1 • 1 5 for further following maintenance should be carried out. information before carrying out this operation.

Engine Engine cooling system Weekly or every 800 kilometres (500 miles) Every three months; check the coolant level. If whichever is the earlier; check the engine oil by means necessary top-up with the correct anti-freeze/water of the dipstick; top-up if necessary. mixture (see page B1/1·7).

Lamp units Engine Weekly; check the lamp units for operation; rectify any 1 Change the engine oil faults. The sump should be drained when the engine is warm, preferably after the car has completed a run. Tyre pressures To drain the oil, position the car over a pit or on a Weekly; check the tyre pressures including the spare; ramp. adjust if necessary. Place a container in position beneath the drain

TSO 4406

Printed in England April 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B1/1 ·4

plug situated on the right-hand side of the sump (see fig. B 1/1-1 ). Remove the drain plug and allow the oil to drain from the sump. Do not flush the sump with paraffin or petrol. Fit the drain ptug ensuring that the washer is correctly positioned and in good condition. Fill the engine sump with recommended lubricant until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

2 Renew the engine oil filter Drain the engine oil as described under Change the engine oil. Place a container under the filter to collect any oil that may be spilled. Remove the filter by unscrewing it from the engine in an anti-clockwise direction (see fig. B 1/1-2). Thoroughly clean the filter seating face on the engine. Fig. 81 /1-2 Engine oil filter location Lightly smear the rubber sealing ring on the neyv filter with clean engine oil. Screw the filter onto the pedestal until the rubber seal contacts the sealing face, then tighten the filter a further half turn; do not over tighten. Fill the engine with clean engine oil until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Run the engine and check the filter joint for leakage. Stop the engine and allow sufficient time for the oil to drain into the sump, again check the oil level; top-up to the MAX mark on the dipstick if necessary. Finally carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

3 Check the engine oil level In order to obtain an accurate indication of the oil level, ensure that the car is standing on level ground. Check the engine oil by means of the dipstick marked ENGINE (see fig. 81/1-3). It is recommended that the oil level is checked when the engine is cold. If the engine has been running, sufficient time should elapse after it has Fig. B 1 /1 ·3 Engine oil filler and dipstick stopped to allow the oil to drain into the sump. Do not check the oil level with the engine running. To replenish the sump with oil. open the filler cap marked ENGINE (see fig. B 1/1-3). Add clean oil to the engine and after allowing sufficient time for the oil to reach the sump, check that the oil is up to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. Important The engine lubrication system incorporates a thermostatically controlled oil cooler, therefore if the oil has been drained from the engine the following additional procedure must be carried out to ensure the correct oil level is obtained. Carry out the normal topping-up procedure as described previously to obtain the maximum oil level reading on the dipstick. Drive the car allowing the turbocharger to come into operation, thus enabling the engine oil to attain the temperature required to actuate the oil cooler Fig. B1/1 ·4 Engine oil cooler return pipe thermostat.

November 1 984 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81/1 81/1·5

To ascertain that the thermostat has actuated. a rise in the temperature of the oil cooler return pipe (see fig. 81/1·4) can be felt. This temperature rise occurs as hot oil begins to flow from the oil filter housing. where the thermostat is situated. to the oil cooler mounted in front of the coolant radiator matrix. Do not attempt to attain the required engine oil temperature rise with the car stationary. When it has been ascertained that the engine oil has been passing through the cooler. thus filling this part of the lubrication system. check the oil level in the normal manner as described previously.

4 Check the drive belts Before commencing to adjust the drive belts inspect them for signs of wear or cracking. Any belts found unsatisfactory should be renewed. If after adjustment, a matched pair of belts have a marked variation in tension, a new pair should be fitted. Always renew both belts in a matched pair, even if only one belt is faulty. Two belt tension loads are specified; a new belt load for replacement (new) belts and a retensioning load for belts which are satisfactory for further service. Fig. B1 /1 ·5 Engine drive belt adjustment points The belt tension must be checked at a point Inset· Refrigeration compressor rear midway between two pulleys by use of a belt tension pivot meter. Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent belt slip.

Crankshaft to coolant pump/steering pump The belt tension meter reading should be as follows. New belt 36.3 kgf to 40,8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf). Retensioned belt 31, 7 kgf to 36.3 kgf (70 lbf to 80 lbf). The tension of this matched pair of belts is adjusted by altering the position of the steering pump. Slacken the setscrew securing the steering pump mounting bracket pivot and the clamping setscrew on the belt tensioner situated below the steering pump (see fig. B 1/1 ·5). Carefully adjust the tensioner until the correct belt tension is attained. When the belt tension is correct. tighten the tensioner clamp and mounting bracket pivot setscrews. If the alternator belt is to be adjusted the mounting bracket pivot setscrew can remain slack until adjustment has been carried out. Fig. 81 /1 ·6 Engine air intake filter Ensure the belt tension is still correct when the (Air intake trunk disconnected) steering pump is fully secured.

clamping setscrew on the belt tensioner situated Crankshaft to coolant pump/alternator above the alternator { see fig. B1/1 ·5 }. The belt tension meter reading should be as follows, Carefully adjust the tensioner until the correct belt New belt·36.3 kgf to 40,8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf). tension is attained. Retensioned belt 31. 7 kgf to 36,3 kgf When the belt tension is correct. tighten the belt (70 lbf to 80 lbf). tensioner clamping setscrew and alternator mounting The belt tension is adjusted by altering the setscrew. position of the alternator. Ensure the belt tension is still correct when the Slacken the alternator mounting setscrew and the alternator is fully secured.

TSD 4406

Printed in England November 1 984 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1984 81/1-6

Crankshaft to refrigeration compressor Support the air intake housing and release the The belt tension meter reading should be as follows, three toggle clips securing the housing to the valance. New belt 36.3 kgf to 40,8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf). Carefully free the joint, then move the housing Retensioned belt 31,7 kgf to 36,3 kgf towards the engine and withdraw the housing filter ( 70 lbf to 80 lbf). element from the car. The belt tension is adjusted by altering the position of Remove the filter element from the housing. the refrigeration compressor. It should be noted that the design of the air intake Slacken the compressor pivot bolts at the front filter is such that dirt and foreign matter will be and rear of the compressor and the belt tensioner collected on the inside of the filter element. clamping setscrew (see fig. 81/1 ·5). Ensure that the inside of the air cleaner housing Carefully adjust the tensioner until the correct belt (both the section removed and the fixed section in the tension is attained. valance) is clean. When the belt tension is correct tighten the belt Inspect the joint seals for serviceability. Renew if tensioner clamping setscrew and the compressor pivot necessary. bolts. Fit the new filter element as follows. Ensure the belt tension is still correct when the Locate the large end of the new filter element compressor is fully secured. onto the locating spigot on the inside of the removable half of the housing. 5 Renew the air filter element Carefully position the housing and filter onto the The air filter element is situated in the air intake valance allowing the filter to pass into the valance housing at the front right-hand side of the engine mounted section of the housing. locate the small ·1ompartment (see fig. B 1/1-6). (blank) end of the filter into the spigot in the valance To gain access to the element. release the two housing. Align the three housing toggle clips with their toggle clips retaining the air intake trunk to the respective securing points. Special care should be housing. taken during these operations to ensure that the paper Carefully free the joint and move the trunk away element is not damaged during insertion. from the housing. Ensure that the filter is correctly positioned on the Unscrew the worm drive clip securing the location spigots. then secure the three toggle clips. It turbocharger intake trunk to the air intake housing. is essential that the filter is correctly located on the Detach the trunk. spigots before the toggle clips are fastened down. otherwise there is a serious risk of crushing the filter element. Fit the remaining components by reversing the removal procedure.

6 Clean the crankcase breather flame trap The engine crankcase is ventilated through a breather tube connected to the air dump (recirculation} pipe. A flame trap in the form of a filter gauze is fitted into the system at the rear of 'A' bank cylinder (see fig. B1/1·7) and should be cleaned as follows. Remove the windscreen wiper mechanism cover ) and the wiper motor relay (see fig. 81/1·14). Disconnect the breather hose from the connection on the air dump pipe. Remove the setscrews securing the speed control bellows or actuator mounting bracket. dependent on the type fitted. to the crankcase breather/flame trap housing. Move the bellows or actuator away from the housing. Remove the remaining setscrew from the housing cover. This setscrew also secures the ignition harness clamp. Carefully remove the housing cover and hose. Remove the circlip retaining the filter gauze situated on the underside of the housing cover. Remove the filter gauze and washer. Thoroughly clean the gauze with a suitable cleaning solvent and blow dry with compressed air. Ensure that the breather pipe. housing. and cover are also clean. Fig. B1/1 ·7 Crankcase breather tube flame trap Fit the filter gauze. housing cover. and speed

November 1984 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B 1/1 81/1•7

control bellows or actuator by reversing the removal Pin1i litl"fl 11mo1 procedure. .s 7 Renew the sparking plugs Sparking plug type NGK BPR 5 ES or Champion RN 11 YC. Plug gap setting 0,76 mm (0.030 in). Before removing the sparking plugs the surrounding area should be thoroughly cleaned to prevent the ingress of foreign matter when the plugs are removed. a Fit the new plugs ensuring that the plug gaps are correctly set and that each plug is fitted with a sealing 0 washer. Torque tighten each plug to between 18 Nm and 23 Nm (1,8 kgf m and 2.3 kgf m. 13 lbf ft and A 17 lbf ft).

8 Lubricate the distributor Lubrication of the distributor is carried out during initial assembly and further lubrication is not required.

9 Lubricate the accelerator and carburetter t.1---1--1---1----4---l--1 0 0 S linkage o, -•5 .AO ,30 -26 .20 -1S- -10 Lubricate all the accelerator and carburetter linkage efc 0 I 1f) ; 20 ., -so, ·•O I -30 I -20 I •10 I ball joints. pivots. and clevis pins. s's% 5011 4'5" 40% 3°6'4 30% 261' 2'0,; $ 805 C Examine the ball joints for wear and adjust if necessary. Renew any worn clevis pins. Examine the linkage for correct operation. For Fig. B1 /1-8 Anti-freeze correction chart to give details of linkage setting procedures reference should a 50% solution be made to Chapter K of the Workshop Manual. A Acceptable service range of concentration 10 Check the ignition timing B Freezing point of coolant For details of the ignition timing settings and C Percentage concentration procedures reference should be made to Chapter K of 0 Volume of 100% anti-freeze to be the Workshop Manual. added to maintain a 50% solution after removal of the same volume of 11 Check the engine idle speed old coolant For full details of carburetter settings reference should be made to Chapter K of the Workshop Manual. operating temperature is attained and the anti-freeze has become thoroughly mixed with the coolant. Stop 12 Check the choke idle speed the engine and again check the concentration in the For full details of choke fast-idle set:tings reference radiator. should be made to Chapter K of the Workshop An acceptable level of anti-freeze concentration is Manual. between 45% and 50%. Therefore, as a hydrometer may be inacc~rate where readings above 40% are expected, it is recommended that a refractometer is Engine cooling system used. 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration For details refer to Chapter L of the Workshop The cooling system is filled initially with a coolant Manual. solution comprising equal parts of UT184 (BP· Hythe If a refractometer is not available, and a Chemicals) or Prestone II and water. This mixture gives hydrometer has to be used a scale reading of between frost protection down to a temperature of-37"C 1,06 and 1,07 should be obtained. with the coolant at (-35"F). The coolant should contain fifty percent .of an room temperature for the mixture to be correct. approved anti-freeze at all times, as this not only provides frost protection, but also prevents corrosion of 2 Check the coolant level the coolant passages, and raises the boiling temperature Warning of the coolant The cooling system becomes pressurized during The anti-freeze concentration should be checked engine running, therefore. extreme care should be in both the expansion bottle and the radiator. taken when removing the radiator cap from a If the strength of the coolant requires increasing, warm or hot radiator. sufficient coolant should be drained from the radiator Routine check and replaced with undiluted anti-freeze (see fig. To check the level outside a normal service schedule B1/1 ·8). Afterwards run the engine until normal (e.g. Regular maintenance) and when no cooling/

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1985 © Rolls•Royce Motors Limited 1985 B1/1·8

heating system fault is reported or suspected, proceed radiator cap by pressing it firmly down and turning it as follows. fully clockwise. If the engine is hot ensure that the coolant level Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in in the.translucent expansion bottle is at the MAX accordance with the Routine check procedure. mark. Top-up if necessary and replace the expansion If the coolant level in the radiator is low but visible bottle cap. and no cooling/heating system fault is reported o, If the engine is cold ensure that the coolant level suspected top-up the system using the following in the translucent expansion bottle is half-way between procedure. If however the coolant is not visible or a the MIN and MAX marks. Top-up if necessary and coolanVheating system leak is reported or suspected, replace the expansion bottle cap. the system should have any faults rectified and then If the coolant level in the expansion bottle is either be pressure tested prior to carrying out the topping-up below the MIN mark or there is no coolant in the procedure. expansion bottle. carry out the following Full check Top-up the radiator until the coolant is half-way up procedure. the filler neck. Start and run the engine. Full check Turn the air conditioning system function control Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position fully clockwise to the defrost position. and apply the parking brake. Set the air conditioning system override switch to Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the the AUTO position. fuseboard. Allow at least one minute for the air conditioning Check the coolant level in the translucent system to stabilize, then check to ensure that all air is expansion bottle (see fig. B 1/1-9}. If the level is low being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is ) or the bottle is empty, add coolant to bring the level up delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). to the MIN mark. This procedure opens the heater system water tap. Ensure that the engine is not hot {to allow safe Run the engine, without the pressure cap fitted, removal of the radiator cap). until normal operating temperature is attained. Top-up Remove the radiator cap in three stages as the coolant level in the radiator during this time. follows. Switch off the engine. Turn the cap slowly, anti-clockwise until a check Fit the radiator pressure cap by pressing it firmly position is reached. Wait until any pressure in the down and turning it fully clockwise. system has been released. Press down on the cap and Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in continue to turn it anti-clockwise until the cap is accordance with the Routine check procedure. released. Check the coolant level in the radiator. This should 3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness be halfway up the filler neck. Examine all the coo/ant hose connections for signs of If the coolant level in the radiator is correct, fit the leakage and check the worm drive clips for tightness. Never overtighten a clip in an attempt to seal a leaking connection. In the event of a hose connection leaking when the worm drive clips have been tightened, drain the cooling system to a level below the leaking hose. Remove and inspect the hose and its connecting component for signs of damage. If necessary renew the faulty component and refill the system with coolant as described in Renew the coolant.

4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses Inspect all coolant hoses for signs of deterioration. cracking, weak spots, etc. Any faulty hose should be removed and a new hose fitted. When renewing a hose always ensure that it does not foul other components and that it is not kinked so as to cause complete or partial restriction of the coolant flow.

5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose Drain the coolant system as described in Renew the coolant, but do not remove the engine crankcase drain plugs. Disconnect the heater tap feed hose (see fig. 81/1 • 1 O} from the engine and heater tap; remove the hose. Fig. B1/1-9 Coolant expansion bottle Fit the new hose; ensure that the hose is free

November 1 984 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81/1 81/1-9

from any sharp bends that may restrict coolant flow. Fill the engine coolant system as described in Renew the coolant. Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the gear range selector lever is in the Park position. Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the fuseboard. Start and run the engine; check the coolant hose for leaks. Switch off the ignition and fit the gear range selector cut-out.

6 Renew the coolant Drive the car onto a ramp; move the gear range selector to the Park position and apply the parking brake. Remove the gear range selector-cut-out from the fuseboard. Disconnect the Lucar connections from the oil pressure switch situated adjacent to the engine oil filter (see fig. 81 /1-11 ). Switch on the ignition and rotate the air conditioning function switch to the windscreen defrost Fig. B1 /1-10 Heater tap feed hose position, also set the upper system mode override switch to the AUTO position. Wait approximately one minute for the system to attain the required setting and observe that all the air is being directed to the windscreen. This procedure opens the heater water tap and ensures the system can be completely drained. Switch off the ignition. Place a container beneath the radiator drain tap to collect the coolant. Connect a length of hose onto the drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator pressure cap. Open the radiator drain tap and allow the coolant to drain from the radiator. When the radiator has completely drained. place a container beneath the crankcase drain plugs. Remove the drain plugs from the crankcase (see fig. Bl /1-12) and allow the residue of coolant to drain from the crankcase. Renew the washers on the drain plugs and fit the plugs into the crankcase. X412 To drain the coolant remaining in the expansion bottle disconnect the connection hose from the Fig. B1 /1-11 Oil pressure switch and transmitter radiator filler neck and allow the coolant to drain from the expansion bottle into the container. When the coolant has drained connect the hose to the radiator always coolant in the top tank of the radiator. Ensure filler neck. that the thermostat has opened; indicated by a rapid Check all hoses for serviceability and renew as warming of the top radiator hose. necessary. Switch off the engine and top-up the radiator to Fill the system with fresh coolant of the specified half-way up the filler neck. Fit the pressure cap. concentration as follows. Fill the expansion bottle to a level midway Ensure the radiator drain tap is closed. between the maximum and minimum levels indicated Slowly fill the radiator with coolant, thus reducing on the bottle. the possibility of air locks in the system. Start and run the engine until normal engine Start and run the engine for a minimum of 10 running temperature is attained; switch off the engine minutes with the radiator pressure cap removed. After and top-up the expansion bottle to the maximum level. running for five minutes ensure that warm air is Allow the engine to cool. Carefully remove the passing up the windscreen from the demister ducts. radiator pressure cap and ensure the radiator is Top-up the radiator as· necessary to ensure there is completely full of coolant. Top-up to half-way up the

TSD 4406

Printed in England November 1 984 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1984 B1/1·10 radiator filler neck if necessary. Fit the radiator 7 Reverse flush the coolant system pressure cap. Drain the engine coolant system as described in Connect the Lucar connection previously Renew the coolant. disconnected from the pressure switch adjacent to the Remove the top and bottom hoses from the oil filter ( see fig. B 1/1 • 11 ). radiator matrix. Note Fit a waste pipe to the upper (inlet) connection of For the coolant system to operate correctly. i.e. for the radiator. coolant to pass into the expansion bottle when hot and Apply mains water under pressure through the be drawn back into the radiator during cooling. the top lower (outlet) connection of the radiator. This should of the radiator must not contain an air pocket. remove all loose sediment in approximately 30 minutes. Do not under any circumstances use an alkaline compound or detergent to clean the system. Such compounds have a detrimental chemical action on aluminium alloys. Remove the engine coolant drain plugs from the crankcase. Remove the thermostat as described in Renew the thermostat, then replace the cover. Fit a waste pipe to the cover outlet. Fit a suitable pipe to the drain plug aperture and apply mains water pressure to each aperture in turn. Flush for approximately 30 minutes, or until the water runs clear of foreign matter. Fit the drain plugs and a new thermostat by reversing the procedure for removal. To flush the heater systems. detach the heater at the water tap and disconnect the return hose at the Fig. 81/1 · 12 Crankcase drain plug (B bank coolant pump. shown) Fit a waste pipe to the disconnected heater feed hose. Flush the matrix for approximately 30 minutes. Examine the coolant hoses for deterioration or darT1age and renew as necessary. Connect all hoses and fill the system with the recommended coolant mixture as described under Renew the coolant.

8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator. oil cooler, and refrigeration condenser Using a pressure hose pipe, flush the radiator. oil cooler, and condenser matrices. Hold the nose of the hose pipe close to the back of the radiator matrix and allow the water to pass between the veins of the matrix. Slowly move the hose over the whole matrix area until all foreign matter (insects etc.) have been flushed clear. Care must be taken to ensure that the end of the hose does not damage the matrix face during this operation.

November 1 984 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81/1 81/1-11

Disconnect the electrical connector from the thermostat housing cover. Remove the setscrews securing the thermostat housing cover. Remove the cover. The cover can be moved away from the housing without detaching the outlet hose. Lift the thermostat from the housing (see fig. B1/1-13). Remove the old gasket material from the thermostat housing and cover. Ensure that no material enters the thermostat housing. Check that the two faces are clean and dry. lnsen a new thermostat into the housing. Place a new gasket in position on the housing and fit the cover. Connect the electrical connection removed from the housing cover. Top-up the cooling system with the correct coolant mixture as described under Renew the coolant.

Torque converter transmission It is absolutefy essential when adding fluid to, or working on the torque convener transmission that great attention is paid to cleanliness. The smallest C panicle of din in the transmission fluid could interfere with the correct operation of the unit. It is also imponant that only an approved fluid is used (see Chapter A).

1 Check the transmission fluid level The fluid level can only be checked accurately when the car is standing on a level surface, the engine is running at idle speed, and transmission fluid is at Fig. B1/1-14 Transmission filler tube and normal operating temperature approximately 77°C dipstick (170°F). A Removing the windscreen wiper The dipstick and filler tube are situated on the mechanism cover. The arrow right-hand side of the engine companment. indicates the wiper motor relay Remove the protective cover from the windscreen removed wiper mechanism to gain access to the dipstick. B Withdrawing the dipstick from the Ensure that the following safety procedure is filler tube undenaken to isolate the mechanism prior to removing C Original dipstick markings the cover. D Revised dipstick markings Ensure that the windscreen wiper control switch situated on the facia is in the ott position. Remove a windscreen wiper relay, preferably number three, situated adjacent to the windscreen washer reservoir (see fig. B 1/1-14}. To remove the relay pull it vertically from its mounting. Always clean the top of the dipstick before removing it from the filler tube. As an initial check, the fluid level may be checked after starting from cold as follows. Apply the parking brake. Start and run the engine for three to four minutes at fast-idle speed, with the gear range selector in the Park position. Reduce the engine speed to slow idle. Whilst sitting in the driving seat firmly apply the footbrake and move the gear range selector through the full range of gear positions pausing briefly in each range. Return the selector to the Park position. Immediately check the fluid level with the engine Fig. 81 /1-15 Transmission drain point

TSD 4406

Printed in England November 1984 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1984 81/1·12

running at idle speed. Position the car on a level surface. firmly apply the The level should be up to the circular dimple parking brake and select Park with the gear selector situated below the FILL mark on the dipstick or lever. 10 mm (0.375 in) below the MIN mark, dependent Carry out the procedure described for the initial on the type of dipstick fitted (see fig. 81/1·14). check. Top-up to this level if necessary. With the transmission fluid at normal operating After this initial check a further check should be temperature the level of the fluid should be between carried out as follows. the FILL and MAX HOT marks or the MIN and MAX Drive the car for approximately 24 kilometres marks (see fig. B 1/1 • 14) dependent on the type of (15 miles) of highway/motorway driving or 16 dipstick fitted. kilometres ( 1 0 miles) of city driving. This should If necessary add fluid by pouring it down the filler ensure the transmission has reached normal operating tube, with the engine still running, until the fluid is to temperature. t,lle MAX mark on the dipstick. It is essential that this temperature is attained. Do not top-up the fluid level to the MAX Do not overfill mark on the dipstick when the fluid is only warm, as When the fluid level is correct, switch off the engine this will result in an overfill situation when the normal and fit the windscreen wiper relay and mechanism operating temperature is anained. Overlilling will result cover. in fluid being discharged from the transmission breather pipe. 2 Renew the transmission fluid Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Place a clean container having a minimum capacity of 3 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt) under the nut which secures the transmission fluid filler tube to the sump(seefig. B1/1-15). From within the engine compartment, remove the transmission dipstick as described under Check the transmission fluid level. Slacken the setscrew securing the filler tube to the engine. Unscrew the nut securing the filler tube to the side of the transmission sump (see fig. 81/1-15). Withdraw the filler tube from the sump and move it to one side to allow the fluid to drain into the container. After draining the sump, ensure that the filler tube is clean then fit it to the sump and tighten the drain Fig. 81 /1-16 Transmission intake strainer nut. removal Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip to the engine. Add 2,8 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump, pouring the fluid down the filler tube. Check the fluid level as described under Check the transmission fluid level.

3 Fit a new intake strainer Drain the transmission sump as described under the heading, Renew the transmission fluid, then proceed as follows. Remove the setscrews securing the transmission sump and lower the sump. Drain any fluid from the sump and discard the gasket. Unscrew the setscrew securing the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission; remove the strainer assembly (see fig. B1/1·16). Remove the intake pipe from the strainer and discard the strainer. Clean the transmission sump and the intake pipe with paraffin and dry with compressed air. Fit a new ·o· ring to the intake pipe and lubricate Fig. B1 /1-17 Propeller-shaft grease point the 'O' ring with clean transmission fluid.

April 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B 1/1 B1/1·13

Ensure that a new rubber seal is fined to the pipe bore in the new intake strainer. then fit the intake pipe into the strainer. Fit the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission and torque tighten the securing setscrew to 14 Nm ( 1.4 kgf m, 10 lbf ft). Fit the transmission sump using a new gasket and torque tighten the sump setscrews to 16 Nm (1.7 kgf m. 12 lbf ft). Fit the oil filler tube into the sump and tighten _the nut. Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip to the engine. Add 4,5 litres (8 Imp pt. 9.6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump. pouring the fluid down the filler tube. then follow the fluid level checking procedure described under Check the transmission fluid level.

4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod Fig. B1/1 · 18 Final drive drain and filler/level Lubricate the clevis pins in the control rod linkage at points the left-hand side of the transmission, with a few drops of clean engine oil. Also lubricate the manual shah where it enters the transmission casing.

Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints A grease nipple is fitted to the universal joint at each end of the shaft { see fig. B 1/1 • 1 7). Using a suitable grease gun, lubricate each joint with an approved grease.

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Remove the level plug located in the rear face of the final drive casing (see fig. 81 /1 • 18). The oil in the casing should be up to the level plug orifice. If Fig. B1/1·19 Steering pump filler/dipstick necessary tor:rup with an approved oil. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint washer.

2 Renew the final drive oil It is advisable to carry out this operation when the oil is warm, e.g. immediately after the car has completed a run. Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and clean the area around the drain and level plugs (see fig. 81/1·18). Place a container beneath the drain plug, then remove both the drain and level plugs. When the oil has drained. fit the drain plug complete with a new joint washer. Using a syringe. fill the casing to the level plug orifice with an approved oil (see Chapter A}. Fig. 81 /1 ·20 Track rod ball joints approximately 2,3 litres (4.0 Imp pt. 4.8 US pt) of oil will be required. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint washer and check for leaks. convoluted seals which retain the joint lubricant. , If upon inspection a seal is found to be leaking or 3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint damaged the joint should be inspected and a new seal covers fitted as described in Chapter J of the Workshop The drive-shaft constant velocity joints are enclosed by Manual.

TSD 4406

Printed in England November 1984 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1984 B1/1 ·14

Steering system 2 Check the condition of the steering ball joint 1 Check the steering pump fluid level covers Remove the filler cap from the steering pump reservoir Examine the condition of the rubber cover seals on the (see fig. B 1/1-19) and check that the fluid level is at steering ball joints (see fig. B 1/1-20). least up to the FULL COLD mark on the integral If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor dipstick. If necessary, top-up to this level with condition they should be removed and the ball joint approved fluid. examined for wear and damage. Fit new parts as Start and run the engine until it reaches normal necessary. operating temperature, approximately 77°C, (170°F) For full information refer to Chapter N of the then stop the engine. Workshop Manual. Remove the filler cap and check the fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, add an approved fluid to 3 Check the condition of the steering rack raise the level to the FULL HOT mark on the dipstick; convoluted seals do not overfill. Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the Ensure that the filler cap is securely replaced. rack and pinion unit and check the tightness of the seal clips. If the seals are satisfactory, tighten the clips as necessary. If the convoluted seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the rack and pinion unit should be removed from the car and new seals fitted. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers The front suspension ball joints (see fig. B1/1-21} are packed with grease on initial assembly and should not normally require attention between service overhauls unless the rubber seal covers are damaged. If on inspection the covers are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the ball joints should be Fig. B1 /1-21 Front suspension ball joints removed and new joints and seals fitted as necessary. For full information refer to Chapter H of the Workshop Manual.

2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted seals Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the rear suspension struts (see fig. 81/1-22). If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the struts should be removed as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual, and new seals fitted.

3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints Position the car on a ramp or over a pit then disconnect the actuation links from the height control valves and the rear trailing arms at the ball joints (see fig. 81/1-23). Note from which side each link is taken. Clean the ball joints then lubricate with an approved grease. Do not alter the length of the actuating links Connect each actuating link to the height control valve and the trailing arm from which it was removed. Adjust the joints to obtain complete movement Fig. B1 /1-22 Rear suspension strut without free play. . ·

April 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81/1 81/1-15

Brake and hydraulic systems

AwARNING

Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids' {Castro! RR363, Universal. or any other type). The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, pipes, etc. that they are suitable for a mineral oil system. For details of correct component identification reference should be made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Fig. B1 /1-23 Height control valve ball joints Always ensure that a sealed container of Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted Shake each sample taken to ensure it is well mixed. adjacent to the battery. Pour 10 ml of each sample into clean test tubes Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the (do not mix the samples together). systems when work is being carried out. Using the dispenser, add two drops of the red dye solution contained in the kit into each 10 ml sample. Cork the test tubes and shake them thoroughly. In order to protect against claims of liability for Leave the samples to settle for at least 30 hydraulic system contamination. it is recommended minutes. that the hydraulic ·system mineral oil is tested for Examine each sample. contamination prior to work being undertaken, Sample diagnosis preferably in the presence of the owner or his/her On adding the red dye solution and the representative. subsequent mixing, the green colour of the mineral oil It is important that the test is carried out even will change to a reddish brown. This does not when the hydraulic system mineral oil is to be indicate contamination of the hydraulic system renewed as this will not prevent the deterioration of mineral oil. components which have been in contact with Contamination can only be confirmed by the contaminated mineral oil. formation of a cloudy red mass which will begin to Brake fluids and mineral oil are immiscible and settle towards the bottom of the tube, if left to stand with large amounts of contamination separation of the for at least 30 minutes. fluids will occur on standing, due to the greater If the sample in the test tube, on addition of the density of the conventional fluids. A further indication dye turns red but remains clear it indicates that the of the mixing of conventional brake fluid and mineral sample is not contaminated. oil is its cloudy appearance. The volume of red mass which will eventually To carry out contamination tests. a kit is available settle to the bottom of the test tube indicates the from Rolls-Royce Motors Limited part number amount of contamination within the hydraulic system RH 2841 and should be used as follows. mineral oil. Switch on the ignition and depressurize the Complete separation of the two liquids may take a hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until considerable amount of time, for example a very small both low pressure warning panels illuminate. Continue percentage of contamination may take more than to pump the pedal for at least a further 20 applications seven days to completely separate. to ensure that all the accumulator mineral oil is If contamination is suspected, a more thorough returned to the reservoir. test should be undertaken, details of which are given Clean the area around each hydraulic reservoir in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. filler cap and then remove the cap. If contamination is suspected, but difficult to Ensure that the components in the test kit are diagnose. due to the small amount of contamination clean and dry. that may be present, or any doubt exists. confirmation Using the sampling tube provided. extract 50 ml should be obtained by sending a sample to Rolls of mineral oil from the top and bottom of each Royce Motors {if in the United Kingdom) or to a reservoir. chemical analysis laboratory. Place the samples into individual clean dry Before attempting any work on the hydraulic containers. system personnel must be fully conversant with the

TSO 4406

Printed in England November 1 984 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1984 precautions required to ensure adequate safety and hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until correct system operation. the two warning panels illuminate. Start and run the Refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. engine for approximately four minutes with the car Important unladen to charge the systems and then stop the Always seal each reservoir cap after it has been engine. The mineral oil in both reservoirs should be up confirmed that the systems are not contaminated and to the FULL marks on the level indicator plate. all work on the systems has been completed. If the reservoirs require topping-up, ensure that the tops of the reservoirs and the filler caps are clean, 1 Check the reservoir mineral oil level then add an approved hydraulic system mineral oil (see The mineral oil reservoirs for the hydraulic systems are Chapter A), as necessary. located in the engine compartment (see fig. Bl/1·24). It is important that only an approved hydraulic To check the oil level, first depressurize the system mineral oil is used and that exceptional cleanliness is observed when topping-up the hydraulic systems. Under no circumstances should a conventional (i.e. RR 363 or Universal) type brake fluid be used. After topping-up. ensure that the filler caps are clean then fit and seal them securely to the reservoirs, or insert the blanking plug dependent on the type of filler cap fitted. Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic System Mineral Oil, for- system replenishment. are fitted adjacent to the car battery.

2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil Oepressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as follows. · Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic systems by attaching a tube to each bleed point then opening the bleed screws and allowing the mineral oil to drain from the circuits. The bleed screws are located on each accumulator, on each pair of brake calipers. on the deceleration conscious pressure limiting valve and on each inner rear wing from the rear suspension strut. A drain tube is not required at the accumulator bleed screws as these -are an integral part of the accumulators and when opened allow the mineral oil to flow from the accumulator spheres back to the reservoirs. Drain the mineral oil from the reservoirs and clean the reservoirs as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. After the system has completely drained, close all the bleed screws and ensure that any disturbed pipes are connected and correctly torque tightened. Fill the reservoirs with fresh hydraulic system mineral oil (see 81/1-24 and Chapter A) until the levels of the reservoirs are slightly above the topping up marks on the indicator plate. Run the engine for four minutes, with the car unladen. then top-up to the FULL level mark; never allow the mineral oil levels to fall below the minimum level marks. Check for leaks, especially around the unions of any pipes which have been disturbed. Finally, bleed the hydraulic systems as described Fig. 81 /1-24 Access to the hydraulic system in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. reservoirs Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic A Original filler cap System Mineral Oil, for system replenishment, are B Specialized filler cap fitted adjacent to the battery. SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B1/1 B1/1-17

3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and check the condition of the hydraulic system pipes and hoses. Examine the metal pipes for signs of corrosion. particularly those in an exposed position. Examine the hoses for chafing or surface cracking. Faulty pipes and hoses should be replaced as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual.

4 Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as follows. Fit a hose clamp to each of the intermediate hoses of the accumulator return pipes to prevent the flow of mineral oil from the reservoirs. Fig. B1 /1-25 Accumulator to body hoses Thoroughly clean the areas around the connections of the two accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses (see figs. B 1/1 ·25 and B1/1-26). Remove the respective hoses noting the following points. To avoid contamination fit the new hose immediately after removing the old one; alternatively fit approved blanks to the open ports until the new hoses are fitted. Before fitting a new hose ensure that it is thoroughly clean and conforms with the hydraulic systems mineral oil requirements. When fitting the new hoses. ensure that they are routed to clear other components and that clearance is maintained during full suspension movement. Tighten the pipe nuts to the torque settings given in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. After fitting the new hoses. check for leaks and Fig. 81 /1-26 Trailing arm to body hoses bleed the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual.

5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses To renew the hydraulic system hoses follow the same basic procedure described under the heading Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses.

TSD 4406

Printed in England November 1984 © Rolls-Royce Motors limited 1984 B1/1-18

pads, the disc faces should be cleaned prior to fitting 8 Renew the brake caliper seals the new pads. All traces of the old pad lining material To renew the caliper piston seals it is necessary to should be removed by hand rotating the disc whilst remove the brake calipers from the car. applying coarse grade emery cloth to the disc faces. For full instructions, refer to Chapter G of the Do not emery the disc faces radially. Workshop Manual. Always ensure that the pads fitted to all six brake calipers have the same type and grade of pad lining. 9 Check the parking brake pads for wear Fit the road wheels and lower the car. Securely chock the front wheels then raise the rear of If new brake pads have been fitted, an initial the car. Place sill blocks under the rear body sills and running-in period of between 1100 kilometres and also support the rear trailing arms. Do not allow the 1300 kilometres (700 miles and 800 miles) should suspension struts to support the full suspension load. be observed.During this running-in period the brakes Remove the rear wheels and release the parking should not be applied harshly or for prolonged periods brake to the off position. from high speeds except in an emergency. Towards Disconnect the caliper actuation rod from the the end of the running-in period, the force with which caliper lever (see fig. B1/1 ·27). the brakes are applied may be progressively increased. Unscrew and remove the caliper adjuster and collect the adjuster clicker plate. Unhook the pad retention springs from each pad, 7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust noting the larger spring is fitted to the inner pad. excluders (when changing brake pads) Remove the pads from the caliper. The condition of the caliper dust seals should be Check the thickness of the lining material on each checked whenever the brake pads are removed. pad. Pads which are worn to within 1,6 mm J Inspect the seals for signs of damage, heat (0.062 in) or less of the steel backing plate should be hardening. or general deterioration and renew if renewed. necessary. To fit the pads attach the retention springs then When fitting new seals. ensure that the seal locate the pads into position and hook the springs retaining clips are correctly located. onto the caliper. Complete the assembly by reversing the removal procedure then adjust the calipers as described under the heading Adjust the parking brake. Note If new parking brake pads have been fitted, the following bedding-in procedure should be carried out aher adjusting the parking brake. Drive the car at approximately 48 km/h (30 mile/h) and apply the parking brake to bring the car to rest; it is important that this is done gently and progressively. The parking brake must not be applied fully and no attempt should be made to lock the wheels. This operation should be carried out nine times. allowing at least one minute to elapse between stops to prevent the discs overheating. Finally adjust the caliper as described under the heading Adjust the parking brake. Fig. B1/1-28 Parking brake rear cable adjustment point 10 Adjust the parking brake Ensure that the parking brake is in the off position. Adjust the rear cables at the adjusters (see fig. B 1/1-28) so that the caliper operating levers return to their off-stops under the influence of their return springs with no appreciable slackness in the cables. Note The cables must be adjusted so that the equalizer link on the intermediate linkage (see fig. B 1/1 ·28) lies at right angles with the centre line of the car with the parking brake in the off position. To check the cable adjustment, adjust both rear cables at the equalizer link until the caliper off-stops are just clear of the calipers. Measure the gap produced at each off·stop and lengthen the cables by this amount. Fig. B1/1-29 Main fuel filter With the cables correctly adjusted, check that the

November 1984 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B 1/1 81/1·19

centralizing straps {see fig. B 1/1·27) are pushing the pads away from the discs when the parking brake is in the off position. If not, remove the nut and bolt securing the straps, bend the straps outward (i.e. away from the disc) then refit them. Ensure that the straps are pushed downward towards the adjusting nut whilst tightening the nut and bolt securing them to the caliper. Check that the distance between the pad and the disc are the same on each side of the caliper; if not. reset the centralizing straps. Raise each rear wheel in turn so that it is free to rotate and adjust each caliper as follows. Turn the caliper adjuster (see fig. 81/1 ·27) X470 clockwise until the pads just grip the disc; at this point it should only just be possible to rotate the road wheel Fig. B1/1-30 lntank fuel filter by hand. Turn the adjuster anti-clockwise a quaner turn (i.e. three clicks on the nut) to obtain the minimum clearance between the pads and disc.

11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. lubricate the parking brake linkage clevis pins. fulcrum pins, and the rear cable adjusters with approved grease.

Fuel system Safety precautions It is important that before a fuel line is opened or the fuel tank drained or siphoned, that the workshop safety precautions given in Chapter A of the Workshop Manual are strictly observed.

1 Renew the main filter element The main fuel filter is situated on the car underframe {see fig. 81/1 ·29). The element is housed in a sealed container and no attempt should be made to clean it; always fit a new unit. Place a container beneath the filter to collect any petrol that drains from the filter. Fig. 81/1-31 Carburetter inlet filter Carefully remove the inlet and outlet pipe connections from the filter. Slacken the worm drive clip retaining the filter to Disconnect the hose from the intank filter outlet the mounting bracket and withdraw the filter. pipe. Remove the unions fitted into both ends of the Remove the circlip retaining the filter and carefully filter and discard the filter. withdraw the filter from the tank. Clean and fit the unions together with new sealing Clean the filter mesh by washing in clean fuel. washers into the new filter. Examine the filter for serviceability and renew if Fit the new filter by reversing the removal necessary. procedure noting the direction of flow arrow marked Fit the filter by reversing the removal procedure. on the outside of the filter casing. Always use a new seal on the filter body. When carrying out the above operation at the Ensure that the fuel drained from the fuel tank is 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or four years and free from foreign matter. then return it to the fuel tank. subsequent periods, the intank fuel filter, situated on Check the fuel filter and any pipe connections that the underside of the fuel tank. (see fig. Bl/1-30) have been disconnected for leaks. should also be removed and cleaned as follows. Disconnect the battery. 2 Clean the carburetter fuel inlet filter Drain or siphon the fuel tank. Carry out this operation when the engine is cold. Place a container beneath the fuel intank filter to Remove the setscrews securing the air chest collect the residue of fuel from the tank when the filter cover. is removed. lift off the cover and gasket.

TSD 4406

Printed in England April 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B1/1-20

Unscrew the fuel inlet pipe from the adapter on areas immediately and thoroughly with water. If the the front of the air chest (see fig. B 1 /1-31 ). eyes are affected. flush for at least 15 minutes and Remove the three setscrews securing the aperture obtain prompt medical attention. plate and withdraw the plate off the fuel inlet adapter. Carefully remove the inlet adapter from the carburetter; discard the sealing washer. Chloride battery Withdraw the fuel filter, taking care not to lose the small spring situated at the inner end. Air temperature below 32°C (90°F) Clean the filter by washing in clean fuel. Fit the filter and components removed by Specific Gravity Condition of battery reversing the removal procedure noting the following. 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged Ensure that the spring is located correctly in the 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged inner end of the filter with the larger diameter of the 1.090 to 1.11 0 Fully discharged spring seated on the filter. Fit a new sealing washer and ring onto the inlet Air temperature above 32°C (90°F) adapter and a new gasket to the aperture plate. Prior to fitting the air chest cover, start the engine Specific Gravity Condition of Battery and check the fuel inlet pipe and adapter for leaks; 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged rectify as necessary. 1.1 50 to 1 .1 70 Half discharged Fit the cover using a new sealing gasket. Always 1.070 to 1.090 Fully discharged ensure that the air chest is free of foreign matter prior to fitting the cover. Lucas or Varta battery

3 Fit a new filler head to fuel tank hose Air temperature below 27°C (80"F) To enable the filler head to fuel tank hose to be renewed it is necessary to remove the rear suspension Specific Gravity Condition of Battery gas spring. For details of the procedure required, 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged reference should be made to Chapter K of the 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged Workshop Manual. 1.090 to 1.110 Fully discharged

4 Examine all flexible fuel pipes Air temperature above 27°C _(80°F) Carefully examine all flexible fuel pipes throughout the fuel system. Renew any pipes which have become Specific Gravity Condition of Battery damaged or deteriorated to an unserviceable condition. 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged Check the complete fuel system for leaks and 1 . 1 30 to 1 . 1 50 Half discharged rectify as necessary. 1.050 to 1.070 Fully discharged

5 Test fuel pump for efficiency To carry out this operation, it is necessary to remove the fuel pump from the car. For details of the removal If the specific gravity readings of all the cells are and test procedure reference should be made to uniform and within the range 1.240 to 1.270 the Chapter K of the Workshop Manual. battery is in an acceptable state of charge. If the readings are uniform but below 1 .220 the battery should be recharged. Always remove the battery from Electrical system the car for recharging. 1 Check the state of charge of the battery If the specific gravity of the electrolyte in one cell The battery is situated on the right-hand side of the differs markedly from the others (i.e. the reading is luggage compartment To gain access to the battery 0.040 or more, lower than the remainder), then a turn back the carpet and remQ.ve the trim from around defect must be suspected and rectified as necessary. the battery. Unclip the battery cover retaining strap Battery electrolyte level check and lift off the cover. Before correcting the electrolyte level ensure that the battery is in a high state of charge (see battery Battery electrolyte specific gravity check (applicable to electrolyte specific gravity check). batteries with removable cell vent covers) The level of the battery electrolyte in each cell Remove the vent covers from the top of the battery. should be approximately 5 mm (0.250 in) above the Using a hydrometer check the specific gravity of tops of the separators (Lucas or Varta battery) or the electrolyte in each cell and compare the readings contacting the blue bar situated above the separators obtained with the following tables. (Chloride battery). Caution If the electrolyte level is low top-up using distilled The electrolyte in the battery is a corrosive acid. Do not water until the level is attained. Do not overfill. allow the electrolyte to come into contact with the Always ensure the top of the battery is clean prior eyes, skin, fabric, or paintwork. Flush any contacted to removal of the v~nt covers.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 81/1 81/1-21

Battery voltage check On cars conforming to a Swiss specification, the Sealed for life ( maintenance free) batteries front and rear fog lamps should only illuminate The state of charge on this type of battery can only be together when the main lighting switch is in the Park checked by taking a voltage reading across the battery position. If the switch is turned to the Head position, terminals using a digital voltmeter or multimeter. The the front fog lamps should extinguish when the instrument must be accurate to within 0.1 volts. headlamps are on dipped beam. When main headlamp Before a reading is taken on batteries that have beam is selected both front and rear fog lamps should recently received a charge, the residual effect of the extinguish. surface charge on the battery plates must be removed Cars without front fog lamps to avoid a false reading. The rear fog lamps will only illuminate when the The surface charge can be removed by applying main lighting switch is in the Head position and the an electrical load to the battery e.g. by connecting a headlamps are on dipped beam. When main beam is high rate discharge tester for 15 seconds or, if the selected the rear fog lamps should extinguish. battery is connected to the car by switching on the The respective facia tell-tales should also be headlamps for one minute. before a reading is taken. checked for illumination during these operations. To ascertain the state of charge of the battery, With the lighting in the Park and Head positions, compare the reading with the following table. switch on the ignition. Check the facia instruments for illumination; the panel illumination dimming switch Voltage State of charge should also be checked for correct operation. 12.8 volts 100% 12.6 volts 82% 4 Check an facia warning lamps for operation 12.5 volts 75% Before carrying out the following checks firmly apply 12.4 volts 60% the parking brake; ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position and remove the gear range selector isolator from the fuseboard. A minimum reading of 12.5 volts {75% charge) is acceptable. Below this reading the battery should be Ignition and oil warning lamps recharged. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. the ignition and oil pressure warning lamps should illuminate. Start 2 Clean and check the battery terminals the engine, both lamps should extinguish; switch off The top of the battery should always be kept clean and the ignition. dry. When the ignition key is turned to the ACC If corrosion of the battery leads or terminals has position the ignition warning lamp only should occured it should be removed as follows. illuminate. Disconnect the battery leads and using hot water or a dilute solution of ammonia carbonate, wash them Warning panel cluster lamps thoroughly until all corrosive has been removed. Finally Move the gear range selector lever to the D position wash with clean water to remove the ammonia (do not insert the gear range selector isolator}. carbonate solution. Apply the footbrake then turn the ignition key to Remove any corrosive deposit from the terminal the start position. All the warning panel cluster lamps posts using a cloth moistened with ammonia should illuminate. With the ignition key held in the start carbonate solution then wash with clean water. position, turn the main lighting switch to the park and Dry the battery leads and terminal posts. Connect main beam positions; the intensity of illumination of the battery leads to the terminal posts. Liberally coat the ice and low fuel warning panels should reduce. the terminals with petroleum jelly. Switch off the ignition and lighting switch. The two hydraulic system pressure warning lamps 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation should also be checked as follows. Actuate the respective switches and check for lamp Turn the ignition key t o the RUN position. illuminati.on and function i.e. hazard warning and turn Depressurize the hydraulic systems by actuating flashers, headlamp dip/main beam. headlamp flash. the brake pedal between 50 and 60 times. The two When checking the fog lamps the main lighting brake pressure warning panels should illuminate. switch must be on. When the panels have illuminated start and run Cars with front fog lamps fitted the engine. Both panels should extinguish after In the Park position the front lamps must be approximately two minutes indicating that the switched on before the rear fog lamps will illuminate. hydraulic systems are pressurized. Switch off the On cars other than those conforming to a Swiss ignition. specification when only the rear fog lamps are switched on with the main lighting switch in the Head Fasten seat belt warning lamp position, these lamps should extinguish ·when the To check the seat belt warning lamp, open and close headlamps are switched to main beam. If both front each door in turn; observe the lamp operation. and rear fog lamps are in use the rear fog lamps The seat belt warning panel should illuminate should remain illuminated. whenever a door is opened and extinguish

_) TSO 4406

Printed io England November 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 81/1-22

approximately seven seconds after the door is closed. good contact and that both horns are functioning Note correctly each time it is pressed. All doors must be fully closed for the lamp to On Bentley Turbo R cars move the horn selection extinguish (i.e. not on first catch) switch to the air horn position and repeat the checking procedure. Hazard warning indicator Depress the hazard warning switch, check that all the 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp turn indicators and the facia warning lamp are flashing. washer reservoir Dependent on the time of manufacture, the 5 Check all interior lamps for operation windscreen and headlamp wash systems will utili.ze Ensure all the doors are fully closed and the interior either a single reservoir for both functions or two lights are extinguished. Open the drivers door; the independent reservoirs. rear section of the central roof lamps should illuminate. The combined {single) reservoir and the Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain windscreen wash reservoir of the independent illuminated for approximately seven seconds. systems should be topped-up to their maximum levels From 1985 model year carsthe rear roof lamps using the correct mixture of washer fluid and water. and footwell lamps should also illuminate when the The independent headlamp wash reservoir should door is opened. If the gear selector lever is moved be topped-up to its maximum level with clean water. from the Park position on these ci!rs, -with the ignition During winter conditions, a solution of 30% key in the RUN position, the lamps will extinguish isopropyl alcohol and 70% water should be used. This immediately all the doors are closed. mixture will provide frost protection down to a When carrying out these operations also check temperature of approximately -10°C (14°F). that the door open warning lamp and step lamp are Topping-up levels illuminated with the door in the open position; these Bottom of filler neck on both reservoirs. lamps should extinguish immediately the door is fully closed. 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper Repeat the check on the remaining doors. blades and headlamp wash brushes (if fitted). Note Lift the wipers from the windscreen and inspect them If the doors are only closed to the first catch position for wear or damage. Renew the blades if necessary. the lamps should remain illuminated. To renew a wiper blade one of the following Check the operation of the front compartment methods should be carried out dependent on the type personal lamps as follows. of blade to wiper arm attachment Withdraw the main lighting switch; the front On early cars lift the wiper arm away from the section of the driver's roof lamp should illuminate. windscreen then press the small tab situated in the end Operate the map lamp switch; the front section of of the arm to release the blade retaining catch. Pull the the front passengers roof lamp should illuminate. blade from the arm and fit the new blade. Check that On cars fitted with vanity mirror illumination, the new blade is secured by the retaining catch then move the switch to the mirror position. return the blade to the windscreen. Lower the passengers sun visor; the lamp situated To renew a wiper blade on later cars proceed as above the visor should illuminate. follows. Withdraw the visor from its retaining clip; the Drivers side of the windscreen. Lift the wiper arm lamp should extinguish. The lamp should also from the windscreen. Press the top half of the blade extinguish when the visor is moved to its raised forward until the blade is released from its location clip position, even when the switch is on. on the wiper arm. To fit the new blade, position it on The operation of the rear roof lamps should be the wiper arm and press it firmly into the location clip. checked by operating the switches situated on the rear On the passenger side of the windscreen, lift the compartment vanity mirror surrounds. wiper arm from the windscreen and pivot the blade Press the upper portion of the three position backwards through 90°. Press the small release tag, switch. The front section of the respective roof lamp situated on the underside of the blade pivot block and should illuminate. Pressing the lower portion should push the blade out of the crooked end of the wiper arm. illuminate the rear section of both rear lamps. With the Withdraw the wiper blade from the arm. Fit the new switch in the central position both lamps should be blade by reversing the removal procedure. off. Repeat the operation on the opposite side of the Note car. Care must be taken during these operations. En·sure that the wiper arm is not allowed to spring 6 Check the horns for operation back onto the windscreen when the blade has been Examine the electrical connections to each horn to removed or damage to the windscreen could occur. ensure they are in good condition. Clean the horns and On cars fitted with headlamp wash/wipe brushes, remove any foreign matter that may have collected in examine the brushes for wear or damage and renew if the horn trumpets. necessary. Switch on the ignition; press the horn button To renew a brush, carefully remove the retaining several times to ensure the horn button is making a nut from the spindle. Note the position of the brush

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B1/1 81/1·23

then withdraw it from the splined spindle . Fit the new Body brush by reversing the removal procedure ensuring 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat that the brush is in the correct park. position. belts The following checks should be carried out on the 9 Check the windscreen and headlamp retractable seat belts. wash/wipe for correct operation Fully withdraw the seat belt from the real; Before carrying out the following check ensure that the examine the webbing for any signs of wear or damage. windscreen is clean. Allow the belt to return to the stowed position. Switch on the ignition and press the windscreen To check the operation of the retractable belt. fit wash/wipe switch. The windscreen wipers should the belt and then give the webbing of the diagonal belt operate and the fluid from the washer jets should a sharp pull. Ensure that the belt locks and then impinge on the windscreen approximately 419 mm returns to the normal roller action immediately the belt ( 16.5 in) from the centre line of the windscreen and is released. 190 mm {7.5 in) below the windscreen top finisher. With the fastening tongue of the belt locked in the The wash/wipe function should continue until the retaining clasp; ensure the tongue is securely held and switch is released. is released immediately the release button marked On release of the switch the washer should cease PRESS is operated. while the wipers should continue for approximately The alternative method of checking the seat belts four strokes before returning to the park position. is to select an open stretch of road, then, when the Turn the main lighting switch to the HEAD road is free from any potential danger, accelerate the position. The headlamps cleaning function will only car to 24 km/h (15 mile/h) and brake sharply from operate when the headlamps are illuminated. Press the this speed; ensure that the belt locks and then wash/wipe switch. The headlamp brushes and washer subsequently releases. If this method of test is used, it jets should operate until the switch is released. the will be necessary to carry a passenger to enable the brush giving one full wipe cycle after the jet flow has passenger seat belts to be tested. ceased. Check the rear seat lap belt (if fitted) for condition On cars fitted with power wash jets ( no brushes) and correct locking and release. the jets should only operate for half a second when Report any defects to the owner. the wash/wipe switch is depressed. To repeat the When seat belt replacement is necessary only wash it will be necessary to release then depress the belts approved by Rolls·Aoyce Motors Limited should switch again. However. the windscreen wash/wipe be fitted. function will continue to operate as described previously while the switch is held depressed. 2 Check that all body drains are free from 10 Check the alternator for correct operation obstruction For details of the alternator test procedure and brush Examine the body drain holes; remove any foreign renewal, reference should be made to Chapter M of matter that may be obstructing the holes. Take care the Workshop Manual. not to damage the paintwork.

11 Check the condition of the starter motor brushes and pinion For details of the procedure required to carry out the 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt inspection of the staner motor brushes and pinion, Turn back the carpet on the luggage compartment reference should be made to Chapter M of the floor to expose the spare wheel inflation trap and spare Workshop Manual. wheel carrier lowering bolt head. Remove the inflation trap cover; if a spare wheel retainer is fitted, it should Automatic air conditioning system be released 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from Rotate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt anti· obstruction clockwise until the carrier is fully lowered. Remove the Check the air intake grilles and. foam filters, situated spare wheel from the carrier. behind the car bonnet. for obstruction (i.e. leaves, dirt, Lubricate the carrier lowering bolt using a etc.). If necessary carefully remove the grille retaining recommended lubricant. Raise and lower the carrier to screws, lift the grilles from the body and clean out the distribute the lubricant over the full length of the air intake ducts; also ensure the air intake duct drain carrier bolt. tubes are free from obstruction. Check the condition of the spare wheel as described under the heading Wheels. Fit the spare wheel onto the carrier. Ensure that 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct the inflation valve is in line with the inflation trap in operation the luggage compartment floor. then fully raise the For details of the procedure required to carry out this carrier. operation reference should be made to Chapter C of Fasten the spare wheel retainer (if fitted),and fit the Workshop Manual. the tyre inflation trap rubber and carpet.

TSO 4406

Printed in England April 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 81/1-24

Wheels Important 1 Check all tyre pressures When stopping after a sustained period of high speed Check the tyre pressures including the spare when the driving, it is advisable to let the engine idle for a few tyres are cold; adjust if necessary. The inflation seconds before switching off. to allow the pressure of the spare tyre should be adjusted to the turbocharger to cool. Normal parking manoeuvres will highest tyre pressure (i.e. rear wheel). provide this time period. Do not check pressures immediately after or Ensure that all controls, door handles, steering during a run when the tyres are warm. wheels, etc .. are clean and that any dirt which may be Always ensure that the valve caps are fitted after attributed to the service schedule is completely checking. removed. On wheels fitted with aluminium tyre inflation valves, always ensure that an ah,.1minium valve cap is fitted. The fitting of a differing metal cap will result in corrosion and prevent cap removal.

2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres Examine the tyres. including the spare, for any signs of damage or tyre wall cracking etc. Carefully remove any stones or other objects that may be lodged in the tyre treads. Check the depth of tread at several points around each wheel using a tread depth gauge. To enable a "'.isual check to be made, tread depth indicators are incorporated into the tyre construction. These indicators are integral moulded ribs, spaced at intervals around the circumference of the tyre and extend across the full width of the tread in all primary grooves. When one or more of these indicators are flush with the tread, only 1,6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread depth remains, and a new tyre is required. If the condition of the tyres is not satisfactory or the tread depths do not conform to the legal requirements of the country in which the' car is operating, the owner should be notified and asked to authorize the fitting of new tyres. For full information on tyre fitting, balancing, etc. reference should be made to Chapter R of the Workshop Manual.

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance On completion of the respective service schedule operation. carefully road test the car for satisfactory performance. If new brake pads have been fitted. the running-in and bedding procedures should be carried out as described under, Check the brake disc pads for wear and Check the parking brake pads for wear. When the road test has been completed, the car should be fully inspected for any leaks, fouls, etc., and rectified as necessary. The transmission fluid level and engine oil level should be finally checked after the test, (see Check the transmission fluid level and Check the engine oil level}. After the ignition has been switched off, the electrically operated fan situated behind the radiator shell may continue to operate. This operation is dependent on engine coolant temperature and will continue whenever the coolant is above the fans predetermined temperature setting.

November 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 B2·1

Service schedule procedures Cars conforming to Australian specifications

Contents Pages Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1981/85 (inclusive) model year cars B2-3 B2·3 B2·3

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 B2·3

SeNice schedule procedures 1981 /85 (inclusive) model year cars

/JJ.wARNING Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids (Castro! RR363, Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, pipes, etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil system. For details of correct component identification reference should be made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Always ensure that a sealed container of Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted adjacent to the battery. Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the systems when work is being carried out.

General information The information contained in this chapter should be used in conjunction with the service schedule charts and Workshop Manuals. The following are the Workshop Manual publications to which reference should be made. Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne from vehicle identification number (VIN) Fig. 82·1 Crankcase breather tube flame trap *SCAZS0000ACH01001* and Corniche/Continental from (VIN) *SCAZD0006CCH05037*, publication number TSO 4400. Lamp units Corniche prior to vehicle identification number Weekly; check the lamp units for operation; rectify any (VIN}* SCAZD0006CCH05037* and Camargue, faults. publication number TSD 4200. Tyre pressures Weekly; check the tyre pressures including the spare; Car protection adjust if necessary. Prior to commencing a service schedule, the car should be suitably protected. For this purpose car Windscreen and headlamp washer reservoirs protection kit RH 2662, wing covers RH 2684, and Weekly; check the washer fluid level; top-up if wing cover liners RH 2685 should be used. necessary.

Regular maintenance Hydraulic reservoirs In addition to the service schedules listed, the Monthly; check the level of hydraulic mineral oil in the following maintenance should be carried out reservoirs. Depressuri2e the hydraulic systems by pumping Engine the brake pedal until the low brake pressure warning Weekly or every 800 kilometres (500 miles) panels on the facia illuminate. Continue to pump the whichever is the earlier; check the engine oil by means pedal for at least a further 20 applications to ensure of the dipstick; top-up if necessary. complete depressurization. Start and run the engine

TSD 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © RoUs·Royce Motors Limited 1 985 B2-4 for four minutes with the car unladen, prior to solvent and ensure that the holes are free of checking the level. Top-up if necessary to the indicated obstruction; dry with compressed air. maximum level. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Ensuring that the ·o· ring is in good condition, fit Oil (LHM). Refer to page B2-20 for fu11her the adapter by reversing the removal procedure. information before carrying out this operation. Exhaust emission control system Engine cooling system 1 Remove and clean the E.G. R. valves and feed Every three months; check the coolant level. If pipes necessary top-up with the correct anti-freeze/water Remove the valves and heatshield as described in the mixture (see page 82-12). Workshop Manual. Using a scraper, remove all carbon film from the Crankcase emission control system valve and mounting flange faces; complete the 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame trap operation with a wire brush. The engine crankcase is ventilated through a breather Clean the carbon from the valves using a wire tube connected to the carburetter air induction system. brush fitted into a portable drill. Take care not to A flame trap in the form of filter gauze is fitted into the damage the valve seating area. system at the rear of 'A' bank cylinder head (see fig. Thoroughly blow out the valves with compressed 82-1) and should be cleaned as follows. air to ensure that all loose carbon particles are Withdraw the windscreen wiper motor relay removed. (wiper 3) (see fig. B2-23, item A) situated on a Remove the feed pipe from the balance pipe and bracket adjacent to the windscreen washer reservoir. clean as much carbon deposit as possible from the Remove the cover from the windscreen wiper inside of the pipe and joint faces. drive mechanism to gain access to the crankcase Use a wire brush to complete the cleaning breather connection. operations. Disconnect the breather hose from the flame trap Thoroughly blow out the pipe with compressed air housing. to ensure that all loose carbon particles are removed. Remove the three setscrews from the housing Fit the E.G.R. valves and feed pipe after cover and remove the cover. completing the cleaning operations as described in Remove the circlip retaining the gauze filter Operation 2. situated on the underside of the housing cover. Thoroughly clean the gauze with a suitable 2 Clean the orifices in carburetter 'Tee' piece cleaning solvent and dry with compressed air. Remove the E.G.R. distribution pipes. Ensure that the breather pipe and housing are also With a pointed scraper clean as much carbon clean. deposit as possible from inside the distribution pipes Fit the filter gauze and housing cover by reversing and the joint faces. Particular attention should be given the removal procedure. to the carburetter end of the pipes, because the majority of the carbon deposit will be found in this 2 Clean the choke butterfly housing adapter area. The adapter is situated on the choke butterfly housing Using wire brushes complete the cleaning and is part of the crankcase breather system (see operation on the distribution pipes. fig. B2·2). With a pointed scraper remove the carbon To clean the adapter remove the retaining deposits from the carburetter 'Tee' piece connection setscrew and detach the adapter from the breather orifices. pipe. Before fitting the distribution pipes thoroughly Clean the adapter using a recommended cleaning blow out the pipes and carburetter 'Tee' piece connections with compressed air. Fit all components in the E.G.R. system as described in the Workshop Manual.

3 Check the E.G.R. valves for correct operation The E.G.R. system is automatically controlled by exhaust back pressure to maintain a constant E.G.R. propol1ion over normal road load conditions. Checks to ensure the correct operation of the valves are only required under no load conditions as follows. Connect an electric impulse tachometer to the engine in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied and that the gear range selector is in the Park position. Ensure that the pressure tapping cap fitted to the Fig. B2-2 Choke butterfly housing adapter weakening device is correctly tightened.

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 B2·5

Start and run the engine until normal operating temperature is attained. Ensure that the engine has run for at least 25 minutes after the engine coolant thermostat has opened. Increase the engine speed slowly noting the operation of the E.G.R. valves. The E.G.R. valves should commence to open between 800 rev/min and 1000 rev/min. If the valves either fail to open or open late check for the following possible causes. a. Failed E.G. R. cut-out switch. b. Failed E.G.R. cut-out solenoid. c. Failed E.G.R. full throttle cut-out micro-switch. d. Leak or blockage in the carburetter signal pipe to weakening device cut-off solenoid. Fig. 82·3 Air pump drive belt adjustment and e. Leak or blockage in the E.G.R. valve signal pipe or tension check point hose from the E.G.R. cut·out solenoid to the E.G.R. valves. f. Advanced ignition timing. If the valves begin to open early check for the following possible cause. a. Retarded ignition timing. If the E.G.R. valves do not function correctly after carrying out these tests, replace the offending valve{s) with new units.

4 Check the condition and tension of the drive belt: adjust or renew as necessary Before commencing to adjust the drive belt inspect it for signs of wear or cracking. If the belt is found unsatisfactory, it should be renewed. The belt tension must be checked at ~ point midway between the two pulleys (see fig. 82-3) by use of a belt tension meter or by applying a spring Fig. 82-4 Fuel evaporative emission control balance to give a 9.5 mm (0.375 in) belt tension at a canister and mounting bracket specified load. setscrews Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent belt slip. 5 Check the air injection system for leaks and Coolant pump to air pump correct operation Load may be applied on either side of the belt run. Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Check the air injection system for air leaks as follows. New belt and retensioning load Ensure that the ignition is switched off. Belt tension meter 18, 1 kgf to 22,7 kgf Visually inspect the condition of all hoses, pipes, {40 lbf to 50 lbf) and joints associated with the air injection system. Spring balance 3.6 kgf to 5,9 kgf Ensure that all worm drive clips are tight. (8 lbf to 1 3 lbf) Start the engine and listen carefully for any evidence of an air leak from the system. The tension of the belt is adjusted by altering the If an air leak is suspected it is permissible to coat position of the air pump. the component or hose with a soap solution; soap· Slacken the air pump pivot setscrew. bubbles will confirm an air leak. Slacken the setscrew securing the air pump to the To check the air diverter valve the following test adjustment strut. should be carried out Slacken the adjustment strut pivot setscrew. Run the engine at 2000 rev/min. Turn the air pump around its pivot point to adjust Ensure that air does not escape from the air the belt tension and tighten the setscrew in the diverter valve exhaust ports situated around the body adjustment strut slot. Check the belt tension and of the air diverter valve. repeat the adjustment operation if necessary. If air does escape from the air diverter valve When the belt tension is correct, tighten the exhaust ports, check the pressure relief valve within remaining two setscrews. the assembly as follows.

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2·6

Blank off the two connections to the check valves. Fuel evaporative emission control system Apply air pressure to the air diverter valve via the 1 Renew the evaporative control canister air pump connection. Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Ensure that the pressure relief valve works within Locate the control canister under the left·hand the acceptable limits quoted, 0,5 kgf/cm2 to front wing (see fig. 82-4). Using the special pliers 0,6 kgf/cm2 (7.4 lbf/in2 to 8.4 lbf/in2). RH 8090 remove the securing clip from the canister end of the fuel tank to canister flexible hose. Withdraw both hoses fitted to the control canister. 1 Label each one to facilitate assembly. Unscrew the four setscrews retaining the control canister in position (see fig. B2·4). Support the weight of the canister before the last setscrew is removed. Collect the washer fitted under the head of each setscrew. Withdraw the control canister from under the wing. Note the position of the control canister in relation to the mounting bracket and unscrew the retaining worm drive clip. 380 mm Fit the new canister to the mounting bracket and (15 in) tighten the retaining worm drive clip. Ensure that the canister is in the correct position relat!ve to the mounting bracket. Fit the assembly to the vehicle by reversing the procedure given for removal. noting that new hose securing clips should be used.

2 Check the condition of all pipes. hoses, and connections Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Locate the fuel evaporative control canister. Withdraw the fuel tank evaporative hose from the canister and connect it to the test equipment shown in figure B2·5. 2 W879 Apply air pressure to the fuel tank hose via the test equipment until a reading of 380 mm ( 1 5 in) H20 Fig. B2·5 Leak check test equipment is anained and close the pressure supply. 1 Connection to fuel tank/canister hose After five minutes again check the pressure 2 Pump reading, this should not have fallen by more than 12, 7 3 One-way pressure valve mm (0.5 in}. If the pressure drop is more than 12,7 mm (0.5 in), progressively treat all joints in the system with soap solution to detect air leaks. Rectify any air leaks and again leak check the system. During the five minutes leak down, visually inspect the hoses, pipes, and connections of the system that are routed under the car. Commence where the hose exits from the body adjacent to the left-hand rear road spring and follow the system to the control canister. Ensure that the hoses are secure in the mounting clips. When the system is satisfactory, detach the test equipment and connect the hose to the control canister. Secure the hose with a new clip.

3 Check the purge flow rate Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Remove the retaining clip from the purge line restrictor hose (see fig. B2-6). Disconnect the hose at the purge line restrictor. Fig. B2·6 Purge line restrictor Leave the restrictor in the hose to the engine.

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 B2-7

Connect a rotameter assembly RH 8 7 25 into the line, between the restrictor and the open pipe to the valance connection. Connect an impulse tachometer to the engine in accordance with the mar.ufacturer's instructions. Start and run the engine at 650 rev/min; the reading on the flowmeter should be between 50 ft3/h and 70 ft3/h. If the purge flow rate is outside the limits specified, refer to the Workshop Manual TSD 4400. Chapter U. Should investigation reveal the control canister to be faulty, proceed to change it as described under the heading Renew the evaporative control canister.

Engine 1 Change the engine oil The sump should be drained when the engine is warm, preferably after the car has completed a run. Fig. B2·7 Engine sump drain plug To drain the oil. position the car over a pit or on a ramp. Place a container in position beneath the drain plug situated on the right-hand side of the sump (see fig. 82-7). Remove the drain plug and allow the oil to drain from the sump. Do not flush the sump with paraffin or petrol. Fit the drain plug ensuring that the washer is correctly positioned and in good condition. Fill the engine sump with recommended lubricant until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

2 Renew the engine oil filter Drain the engine oil as described under Change the engine oil. Place a container under the filter to collect any oil that may be spilt. Remove the filter by unscrewing it from the engine in an anti-clockwise direction (see fig. B2·8). Thoroughly clean the filter seating face on the engine. Fig. 82-8 Engine oil filter location Lightly smear the rubber sealing ring on the new filter with clean engine oil. Screw the filter onto the pedestal until the rubber seal contacts the sealing face then tighten the filter a further half turn; do not overtighten. Fill the engine with clean engine oil until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Run the engine and check the filter joint for leakage. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

TSD 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2-8

check the oil level with the engine running. Spring balance 7.5 kgf to 8,2 kgf To replenish the sump with oil. open the filler cap (16.5 lbf to 18 lbf) marked ENGINE (see fig. 82-9). Add clean oil to the engine and after allowing sufficient time for the oil to Retensioning load reach the sump check that the oil is up to the MAX Belt tension meter 22,7 kgf to 27,2 kgf mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. (50 lbf to 60 !bf) Spring balance 6,8 kgf to 7.5 kgf 3 Check the drive belts (15 lbf to 16.5 lbf) Before commencing to adjust the drive belts inspect them for signs of wear or cracking. Any belts found The tension of this matched pair of belts is unsatisfactory should be renewed. adjusted by altering the position of the jockey pulley If after adjustment a matched pair of belts have a (see fig. 82-10). marked variation in tension, a new pair should be Slacken the nut and setscrew securing the jockey fitted. Always renew both belts in a matched pair even pulley arm. Pivot the jockey pulley to adjust the belt if only one belt is faulty. tension then tighten the nut and setscrew. Check the Two belt tension loads are specified; a new belt belt tension and repeat the adjustment procedure if load for replacement (new) belts and a retensioning necessary. load for belts which are satisfactory for further service. The belt tension must be checked at a point Coolant pump to alternator midway between two pulleys (see fig. B2-10) by use Load may be applied on either side of the belt run. of a belt tension meter or by applying a spring balance to give a 9,50 mm (0.375 in) belt deflection at a New belt load specified load. Belt tension meter 36,3 kgf to 40,8 kgf The variation in the spring balance loads for (80 lbf to 90 lbf) similar belt tension meter loads is due to the varying Spring balance 5,0 kgf to 5,9 kgf lengths of belt between individual belt centres. ( 11 lbf to 13 lbf) Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent belt slip. Retensioning load Belt tension meter 31,7 kgf to 36.3 kgf Crankshaft to coolant pump (70 lbf to 80 lbf) Load may be applied on either side of the belt run. Spring balance 4, 1 kgf to 5,0 kgf (9 lbf to 11 lbf) New belt load Belt tension meter 2 7,2 kgf to 31 , 7 kgf The tension of the belt is adjusted by altering the (60 lbf to 70 lbf) position of the alternator (see fig. 82-1 0). Slacken the setscrew securing the alternator at the upper mounting point. Slacken the setscrew securing the adjustment strut to the front mounting plate. also the nut and bolt in the adjustment slot. Pivot the alternator to adjust the belt tension then tighten the nut and bolt in the adjustment slot. Check the belt tension and repeat adjustment if necessary. When the tension is correct finally tighten the remaining setscrews and check the tension again.

Crankshaft to steering pump/refrigeration compressor Load must be applied on the top run of the belts. Each belt to be checked individually.

New belt load Belt tension meter 40,8 kgf to 45,5 kgf {90 lbf to 1 00 lbf) Spring balance 6,3 kgf to 7, 7 kgf ( 1 4 lbf to 1 7 /bf)

Retensioning load Belt tension meter 36,3 kgf to 40.8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf) Fig. B2-10 Engine drive belt adjustment and Spring balance 4, 1 kgf to 6,3 kgf tension check points (9 lbf to 14 lbf)

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82 B2·9

The tension of this matched pair of belts is adjusted by altering the position of the steering pump (see fig. 82· 10). Slacken the setscrew in the steering pump mounting bracket slot situated below the pump pulley. Slacken the pump pivot setscrew and the union on the supply hose at the rear of the pump. Pivot the pump to adjust the belt tension then tighten the setscrew in the adjustment slot Check the belt tension and adjust again if necessary. When the tension is correct tighten the pivot setscrew and again check the belt tension. Finally tighten the supply hose connection; ensuring that the soft rubber protective sleeve has clearance or minimal contact with the coolant pump to manifold elbow.

4 Renew the air filter element Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, and Convertible cars The air filter element is situated in the air intake housing at the front right-hand side of the engine compartment ( see fig. B2· 11 ). Fig. B2·11 Air filter (Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, To gain access to the element release the two Mulsanne. and Convertible cars) toggle clips retaining the air blending valve housing to the air cleaner housing. Carefully free the joint and move the housing away from the air cleaner. Unscrew the worm drive clip securing the carburetter intake hose to the air cleaner housing. Detach the hose. Support the air cleaner housing and release the three toggle clips securing the housing to the valance. Carefully free the joint, then move the housing towards the engine and withdraw the housing and air filter element from the car. Remove the filter element from the housing. Ensure that the inside of the air cleaner housing (both the sections removed and the fixed sections in the valance) is clean. Inspect the joint seals for serviceability. Renew if necessary. Two types of filter element have been fitted, a tubular type, open at both ends or a conical type with the small end of the cone closed. Dependent on the type of filter element to be fitted proceed as follows.

Tubular type Enter the new element into the wing valance. Fit the air cleaner housing to the valance. Ensure W888 that it is located inside the valance retaining clamp ring. Hold the rubber seal in position over the housing Fig. B2·12 Air filter (Corniche Saloon and spigot by placing the fingers of one hand through the Camargue) air intake aperture and onto the seal. To allow the housing to pass over the end of the filter, it will be necessary to slightly withdraw the Fit the remaining components by reversing the element during this operation. removal procedure. Whilst ensuring that both the air filter element and sealing ring are correctly positioned on the housing Conical type spigot fit the assembly to the wing valance. Locate the large end of the new filter element Align the three housing toggle clips with their onto the locating spigot on the inside of .the removable respective securing points. Fasten the toggle clips. half of the housing.

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2·10

Carefully position the housing and filter onto the engine oil to approximately 13 mm (0.50 in} from the valance allowing the filter to pass into the valance top of the tube. Fit the damper into the tube and mounted section of the housing. Locate the small screw the cap firmly into position. (blank) end of the fitter into the spigot in the valance housing. Align the three housing toggle clips with their 6 Clean the carburetter air valve pistons respective securing points. Special care should be Remove the upper half (suction chamber, etc.) of each taken during these operations to ensure that the paper carburetter as described in Chapter U of the Workshop element is not damaged during insertion. Manual. Ensure that the filter is correctly positioned on the Dismantle each upper half but ensure that the location spigots, then secure the three toggle clips. It parts are retained with their respective carburetter. is essential that the filter is correctly located on the Clean the inside of the suction chamber, the spigots before the toggle clips are fastened down. piston and piston rod guide with fuel or methylated otherwise there is a serious risk of crushing the filter spirit (denatured alcohol) and wipe dry. Abrasives element. must not be used. Fit the remaining components by reversing the Examine the suction chamber and piston for removal procedure. d9mage and signs of scoring. Check that all the balls are in the piston ball race Corniche Saloon and Camargue (2 rows. 6 per row). Fit the piston into the suction The air filter element is situated in the air intake chamber, without the damper and spring, hold t~e housing at the front right-hand side of the engine assembly in a horizontal position and spin the piston. compartment (see fig. B2· 12). The piston should spin freely in the suction chamber To gain access to the element. unscrew the worm without any tendency to stick. j drive clip securing the intake hose to the carburetters Assemble the parts as described in the Workshop inlet duct. Withdraw the hose. Manual {Carburetters • To assemble}. Unscrew the knurled securing setscrew situated on the side of the assembly. 7 Check the float chamber depression; adjust if Withdraw the cover. necessary Unscrew the hexagonal nut from the centre stud. For details of the procedure necessary to carry out this Withdraw the end plate, filter, and second end plate. operation reference should be made to Chapter U of Fit the new element to the assembly by reversing the Workshop Manual. the removal procedure. Refer to figure B2· 12 for the correct assembly sequence. 8 Check the choke operation and choke stove pipe flow; rectify if necessary 5 Check the carburetter damper oil level Apply the parking brake and ensure that the gear The upper portion of the guide spindle, attached to the range selector lever is in the Park position. Remove the air valve piston in each carburetter is hollow and gear range thermal cut-out from the fuseboard. should contain the same type of oil as used in the Start and run the engine until normal operating engine. temperature is attained. Stop the engine. To check the oil level, unscrew the cap and Connect an impulse tachometer to the engine in withdraw the damper from the air valve piston (see fig. acccordance with the manufacturer's instructioi:is. 62-13). Top-up the damper reservoir with clean Disconnect the stove pipe union at the intake elbow and connect a flowmeter to the pipe using connector RH 8945. The flowmeter must be a rotameter type capable of measuring 2,9 m3/h (100 ft3/h). Start and run the engine at idle speed (650 rev/min); observe the flowmeter, a correct reading is between 1.41 m3/h and 1,51 m3/h (50 ft3/h and 55 ft3/h). If the reading is outside the prescribed limits, reference should be made to Chapter U of the Workshop Manual.

9 Check the choke fast-idle speed; adjust if necessary For full details of choke fast-idle settings reference should be made to Chapter U of the Workshop Manual.

10 Renew the sparking plugs Sparking plug type Champion RN 12 YC or RN 12 Y. Fig. B2·13 SU Carburetter damper Plug gap setting 0,89 mm (Q.035 in).

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 82·11

Before removing the sparking plugs the surrounding area should be thoroughly cleaned to prevent the ingress of foreign matter when the plugs are removed. Fit the new plugs ensuring that the gaps are correctly set and that each plug is fitted with a sealing washer. Torque tighten each plug to between 18 Nm and 23 Nm (1,8 kgf m and 2,3 kgf m, 13 lbf ft and 17 lbf ft).

11 Lubricate the distributor ( 1981 /82 model year cars only) Lubrication of the spindle is the only routine maintenance required. To carry out this operation remove the moulded top cover of the distributor and the rotor arm. Do not remove the cover from the distributor baseplate (see fig. B2· 15). Lubricate the spindle shaft bearings by applying Fig. B2· 14 Choke stove pipe restrictor union two drops of engine oil to the felt pad situated beneath the rotor arm. Clean and fit the rotor arm. Clean the terminal posts and cover, then fit the cover ensuring that it is correctly located on the distributor base.

12 Lubricate the accelerator linkage Lubricate all the accelerator linkage ball joint pivots and clevis pins. Examine the ball knuckle joints for wear and adjust if necessary. Renew any worn clevis pins. Examine the linkage for correct operation. For details of linkage setting procedures refer to Chapter U of the Workshop Manual TSD 4400.

13 Check the torque tightness of the exhaust manifold setscrews Ensure that all setscrews retaining the exhaust manifold in position are torque tightened to between 32 Nm and 33 Nm (3.2 kgf m and 3.4 kgf m, 23 lbf ft and 25 lbf ft).

14 Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary The ignition is timed on A 1 cylinder which is located at the front left-hand side of the engine (viewed from the front of the car). Fig. B2-15 Distributor lubrication point Important (1981/82 model year cars only) If the ignition timing is to be set, ensure that the sparking plugs are in good condition before running the engine; if they require cleaning or renewal, ensure to give an idle speed of 2000 rev/min. When setting that the gaps are correctly set (see Operation 10, the engine idle speed reduce from a higher speed to Renew the sparking plugs). 2000 rev/min. Direct the flashing light of the stroboscope onto To check the ignition timing commence by the crankshaft damper timing marks and timing running the engine until normal operating temperature pointer; the pointer is positioned on the right-hand is attained and the choke fast·idle is in the off position. side of the crankshaft damper when viewed from the Switch off the engine. front of the engine. Connect a stroboscope and a tachometer to the If the timing pointer does not coincide with the engine as described in the instructions supplied with 25° btdc mark on the crankshaft damper adjust the the respective equipment. ignition timing as follows. Start the engine and adjust the throttle stop screw Release the clamp screw on the distributor and

TSD 4406

Printed in Engl&nd June 1985 © RoUs·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2-12 rotate the head of the distributor in the appropriate the clamp screw and again check to ensure that the direction until the correct timing is obtained. Clockwise timing has not altered whilst tightening the clamp rotation of the distributor head advances the ignition screw. and conversely anti-clockwise rotation retards the Set the engine idle speed to 650 rev/min. ignition. After adjustment has been carried out tighten Direct the flashing light of the stroboscope onto the crankshaft damper timing marks and timing pointer. Check that the ignition timing is between 5° and 1 1° btdc. Stop the engine and remove all the test equipment

15 Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary Ensure that the engine is at normal operating temperature and that the choke fast·idle is in the off position. The air conditioning system must be switched off and a tachometer connected to the engine in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Stop the engine, remove the air intake and blank off the hot idle compensator feed drilling (see fig. B2· 16}; replace the air intake. Start the engine and, if necessary, adjust the engine idle speed to 650 rev/min, using the throttle ) stop screw. Stop the engine and remove the air intake. Remove the blank from the hot idle compensator feed drilling and fit the air intake. Detach the test Fig. B2-16 Hot idle mixture compensator feed equipment.

Engine cooling system Pmt, Lilies Jlmp l 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration The cooling system is filled initially with a coolant solution comprising equal parts of UT 184 (BP - Hythe Chemicals) or Prestone II and water. This mixture gives frost protection down to a temperature of -3 7"C (-35°F). The coolant should contain fifty percent of an approved anti-freeze at all times. This not only provides frost protection but also prevents corrosion of the coolant passages and raises the boiling temperature of the coolant. The anti-freeze concentration should be checked A in both the expansion bottle (where fitted) and the radiator. If the strength of the coolant requires increasing, sufficient coolant should be drained from the radiator and replaced with undiluted anti-freeze {see fig. 02-17). Afterwards run the engine until normal operating temperature is attained and the anti-freeze 1 5 has become thoroughly mixed with the coolant. Stop H--t-t---t---+---t--1 o. 0 5 05 the engine and again check the concentration in the BC ...-•'+- s __·•... o __.:...... 1---1--· 3'-io'---- ·2.,_s-1-_ -~20--.._.,.._s-4-_ -_._,o...... , radiator. ,.F -SOf ..4 Q I •30 j •20 I •10 I O \0 20 1 1 An acceptable level of anti-freeze concentration is s·s" so% 4·s% C 4'0,- 3·s% 30% 2,&% 2'0\'. S605 between 45% and 50%. Therefore, as a hydrometer may be inaccurate where readings above 40% are Fig. B2-17 Anti-freeze correction chart to give a expected, it is recommended that a refractometer is 50% solution used. A Acceptable service range of concentration For details refer to Chapter L of the Workshop B Freezing point of coolant Manual. C Percentage concentration If a refractometer is not available and a D Volume of 100% anti-freeze to be added hydrometer has to be used. a scale reading of between to maintain a 50% solution after removal 1,06 and 1,07 should be obtained with the coolant at of the same volume of old coolant room temperature for the mixture to be correct.

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82 B2-13

2 Check the coolant level Warning Both types of cooling system become pressuri:ted during engine running, therefore. extreme care should be taken when removing the radiator cap from a warm or hot radiator.

Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, and Convertible cars Routine check To check the level outside a normal service schedule (e.g. Regular maintenance) and when no cooling/ heating system fault is reported or suspected. proceed as follows. If the engine is hot ensure that the coolant level in the translucent expansion bonle is at the MAX mark. Top-up if necessary and replace the expansion bottle cap. If the engine is cold ensure that the coolant level in the translucent expansion bottle is half-way between the MIN and MAX marks. Top-up if necessary and Fig. B2·18 Oil pressure switches and transmitter replace the expansion bottle cap. If the coolant level in the expansion bottle is either below the MIN mark or there is no coolant in the expansion bottle, carry out the following Full check procedure.

Full check Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position and apply the parking brake. Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the fuseboard. Check the coolant level in the translucent expansion bottle (see fig. B2· 19). If the level is low or the bottle is empty, add coolant to bring the level up to the MIN mark. Ensure that the engine is not hot (to allow safe removal of the radiator cap). Remove the radiator cap in three stages as follows. Turn the cap slowly anti-clockwise until a check Fig. B2-19 Coolant expansion bottle (Silver position is reached. Wait until any pressure in the Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne. system has been released. Press down on the cap and and Convertible cars) continue to turn it anti-clockwise until the cap is released. Check the coolant level in the radiator. This should Start and run the engine. be half-way up the filler neck. Turn the air conditioning system function control If the coolant level in the radiator is correct, fit the fully clockwise to the defrost position. radiator cap by pressing it firmly down and turning it Set the air conditioning system override switch to fully clockwise. the AUTO position. Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in Allow at least one minute for the air conditioning accordance with the Routine check procedure. system to stabilize, then check to ensure that all air is If the coolant level in the radiator is low but visible being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is and no cooling/heating system fault is reported or delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). suspected top-up the system using the following This procedure opens the heater system water tap. procedure. If however the coolant is not visible or a Run the engine, without the radiator pressure cap coolant/heating system leak is reported or suspected, fitted, until normal operating temperature is attained. the system should have any faults rectified and then Top-up the coolant level in the radiator during this be pressure tested prior to carrying out the topping-up time. procedure. Switch off the engine. Top-up the radiator until the coolant is half-way up Fit the radiator pressure cap by pressing it firmly the filler neck. down and turning it fully clockwise.

TSO 4406

Printed in Engtano June 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 82-14

Toi:rup the coolant level in the expansion bottle in Remove the radiator cap. If the engine is hot. accordance with the Routine check procedure. muffle the cap with a thick cloth and gradually turn the cap anti-clockwise until the pressure is reduced, then Corniche Saloon and all Camargue remove the cap. Ensure the gear range sele1,;tor is in the Park position If the coolant level is low, tojrup the radiator and apply the parking brake. header tank with the correct anti-freeze/water mixture. Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the The correct level is when the coolant reaches the fuseboard. rubber seal in the filler neck. Fit the filler cap. Start the engine and turn the air conditioning function control clockwise to the defrost position and 3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness set the upper system mode override switch to the Examine all the coolant hose connections for leakage. AUTO position. check the worm drive clips for tightness. Never over Allow approximately one minute for the system to tighten a clip in an attempt to seal a leaking attain the required setting. then check that all air is connection. being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is In the event of a hose connection leaking when delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets}. the worm drive clips have be.en tightened. drain the This procedure opens the heater water tap and cooling system to a level below the leaking hose. ensures that the cooling system can be correctly Remove and inspect the hose and its connecting checked. component for signs of damage. If necessary renew Switch off the ignition. the faulty component and refill the system with coolant as described in Renew the coolant.

4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses Inspect all coolant hoses for signs of deterioration, cracking, weak spots. etc. Any faulty hose should be removed and a new hose fitted. When renewing a hose always ensure that it does not foul other components and that it is not kinked so as to cause complete or partial restriction of coolant flow.

5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose Drain the cooling system as described in Renew the coolant, but do not remove the engine crankcase drain plugs. Disconnect the heater tap feed hose from the engine and heater tap (see fig. B2·20}; remove the hose. Fit the new hose; ensure that the hose is free from any sharp bends that may restrict coolant flow. Fig. 82·20 Heater tap feed hose Fill the engine cooling system as described in Re~ew the coolant Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the gear range selector lever is in the Park position. ) Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the fuseboard. Stan and run the engine; check the coolant hose for leaks. Switch off the ignition and fit the gear range selector cut-out.

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82 82·15

position, also set the upper system mode override Note switch to the AUTO position. For the coolant system to operate correctly, i.e. for Wait approximately one minute for the system to coolant to pass into the expansion bottle when hot and attain the required setting and observe that all the air be drawn back into the radiator during cooling, the top is being directed to the windscreen. This procedure of the radiator must not contain an air pocket. opens the heater water tap and ensures the system can be completely drained. 7 Reverse flush the coolant system Switch off the ignition. Drain the engine coolant system as described in Place a container beneath the radiator drain tap to Renew the coolant collect the coolant. Connect a length of hose onto the Remove the top and bottom hoses from the drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. radiator matrix. Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator Fit a waste pipe to the upper (inlet) connection of pressure cap. the radiator. Open the radiator drain tap and allow the coolant Apply mains water under pressure through the to drain from the radiator. lower (outlet) connection of the radiator. This should When the radiator has completely drained place a remove all loose sediment in approximately 30 container beneath the crankcase drain plugs. Remove minutes. the drain plugs from the crankcase (see fig. B2·21} Do not under any circumstances use an and allow the residue of coolant to drain from the alkaline compound or detergent to clean the crankcase. system. Such compounds have a detrimental Renew the washers on the drain plugs and fit the chemical action on aluminium alloys. plugs into the crankcase. Remove the engine coolant drain plugs from the To drain the coolant remaining in the expansion crankcase. bottle (Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, and Remove the thermostat as described in Renew the Convertible cars) disconnect the connection hose from thermostat, then replace the cover. the radiator filler neck and allow the coolant to drain Fit a suitable pipe to the drain plug aperture and from the expansion bottle into the container. When the apply mains water pressure to each aperture in turn. coolant has drained connect the hose to the radiator Flush for approximately 30 minutes. or until the filler neck. water runs clear of foreign matter. Check all hoses for serviceability and renew as Fit the drain plugs and a new thermostat by necessary. reversing the procedure for removal. Fill the system with fresh coolant of the specified To flush the heater system, detach the heater at concentration as follows. the water tap and disconnect the return hose at the Ensure the radiator drain tap is closed. coolant pump. Slowly fill the radiator with coolant thus reducing Fit a waste pipe to the disconnected heater feed the possibility of air locks in the system. hose. Start and run the engine for a minimum of 10 Flush the matrix for approximately 30 minutes. minutes with the radiator pressure cap removed. After Examine the coolant hoses for deterioration or running for five minutes ensure that warm air is damage and renew as necessary. passing up the windscreen from the demister ducts. Connect all hoses and fill the system with the Top-up the radiator as necessary to ensure there is recommended coolant mixture as described under always coolant in the top tank of the radiator. Renew the coolant. Ensure that the thermostat has opened; indicated by a rapid warming of the top radiator hose. 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator and Switch off the engine and top-up the radiator to refrigeration condenser half·way up the filler neck. Fit the pressure cap. Using a pressure hose pipe, flush the radiator matrix Applicable to Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, and condenser matrix. and Convertible cars. Hold the nose of the hose pipe close to the back Fill the expansion bottle upto a level midway of the radiator matrix and allow the water to pass between the maximum and minimum levels indicated between the veins of the matrix. Slowly move the hose on the bottle. over the whole matrix area until all foreign matter Start and run the engine until normal engine (insects, etc.) have been flushed clear. Care must be running temperature is attained; switch off the engine taken to ensure that the end of the hose does not and top-up the expansion bottle to the maximum level. damage the matrix face during this operation. Allow the engine to cool down. Carefully remove the radiator pressure cap and ensure the radiator is 9 Renew the thermostat completely full of coolant. Top-up to half-way up the Disconnect the battery. radiator filler neck if necessary. Fit the radiator Place a container beneath the radiator. Attach a pressure cap. length of hose to the radiator drain tap to direct the Connect the Lucar connection previously coolant into the container. disconnected from the pressure switch adjacent to the Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator oil filter (see fig. B2· 18). pressure cap.

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls•Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2·16

Open the radiator drain tap and allow sufficient Top-up the cooling system with the correct coolant to drain from the system for the coolant level coolant mixture as described under Renew the coolant. to fall below that of the thermostat housing. Close the drain tap and remove the hose previously attached. Torque converter transmission Disconnect the electri(;ai connector from the It is absolutely essential when adding fluid to, or thermostat housing cover. working on the torque converter transmission that Remove the bolt from the air intake elbow and the great attention is paid to cleanliness. The smallest four setscrews from the thermostat housing cover. particle of dirt in the transmission fluid could interfere Collect the bracket. with the correct operation of the unit. Remove the thermostat housing cover. The cover It is important for the efficient operation of the can be moved away from the housing without torque converter transmission that only an approved detaching the outlet hose. fluid is used (see Chapter A). Lift the thermostat from the housing (see fig. B2·22). 1 Check the transmission fluid level Remove the old gasket material from the The fluid level can only be checked accurately when thermostat housing and cover. Ensure that no material the car is standing on a level surface, the engine is enters the thermostat housing. running at idle speed, and transmission fluid is at Check that the two faces are clean and dry. normal operating temperature. approximately 77°C Insert a new thermostat into the housing. (170°F). Place a new gasket in position on the housing and The dipstick and filler tube are situated on the fit the cover and air intake elbow bracket. Connect the right·hand side of the engine compartment. elbow to the bracket On Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, and Mulsanne cars, Connect the electrical connection removed from remove the protective cover (if fitted) from the the thermostat housing. windscreen wiper mechanism to gain access to the dipstick. Ensure that the following safety procedure is undertaken to isolate the mechanism prior to removing the cover. Ensure that the windscreen wiper control switch situated on the facia is in the off position. Remove a windscreen wiper relay, preferably number three, situated adjacent to the windscreen washer reservoir (see fig. B2·23). To remove the relay pull it vertically from its mounting. Always clean the top of the dipstick before removing it from the filler tube. As an initial check, the fluid level may be checked after starting from cold as follows. Apply the parking brake. Start and run the engine for three to four minutes at fast·idle speed, with the gear range selector in the Park position. Reduce the engine speed to slow idle. Whilst sitting in the driving seat, firmly apply the footbrake and move the gear range selector through the full range of gear positions pausing briefly in each range. Return the selector to the Park position. Immediately check the fluid level with the engine running at idle speed. The level should be up to the circular dimple situated below the FILL mark on the dipstick or 10 mm (0.375 in) below the MIN mark, dependent on the type of dipstick fitted (see fig. B2·23). Toi:rup to this level if necessary. After this initial check a further check should be carried out as follows. Drive the car for approximately 24 kilometres (1 5 miles) of highway/motorway driving or 16 kilometres { 10 miles} of city driving. This should ensure the transmission has reached normal operating temperature. It is essential that this temperature is attained. Do not top·up the fluid level to the MAX Fig. 82·22 Thermostat housing assembly mark of the dipstick when the fluid is only warm, as

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 B2-17

this will result in an overfill situation when the normal operating temperature is attained. Overfilling will result in fluid being discharged from the transmission breather pipe. Position the car on a level surface, firmly apply the parking brake and select Park using the gear selector lever. Carry out the procedure described for the initial check. With the transmission fluid at normal operating temperature the level of the fluid should be between the FILL and MAX HOT marks or the MIN and MAX marks (see fig. B2-23) dependent on the type of dipstick fitted. If necessary add fluid by pouring it down the filler tube, with the engine still running, until the fluid is to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. When the fluid level is correct, switch off the engine and fit the windscreen wiper mechanism cover and relay.

2 Renew the transmission fluid Position the car on a ramp or over a pit C Place a clean container having a minimum capacity of 3 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt) under the nut which secures the transmission fluid filler tube to the sump (see fig. B2-24). From within the engine compartment. remove the transmission dipstick as described under Check the transmission fluid level. D 1\0635 Slacken the setscrew securing the filler tube to the engine. Fig. 82·23 Transmission filler tube and dipstick Unscrew the nut securing the filler tube to the A Removing the windscreen wiper side of the transmission sump(see fig. B2-24). mechanism cover. Withdraw the filler tube from the sump and move it to The arrow indicates the wiper motor relay one side to allow the fluid to drain into the container. to be removed After draining the sump, ensure that the filler tube B Withdrawing the dipstick from the filler is clean then fit it to the sump and tighten the drain tube nut. Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip C Original dipstick markings to the engine. D Revised dipstick markings Add 2,8 litres (5 Imp pt. 6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump. pouring the fluid down the filler tube. Check the fluid level as described under Check the transmission fluid level.

3 Fit a new intake strainer Drain the transmission sump as described under the heading, Renew the transmission fluid, then proceed as follows. Remove the setscrews securing the transmission sump and lower the sump. Drain any oil from the sump and discard the gasket Unscrew the setscrew securing the intake strainer W272 and pipe assembly to the transmission; remove the strainer assembly (see fig. B2-25}. Fig. B2-24 Transmission drain point Remove the intake pipe from the strainer and discard the strainer. Fit a new rubber ·o· ring to the intake pipe and Clean the transmission sump and the intake pipe lubricate the ·o· ring with clean transmission fluid. with paraffin and dry with compressed air. Ensure that a new rubber seal is fitted to the pipe

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 82·18

bore in the new intake strainer, then fit the intake pipe to the strainer. Fit the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission and torque tighten the securing setscrew to 14 Nm (1.4 kgf m, 10 lbf ft). Fit the transmission sump using a new gasket and torque tighten the sump setscrews to 16 Nm (1,7 kgfm, 12 lbfft). Fit the oil filler tube into the sump and tighten the nut Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip to the engine. Add 4,5 litres (8 Imp pt, 9.6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump, pouring the fluid down the filler tube, then follow the fluid level checking procedure described under Check the transmission Fig. 82·25 Transmission intake strainer removal fluid level.

4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod Lubricate the clevis pins in the control rod linkage at the left·hand side of the transmission, with a few drops of clean engine oil. Also lubricate the manual .. shaft where it enters the transmission casing. ) Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints (if applicable) A grease nipple is fitted to the universal joint at each end of the shaft (see fig. B2·26}. Using a suitable grease gun lubricate each joint with an approved grease. On cars fitted with a rubber jointed propeller shaft lubrication is not required.

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Remove the level plug located in the rear face of the final drive casing. The oil in the casing should be up to the level plug orifice. If necessary, toi:rup with an approved oil. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint Fig. 82·26 Propeller shaft grease point washer.

3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint covers Fig. 82·27 Final drive drain and filler/level points The drive-shaft joints. enclosed by convoluted seals.

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 82-19 are filled with lubricant on initial assembly. If upon inspection a seal is found to be leaking or damaged the joint should be inspected and a new seal should be fitted as described in Chapter J of the Workshop Manual.

Steering system 1 Check the steering pump fluid level Remove the filler cap from the steering pump reservoir, and check that the fluid level is at least up to the FULL COLD mark on the integral dipstick. If necessary. top-up to this level with approved fluid (see fig. 82-28). Start and run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, approximately 7 7"C ( 1 70° F) then stop the engine. Remove the filler cap and check the fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, add an approved fluid to Fig. B2-28 Steering pump filler/dipstick raise the level to the FULL HOT mark on the dipstick; do not overfill. Ensure that the filler cap is securely replaced.

2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints ( if applicable) If grease nipples are fitted to the ball joints at the ends of the track rods. they should be lubricated until a slight swelling of the joint seal is evident. Take care not to damage or displace the seals.

3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers Examine the condition of the rubber cover seals on the ball joints (see fig. 82-29). If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition new parts should be fitted as necessary. For Fig. B2-29 Track rod ball joints full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

4 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the rack and pinion unit and check the tightness of the seal clips. If the seals are satisfactory, tighten the clips as necessary. If the convoluted seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the rack and pinion unit should be removed from the car and new seals fitted. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers The front suspension ball joints (see fig. 82-30) are packed with grease on initial assembly and should not normally require attention between service overhauls unless the rubber seal covers are damaged. If on inspection the covers are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the ball joints should be removed and new joints and seals fitted as necessary. Fig. B2-30 Front suspension ball joints

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 82-20

For full information refer to Chapter H of the Clean the ball joints then lubricate with an Workshop Manual. approved grease. Do not alter the length of the actuation link. 2 Check the condition of the rear strut Connect the actuation link to the height control convoluted seals valve and the trailing arm from which it was removed. Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the Adjust the joint to obtain complete movement rear suspension struts (see fig. B2-31 ). without free play. If the seals are found to be damaged. or in poor condition, the struts should be removed, as described in Chapter G of the Workshop manual, and new seals fined. Brake and hydraulic systems

3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Disconnect the actuation links from the height control valves and rear suspension trailing arms at the ball joints (see fig. 82·32). Note from which side each link is taken. WARNING Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (lHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363, Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause ) component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals. hoses. pipes, etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil system. For details of correct component identification reference should be made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Always ensure that a sealed container of Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fined adjacent to the battery. Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the systems when work is being carried out.

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 B2-21

Clean the area around each hydraulic reservoir filler cap and then remove the cap. Ensure that the components in the test kit are clean and dry. Using the samp!ing tube provided, extract 50 ml of mineral oil from the top and bottom of each reservoir. Place the samples into the individual clean dry containers. · Shake each sample taken to ensure it is well mixed. Pour 10 ml of each sample into clean test tubes (do not mix the samples together). Using the dispenser. add two drops of the red dye solution contained in the kit into each 10 ml sample. Cork the test tubes and shake them thoroughly. Leave the samples to settle for at least 30 minutes. Examine each sample.

Sample diagnosis On adding the red dye solution and the subsequent mixing, the green colour of the mineral oil will change to a reddish brown. This does not indicate contamination of the hydraulic system mineral oil. Contamination can only be confirmed by the formation of a cloudy red mass which will begin to settle towards the bottom of the tube if left to stand for at least 30 minutes. If the sample in the test tube on addition of the dye turns red but remains clear it indicates that the sample is not contaminated. The volume of red mass which will eventually settle to the bottom of the test tube indicates the amount of contamination within the hydraulic system mineral oil. Complete separation of the two liquids may take a considerable amount of time, for example a very small percentage of contamination may take more than seven days to completely separate. If contamination is suspected, a more thorough test can be undertaken. details of which are given in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. If contamination is suspected. but difficult to Fig. 82-33 Access to the hydraulic systems diagnose. due to the small amount of contaminant that reservoirs may be present or any doubt exists, confirmation A Original filler cap should be obtained by sending a sample to Rolls B Specialized filler cap Royce Motors (if in the United Kingdom) or to a chemical analysis laboratory. Before attempting any work on a hydraulic system To check the oil level. first depressurize the personnel must be fully conversant with the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until precautions required to ensure adequate safety and the two warning panels illuminate. Start and run the correct system operation. engine for approximately four minutes to charge the Refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. systems and then stop the engine. The mineral oil in Important both reservoirs should be up to the FULL marks on Always seal each reservoir cap after it has been the level indicator plate. confirmed that the systems are not contaminated and If the reservoirs require topping-up. ensure that all work on the systems has been completed. the tops of the reservoirs and the filler caps are clean. then add an approved hydraulic system mineral oil (see 1 Check the mineral oil level in the reservoirs Chapter A) as necessary. The mineral oil reservoirs for the hydarulic systems are It is important that only approved hydraulic located in the engine compartment (see fig. B2-33). system mineral oil is used and that exceptional

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2-22

cleanliness is observed when topping-up the at the accumulator bleed screws as these are an hydraulic systems. integral part of the accumulators and when opened Under no circumstances should a conven allow the mineral oil to flow from the accumulator tional (i.e. RR363 or Universal) type brake fluid be spheres back to the reservoirs. used. Drain the mineral oil from the reservoirs and clean After topping-up ensure that the filler caps are the reservoirs as described in Chapter G of the clean. then fit them securely to the reservoirs or insert Workshop Manual. the blanking plug dependent upon the type of filler cap After the system has completely drained, close all fitted. the bleed screws and ensure that any disturbed pipes Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic are connected and correctly torque tightened. System Mineral Oil for system replenishment. are Fill the reservoirs with fresh hydraulic system fitted adjacent to the battery. mineral oil (see fig. 82-33 and Chapter A) until the levels in the reservoirs are slightly above the topping 2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil up marks on the indicator plate. Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Run the engine for four minutes, then toirup to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as the FULL level mark; never allow the mineral oil levels follows. to fall below the minimum level marks. Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic Check for leaks. especially around the unions of systems by attaching a tube to each bleed point. then any pipes which have been disturbed: opening the bleed screws and allowing the mineral oil Finally, bleed the hydraulic systems as described to drain from the circuits. The bleed screws are located in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. on each accumulator, on each pair of brake calipers, on Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic the deceleration conscious pressure limiting valve and System Mineral Oil for system replenishment, are on each r.ear suspension strut or each inner rear wing fitted adjacent to the battery. from the suspension strut. A drain tube is not required 3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and check the condition of the hydraulic system pipes and hoses. Examine the metal pipes for signs of corrosion, particularly those in an exposed position. Examine the hoses for chafing or surface cracking. Faulty pipes·and hoses should be replaced as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual.

4 Renew the accumulator to body, trailing arms to body, and sub-frame to body hoses (if fitted} Oepressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as follows. Fit a hose clamp to each of the intermediate hoses of the accumulator return pipes to prevent the flow of mineral oil from the reservoirs. Fig. B2-34 Hydraulic accumulator to body hoses Thoroughly clean the areas around the connections of the two accumulator to body, trailing arms to body, and sub-frame to body hoses (see figs. 82-34, B2-35, and B2-36). Remove the respective hoses noting the following points. To avoid contamination fit the new hose immediately after removing the old one; alternatively fit approved blanks to the open ports until the new hoses are fitted. Before fitting a new hose ensure that it is thoroughly clean and conforms with the hydraulic systems mineral oil requirements. When fitting the new hoses, ensure that they are routed to clear other components and that clearance is maintained during full suspension movement. Tighten the pipe nuts to the torque settings given in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Fig. B2-35 Trailing arm to body hoses After fitting the new hoses, check for leaks and

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82 B2-23

bleed the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual.

5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses To renew the hydrt1•.!lic system hoses follow the same basic procedure described under the heading Renew the accumulator to body, trailing arms to body, and sub-frame to body hoses.

1300 kilometres (700 miles and 800 miles) should 6 5 4 W290 be observed. During this running-in period the brakes should not be applied harshly or for prolonged periods Fig. B2-37 Parking brake mechanism from high speeds except in an emergency. Towards 1 Actuation rod the end of the running-in period. the force with which 2 Centralizing straps the brakes are applied may be progressively increased. 3 Parking brake pads 4 Brake disc 7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust 5 Adjuster clicker block excluders (when changing brake pads) 6 Adjuster The condition of the caliper dust seals should be checked whenever the brake pads are removed. Inspect the seals for signs of damage, heat also support the rear trailing arms. Do not allow the hardening. or general deterioration and renew if suspension struts to support the full suspension load. necessary. Remove the rear wheels and release the parking When fitting new seals, ensure that the seal brake to the off position. retaining clips are correctly located. Disconnect the caliper actuation rod from the caliper lever (see fig. 82-37). 8 Renew the brake caliper seals Unscrew and remove the caliper adjuster and To renew the caliper piston seals it is necessary to collect the adjuster clicker plate. remove the brake calipers from the car. Unhook the pad retention springs from each pad, For full instructions, refer to Chapter G of the noting the larger spring is fitted to the inner pad. Workshop Manual. Remove the pads from the caliper. Check the thickness of the lining material on each 9 Check the parking brake pads for wear pad. Pads which are worn to within 1.6 mm (0.062 in) Securely chock the front wheels then raise the rear of or less of the steel backing plate should be renewed. the car. Place sill blocks under the rear body sills and To fit the pads, attach the retention springs then

TSD 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1 985 82-24

locate the pads into position and hook the springs To check the cable adjustment. adjust both rear onto the caliper. cables at the equalizer link until the caliper off-stops Complete the assembly by reversing the removal are just clear of the calipers. Measure the gap procedure. then adjust the calipers as described under produced at each off-stop and lengthen the cables by the heading Adjust the parking brake. this amount. Note With the cables correctly adjusted, check that the If new parking brake pads have been fitted. the centralizing straps (see fig. 82-37) are pushing the following bedding-in procedure should be carried out pads away from the discs when the parking brake is in after adjusting the parking brake. the off position. If not, remove the nut and bolt securing the straps, bend the straps outward {i.e. away Drive the car at approximately 48 km/h (30 from the disc) then refit them. Ensure that the straps mile/h} and apply the parking brake to bring the car to are pushed downward towards the adjusting nut rest; it is important that this is done gently and progressively. The parking brake must not be applied whilst tightening the nut and bolt securing them to the caliper. fully and no attempt should be made to lock the Check that the distance between the pad and the wheels. This operation should be carried out nine disc are the same on each side of the caliper; if not, times, allowing at least one minute to elapse betvveen stops to prevent the discs overheating. reset the centralizing straps. Raise each rear wheel in turn so that it is free to Finally adjust the caliper as described under the heading Adjust the parking brake. rotate and adjust each caliper as follows. Turn the caliper adjuster (see fig. 82-37) clock· 10 Adjust the parking brake wise until the pads just grip the disc; at this point it should only just be possible to rotate the road wheel Ensure that the parking brake is in the off position. by hand. Turn the adjuster anti-clockwise a quarter Adjust the ~ear cables at the adjusters (see fig. B2·38) so that the caliper operating levers return to turn (i.e. three clicks on the nut) to obtain the minimum clearance between the pads and disc. their off-stops under the influence of their return springs with no appreciable slackness in the cables. Note 11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage The cables must be adjusted so that the equalizer link Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Lubricate the on the intermediate linkage (see fig. 82·38) lies at parking brake linkage clevis pins.fulcrum pins. and the right-angles with the centre line of the car with the rear cable adjusters with approved grease. parking brake in the off position. Fuel system Safety precautions Jt is important that whenever a fuel line is opened or the fuel tank drained, that the workshop safety precautions given in Chapter A of the Workshop Manual are strictly observed.

1 Renew the main filter element The main fuel filter; situated on the car body underframe. contains a disposable element. Dependent on the type of filter fitted (see fig. 82-39) the following procedure should be carried out to renew the filter element.

Type A Disconnect the inlet and outlet pipes from the filter top cover. Blank off the pipe connections to prevent loss of fuel. Remove the setscrews securing the filter mounting bracket to the body crossmember; lower the filter from the car. Remove the three screws securing the filter bowl clamping ring. Separate the bowl from the filter head. Drain any fuel from the bowl and withdraw the element.

Type B Fig. 82-38 Parking brake rear cable adjustment Place a clean container beneath the filter to collect any point fuel spillage.

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 82-25

Remove the retaining bolt from the centre of the filter bowl. Separate the bowl from the filter head.

Type A and B Clean the filter bowl using clean fuel. Fit a new element and sealing rings by reversing the respective removal procedure noting the following. Do not overtighten the bowl securing bolt or clamp retaining screws. Tighten the three screws evenly. After fitting the filter to the car, examine the fuel system for leakage and rectify as necessary. When carrying out the above operation at the 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or four years and subsequent periods, the intank fuel filter situated on the underside of the fuel tank (see fig. 82·40) should also be removed and cleaned as follows. Disconnect the battery. Drain or siphon the fuel tank. Place a container beneath the fuel intank filter to collect the residue of fuel from the tank when the filter is removed. Disconnect the hose from the intank filter outlet A B W288 pipe. Remove the circlip retaining the filter and carefully Fig. 82·39 Main fuel filter withdraw the filter from the tank. Clean the filter mesh by washing it in clean fuel. Examine the filter for serviceability and renew if necessary. Fit the filter by reversing the removal procedure. Always use a new seal on the filter body. Ensure that the fuel drained from the fuel tank is free from foreign matter. then return it to the fuel tank. Check the fuel filter and the pipe connections that have been disconnected, for leaks.

3 Renew the fuel mixture weakening device filter The filter is situated on the left-hand valance of the engine compartment (see fig. B2-42). To remove the filter. disconnect the outlet hose Fig. B2·41 Fuel inlet filter

TSD 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2-26

and then remove the two setscrews retaining the filter Battery electrolyte check assembly to the valance; discard the filter assembly. Applicable to batteries with removable cell vent Fit a new filter assembly by reversing the removal cover(s) procedure. a. Electrolyte specific gravity check. Remove the vent cover( s) from the top of the battery. 4 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel Using a hydrometer check the specific gravity of tank hose; renew as necessary the electrolyte in each cell and compare the readings To enable the filler head to fuel tank hose to be obtained with the following tables. examined. it is necessary to remove the rear Caution suspension gas spring. For details of the procedure The electrolyte in the battery is a corrosive acid. Do not required reference should be made to Chapter U of the allow the electrolyte to come into contact with the Workshop Manual. eyes, skin, fabric. or paintwork. Flush any contacted areas immediately and thoroughly with water. If the 5 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes eyes are effected, flush for at least 1 5 minutes and Carefully examine all the flexible fuel pipes throughout obtain prompt medical attention. the fuel system. Renew any pipes which have become damaged or deteriorated to an unserviceable condition. Chloride battery Check the complete fuel system for leaks and rectify as necessary. Air temperature below 32°C (90°F)

Electrical system Specific Gravity Condition of Battery 1 Check the battery electrolyte level and 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged condition 1. 1 80 to 1.200 Half discharged Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, Mulsanne, and Convertible 1.090 to 1.110 Fully discharged cars. The battery is situated in the luggage Air temperature above 32°C (90°F) compartment stowage well. To gain access to the battery. turn back the carpet from the right-hand side Specific Gravity Condition of Battery of the luggage compartment. Lift out the stowage well 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged lid and the cover from around the battery. 1. 1 50 to 1.1 70 Half discharged 1.070 to 1.090 Fully discharged Corniche Saloon and all Camargue cars. The battery is mounted on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment To gain access to the battery Lucas or Varta battery turn back the carpet and remove the trim from around the battery, the trim is secured by contact strip on Air temperature below 27°C (80°F) Corniche and two turn fasteners on Camargue. Unclip the battery cover retaining strap and lift off the cover. Specific Gravity Condition of Battery To check the specific gravity of the battery 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged electrolyte on these models, it is necessary to remove 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged the battery from the. car as follows. Ensure the ignition 1.090to1.110 Fully discharged is switched off, then disconnect the battery leads. Remove the battery clamp and lift the battery from its Air temperature above 27°C (80°F) cradle. Specific Gravity Condition of Battery 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged 1.1 30 to 1.1 50 Half discharged 1.050 to 1.().70 Fully discharged

If the specific gravity reading of all the cells is uniform and within the range 1.240 to 1.2 70 the battery is in an acceptable state of charge. If the readings are uniform but below 1.220 the battery should be recharged. Always remove the battery from the car for recharging. If the specific gravity of the electrolyte in one cell differs markedly from the others {i.e. the reading is 0.040 or more, lower than the remainder). then a defect must be suspected and rectified as necessary. b. Electrolyte level check Ensure that the battery is in a high state of charge (see Fig. B2·42 Fuel mixture weakening device filter Electrolyte specific gravity check).

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82 B2-27

The level of the battery electrolyte in each cell dip/main beam, headlamp flash {if fitted)]. When should be approximately 5 mm (0.250 in) above the checking the fog lamps the main lighting switch must tops of the separators {Lucas or Varta battery) or be on. In the Park position the front fog lamps must be contacting the blue bar situated above the separators switched on before the rear fog lamps will illuminate. {Chloride battery). When only the rear fog lamps are switched on If the electrolyte level is low top-up using distilled with the main lighting switch in the Head position, water until the level is attained. Do not overfill. these lamps will be extinguished when the headlamps Always ensure the top of the battery is clean prior are switched to main beam. If both front and rear fog to removal of the vent cover(s}. lamps are in use the rear fog lamps will remain illuminated. Battery voltage check The respective facia tell-tales should also be Applicable to sealed for life {maintenance free} checked for illumination during these operations. batteries With the lighting switch in the Park and Head The state of charge of a sealed for life battery can position, switch on the ignition. Check the facia only be checked by taking a voltage reading at the instruments for illumination; the panel illumination battery terminals, using either a digital voltmeter or dimming switch should also be checked for correct multimeter. The instrument used must be accurate to operation. within 0.1 volts. Before a voltage reading is taken on batteries that 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation have recently received a charge, the residual effects of Before carrying out the following checks firmly apply the surface charge on the battery plates must be the parking brake; ensure the gear range selector is in removed to avoid a false reading. This surface charge the Park position and remove the gear range selector can be removed by applying an electrical load to the cut-out from the fuseboard. battery (e.g. by either connecting a high rate discharge tester for 1 5 seconds or if the battery is fitted to a car. switching on the headlamps for one minute). After Ignition and oil warning lamps wards. allow the battery to stand for a further one Turn the ignition key to the RUN position, the ignition minute before a voltage reading is taken. and oil pressure warning lamps should illuminate. Start Compare the reading obtained with the following the engine. both lamps should extinguish; switch off table to ascertain the state of charge. the ignition. When the ignition key is turned to the ACC position Voltage State of charge the ignition warning lamp only should illuminate. 12.8 100% 12.6 82% 12.5 75% Warning panel cluster lamps 12.4 60% Move the gear range selector lever to the D position (do not insert the gear range selector cut-out). Apply the footbrake then turn the ignition key to the A minimum reading of 12.5 volts (corresponding start position. All the warning panel cluster lamps to 75% charge) is acceptable. Below this reading the should illuminate. With the ignition held in the start battery should be recharged. Instructions for charging position, turn the main lighting switch to the Park and are provided on the battery label. Head positions; the intensity of illumination of the ice and low fuel warning panels should reduce. Switch off 2 Clean and check the battery terminals the ignition and lighting switch. The top of the battery should always be kept clean and The hydraulic system warning panel situated at the dry. top of the warning panel cluster should also be checked If corrosion of the battery leads or terminals has as follows. occured it should be removed as follows. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Disconnect the battery leads and using hot water Depressurize the hydraulic system by actuating the or a dilute solution of ammonia carbonate, wash them brake pedal between 50 and 60 times. The two brake thoroughly until all corrosion has been removed. pressure warning panels should illuminate. Finally wash with clean water to remove the ammonia When the panels have illuminated start and run the carbonate solution. Remove any corrosive deposit from the terminal engine. Both panels should extinguish after posts using a cloth moistened with ammonia approximately two minutes indicating that the hydraulic carbonate solution then wash with clean water. systems are pressurized. Switch off the ignition. Dry the battery leads and terminal posts. Connect the battery leads to the terminal posts. Liberally coat Fasten seat belt warning lamp the terminals with petroleum jelly. To check the seat belt warning lamp, open and close each door in turn; observe the lamp operation. 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation The seat belt warning panel should illuminate Actuate the respective switches and check for lamp whenever a door is opened and extinguish illumination and function [i.e. turn flashers. headlamp approximately seven seconds after the door is closed.

TSO 4406

Printed in Ellgland June 1985 © Rons-Royce Motors Limited 1985 82·28

Note lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the All doors must be fully closed for the lamp to rear section of the four roof lamps should illuminate. extinguish (i.e. not on first catch). Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain illuminated for approximately seven seconds then Hazard warning indicator extinguish. Repeat the check with the passenger door. Depress the hazard warning switch, check that all the When carrying out these checks also ensure that the turn indicators and the facia warning lamp are flashing. door open warning lamp and step lamp are illuminated when the door is open. 5 Check all interior lamps for operation Check the operation of the rear compartment roof Ensure all the doors are fully closed and the interior lamps by operating the three position switch situated lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the in each arm rest, ensuring that the car doors are rear section of the central roof lamps should illuminate. closed. Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain Press the outer section of the switch, the front illuminated for approximately seven seconds. section of the respective roof lamp should illuminate. On 1985 model year cars the rear roof lamps and Press the inner section of the switch, the rear section footwell lamps should also illuminate when the door is of both rear roof lamps should illuminate. With the opened. If the gear selector lever is moved from the switch in the central position both roof lamps should Park position on these cars, with the ignition key in the be off. RUN position, the lamps will extinguish immediately Repeat the check on the opposita switch. all the doors are closed. When carrying out this Check the front compartment roof lamps as operation also check that the door open warning lamp described in the section for cars, other than Corniche. and step lamp are illuminated with the door in the open position. These lamps should extinguish Convertible cars immediately the door is fully closed. Seven interior lamps are provided, one in each door. Repeat the check on the remaining door(s). two in the hood above the rear window, one in the Note front face of each rear seat outer arm rest and one If the doors are only closed to the first catch position above the facia stowage compartment. the lamps should remain illuminated. Open the driver's door; both roof lamps, the lamp in each rear arm rest and the lamp in each door should Check the operation of the front compartment illuminate. Fully close the door, the lamps should all personal lamps as follows. extinguish, except the rear roof lamps which should Withdraw the main lighting switch; the front remain illuminated for approximately seven seconds. section of the driver's roof lamp should illuminate. Repeat this procedure with the passenger door. Operate the map lamp switch, the front section of Withdraw the main lighting switch; both rear roof the front passenger's roof lamp should illuminate. lamps should illuminate. On 1985 model year cars fitted with vanity mirror Operate the facia switch marked MAP; the lamp illumination. move the switch to the mirror position. situated above the facia stowage compartment should Lower the passengers sun visor; the lamp situated illuminate. above the visor should illuminate. With the doors closed, operate the switches Withdraw the visor from its retaining clip; the situated in the end of the arm rest. The rear roof lamp lamp should extinguish. The tamp should also and rear compartment arm rest lamp situated on the extinguish when the visor is moved to its raised same side of the car as the switch should illuminate. position, even when the switch is on. The operation of the rear roof lamps should be 6 Check the horns for operation checked by operating the switches situated on the rear Examine the electrical connections to each horn to compartment vanity mirror surrounds. ensure they are in good condition. Clean the horns and Press the upper portion of the three position remove any foreign matter that may have collected in switch; the front section of the respective roof lamp the horn trumpets. should illuminate. Press the lower portion of the Switch on the ignition; press the horn button switch and the rear section of both rear roof lamps several times to ensure the horn button is making a should illuminate. With the switch in the central good contact and that both horns are functioning position both lamps should be off. Repeat the correctly each time it is pressed. operation on the opposite side of the car. On Camargue cars press the outer of the two 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp switches situated in the arm rest; this should washer reservoirs illuminate the rear section of both rear roof lamps. a. Windscreen washer reseivoir. Pressing the inner switch should illuminate the front The filler is located in the engine compartment. section of the respective roof lamps. Repeat the Remove the filler cap and add the correct mixture of operation on the opposite side of the car. windscreen washer fluid and distilled water to the reservoir until the maximum level is attained. Comiche Saloon cars Topping-up level. Ensure the doors are fully closed and the interior Cars with the reservoir situated in the engine

June 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82 82-29 compartment - bottom of filler neck. impinge on the windscreen approximately 41 9 mm Cars with the reservoir situated beneath the wing • ( 1 6.5 in) from the centre line of the windscreen and 44,0 mm (1.750 in) below the filler neck. 190 mm (7.5 in) below the windscreen top finisher. b. Headlamp washer reservoir. The wash/wipe function should continue until the On 1985 Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne model switch is released. year cars a headlamp washer system is fitted. The On release of the push button switch the washer reservoir is housed under the front right-hand wing and should cease while the wipers should continue for the filler is located in the engine compartment towards approximately four strokes before returning to the park the front of the car. position. The reservoir should be topped-up with clean water Turn the main lighting switch to the HEAD position. until the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler neck. The headlamps cleaning function will only operate when During winter conditions, a solution of 30% the headlamps are illuminated. Press the wash/wipe isopropyl alcohol and 70% water should be used. This switch, the power wash jets should only operate for half mixture will provide frost protection down to a a second when the wash/wipe switch is depressed, To temperature of approximately -1 o•c (14 °F). .repeat the wash it will be necessary to release and then depress the switch again. 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper The headlamp brushes and washer jets should blades and headlamp wash brushes operated until the switch is released, the brush giving Lift the wiper arms from the windscreen and inspect one full wipe cycle after the jet flow has ceased. them for wear or damage. Renew the blades if necessary. 10 Check the alternator for correct operation To remove a blade, lift the wiper arm away from For details of the alternator test procedure and brush the windscreen then press the small tab situated in the · renewal. reference should be made to Chapter M of end of the arm to release the blade. Check that the· the Workshop Manual. new blade is secured by the retaining catch then return the blade to the windscreen. Automatic air conditioning system On late Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from cars the wiper blade removal procedure is as follows. obstruction a. Driver's side of the windscreen. Lift the wiper arm Check the air intake grilles and foam filter. situated from the windscreen. Push half of the blade away from behind the bonnet. for obstruction (leaves. dirt, etc.). the arm, until the blade is released from its location Carefully remove the grille retaining screws. lift the clip. To fit the new blade, position it on the wiper arm grilles and filters from the body and clean all parts and press it firmly into the location clip. including the air intake ducts; also ensure the air b. On the passenger's side of the windscreen, lift the intake duct drain tubes are free from obstruction. wiper arm from the windscreen and pivot the blade through 180°. Press the small release tag, situated on 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct the underside of the blade pivot block and push the operation blade out of the crooked end of the wiper arm. For details of the procedure required to carry out this Withdraw the wiper blade from the arm. Fit the new operation reference should be made to Chapter C of blade by reversing the removal procedure. the Workshop Manual. Note Care must be taken during these operations to ensure Body that the wiper arm is not allowed to spring back onto 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat the windscreen when the blade has been removed, belts otherwise damage to the windscreen could occur. The following checks should be carried out on the front and rear retractable seat belts. On Corniche, Continental, and Camargue cars Fully withdraw the seat belt from the reel; fitted with headlamp wash/wipe brushes, examine the examine the webbing for any signs of wear or damage. brushes for wear or damage and renew if necessary. Allow the belt to return to the stowed position. To renew a brush. carefully remove the retaining To check the operation of the retractable belt, fit nut from the spindle. Note the position of the brush the belt and then give the webbing of the diagonal belt then withdraw it from the splined spindle. Fit the new a sharp pull. Ensure that the belt locks and then · brush by reversing the removal procedure ensuring returns to the normal roller action immediately the belt that the brush is in the correct park position. is released. With the fastening tongue of the belt locked in the 9 Check the windscreen wash/wipe and retaining clasp; ensure the tongue is securely held and headlamps power wash/wipe for correct operation is released immediately the release button marked Before carrying out the following check ensure that the PRESS is operated. windscreen is clean. The alternative method of checking the seat belts Switch on the ignition and press the windscreen is to select an open stretch of road, then when the wash/wipe switch. The windscreen wipers should road is free from any potential danger. accelerate the operate and the fluid from the washer jets should car to 24 km/h (15 mile/h) and brake sharply from

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2-30

this speed; ensure that the belt locks and then must be checked with the hood in the fully open subsequently releases. lf this method of test is used. it (down) position. will be necessary to carry a passenger(s) to enable the The fluid reservoir is situated adjacent to the passenger seat belts to be tested. stowage recess below the luggage compartment floor Check the rear seat lap belt for condition and similar to that shown in figure 82-43. correct locking and release. To gain access to the reservoir, turn back the Report any defects to the owner. carpet on the right-hand side of the luggage When seat belt replacement is necessary only compartment to expose the recess covers; remove the belts approved by Rolls-Royce Motors Limited should covers. be fitted. Unscrew the reservoir filler cap and check the fluid level. The correct level is 25 mm ( 1.0 in) below 2 Check that all body drains are free from the filler neck. obstruction If necessary top-up the reservoir with an approved Examine the body drain holes; remove any foreign fluid. Under no circumstances must a castor oil matter that may be obstructing the holes. Take care based fluid be used. not to damage the paintwork. Wheels 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering 1 Check all tyre pressures bolt Check the tyre pressures including the spare when the Turn back the carpet on the luggage compartment tyres are cold; adjust if necessary. The inflation floor to expose the spare wheel inflation trap and spare pressure of the spare tyre should be adjusted to the wheel carrier lowering bolt head. Remove the inflation highest tyre pressure (i.e. rear wheel). trap cover; if a spare wheel retainer is fitted, it should Do not check the pressures when the tyres are be removed. warm (e.g. after the vehicle has run). Rotate the spare wheel bolt anti·clockwise until Always ensure that the valve caps are fitted aher the carrier is fully lowered. Remove the spare wheel checking. from the carrier. Lubricate the carrier lowering bolt using a 2 Check the condition and tread depth of the recommended lubricant. Raise and lower the carrier to tyres distribute the lubricant over the full length of the Examine the tyres, including the spare. for any signs of carrier bolt. damage or tyre wall cracking. etc. Check the condition of the spare wheel as Carefully remove any stones or other objects that described under the heading Wheels. may be lodged in the tyre treads. Fit the spare wheel onto the carrier. Ensure that Check the depth of tread at several points around the inflation valve is in line with the inflation trap in each wheel using a tread depth gauge. the luggage compartment floor. then fully raise the To enable a visual check to be made, tread depth earner. indicators are incorporated into the tyre construction. Fasten the spare wheel retainer (if fitted), and fit These indicators are integral moulded ribs. spaced at the tyre inflation trap rubber and carpet. intervals around the circumference of the tyre. and extend across the full width of the tread in all primary 4 Check the fluid level in the power operated grooves. When one or more of these indicators are hood reservoir flush with the tread, only 1,6 mm (Y1s in) or less of Convertible cars tread depth remains, and a new tyre is required. The level of the fluid in the hydraulic pump reservoir If the condition of the tyres is not satisfactory or the tread depths do not conform to the legal requirements of the country in which the car is operating, the owner should be notified and asked to authorize the fitting of new tyres. For full information on tyre fitting, balancing. etc., reference should be made to Chapter R of the Workshop Manual.

June l 985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2 B2·31 should be fully inspected for any leaks. fouls, etc., and rectified as·necessary. The transmission fluid level, should be finally checked immediately after the test, while the fluid is at normal running temperature and topped-up if necessary (see Check the transmission fluid level). Ensure that all controls, door handles, steering wheel, etc., are clean and that any dirt which may be attributed to the service schedule is completely removed.

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1985 © Rolls•Rovce Motors Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82/1 B2/1-1

Service schedule procedures . Cars conforming to Australian specifications

Contents Pages Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1 986 model year cars 82/1-3

TSD4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Moto:s Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82/1 82/1-3

Service schedule procedures 1986 model year cars

WARNING.

Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363. Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before titting any seals, hoses, Fig. B2/1 • 1 Crankcase breather - 'A' bank pipes, etc.• that they are suitable for a mineral oil system. For details of correct component identification Headlamp washers reservoir reference should be made to Chapter G of the Weekly; check the washer fluid level; top-up if Workshop Manual. necessary. Always ensure that a sealed container of Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM} is fitted Hydraulic reservoirs adjacent to the battery. Monthly; check the level of hydraulic mineral oil in the Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the reservoirs. systems when work is being carried out. Depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until the low brake pressure warning General information panels on the facia illuminate. Continue to pump the The information contained in this chapter should be pedal for at least a further 20 applications to ensure used in conjunction with the appropriate service complete depressurization. Start and run the engine schedule charts and Workshop Manual. for four minutes with the car unladen. prior to checking the level. Top-up if necessary to the indicated Car protection maximum level. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Prior to commencing a service schedule the car should Oil (LHM). Refer to page 82/1-20 for further be suitably protected. For this purpose car protection information before carrying out this operation. kit RH 2662, wing covers RH 2684, and wing cover liners RH 2685 should be used. Engine cooling system Every three months; check the coolant level. If Regular maintenance necessary top-up with the correct anti-freeze/water In addition to the service schedules listed, the mixture (see page B2/1 • 13). following maintenance should be carried out

Engine Crankcase emission control system Weekly or every 800 kilometres (500 miles) 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame trap whichever is the earlier; check the engine oil by means Crankcase emissions are controlled by two separate of the dipstick; top-up if necessary. breather pipes. From the rear of 'A' bank cylinder head a moµlded Lamp units rubber hose connects the crankcase to the air intake Weekly; check the lamp units for operation; rectify any housing, immediately upstream of the air meter but · faults. downstream of the air cleaner/silencer assembly. From the front of 'B' bank cylinder head a second Tyre pressures moulded rubber tube connects the crankcase via the Weekly; check the tyre pressures including the spare; oil filler (which has a sealed cap) to a pipe leading to adjust if necessary. the plenum chamber. This pipe assembly incorporates a restrictor to control the flow. Windscreen washers reservoir When fitting the flame trap assemblies, the Weekly; check the washer fluid level; top-up if longer assembly should be fitted to the 'B' bank necessary. oil filler connection.

TSO 4406

Printed in Engl~nd July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2/1·4

Crankcase breather · A' bank - To service Locate the crankcase breather connection at the Withdraw the windscreen wiper motor relay (wiper 3) rear of 'A' bank cylinder head. •(see fig. B2/1-27. item A} situated on a bracket Slacken the worm drive clips securing the ends of adjacent to the windscreen washer.reservoir. the breather hose, free the joints and withdraw the Remove the cover from the windscreen wiper hose. drive mechanism to gain access to 'A' bank crankcase Unscrew the three setscrews securing the breather connection. breather take-off flange to the crankcase connections. Withdraw the thre.e setscrews and collect the washer fitted under the head of each one. Lift the solenoid bracket from the vicinity of the connection. Free the joint and lift the elbow casting from the engine. Discard the gasket. Invert the casting and remove the circlip. Collect the retaining washer and withdraw the flame trap assembly. Wash the flame trap in clean fuel and dry with compressed air. Clean any deposits from inside the breather hose. Fit the 'A' bank breather by reversing the procedure given for removal, noting that a new gasket shoutd be fitted between the breather elbow casting and the engine. )

Crankcase breather 'B' bank - To service Fig. B2/1-2 Crankcase breather- 'B' bank Slacken the worm drive clip securing the hose from the auxiliary air valve to the metal breather pipe. Withdraw the hose. Slacken the worm drive clip securing each end of the rubber breather hose and free both hose joints. Unscrew the two setscrews securing the metal breather pipe to the plenum chamber. Collect the washers, withdraw the pipe and discard the gasket. Withdraw both the metal breather pipe and the rubber breather hose. _ Unscrew the setscrew securing the adapter housing to the oil filler and collect the washer. Withdraw the housing (slight resistance may be felt due to the rubber sealing ring). Remove the flame trap assembly. Wash the.flame trap assembly in clean fuel and dry with compressed air. Clean any deposit from inside the breather pipe Fig. B2/1 ·3 Oxygen sensor connection and hose. Inspect the inside of the metal pipe to ensure that the restrictor is not blocked. Assemble the ·e· bank breather by reversing the removal procedure noting that a new gasket should be fitted between the metal pipe and the plenum chamber. Ensure that the rubber ·o· ring on the oil filler connection is in good condition

Exhaust emission control system 1 Renew the oxygen sensor and reset the elapsed mileage indicator Oxygen sensor From inside the engine compartment locate the blue oxygen sensor cable where it exits from the loom adjacent to the left-hand blower motor (see fig. Fig. B2/1 ·4 Oxygen sensor 82/1-3).

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82/1 B2/1·5

Unclip the blue cable and carefully ease it upwards until the white moulded junction piece, connecting the blue cable to the black cable is visible. Note the run of both cables and disconnect them at the white junction block. From beneath the car. clean the area around the oxygen sensor before it is unscrewed and discarded. Before fitting the new oxygen sensor. carefully smear · Never-see?' assembly compound onto the threads. Important Do not allow the assembly compound to contact the exhaust gas slots (the slotted shield below the threaded portion). otherwise damage to the oxygen sensor and catalytic converter may result

Screw the oxygen sensor into the exhaust pipe and tighten to between 50 Nm and 60 Nm {5, 1 kgf m Fig. 92/1-5 Elapsed mileage indicator and 6, 1 kgf m, 3 7 lbf ft and 44 lbf ft). Feed the oxygen sensor cable upwards into the engine compartment. adjacent to the left-hand blower 1 2 3 motor. Connect the black cable to the blue cable and suitably clip the cables to the loom. lmportant Always ensure that any free cable is clipped in the engine compartment. The cable should be reasonably taut under the car. otherwise loose cable could foul the hot exhaust pipe and become damaged.

Elapsed mileage indicator Open the luggage compartment. Release the Tenax clip situated adjacent to the right-hand rear lamps access point Unscrew the Pozidriv screws securing the side panel carpet in position. Unscrew sufficient screws to allow the rear of the carpet panel to be moved inwards to reveal the elapsed mileage indicator (see fig. B2/1-5). Firmly depress the reset button. Switch on the ignition. Start and run the engine, noting that as the oxygen Fig. 82/1·6 Exhaust gas recirculation system sensor reaches its normal operating temperature 1 'B' bank exhaust manifold take-off point the warning lamp on the facia is extinguished. 2 Exhaust gas recirculation (E.G.R.) valve Stop the engine and fit the carpet panel. 3 E.G.R cut-off solenoid

2 Remove and clean the E.G.R. valve and feed pipes (see fig. B2/1-6) Note Unscrew the setscrew retaining the heatshield to the The valve upper securing nut is unscrewed to remove plenum chamber cover. collect the washer. the heatshield. Unscrew the setscrew securing the heatshield to the top of the plenum chamber, collect the large Withdraw the valve and discard the gasket diameter washer. There are two E.G.R. pipes joined together Unscrew the long setscrew that forms the lower adjacent to the auxiliary air valve by a sealing ring and mounting for the auxiliary air valve. Withdraw the split clamp. setscrew and collect the washer and distance pieces. Lower pipe Unscrew the nut from the E.G.R. valve top mount, Locate the joint adjacent to the auxiliary air valve. collect the washer. unscrew the two nuts and collect the washers. Free Withdraw the heatshield. the clamp and withdraw the bolts together with both Detach the vacuum signal hose from the E.G.R. halves of the clamp bracket. Collect the sealing ring. valve. · Unscrew the ·two nuts from the exhaust manifold Unscrew the lower retaining nut and collect the joint Free the joint, withdraw the pipe and discard the washer. gasket

TSO 4406

Printed in England July_1985 © Rolls•Rovce Motors Limited 1985 B2/1·6

Upper pipe Connect an electric impulse tachometer to the Unscrew the two setscrews securing the pipe flange engine in accordance with the manufacturer's to the plenum chamber; collect the washers from the instructions. setscrews. Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied and Withdraw the pipe and discard the gasket. that the gear range selector is in the Park position. With a suitable sc,aper, remove all carbon from Start and run the engine until normal operating the valve, mounting flange faces, plenum chamber temperature is attained. connection. distribution pipes, and joint faces. Ensure that the engine has run at least 15 Using a wire brush fitted into a portable drill minutes after the engine coolant thermostat has complete the cleaning operations. opened. Before fitting the components to the engine. Allow the engine to return to the idle speed. thoroughly blow out the components with compressed Increase the engine speed slowly noting the air to remove all carbon pa~icles. operation of the E.G. R. valve. Fit the components by reversing the procedure The E.G.R. valve should commence to open at given for removal, noting the following points. between 1550 rev/min and 1850 rev/min. ~nsure that the valve pintle is secure on the valve stem. 4 Check the condition and tension of the air Always use new gaskets. pump drive belt Before commencing to adjust the drive belt inspect it 3 Check the e:G. R. valve for correct operation for signs of wear or cracking. If the belt is found The operation of the E.G.A. valve only requires unsatisfactory it should be renewed. checking under no load conditions, as follows. The belt tension must be checked at a point midway between the two pulleys (see fig. B2/1;7) by use of a belt tension meter or by applying a spring balance to give a 9.50 mm {0.375 in) belt deflection at a specified load . .Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent belt slip.

Coolant pump to air pump Load may be applied on either side of the belt run.

New belt and retensioning load Belt tension meter 18, 1 kgf to 22. 7 kgf (40 lbf to 50 lbf) Spring balance 3,6 kgf to 5,9 kgf {8 lbf to 13 lbf)

The tension of the belt is adjusted by altering the Fig. B2/1·7 Air pump drive bait adjustment position of the air pump. and tension check point Slacken the air pump pivot setscrew. Slacken the setscrew securing the air pump to the adjustment strut Slacken the adjustment strut pivot setscrew. Turn the air pump around its pivot point to adjust the belt tension and tighten the setscrew in the adjustment strut slot. Check the belt tension and repeat the adjustment operation if necessary. When the belt tension is correct tighten the remaining two setscrews.

5 Check the air injection system for leaks and correct operation System operation Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Disconnect the hoses from the air injection manifolds (see fig. B2/1-8) and suitably blank the manifold connections. It may be necessary to slacken the setscrew securing the air switching valve Fig. 82/1 ·8 Air injection system manifolds mounting bracket, so that the valve assembly can be disconnected and blanked swivelled to gain access to the connections.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2/1 82/1-7

If preferred, it is permissible to remove the short hose to ·A' bank manifold. Locate the blue oxygen sensor cable where it exits from the loom adjacent to the left-hand blower motor (see fig. B2/1 ·3). Ease the cable upwards until the white moulded junction piece, connecting the blue cable to the black cable is visible. Disconnect the oxygen sensor at this junction, ensuring that the black cable remains taut beneath the car. Start the engine and measure the time taken from the end of the engine cranking to the switching of the air delivery from the air injection hoses. This should be between 90 seconds and 150 seconds. Check both the air switching valve solenoid and Fig. 82/1-9 Air injection system switching valve the engine running sensor/electronic timer assembly if to air cleaner hose disconnected for the switching of the air is outside the specified times. leak check If no air is delivered towards the air manifolds, refer to the Workshop Manual TSO 4400, Chapter U. Connect both the blue and the black oxygen sensor cables. Continue to run the engine until normal operating temperature is attained. Stop the engine. Start and run the engine, ensure that the oxygen sensor warning lamp is extinguished within a few seconds and at exactly the same time the injected air is switched from the air manifolds to the air cleaner (this can be detected by a change in the sound of the air discharge). If the engine is not at normal operating temperature and the oxygen sensor warning lamp takes more than 90 seconds to extinguish, the air may be switched to the air cleaner before the warning lamp is extinguished. If this happens ensure that the engine is fully warmed-up and repeat the operation. Fig. B2/1·10 Fuel evaporative emission control If at any time the oxygen sensor warning lamp is canister and mounting bracket extinguished and the air is not switched from the setscrews manifolds to the air cleaner, there is a fault and serious damage to the catalytic converter could result if the engine is run in this condition. Refer to the Workshop air cleaner. This change can be detected by the ·noise Manual TSD 4400, Chapter U for details of the the air will make as it leaves the open connection of rectification procedure. the air switching valve. When the air is switched towards the air cleaner, System leak check stop the engine. Wait a few seconds, start the engine Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. and continue the examination. Repeat this procedure Visually inspect the condition of all hoses. pipes, until the inspection of the system is complete. and joints associated with the air injection system. If an air leak is suspected it is permissible to coat Locate the blue oxygen sensor cable where it exits the suspect component with a soap solution, soap from the loom adjacent to the left-hand blower motor bubbles will confirm an air leak. (see fig. 82/1 ·3). Fit the disconnected hose to the air switching Ease the cable upwards until the white moulded valve and secure by tightening the worm drive clip. junction piece, connecting the blue cable to the black cable is vis.ible. Disconnect the oxygen sensor at this Fuel evaporative emission control system junction, ensuring that the black cable remains taut 1 Renew the evaporative emission control canister beneath the car. Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Disconnect the hose from the air switching valve Locate the control canister under the left-hand to the air cleaner, at the valve {see fig. B2/1·9). front wing (see fig. B2/1 • 1 0). Using the special pliers Start and run the engine. RH 8090 remove the securing clip from the canister Listen carefully for any evidence of an air leak end of the fuel tank to canister flexible hose. from the system. After 1 Yi minutes to 2Yi minutes the Withdraw both hoses fitted to the control canister. air will be switched from the air manifolds towards the Label each one to facilitate assembly.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 82/1-8

Unscrew the four setscrews retaining the control tighten the retaining worm drive clip. canister in position (see fig. 82/1·10). Support the Ensure that the canister is in the correct position weight of the canister bJfore the last setscrew is relative to the mounting bracket. removed. Collect the washer fitted under the head of Fit the assembly to the vehicle by reve,sing the each setscrew. procedure given for removal, noting that a new hose Withdraw the control canister from under the wing. securing clip should be used. Note the position of the control canister in relation to the mounting bracket and unscrew the retaining 2 Check the condition of all pipes, hoses, and worm drive clip. connections Fit the new canister to the mounting bracket and Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Locate the fuel evaporative emission control canister. Withdraw the fuel tank evaporative hose from the canister and connect it to the test equipment shown in figure B2/1 • 11. Apply air pressure to the fuel tank hose via the test equipment until a reading of 380 mm t 15 in) H20 is attained and close the pressure supply. After five minutes again check the pressure reading, this should not have fallen by more than 12,7 mm (0.5 in). If the pressure drop is more than 1 2, 7 mm (0.5 in), progressively treat all joints in the system with soap solution to detect air leaks. Rectify any air leaks and again leak check the system. During the five minutes leak down, visually inspect the hoses, pipes, and connections of the system that are routed under the car. Commence where the hose exits from the body adjacent to the left·hand rear road spring and follow the system to the control canister. Ensure that the hoses are secure in the mounting clips. When the system is satisfactory, detach the test equipment and connect the hose to the control canister. Secure the hose with a new clip.

3 Check the purge flow rate Fig.B2/1·11 Leak check test equipment Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. 1 Connection to fuel tank/canister hose Remove the retaining clip from the purge line 2 _Pump restrictor hose. 3 One-way pressure valve Disconnect the hose at the purge line restrictor. Leave the restrictor in the hose to the engine (see fig. B2/1·12}. Connect a rotameter assembly RH 8725 into the line, between the restrictor and the open pipe to the valance connection. Connect an impulse tachometer to the engine in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Start the engine. Raise the engine speed to 2500 rev/min and note the flow reading on the rotameter, this should be between 35 ft:3/h and 55 ft:3/h. If the purge flow rate is outside the limits specified. refer to the Workshop Manual TSD 4400, Chapter U. Engine 1 Change the engine oil Fig. B2/1·12 Disconnecting the purge line The sump should be drained when the engine is 1 Hose from canister warm, preferably after the car has completed a run. 2 Restrictor To drain the oil, position the car over a pit or on a 3 Hose to throttle body ramp.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82/1 82/1-9

Place a container in position beneath the drain plug situated on the right-hand side of the sump {see fig. 82/1-13). Remove the drain plug and allow the oil to drain from the sump. Do not flush the sump with. paraffin or petrol. Fit the drain plug ensuring that the washer is correctly positioned and in good condition. Fill the engine sump with recommended lubricant until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

2 Renew the engine oil filter Drain the engine oil as described under Change the engine oil. -Place ·a container under the filter to collect any oil that may be spilt. Remove the filter by unscrewing it from the engine in an anti-clockwise direction (see fig. 82/1-14). Fig. 82/1-13 Engine sump drain plug Thoroughly clean the filter seating face on the engine. Lightly smear the rubber sealing ring on the new filter with clean engine oil. Screw the filter onto the pedestal until the rubber seal contacts the sealing face then tighten the filter a further half turn; do not overtighten. Fill the engine with clean engine oil until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Run the engine and' check the filter joint for leakage. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

Check the enijine oil level In order to obtain an accurate indication of the oil level. ensure that the car is standing on level ground. Check the oil leve! by means of the dipstick marked ENGINE (see fig. 82/1·15). It is recommended that the oil level is checked when the engine is cold. If the engine has been running, suHicient time should elapse after it has Fig. 82/1-14 Engine oil filter location stopped to allow the oil to drain into the sump. Do not check the oil level with the engine running. To replenish the sump with oil, open the filler cap marked ENGINE {see fig. 62/1-15). Add clean oil to the engine and after allowing sufficient time for the oil to reach the sump check that the oil is up to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. Important The engine lubrication system incorporates a thermostatically controlled oil cooler, therefore if the oil has been drained from the engine the following additional procedure must be carried out to ensure the correct oil level is obtained. Carry out the normal topping-up procedure as described previously to obtain the maximum oil level reading on the dipstick. Drive the car to enable the engine oil to anain the temperature required to actuate the oil cooler thermostat. To ascertain that the thermostat has actuated, a rise in the temperature of the oil cooler return pipe Fig. B2/1-15 Engine oil filler and dipstick

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rons-Royce Motors Limited 1 985 82/1-10

{see fig. B2/1-16) can be felt This temperature rise fitted. Always renew both belts in a matched pair even occurs as hot oil begins to flow from the oil filter if only one ·belt is faulty. housing, where the thermostat is situated, to the oil Two belt tension loads are specified; a new belt cooler mounted in front of the coolant radiator matrix. load for replacement (new) belts and a retensioning Do not attempt to attain the required engine oil load for belts which are satisfactory for further service. temperature rise with the car stationary. The belt tensions must be checked at a point When it has been ascertained that the engine oil midway between two pulleys (s&t:l fig. 82/1-16) by has been passing through the cooler, thus filling this use of a belt tension meter or by applying a spring part of the lubrication system, check the oil level in the balance to give a 9,50 mm (0.375 in) belt deflection normal manner as described previously. at a specified load. The variation in the spring balance loads for 3 Check the drive belts similar belt tension meter loads is due to the varying Before commencing to adjust the drive belts inspect length of belt between individual belt centres. them for si.Qns of wear or cracking. Any belts found Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent unsatisfactory should be renewed. belt slip. .If after adjustment, a matched pair of belts have a marked variation in tension, a new pair should be Crankshaft to coolant pump Load may be applied on either side of the belt run.

New belt load Belt tension meter 2 7,2 kgf to 31 •7 kgf (60 lbf to 70 lbf) Spring balance 7 ,5 kgf to 8,2 kgf (16.5 lbf to 18 lbf) Retensioning load Belt tension meter 22, 7 kgf to 2 7,2 kgf (50 lbf to 60 lbf) Spring balance 6,8 kgf to 7,5 kgf (15 lbf to 16.5 lbf)

The tension of this matched pair of belts is adjusted by altering the position of the jockey pulley (see fig. 62/1-17). Slacken the nut and setscrew securing the jockey pulley arm. Pivot the jockey pulley to adjust the belt Fig. B2/1-16 Engine oil cooler return pipe tension then tighten the nut and setscrew. Check the belt tension and repeat the adjustment procedure if necessary.

Coolant pump to alternator Load may be applied on either side of the belt run.

New belt load Belt tension meter 36,3 kgf to 40,8 kgf {80 lbf to 90 lbf) Spring balance 5,0 kgf to 5,9 kgf (11 lbf to 13 lbf) Retensioning load Belt tension meter 31, 7 kgf to 36,3 kgf (70 lbf to 80 lbf} Spring balance 4.1 kgf to 5,0 kgf (9 tbf to 11 lbf)

The tension of the belt is adjusted by altering the position of the alternator ( see fig. 82/1 • 1 7). Slacken the setscrew securing the alternator at the upper mounting point. Slacken the setscrew securing the adjustment strut to the front mounting plate, also the nut and bolt in the adjustment slot. Pivot the alternator to adjust the belt tension then· tighten the nut and bolt in the Fig. 82/1-17 Engine drive belt adjustment and adjustment slot. Check the belt tension and repeat the tension check points adjustment if necessary.

July 1985 SEAY.CE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82/1 B2/1-11

When the tension is correct finally tighten the The air filter element is situated in the air intake remaining setscrews and check the tension again. housing at the front right-hand side of the engine compartment ( see fig. B2/1 • 19). Crankshaft to steering pump/refrigeration To gain access to the element unfasten the two compressor toggle clips retaining the air blending valve housing to Load must be applied on the top of the belts. the air cleaner housing. Carefully free the joint and Each belt to be checked individually. move the housing away from the air cleaner. Unscrew the worm drive clip securing the engine intake hose to the air cleaner. Detach the hose. New belt load Support the air cleaner housing and unfasten the Belt tension meter 40,8 kgf to 45,5 kgf three toggle clips securing the housing to the valance. (90 lbf to 100 lbf) Carefully free the joint. then move the housing Spring balance 6.3 kgf to 7,7 kgf towards the engine and withdraw the housing and air ( 1 4 lbf to 1 7 lbf) filter element from the car. Retensioning load Remove the filter element from the housing. Belt tension meter 36,3 kgf to 40,8 kgf Ensure that the inside of the air cleaner housing {80 lbf to 90 lbf) (both the sections removed and fixed section in the Spring balance 4, 1 kgf to 6,3 kgf valance) is clean. (9 lbf to 14 lbf) Inspect the joint seals for serviceability. Renew if necessary. The tension of this matched pair of belts is To fit the filter element proceed as follows. adjusted by altering the position of the steering pump Locate the large end of the new filter element (see fig. B2/1 • 17). Slacken the setscrew in the onto the locating spigot on the inside of the removable steering pump mounting bracket slot situated below half of the housing. the pump pulley. Carefully position the housing and filter onto the Slacken the pump pivot setscrew and the union valance allowing the filter to pass into the valance on the supply hose at the rear of the pump. mounted section of the housing. Locate the small Pivot the pump to adjust the belt tension then (blank) end of the filter into the spigot in the valance tighten the setscrew in the adjustment slot. Check the housing. Align the three housing toggle clips with their belt tension and adjust again if necessary. When the respective securing points. Special care should be tension is correct tighten the pivot setscrew and again taken during these operations to ensure that the paper check the belt tension. Finally tighten the supply hose element is not damaged during insertion. connection; ensuring that the soft rubber protective Ensure that the filter is correctly positioned on the sleeve has clearance or minimal contact with the location spigots. then secure the three toggle clips. It coolant pump to manifold elbow. is ·essential that the filter is correctly located on the spigots before the toggle clips are fastened down, 4 Renew the air filter element otherwise there is a serious risk of crushing the filter Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne element

A1157

Fig. B2/1 • 18 Air filter assembly ( exploded)

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2/1-12

Fit the remaining components by reversing the 7 Check the ignition timing removal procedure {see fig. B2/1·18). Ignition timing is carried out on A 1 cylinder and ·should be 1 5°btdc at 1450 rev/min; A 1 cylinder is 5 Renew the sparking plugs the front cylinder on the right-hand side of the engine Sparking plug type Champion RN 1 2 YC or RN 1 2 Y when viewed from the driver's seat. Plug gap setting 0,89 mm (0.035 in). Important Before removing the sparking plugs the If the ignition timing is to be set, ensure that the surrounding area should be thoroughly cleaned to sparking plugs are in a good condition before running prevent the ingress of foreign matter when the plugs the engine; if they require cleaning or renewal, ensure are removed. that the gaps are set correctly (see Operation 5. Fit the new plugs ensuring that the gaps are Renew the sparking plugs). correctly set and that each plug is fitted with a sealing washer. To check the ignition timing commence by Torque tighten each plug to between 18 Nm and running the engine until normal operating temperature 23 Nm ( 1,8 kgf m and 2.3 kgf m, 13 lbf ft and 1 7 lbf ft). is attained. Switch off the engine. Connect a stroboscope and a tachometer to the 6 Lubricate the accelerator linkage engine as described in the instructions supplied with Lubricate all the accelerator linkage ball joint pivots the respective equipment. and clevis pins. On no account must the stroboscope timing Examine the ball knuckle joints for wear and lamp positive feed be connected to the ignition adjust if necessary. Renew any worn clevis pins. coil. The positive feed should be taken from a Examine the linkage for correct operation. For known 12 volt connection. details of linkage setting procedure reference should be Disconnect the vacuum advance hose from on top made to the Workshop Manual TSD 4400. Chapter U.. of the throttle housing connection and blank off the throttle housing connection. Start and run the engine at a speed of 1450 rev/min. When setting the engine speed reduce from a higher speed to 1450 rev/min. Direct the flashing light of the stroboscope onto the crankshaft damper timing marks and timing pointer; the pointer is positioned on the left-hand side of the crankshaft damper when viewed from the driver's seat. If the timing pointer does not coincide with the 15°btdc mark on the crankshaft damper adjust the ignition timing as follows. Release the clamp screw on the distributor and rotate the head of the distributor in the appropriate direction until the correct timing is obtained. Clockwise rotation of the distributor head advances the ignition and conversely anti-clockwise rotation retards the ignition. Tighten the clamp screw and check that the Fig. 82/1 • 19 Air fitter ( Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, ignition timing is between 14° and 16°btdc at 1450 and Mulsanne) rev/min (again reduce from a higher speed to 1450 rev/min).

8 Check the operation of the ignition distributor vacuum advance mechanism After completing Operation 8 continue as follows.

Vacuum advance mechanism Allow the engine to return to the idle speed and set this to 650 rev/min using the idle speed adjustment screw on top of the throttle body. Ensure that the engine speed does not dip below 650 rev/min. Direct the timing light onto the timing marks on the crankshaft damper. The timing should now be between tdc and s• btdc. Connect a vacuum pump to the distributor Fig. B2/1·20 Idle speed adjustment vacuum advance side of the capsule. Apply an initial

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82/1 82/1·13 vacuum of 635 mm Hg (25 in Hg) and then reduce Pinn Lilr• 0ff'll)) the vacuum to 508 mm Hg (20 in Hg) and maintain it Adjust the idle speed to 650 rev/min. Check that the ignition timing has advanced by between 1 0° and 1 4 ° from the· setting noted previously (timing between tdc and 8° btdc). Stop the engine, remove the test equipment and reconnect all hoses in their correct positions.

9 Check the engine idle speed Ensure that the usual workshop safety precautions are carried out and that an impulse tachometer is fitted to the engine in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. A To set the idle speed. ensure that the engine has stabilized at its normal operating temperature. This can be achieved by allowing the engine to run at idle speed for at least 15 minutes after the thermostat has opened. The opening of the thermostat can be detected by a sudden rise in the temperature of the l ,S thermostat elbow pipe. l+---1--1-- -1---+--+-'·0 O 6 0.5 Disconnect the purge line at the restrictor. Leave •c .,...... ,.__ ·•:,:...o-4,--'-t-+·.....J0 +--·.,..2s_ t--·,...o +--r ·•.... ,0,...... { s-._-.... the restrictor fitted into the hose to the engine (see fig. B ·r . so , -•o , .Jo ; -20 , -•o , l 1!> 1 20 · "' so% ,s'lli :isll ~~ is'lli 20'lli B2/1 · 12). 66 C ~"' 5 605 Disconnect the oxygen sensor cable situated in the rear left-hand corner of the engine compartment Fig. 82/1·21 Anti-freeze correction chart to give (see fig. B2/1 ·3). a 50% solution Ensure that the automatic air conditioning system A Acceptable service range of concentration is off. B Freezing point of coolant Set the engine idle speed to 650 rev/min by C Percentage concentration turning the adjustment screw situated on top of the D Volume of 100% anti-freeze to be throttle body (see fig. B2/1-20). added to maintain a 50% solution Connect the purge line hose and the oxygen after removal of the same volume sensor cable to their respective connections. of old coolant first Note Connecting the purge line may increase the idle speed and connecting the oxygen sensor cable will tend to An acceptable level of anti-freeze concentration is restore normal id.le speed. Do not attempt to correct between 45% and 50%. Therefore, as a hydrometer these small variations in idle speed. may be inaccurate where readings above 40% are expected. it is recommended that a refractometer is Engine cooling system used. 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration For details refer to Chapter L of the appropriate The cooling system is filled initially with a coolant 'Workshop Manual. solution comprising equal parts of UT 184 (BP· Hythe If a refractometer is not available and a hydrometer Chemicals) or Prestone II and water. This mixture gives has to be used. a scale reading of between 1,06 and frost protection down to a temperature of ·37°C (35°F). 1.07 should be obtained with the coolant at room The coolant should contain fifty percent of an temperature for the mixture to be correct approved anti-freeze at all times. This not only provides frost protection but also prevents corrosion of 2 Check the coolant level the coolant passages and raises the boiling Warning temperature of the coolant. Both types of cooling system become pressurized The anti-freeze concentration should be checked during engine running, therefore, extreme care in both the expansion bottle {where fitted) and the should be taken when removing the radiator cap radiator. from e warm or hot radiator. If the strength of the coolant requires increasing, sufficient cool""lt should be drained from the radiator Silver Spirit Silver Spur, and Mulsanne and replaced with undiluted anti-freeze. Afterwards run Routine check the engine until normal operating temperature is To check the level outside a normal service schedule attained and the anti-freeze has become thoroughly (e.g. Regular maintenance) and when no cooling/ mixed with the coolant Stop the engine and again heating system fault is reported or suspected, proceed check the concentration in the radiator. as follows.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls•Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2/1·14

If the engine is hot ensure that the coolant level the system should have any faults rectified and then in the translucent expansion bottle is at the MAX be pressure tested prior to carrying out the topping-up mark. Top-up if necessary and replace the expansion procedure. bottle cap. Top-up the radiator until the coolant is half·way up If the engine is cold. ensure that the coolant level the filler neck. in the translucent expansion bottle is half-way between Start and run the engine. the MIN and MAX marks. Top-up if necessary and Turn the air conditioning system function control replace the expansion bottle cap. fully clockwise to the defrost position. If the coolant level in the expansion bottle is either Set the air conditioning system override switch to below the MIN mark or there is no coolant in the the AUTO position. expansion bottle, carry out the following Full check Allow at least one minute for the air conditioning procedure. system to stabilize, then check to ensure that all air is being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is Full check delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). Ensure the· gear range selector is in the Park position This procedure opens the heater system wat~r tap. and apply the parking brake. Run the engine. without the radiator pressure cap 'Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the fitted, until normal operating temperature is attained. fuseboard. Top-up the coolant level in the radiator during this Check the coolant level in the translucent time. expansion bottle (see fig. 82/1 ·22). If the level is low Switch off the engine. or the bottle is empty, add coolant to bring the level up Fit the radiator pressure cap by pressing it firmly to the MIN mark. down and turning it fully clockwise. Ensure that the engine is not hot (to allow safe Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in removal of the radiator cap). accordance with the Routine check procedure. Remove the radiator cap in three stages as follows. Camargue Turn the cap slowly i:1nti·clockwise until a check Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position position is reached. Wait until any pressure in the and apply the parking brake. system has been released. Press down on the cap and Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the continue to turn it anti-clockwise until the cap is fuseboard. released. Start the engine and turn the air conditioning Check the coolant level in the radiator. This should function control clockwise to the defrost position and he half-way up the filler neck. set the upper system mode override switch to the If the coolant level in the radiator is cor~ect. fit the AUTO position. radiator cap by pressing it firmly down and turning it Allow approximately one minute for the system to fully clockwise. attain the required setting, then check that all air is Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is accordance with the Routine check procedure. · delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). If the coolant level in the radiator is low but visible This procedure opens the heater water tap and and no cooling/heating system fault is reported or ensures that the cooling system can be correctly suspected top-up the system using the following checked. procedure. If however the coolant is not visible or a Switch off the ignition. coolant/heating system leak is reported or suspected, Remove the radiator cap. If the engine is hot. muffle the cap with a thick cloth ,:1nd gradually turn the cap anti-clockwise until the pressure is reduced. then remove the cap. If the coolant level is low. top-up the radiator header tank with the correct anti-freeze/water mixture. The correct level is when the coolant reaches the rubber seal in the filler neck. Fit the filler cap.

3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness Examine all the coolant hose connections for signs of leakage and check the worm drive clips for tightness. Never overtighten a clip in an attempt to seal a leaking con11.ection. In the event of a hose connection leaking when the worm drive clips have been tightened, drain the cooling system to a level below the leaking hose. Fig. B2/1-22 Coolant expansion bottle (Silver Remove and inspect the hose and its connecting Spirit, Silver Spur. and Mulsanne) component for signs of damage. If necessary renew

Julv 1985 SERVCCE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2/1 B2/1·15

the faulty component and refill the system with coolant as described in Renew the coolant. 4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses Inspect all coolant hoses for signs of deterioration, cracking, weak spots, etc. Any faulty hose should be removed and a new hose fitted. When renewing a hose always ensure that it does not foul other components and that it is not kinked so as to cause complete or partial restriction of coolant flow.

5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose Drain the coolant system as described in Renew the coolant, but do not remove the engine crankcase drain plugs. Disconnect the heater tap feed hose from the engine and heater tap (see fig. B2/1-23); remove the hose. Fit the new hose; ensure that the hose is free Fig. 82/1 ·23 Heater tap feed hose from any sharp bends that may restrict coolant flow. Fill the engine coolant system as described in Renew the coolant. Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the gear range selector lever is in the Park position. Remove the gear range selector cut•out from the fuseboard. Start and run the engine; check the coolant hose for leaks. Switch off the ignition and fit the gear range selector cut-out.

6 Renew the coolant Drive the car onto a ramp; move the gear range selector to the Park position and apply the parking brake. Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the fuseboard. Disconnect the Lucar connection from the pressure switch situated on the oil filter take·off flange (see fig. 82/1-24). This will allow the air conditioning system to be operated without running the engine. Switch on the ignition and rotate the air conditioning function switch to the windscreen defrost Fig. 82/1-24 Oil pressure switch and position, also set the upper system mode override transmitter switch to the AUTO position. Wait approximately one minute for the system to attain the required setting and observe that all the air Renew the washers on the drain plugs and fit the is being directed to the windscreen. This procedure plugs into the crankcase. opens the heater water tap and ensures the system To drain the coolant remaining in the expansion can be completely drained. bottle (Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne} Switch off the ignition. disconnect the connection hose from the radiator filler Place a container beneath the radiator drain tap to neck and allow the coolant to drain from the expansion collect the coolant. Connect a length of hose onto the bottle into the container. When the coolant has drained drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. connect the hose to the radiator filler neck. Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator Check all hoses for serviceability and renew as pressure cap. necessary. Open the radiator drain tap and allow the coolant Fill the system with fresh coolant of the specified to drain from the radiator. concentration as follows. When the radiator has completely drained place a Ensure the radiator drain tap is closed. container beneath the crankcase drain plugs. Remove Slowly fill the radiator with coolant. thus reducing the drain plugs from the crankcase (see fig. B2/1 ·25) the possibility of air locks in the system. and allow the residue of coolant to drain from the Start and run the engine for a minimum of 10 crankcase. minutes with the radiator pressure cap removed.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 After running for five minutes ensure that warm air is Do not under any circumstances use an passing up the windscreen from the demister ducts. alkaline compound or detergent to clean the Top-up the radiator· as necessary to ensure there is system. Such compounds have a detrimental always coolant in the top tank of the radiator. chemical action on aluminium alloys. Ensure that the thermostat has opened; indicated Remove the engine coolant drain plugs from the by a rapid warming of the top radiator hose. crankcase. Switch off the engine and top-up the radiator to Remove the thermostat as described in Renew the half-way up the filler neck. Fit the pressure cap. thermostat, then replace the cover. Applicable to Silver Spirit, Silver Spur.and Fit a suitable pipe to the drain plug aperture and Mulsanne apply mains water pressure to each aperture in turn. Fill the expansion bottle to a level midway Flush for approximately 30 minutes, or until the between the maximum and minimum levels indicated water runs clear of foreign matter. on the bottle. Fit the drain plugs and a new thermostat by Start and run the engine until normal running reversing the procedure for removal. temperature is attained; switch off the engine and top To flush the heater system, detach the heater at up the expansion bottle to the maximum level. the water tap and disconnect the return hose at the Allow the engine to cool down. Carefully remove coolant pump. the radiator pressure cap and ensure the radiator is Fit a waste pipe to the disconnected heater feed completely full of coolant. Top-up to half-way up the hose. radiator filler neck if necessary. Fit the radiator Flush the matrix for approximately 30 minutes. pressure cap. Examine the coolant hoses for deterioration or Connect the Lucar connection previously damage and renew as necessary. disconnected from the pressure switch adjacent to the Connect all hoses and fill the system with the oil filter take-off flange (see fig. BV1-24). recommended coolant mixture as described under Note · Renew the coolant. For the coolant system to operate correctly, i.e. for coolant to pass into the expansion bottle when hot and 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator, be drawn back into the radiator during cooling, the top oil coo.le!!_ and refrigeration condenser of the radiator must not contain an air pocket. Using a pressure hose pipe, flush the radiator matrix. oil cooler matrix, and condenser matrix. Hold the nose of the hose pipe close to the back 7 Reverse flush the coolant system of the radiator matrix and allow the water to pass Drain the engine coolant system as described in between the veins of the matrix. Slowly move the hose Renew the coolant. over the whole matrix area until all foreign matter Remove the top and bottom hoses from the (insects. etc.) have been flushed clear. Care must be radiator matrix. taken to ensure that the end of the hose does not Fit a waste pipe to the upper {inlet) connection of damage the matrix face during this operation. the radiator. Apply mains water under pressure through the 9 Renew the thermostat lower (outlet) connection of the radiator. This should Disconnect the battery. remove all loose sediment in approximately 30 Place a container beneath the radiator. Attach a minutes. length of hose to the radiator drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator pressure cap. Open the radiator drain tap and allow sufficient coolant to drain from the system for the coolant level to fall below that of the thermostat housing. Close the drain tap and remove the hose previously attached. Disconnect the electrical connector from the thermostat housing cover. Remove the bolt from the air switching valve bracket and the four setscrews from the thermostat housing cover. Collect the bracket. Remove the thermostat housing cover. The cover can be moved away from the housing without detaching the outlet hose. Litt the thermostat from the housing (see fig. BV1-26). Remove the old gasket material from the Fig. B2/1·25 Crankcase drain plug ('B' bank thermostat housing and cover. Ensure that no material shown) enters the thermostat housing.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2/1 82/, •17

Check that the two faces are clean and qry. Insert a new thermostat into the housing. Place a new gasket in position on the housing and fit the cover. Connect the air switching valve bracket. Connect the electrical connection removed from the thermostat housing. Top-up the cooling system with the correct coolant mixture as described under Renew the coolant

Torque converter transmission It is absolutely essential when adding fluid to, or working on the torque converter transmission that great attention is paid to cleanliness. The smallest particle of dirt in the transmission fluid could interfere with the correct operation of the unit. It is important for efficient operation of the torque converter transmission that only an approved fluid is used (see Chapter A).

1 Check the transmission fluid level The fluid level can be checked accurately when the car is standing on a level surface, the engine is running at idle speed, and transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature, approximately 77°C ( 170°F). The dipstick and filler tube are situated on the right-hand side of the engine compartment. On Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne cars remov.e the protective cover from the windscreen wiper mechanism to gain access to the dipstick. Ensure that the following safety procedu,re is undertaken to isolate the mechanism prior to removing the cover. Ensure that the windscreen wiper control switch situated on the facia is in the off position. Remove a windscreen wiper relay, preferably number three, Fig. B2/1 ·26 Thermostat housing assembly situated adjacent to the windscreen washer reseivoir (see fig. 82/1·27). To remove the relay pull it vertically from its mounting. On all cars, always clean the top of the dipstick transmission has reached normal operating before removing it from the filler tube. temperature. As an initial check. the fluid level may be checked It is essential that this temperature is after starting from cold as follows. attained. Do not top-up the fluid level to the MAX Apply the parking brake. mark on the dipstick when the fluid is only warm. as Start and run the engine for three to four minutes this will result in an over-fill situation when the normal at fast-idle speed, with the gear range selector in the operating temperature is attained. Overfilling will result Park position. Reduce the engine speed to slow idle. in fluid being discharged from the transmission Whilst sitting in the driving seat, f irmly apply the breather pipe. footbrake and move the gear range selector through Position the car on a level surface, firmly apply the the full range of gear positions pausing briefly in each parking brake and select Park position with the gear range. Return the selector to the Park position. selector lever. Immediately check the fluid level with the engine Carry out .the procedure described for the initial running at idle speed. check.. The level should be up to the circular dimple With the transmission fluid at normal operating situated below the Fill mark on the dipstick (see fig. temperature the level of the fluid should be between 82/1-27). the FILL and MAX HOT marks (see fig. B2/1-27). Top-up to this level if necessary. If necessary add fluid by pouring it down the filler After this initial check a further check should be tube, with the engine still running, until the fluid is to carried out as follows. the MAX mark on the dipstick.. Do not overfill. Drive the car for approximately 24 kilometres ( 15 When the fluid level is correct, switch off the miles) of highway/motorway driving or 16 kilometres engine and fit the windscreen wiper mechanism cover ( 10 miles) of city driving. This should ensure the and relay.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2/1·18

2 Renew the transmission fluid Unscrew the nut securing the filler tube to the Position the car on a ramp or over a pit side of the transmission sump (see fig. 82/1-28). Place a clean container having a minimum capacity Withdraw the filler tube from the sump and move it to of 3 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt) under the nut which one side to allow the fluid to drain into the container. secures the transmission fluid filler tube to the sump After draining the sump, ensure that the filler tube (see fig. 82/1 ·28). is clean then fit it to the sump and tighten the drain From within the engine compartment. remove the nut transmission dipstick as described under Check the Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip transmission fluid level. to the engine. Slacken the setscrew securing the filler tube to Add 2.8 litres (5 Imp pt 6 US pt) of an approved the engine. fluid to the sump, pouring the fluid down the filler tube. Check the fluid level as described under Check the transmission fluid level.

3 Fit a new intake strainer Drain the transmission sump as described under the heading Renew the transmission fluid. then proceed as follows. Remove the setscrews securing the transmission sump and lower the sump. Drain any fluid from the sump and discard the gasket Unscrew the setscrew securing the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission; remove the strainer assembly {see fig. B2/1 ·29). Remove the intake pipe from the strainer and discard the strainer. Clean the transmission sump and the intake pipe with paraffin and dry with compressed air. Fit a new rubber 'O' ring to the intake pipe and lubricate the ·o· ring with clean transmission fluid. Ensure that a new rubber seal is fitted to the pipe bore in the new intake strainer, then fit the intake pipe to the strainer. Fit the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission and torque tighten the securing setscrew to 14 Nm ( 1,4 kgf m, 1O lbf ft). Fit the transmission sump using a new gasket and A1045 torque tighten the sump setscrews to 16 Nm ( 1. 7 kgf m, 1 2 lbf ft). Fit the oil filler tube into the sump and tighten the Fig. 82/1-27 Transmission filler tube and nut Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip dipstick to the engine. A Windscreen wiper motor relay Add 4,5 litres (8 Imp pt. 9.6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump. pouring the fluid down the filler tube, then follow the fluid level checking procedure described under Check the transmission fluid level.

4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod Lubricate the clevis pins in the control rod linkage at the left-hand side of the transmission. with a few drops of clean engine oil. Also lubricate the manual shaft where it enters the transmission casing.

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level Position the car on a ramp or over a pit Remove the level plug located in the rear face of Fig. B2/1·28 Transmission drain point the final drive casing (see fig. B2/1-30). The oil in th&· SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B~1 B2/1·19 casing should be up to the level plug orifice. If necessary, top-up with an approved oil. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint washer.

3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint covers The drive-shaft constant velocity joints are enclosed by convoluted seals which retain the joint lubricant If upon inspection a seal is found to be leaking or damaged the joint should be inspected and a new seal fitted as described in Chapter J of the Workshop Manual.

Steering system 1 Check the steering pump fluid level Remove the filler cap from the steering pump reservoir and check that the fluid level is at least up to the FULL COLD mark on the integral dipstick. If necessary, top up to this level with approved fluid (see fig. B2/1 ·31 ). fig. 82/1 ·30 Final drive drain and filler/level Start and run the engine until it reaches normal points operating temperature, approximately 77°C (170°F) then stop the engine. Remove the filler cap and check the fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary. add an approved fluid to raise the level to the FU LL HOT mark on the dipstick; do not overlill. Ensure that the filler cap is securely replaced.

2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints (if applicable) If grease nipples are fitted to the ball joints at the ends of the track rods. they should be lubricated until a slight swelling of the joint seal is evident. Take care not to damage or displace the seals.

3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers Examine the condition of the rubber cover seals on the ball joints (see fig. B2/1 ·32). If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition new parts should be fitted as necessary. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual. Fig. 82/1·31 Steering pump filler/dipstick

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2/1·20

4 Check the condition of the steering rack If on inspection the covers are found to be convoluted seals damaged or in poor condition, the ball joints should be Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the removed and new joints and seals fitted as necessary. rack and pinion unit and check the tightness of the For full information refer to Chapter H of the seal clips. Workshop Manual. If the seals are satisfactory,-tighten the clips as necessary. 2 Check the condition of the rear strut If the convoluted seals are found to be damaged convoluted seals or in poor condition, the rack and pinion unit should be Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the removed from the car and new seals fitted. For full rear suspension struts {see fig. B2/1-34). information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor Manual. condition, the struts should be removed.as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual, and new seals Suspension fitted. 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers 3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints The front suspension ball joints (see fig. B2/1-33) are Position the car on a ramp or over a pit, Disconnect packed with grease on initial assembly and should not the actuation links from the height control valves and normally require attention between service overhauls the rear suspension trailing arms at the ball joints (see unless the rubber seal covers are damaged. fig. 82/1-3 5 ). Note from which side each link is taken. Clean the ball joints then lubricate with an approved grease. Do not alter the length of the actuation link. Connect the actuation link to the height control valve and the trailing arm from which it was removed. Adjust the joint to obtain complete movement without free play.

Brake and hydraulic systems

W286 WARNING Fig. B2/1-32 Track rod ball joints Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363, Universal. er any other type). The use of any type of brake fluid. even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses. pipes, etc, that they are suitable for a mineral oil system. For details of correct component identification reference should be made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Always ensure that a sealed container of Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (ILHM) is fitted adjacent to the battery. Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the systems when work is being carried out.

In order to protect against claims of liability for hydraulic system contamination, it is recommended that the hydraulic system mineral oil is tested for contamination prior to work being undertaken, preferably in the presence of the owner or his/her Fig. 82/1-33 Front suspension ball joints representative.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2/1 B2/1·21

It is important that the test is carried out even when the hydraulic system mineral oil is to be renewed as this will not prevent the deterioration of components which have been in contact with contaminated mineral oil. Brake fluids and mineral oil are immiscible and with large amounts of contamination separation of the fluids will occur on standing. due to the greater density of the conventional fluids. A further indication of the mixing of conventional brake fluid and mineral oil is its cloudy appearance. To carry out contamination tests a kit is available from Rolls-Royce Motors Limited, part number RH 284 1 and should be used as follows. Switch on the ignition and depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until both low pressure warning panels illuminate. Continue to pump the pedal for at least a further 20 applications to ensure that all the accumulator mineral oil is returned to the reservoir. Clean the area around each hydraulic reservoir filler cap and then remove the cap. Ensure that the components in the test kit are clean and dry. Using the sampling tube provided. extract 50 ml of mineral oil from the top and bottom of each reservoir. Place the samples into the individual clean dry containers. Shake-each sample taken to ensure it is well Fig. 82/1 ·34 Rear suspension strut mixed. Pour 10 ml of each sample into clean test tubes (do not mix the samples together). Using the dispenser, add two drops of the red dye solution contained in the kit into each 10 ml sample. Cork the test tubes and shake them thoroughly. Leave the samples to settle for at least 30 minutes. Examine each sample.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Aolls· Royce Motors Limited 1 985 B2/1·22

Important Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic Always seal each reservoir cap after it has been systems by attaching a tube to each bleed point then confirmed that the systems a.re not contaminated and opening the bleed screws and allowing the mineral oil all work on the systems has been completed. to drain from the circuits. The bleed screws are located on each accumulator, on each pair of brake calipers. on 1 Check the mineral oil level in the reservoirs the deceleration conscious pressur.e limiting valve and The mineral oil reservoirs for the hydraulic systems are on each rear suspension strut {or each inner rear wing located in the engine compartment (see fig. 82/1 ·36). from the suspension strut). A drain tube is not To check the oil level, first depressurize the required at the accumulator bleed screws as these are hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until an integral part of the accumulators and when opened the two warning panels illuminate. Start and run the allow the mineral oil to flow from the accumulator engine for approximately four minutes to charge the spheres back to the reservoirs. systems and then stop the engine. The mineral oil in Drain the mineral oil from the reservoirs and clean both reservoirs should be up to the FULL marks on the reservoirs as described in Chapter G of the the level indicator plate. Workshop Manual. If the reservoirs require topping-up, ensure that After the system has completely drained. close all the tops of the reservoirs and the filler caps are clean. the bleed screws and ensure that any disturbed pipes then add an approved hydraulic system mineral oil (see are connected and correctly torque tightened. Chapter A) as necessary. Fill the reservoirs with fresh hydraulic system tt is important that only approved hydraulic mineral oil (see fig. 82/t ·36 and Chapter A) until the system mineral oil is used and that exceptional levels in the reservoirs are slightly above the topping· t cleanliness is observed when topping-up the up marks on the indicator plate. ) hydraulic systems. Run the engine for four minutes. with the car Under no circumstances should a conventional unladen, then toi:rup to the FULL level mark; never (i.e. RR363 or Universal) type brake fluid be used. allow the mineral oil levels to fall below the minimum After topping up, ensure that the blanking plugs level marks. are clean and fit them into the filler caps. Check for leaks. especially around the unions of Ensure th:1t the containers of new Hydraulic any pipes which have been disturbed. System Mineral Oil for system replenishment, are Finally, bleed the hydraulic systems as described fitted adjacent to the battery. in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic 2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil System Mineral Oil, for system replenishment, are Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in fitted adjacent to the battery. Chapter G of the appropriate Workshop Manual and proceed as follows. 3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and check the condition of the hydraulic system pipes and hoses. Examine the metal pipes for signs of corrosion. particularly those in an exposed position. Examine the hoses for chafing or surface cracking. Faulty pipes and hoses should be replaced as described in Chapter G of the appropriate Workshop Manual.

4 Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the appropriate Workshop Manual and proceed as follows. Fit a hose clamp to each of the intermediate hoses of the accumulator return pipes to prevent the flow of mineral oil from the reservoirs. Thoroughly clean the areas around the connections of the two accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses (see figs. 82/1-37 and B2/1·38). Remove the respective hoses noting the following. To avoid contamination fit the new hose immediately after removing the old one; alternatively Fig. B2/1 ·36 Access to the hydraulic system fit approved blanks to the open ports until the new reservoirs hoses are fitted.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82/1 B2/1-23

Before fitting a new hose ensure that it is thoroughly clean and conforms with the hydraulic systems mineral oil requirements. When fitting the new hoses, ensure that they are routed to clear other components and that clearance is maintained during full suspension movement. Tighten the pipe nuts to the torque settings given in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. After fitting the new hoses, check for leaks and bleed the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual.

Fig. B2/1-37 Hydraulic accumulator to body hoses 5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses To renew the hydraulic system hoses follow the same basic procedure described under the heading Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses.

6 Check the brake disc pads for wear Remove the wheel discs and slacken the wheel nuts approximately half a turn. Jack up the car and support with stands and sill blocks. Remove the road wheels and examine all the disc brake pad linings. The brake pads must be renewed when the brake pad linings are worn to within 3, 18 mm {0.125 in) of the steel backing plates. The pads should also be renewed if this minimum thickness is likely to be achieved before the next service check. To renew the Fig. 82/1-38 Trailing arm to body hydraulic brake pads, refer to Chapter G of the Workshop hoses Manual. If new brake pads are to be fitted which have different recommended linings from those on the old 8 Renew the brake caliper seals pads, the disc faces should be cleaned prior to fitting To renew the caliper piston seals it is necessary to the new pads. All traces of the old pad lining material remove the brake calipers from the car. should be removed by hand rotating the disc whilst For full instructions, refer to Chapter G of the applying coarse grade emery cloth to the disc faces. Workshop Manual. Do not emery the disc faces radially. Always ensure that the pads fitted to all six brake calipers have the same type and grade of pad lining. 9 Check the parking brake pads for wear Fit the road wheels and lower the car. Securely chock the front wheels then raise the rear of If new brake pads have been fitted, an initial the car. Place sill blocks under the rear body sills and running-in period of between 1100 kilometres and also support the rear trailing arms. Do not allow the 1300 kilometres (700 miles and 800 miles) should suspension struts to support the full suspension load. be observed. During this running-in period the brakes Remove the rear wheels and release the parking should not be applied harshly or for prolonged periods brake to the off position. from high speeds except in an emergency. Towards Disconnect the caliper actuation rod from the the end of the running-in period, the force with which caliper lever (see fig. B2/1-39). the brakes are applied may be progressively increased. Unscrew and remove the caliper adjuster and collect the adjuster clicker plate. Unhook the pad retention springs from each pad. 7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust noting the larger spring is fitted to the inner pad. excluders (when changing brake pads) Remove the pads from the caliper. The condition of the caliper dust seals should be Check the thickness of the lining material on each checked whenever the brake pads are removed. pad. Pads which are worn to within 1,5 mm Inspect the seals for signs of damage, heat {0.062 in) or less of the steel backing plate should be hardening, or general deterioration and renew if renewed. necessary. To fit the pads, attach the retention springs then When fitting new seals, ensure that the seal locate the pads into position and hook the springs retaining clips are correctly located. onto the caliper.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2/1·24

Complete the assembly by reversing the removal With the cables correctly adjusted. check that the procedure, then adjust the calipers as described under centralizing straps (see fig. B2/1 ·39) are pushing the the heading Adjust the parking brake. pads away from the discs when the parking brake is in Note the off position. If not, remove the nut and bolt If new parking brake pads have been fitted, the securing the straps, bend the straps outward (i.e. away following bedding-in procedure should be carried out from the disc) then refit them. Ensure that the straps after adjusting the parking brake. are pushed downward towards the·adjusting nut whilst tightening the nut and bolt securing them to the Drive the car at approximately 48 km/h (30 caliper. mile/h) and apply the parking brake to bring the car to Check that the distance between the pad and the rest; it is important that this is done gently and disc are the same on each side of the caliper; if not, progressively. The parking brake must not be applied reset the centralizing straps. fully and no attempt should be made to lock the Raise each rear wheel in turn so that it is free to wheels. This operation should be carried out nine rotate and adjust each caliper as follows. times, allowing at least one minute to elapse between Turn the caliper adjuster (see fig. 82/1-39} stops to prevent the discs overheating. clockwise until the pads just grip the disc; at this point Finally adjust the caliper as described under the it should only just be possible to rotate the road wheel heading Adjust the parking brake. by hand. Turn the adjuster anti-clockwise a quarter turn (i.e. three clicks on the nut) to obtain the 10 Adjust the parking brake minimum clearance between the pads and disc. Ensure that the parking brake is in the off position. Adjust the rear cables at the adjusters { see fig. 11 lubricate the parking brake linkage B2/1 ·40) so that the caliper operating levers return to Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Lubricate the their off-stops under the influence of their return parking brake linkage clevis pins, fulcrum pins, and the springs with no appreciable slackness in the cables. rear cable adjusters with approved grease. Note The cables must be adjusted so that the equalizer link Fuel system on the intermediate linkage (see fig. B2/1 ·40} lies at right·angles with the centre line of the car with the Safety precautions It is important that before a fuel line is opened or the parking brake in the off position. fuel tank is drained or siphoned. the workshop safety precautions given in Chapter A and Chapter U of the To check the cable adjustment, adjust both rear Workshop Manual are strictly observed. cables at the equalizer link until the caliper off-stops are just clear of the calipers. Measure the gap produced at each off-stop and lengthen the cables by 1 Renew the main fuel filter this amount. The main fuel filter is situated on the car body frame {see fig. 82/1-41 ). It is a sealed unit and no attempt should be made to clean the element. 1 2 3 At the appropriate service interval change the main fuel filter. Depressurize the system {see Chapter U) and unscrew the inlet and outlet pipe connections. Slacken the worm drive clip retaining the assembly to the mounting bracket and withdraw the filter assembly. Unscrew the unions fitted into both ends of the filter and discard the assembly. Fit the new filter assembly by reversing the removal procedure, noting the direction of flow arrow marked on the outside of the casing. When carrying out the above operation at 96 000 kilometres {60 000 miles} or six years and subsequent periods, the intank fuel filter situated on 6 5 4 W29 the underside of the fuel tank (see fig. 82/1 ·42) should also be removed and cleaned as follows. Fig. 82/1 ·39 Parking brake mechanism Disconnect the battery. 1 Actuation rod Drain or siphon the fuel tank. 2 Centralizing straps Place a container beneath the fuel intank filter to 3 Parking brake pads collect the residue of fuel from the tank when the filter 4 Brake disc is removed. 5 Adjuster clicker block Disconnect the hose from the intank filter outlet 6 Adjuster pipe.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 82/1 B2/1-25

Remove the circlip retaining the filter and carefully withdraw the filter from the tank. Clean the filter mesh by washing it in clean fuel. Examine the filter for serviceability and renew if necessary. Fit the filter by reversing the removal procedure. Always use a new seal on the filter body. Ensure that the fuel drained from the fuel tank is free from foreign matter, then return it to the fuel tank. Check the fuel filter and the pipe connections that have been disconnected. for leaks.

2 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel tank hose; renew as necessary Fig. B2/1-40 Parking brake rear cable To enable the filler head to fuel tank hose to be adjustment point examined, it is necessary to remove the rear suspension gas spring. For details of the procedure required reference should be made to Chapter U of the Workshop Manual.

3 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes Carefully examine all the flexible fuel pipes throughout the fuel system. Renew any pipes which have become damaged or deteriorated to an unserviceable condition. Before renewing any pipes depressurize the system (see Chapter U}. Check the complete fuel system for leaks and rectify as necessary.

Electrical system 1 Check the state of charge of the battery Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, and Mulsanne The battery is situated in the luggage compartment stowage well. To gain acr.ess to the battery, turn back Fig. B2/1-41 Main fuel filter the carpet from the right-hand side of the luggage compartment. Lift out the stowage well lid and the cover from around the battery.

Camargue The battery is mounted on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment. To gain access to the battery turn back the carpet and remove the trim from around the battery. the trim is secured by two turn fasteners. Unclip the battery cover retaining strap and lift off the cover. To check the specific gravity of the battery electrolyte on these models. it is necessary to remove the battery from the car as follows. Ensure the ignition is switched off. then disconnect the battery leads. A0516 Remove the battery clamp and lift the battery from its cradle. Fig. 82/1-42 lntank fuel filter

Battery electrolyte check Applicable to batteries with removable cell vent Caution covers. The electrolyte in the battery is a corrosive acid. Do not a. Electrolyte specific gravity check. allow the electrolyte to come into contact with the Remove the vent covers from the top of the battery. eyes. skin, fabric, or paintwork. Flush any contacted Using a hydrometer check the specific gravity of areas immediately and thoroughly with water. If the the electrolyte in each cell and compare the readings eyes are affected. flush for at least 15 minutes and obtained with the following tables. obtain prompt medical attention.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 @ Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B2/1·26

Chloride battery Before a voltage reading is taken on batteries that Air temperature below 32°C (90"F) have recently received a charge. the residual effects of the surface charge on the battery plates must be Spe<:ific Gravity Condition of Battery removed to avoid a false reading. This surface charge 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged can be removed by applying an electrical load to the 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged battery (e.g. by either connecting.a high rate discharge 1.090 to 1. 11 o Fully discharged tester for 1 5 seconds or if the battery is fitted to a car. switching on the headlamps for one minute). After· Air temperature above 32°C (90°F) wards, allow the battery to stand for a further one minute before a voltage reading is taken. Spe<:ific Gravity Condition of Battery Compare the reading obtained with the following 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged table to ascertain the state of charge. 1.150 to 1.170 Half discharged 1.070 to 1.090 Fully discharged Voltage State of charge 12.8 100% Lucas or Varta battery 12.6 82% 12.5 75% Air temperature below 27°C (80°F) 12.4 60% A minimum reading of 12.5 volts {corresponding Specific Gravity Condition of Battery to 75% charge) is acceptable. Below this reading the 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged battery should be recharged. Instructions for charging 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged are provided on the battery label. 1.090 to 1.110 Fully discharged 2 Clean and check the battery terminals Air temperature above 27°C (80°F) The top of the battery should always be kept clean and dry. Specific Gravity Condition of Battery If corrosion of the battery leads or terminals has 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged occured it should be removed as follows. 1.1 30 to 1 • 1 50 Half discharged Disconnect the battery leads and using hot water 1.050 to 1.070 Fully discharged or a dilute solution of ammonia carbonate, wash them thoroughly until all corrosion has been removed. If the specific gravity reading of all the cells is uniform and within the range 1.240 to 1.270 the Finally wash with clean water to remove the ammonia carbonate solution. battery is in an acceptable state of charge. If the readings are uniform but bel?w 1.220 the battery Remove any corrosive deposit from the terminal should be recharged. Always remove the battery from posts using a cloth moistened with ammonia the car for recharging. carbonate solution then wash with clean water. If the specific gravity of the electrolyte in one cell Dry the battery leads and terminal posts. Connect differs markedly from the others {i.e. the reading is the battery leads to the terminal posts. Liberally coat 0.040 or more, lower than the remainder}. then a the terminals with petroleum jelly. defect must be suspected and rectified as necessary. b. Electrolyte level check 3 Check an exterior lamps for operation Ensure that the battery is in a high state of charge (see Actuate the respective switches and check for lamp Electrolyte specific gravity check). illumination and function (i.e. turn flashers. headlamp' The level of the battery electrolyte in each cell dip/main beam. etc.). should be approximately 5 mm (0.250 in) above the The respective facia tell-tales should also be tops of the separators (Lucas or Varta battery) or checked for illumination during these operations. contacting t'1e blue bar situated above the separators With the lighting switch in the Park and Head (Chloride battery). position, switch on the ignition. Check the facia If the electrolyte level is low top-up using distilled instruments for illumination; the panel illumination water until the level is attained. Do not overfill. dimming switch should also be checked for corr~t Always ensure the top of the battery is clean prior operation. to removal of the vent covers. · 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation Battery voltage check Before carrying out the following checks firmly apply Applicable to sealed for life (maintenance free) the parking brake; ensure the gear range selector is in batteries the Park positi_on and remove the gear range selector The state of charge of a sealed for life battery can cut-out from the fuseboard. only be checked by taking a voltage reading at the battery terminals, using either a digital voltmeter or Ignition and oil warning lamps multimeter. The instrument used must be accurate to Turn the ignition key to the RUN position, the ignition within 0. 1 volts. and oil pressure warning lamps should illuminate.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B2/1 82/1-27

Start the engine, both lamps should extinguish; switch Check the operation of the front compartment off the ignition. personal lamps as follows. When the ignition key is turned to the ACC position Withdraw the main lighting switch; the front the ignition warning lamp only should illuminate. section of the driver's roof lamp should illuminate. Operate the map lamp switch, the front section of Warning panel cluster lamps the front passenger's roof lamp should illuminate. Move the gear range selector lever to the D position (do Move the switch to the mirror position. Lower the not insert the gear range selector cut·out). passenger's sun visor; the lamp situated above the Apply the footbrake then turn the ignition key to visor should illuminate. the start position. All the warning panel cluster lamps Withdraw the visor from its retaining clip; the should illuminate. With the ignition held in the start lamp should extinguish. The lamp should also position, turn the main lighting switch to the Park and extinguish when the visor is moved to its raised Head positions; the intensity of illumination of the ice position, even when the switch is on. and low fuel warning panels should reduce. Switch off The operation of the rear roof lamps should be the ignition and lighting switch. checked by operating the switches situated on the rear The hydraulic system warning panel situated at compartment vanity mirror surrounds. the top of the warning panel cluster should also be Press the upper portion of the three position checked as follows. switch; the front section of the respective roof lamp Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. should illuminate. Press the lower portion of the Depressurize the hydraulic system by actuating switch and the rear section of both rear roof lamps the brake pedal between 50 and 60 times. The two should illuminate. With the switch in the central brake pressure warning panels should illuminate. position both lamps should be off. Repeat the When the panels have illuminated start and run operation on the opposite side of the car. the engine. Both panels should extinguish after On Camargue cars press the outer of the two approximately two minutes indicating that the switches situated in the arm rest; this should hydraulic systems are pressurized. Switch off the illuminate the rear section of both rear roof lamps. ignition. Pressing the inner switch should illuminate the front section of the respective roof lamps. Repeat the Fasten seat belt warning lamp operation on the opposite side of the car. To check the seat belt warning lamp, open and close each door in turn; observe the lamp operation. 6 Check the horns for operation The seat belt warning panel should illuminate Examine the electrical connections to each horn to whenever a door is opened and extinguish ensure they are in good condition. Clean the horns and approximately seven seconds after the door is closed. remove any foreig·n matter that may have collected in Note the horn trumpets. All doors must be fully closed for the lamp to Switch on the ignition; press the horn button extinguish (i.e. not on first catch}. several times to ensure the horn button is making a good contact and that both horns are functioning Hazard warning i.ndicator correctly each time it is pressed. Depress the hazard warning switch, check that all the turn indicators and the facia warning lamp are flashing. 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp washer reservoirs 5 Check all interior lamps for operation Windscreen washer reservoir. Ensure all the doors are fully closed and the interior The reservoir is located in the engine compartment lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the Remove the filler cap and add the correct mixture of rear section of the central roof lamps should illuminate. windscreen washer fluid and distilled water to the Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain reservoir until the maximum level is attained. illuminated for approximately seven seconds. Topping-up level - bottom of filler neck. The rear roof lamps and footwell lamps should Headlamp washer reservoir. also illuminate when the door is opened. If the gear On Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, and Mulsanne cars a selector lever is moved from the Park position with the headlamp washer system is fitted. The reservoir is ignition key in the RUN position, the lamps will housed under the front right-hand wing and the filler extinguish immediately all the doors are closed. When is located in the engine compartment towards the front carrying out this operation also check that the door of the car. open warning lamp and step lamp are illuminated with The reservoir should be topped-up with clean the door in the open position. These lamps should water until the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler extinguish immediately the door is fully closed. neck. Repeat the check on the remaining door{s). During winter conditions, a solution of 30% Note isopropyl alcohol and 70% water should be used. This If the doors are only closed to the first catch position mixture will provide frost protection down to a the lamps should remain illuminated. temperature of approximately-1 O"C (14°F).

TSD4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper Automatic air conditioning system blades 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from Lift the wiper arms from the windscreen and inspect obstruction them for wear or damage. Renew the _blades if Check the air intake grilles and foam filters situated necessary. behind the bonnet, for obstruction (i.e. leaves, dirt, On Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, and Mulsanne cars etc.}. Carefully remove the grille retaining screws, lift the wiper blade removal procedure is as follows. the grilles and filters from the body and clean all parts a. Driver's side of the windscreen. Lift the wiper arm including the air intake ducts; also ensure the duct from the windscreen. Push half of the blade away from drain tubes are free from obstruction. the arm, until the blade is released from its location clip. To fit the new blade, position it on the wiper arm and press it firmly into the location clip. 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct b. On the passenger side of the windscreen, lift the operation wiper arm f.rom the windscreen and pivot the blade For details of the procedure required to carry out this through 180°. Press the small release tag, situated on operation reference should be made to Chapter C of the underside of the blade pivot block and push the the Workshop Manual. blade out of the crooked end of the wiper arm. Withdraw the wiper blade from the arm. Fit the new blade by reversing the removal procedure. Body To remove a blade on Camargue cars, lift the 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat wiper arm away from the windscreen then press the belts small tab situated in the end of the arm to release the The following checks should be carried out on the blade. Check that the new blade is secured by the front and rear retractable seat belts. retaining catch then return the blade to the Fully withdraw the seat belt from the reel; windscreen. · examine the webbing for any signs of wear or damage. Note Allow the belt to return to the stowed position. Care must be taken during these operations to ensure To check the operation of the retractable belt, fit that the wiper arm is not allowed to spring back onto the belt and then give the webbing of the diagonal belt the windscreen when the blade has been removed. a sharp pull. Ensure that the belt locks and then otherwise damage to the windscreen could occur. returns to the normal roller action immediately the belt is released. With the fastening tongue of the belt locked in the 9 Check the windscreen wash/wipe and retaining clasp; ensure the tongue is securely held and headlamps power wash for correct operation is released immediately the release button marked Before carrying out the following check ensure that the PRESS is operated. windscreen is clean. The alternative method of checking the seat belts Switch on the ignition and press the windscreen is to select an open stretch of road. then, when the wash/wipe switch. The windscreen wipers should road is free from any potential danger, accelerate the operate and the fluid from the washer jets should car to 24 km/h (15 mile/h) and brake sharply from impinge on the windscreen approximately 41 9 mm this speed; ensure that the belt locks and then ( 16.5 in) from the centre ·1ine of the windscreen and subsequently releases. If this method of test is used, it 190 mm (7.5 in) below the windscreen top finisher. will be necessary to carry a passenger(s) to enable the The wash/wipe function should continue until the passenger seat belts to be tested. . ' switch is released. Check the rear seat lap belt for condition and On release of the push button switch the washer correct locking and release. should cease while the wipers should continue for Report any defects to the owner. approximately four strokes before returning to the park When seat belt replacement is necessary only position. belts approved by Rolls-Royce Motors Limited should Turn the main lighting switch to the HEAD be fitted. position. The headlamps cleaning function (if fitted} will only operate when the headlamps are illuminated. Press the wash/wipe switch, the power wash jets 2 Check that all body drains are free from should operate for half a second when the wash/wipe obstruction switch is depressed. To repeat the wash it will be Examine the body drain holes; remove any foreign necessary to release and then depress the switch again. matter that may be obstructing the holes. Take care not to damage the paintwork. ·

10 Check the alternator for correct operation For details of the alternator test procedure and brush 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering renewal, reference should be made to Chapter M of bolt the Workshop Manual. Turn back the carpet on the luggage compartment

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section BV1 B2/1·29

floor to expose the spare wheel inflation trap and spare operations, carefully road test the car for satisfactory wheel carrier lowering bolt head. Remove the inflation performance. trap cover; if a spare wheel retainer is fitted, it should If new brake pads have been fitted. the running-in be released. and bedding procedures should be carried out as Rotate the spare wheel bolt anti-clockwise until described under, Check the brake disc pads for wear the carrier is fully lowered. Remove the spare wheel and Check the parking brake pads for wear. from the carrier. When the road test has been completed, the car Lubricate the carrier lowering bolt using a should be fully inspected for any leaks, fouls, etc., and recommended lubricant Raise and lower the carrier to rectified as necessary. distribute the lubricant over the full length of the The transmission fluid level, should be finally carrier bolt. checked immediately after the test, while the fluid is at Check the condition of the spare wheel as normal running temperature and topped-up if described under the heading Wheels. necessary (see Check the transmission fluid level). Fit the spare wheel onto the carrier. Ensure that Ensure that all controls, door handles, steering the inflation valve is in line with the inflation trap in wheel, etc., are clean and that any dirt which may be the luggage compartment floor. then fully raise the attributed to the service schedule is completely carrier. removed. Fasten the spare wheel retainer {if fitted}.and fit the tyre inflation trap rubber and carpet

Wheels 1 Check all tyre pressures Check the tyre pressures including the spare when the tyres are cold; adjust if necessary. l'he inflation pressure of the spare tyre should be adjusted to the highest tyre pressure (i.e. rear wheel}. Do not check the pressures when the tyres are warm (e.g. after the vehicle has run). Always ensure that the valve caps are fitted after checking.

2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres Examine the tyres. including the spare. for any signs of damage or tyre wall cracking, etc. Carefully remove any stones or other objects that may be lodged in the tyre treads. Check the depth of tread at several points around each wheel using a tread depth gauge. To enable a visual check to be made, tread depth indicators are incorporated into the tyre construction. These indicators are integral moulded ribs, spaced at intervals around the circumference of the tyre and extend across the full width of the tread in all primary grooves. When one or more of these indicators are flush with the tread, only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread depth remains. If the condition of the tyres is not satisfactory or the tread depths do not conform to the legal requirements of the country in which the car is operating, the owner should be notifietl and asked to authorize the fitting of new tyres. For full information on tyre fitting, balancing, etc., reference should be made to Chapter R of the Workshop Manual.

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance On completion of the respective service schedule

TSO 4406

Printed in Englend Julv 1985 © Aolls·Rovce Motors Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 83 B3·1

Service schedule procedures Cars conforming to Jap;,nese specifications

Contents Pages Silve, Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1981 /1985 /inclusive) model year cars 83-3 B3-3 B3·3 1986 model year cars 83·3 83·3

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 83 83-3

Service schedule procedures 1981 /1986 (inclusive) model year cars

AwARNING Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil ( LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids (Castro! RR363, Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Fig. 83-1 Crankcase breather - 'A' bank Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses. pipes. etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil Lamp units system. For details of correct component identification Weekly; check the lamp units for operation; rectify any reference should be made to Chapter G of the faults. Workshop Manual. Always ensure that a sealed container of Tyre pressures Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted Weekly; check the tyre pressures including the spare; adjacent to the battery. adjust if necessary. Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the systems when work is being carried out. Windscreen and headlamp washer reservoir( s) Weekly; check the washer fluid level; top-up if General information necessary. The information contained in this Chapter should be used in conjunction with the service schedule charts Hydraulic reservoirs and Workshop Manuals. Monthly; check the level of hydraulic mineral oil in the The following are the Workshop Manual publications reservoirs. to which reference should be made. Depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, and Mulsanne from vehicle the brake pedal until the low brake pressure warning identification number (VIN)*SCAZS000ACH01001* panels on the facia illuminate. Continue to pump the and Corniche/Continental from (VIN) pedal for at least a further 20 applications to ensure *SCAZD0006CCH05037*. publication number complete depressurization. Start and run the engine TSD 4400. for four minutes with the car unladen, prior to Corniche prior to vehicle identification number checking the level. Toirup if necessary to the indicated (VIN}* SCAZD0006CCH0503 7 *and Camargue, maximum level. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral publication number TSD 4200. Oil {LHM). Refer to page 83-20 for further information before carrying out this operation. Car protection Prior to commencing a service schedule the car should Engine cooling system be suitably protected. For this purpose car protection Every three months; check the coolant level. If kit RH 2662. wing covers RH 2684, and wing cover necessary top-up with the correct anti-freeze/water liners RH 2685 should be used. mixture ( see page B3-12}.

Regular maintenance Crankcase emission control system In addition to the service schedules listed. the 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame traps following maintenance should be carried out. Crankcase emissions are controlled by two separate breather pipes. Engine From the rear of 'A' bank cylinder head a moulded Weekly or every 800 kilometres (500 miles) rubber hose connects the crankcase to the air intake whichever is the earlier; check the engine oil by means housing, immediately upstream of the air meter but of the dipstick.; top-up if necessary. downstream of the air cleaner/silencer assembly.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B3·4

From the front of 'B' bank cylinder head a second Crankcase breather · A' bank • To service moulded rubber tube connects the crankcase via the Withdraw the windscreen wiper motor relay (wiper 3) oil filler (which has a sealed cap} to a pipe leading to (see fig. 83·25) item A) situated on a bracket adjacent the plenum chamber. This pipe assembly incorporates to the windscreen washer reservoir. a restrictor to control the flow. Remove the cover from the windscreen wiper When fitting the flame trap assemblies, the drive mechanism to gain access to 'A' bank crankcase longer assembly should be fitted to the ·s· bank breather connection. oil filler connection. Locate the crankcase breather connection at the rear of 'A' bank cylinder head. Slacken the worm drive clips securing the ends of the breather hose, free the joints and withdraw the hose. Unscrew the three setscrews securing the breather take-off flange to the crankcase connection. Withdraw the three setscrews and collect the washer fitted under the head of each one. !-ift the solenoid bracket from the vicinity of the connection. Free the joint and lift the elbow casting from the engine. Discard the gasket. Invert the casting and remove the circlip. Collect the retaining washer and withdraw the flame trap assembly. Wash the flame trap in clean fuel and dry with compressed air. Clean any deposits from inside the breather hose. Fit the 'A' bank breather by reversing the procedure given for removal. noting that a new gasket should be fitted between the breather elbow casting Fig. 83-2 Crankcase breather· 'B' bank and the engine.

Crankcase breather 'B' bank· To service Slacken the worm drive clip securing the hose from the.auxiliary ;ir valve to the metal breather pipe. Withdraw the hose. Slacken the worm drive clip securing each end of the rubber breather hose and free both hose joints. Unscrew the two setscrews securing the metal breather pipe to the plenum chamber. Collect the washers, withdraw the pipe and discard the gasket. Withdraw both the metal breather pipe and the rubber breather hose. Unscrew the setscrew securing the adapter housing to the oil filler. Collect the washer and earth braid (if fitted). Withdraw the housing (slight Fig. B3-3 Oxygen sensor connection resistance may be felt due to the rubber sealing ring). Remove the flame trap assembly. Wash the flame trap assembly in clean fuel and dry with compressed air. Clean any deposit from inside the breather pipe and fiose. Inspect the inside of the metal pipe to ensure that the restrictor is not blocked. Assemble the '8' bank breather by reversing the removal procedure noting that a new gasket should be fitted between the metal pipe and the plenum chamber. Ensure that the rubber 'O' ring on the oil filler connection is in good condition and that the earth braid (if fitted) is fitted to the retaining setscrew.

Exhaust emission control system Fig. 83·4 Oxygen sensor (grass-fire shields 1 Renew the oxygen sensor removed) From inside the engine compartment locate the blue

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B3 83·5

oxygen sensor cable where it exits from the loom adjacent to the left-hand blower motor (see fig. B3·3}. Unclip the blue cable and carefully ease it upwards until the white moulded junction piece. connecting the blue cable to the black cable is visible. Note the run of both cables and disconnect them at the white junction block. From beneath the car, clean the area around the oxygen sensor before it is unscrewed and discarded. Before fitting the new oxygen sensor, carefully smear Never-seez assembly compound onto the threads. Important Do not allow the assembly compound to contact the exhaust gas slots (the slotted shield below the threaded portion}, otherwise damage to the oxygen sensor and catalytic converter may result. Wl!71

Screw the oxygen sensor into the exhaust pipe and tighten to between 50 Nm and 60 Nm (5, 1 kgf m Fig. 83·5 Overheat thermocouple sensor and 6, 1 kgf m. 37 lbf ft and 44 lbf ft). · Feed the oxygen sensor cable upwards intq the (c) The sealing rings. pipe flares, and grooves in the engine compartment, adjacent to the left-hand blower spherical joint clamp bracket should be lightly smeared motor. Connect the black cable to the blue cable and with either graphite lubricant or Never·seez compound. suitably clip the cables to the loom. This will assist alignment of the parts upon assembly. Important (d) The parts should be loosely assembled and then Always ensure that any free cable is clipped in the manoeuvered to give the best alignment. before the engine compartment. The cable should be reasonably joints are tightened. taut under the car, otherwise loose cable could foul the Do not allow the assembly compound to enter hot exhaust pipe and become damaged. the exhaust system, particularty up stream (in front) of the catalytic converter, otherwise damage 2 Fit a new catalytic converter to the converter assembly will result. Remove the necessary grass-fire heatshield( s) from within the vicinity of the catalytic converter. 3 Inspect the catalytic converter overheat Note thermocouple and wiring Take care when removing the shield as the sharp Unscrew the thermocouple retaining cap nut (see fig. edges could cause injury to the operator's hands. B3·5) and withdraw the probe from the converter assembly. Unscrew the thermocouple retaining cap nut (see Visually inspect the probe for signs of damage. If fig. B3·5) and withdraw the probe from the converter damage is suspected fit a new probe assembly, if not, assembly. again fit the existing probe. Locate the exhaust pipe joint situated in front of Check the external condition of the wiring, etc. the catalytic converter. This joint will be either a three bolt flange type or a hymatic clamp. 4 Inspect the grass-fire shields Remove the nut(s) from the joint clamp. Visually inspect the shields for damage. Locate the exhaust pipe joint situated to the rear Rectify or renew any damaged shields. of the catalytic converter. It is essential that a minimum clearance of 5 mm Slacken the two nuts retaining the clamp bracket. (0.20 in} is maintained between the heatshields and Support the weight of the catalytic converter. the exhaust pipes. Unscrew and remove the nuts from both the front and rear joints. collect the washers and withdraw the 5 Remove and clean the E.G.R. valve and feed bolts and the front clamp {if applicable). pipes (see fig. B3·6) Withdraw the catalytic converter assembly and Unscrew the setscrew retaining the heatshield to the collect the sealing ring from each joint. The sealing plenum chamber cover, collect the washer. rings are not interchangeable, therefore, they should Unscrew the setscrew securing the heatshield to be labelled for identification. the top of the plenum chamber, collect the large Fit the catalytic converter by reversing the removal diameter washer. procedure. noting the following. Unscrew the long setscrew that forms the lower (a) The sealing rings and pipe flares must be mounting for the auxiliary air valve. Withdraw the thoroughly clean and free from scale. They may be setscrew and collect the washer and distance pieces. lightly dressed with fine emery cloth if required. Unscrew the nut from the E.G.R. valve top mount, {b) Apply Never•seez assembly compound to the collect the washer. clamp bolt threads before assembly. Withdraw the heatshield.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors limited 1985 83-6

Detach the vacuum signal hose from the E.G.R. the clamp and withdraw the bolts together with both valve. halves of the clamp bracket. Collect the sealing ring. Unscrew the lower retaining nut and collect the Unscrew the two nuts from the exhaust manifold washer. joint. Free the joint, withdraw the pipe and discard the Note gasket. The valve upper securing nut is unscrewed to remove Upper pipe the heatshield. Unscrew the two setscrews securing the pipe flange to the plenum chamber; collect the washers from the Withdraw the valve and discard the gasket. setscrews. There are two E.G.R. pipes joined together Withdraw the pipe and discard the gasket. adjacent to the auxiliary air valve by a sealing ring and With a suitable scraper. remove all carbon from split clamp. the valve, mounting flange faces. plenum chamber Lower pipe connection. distribution pipes, and joint faces. Locate the joint adjacent to the auxiliary air valve, Using a wire brush fitted into a portable drill unscrew the two nuts and collect the washers. Free complete the cleaning operation. Before fitting the components to the engine, thoroughly blow out the components with compressed air to remove all carbon particles. Fit the components by reversing the procedure given for removal, noting the following. Ensure that the valve pintle is secure on the valve stem. Always use new gaskets.

6 Check the E.G.R. valve for correct operation The operation of the E.G.R. valve only requires checking under no load conditions, as follows. Connect an electric impulse tachometer to the engine in accordance with the manufacture( s instructions. Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied and that the gear range selector is in the Park position. Start and run the engine until normal operating temperature is attained. Ensure that the engine has run at least 15 minutes after the engine coolant thermostat has opened. Allow the engine to return to the idle speed. Fig. 83·6 Exhaust gas recirculation system Increase the engine speed slowly noting the 1 'B' bank exhaust manifold take-off point operation of the E.G.R. valve. 2 Exhaust gas recirculation (E.G.R.) valve The E.G.R. valve should commence to open 3 E.G.R. cut·off solenoid between 1550 rev/min and 1850 rev/min.

Fuel evaporative emission control system 1 Renew the evaporative emission control canister Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Locate the control canister under the left-hand front wing (see fig. B3· 7). Using the special pliers RH 8090 remove the securing clip from the canister end of the fuel tank to canister flexible hose. Withdraw both hoses fitted to the control canister. Label each one to facilitate assembly. Unscrew the four setscrews retaining the control canister (see fig. 83· 7) in position. Suppon the weight of the canister before the last setscrew is removed. Collect the washer fitted under the head of each setscrew. Withdraw the control canister from under the wing. Note the position of the control canister in ~elation Fig. B3·7 Fuel evaporative control canister and to the mounting bracket and unscrew the retaining mounting bracket setscrews worm drive clip.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 83 B3·7

Fit the new canister to the mounting bracket and 1 tighten the retaining worm drive clip. Ensure that the canister is in the correct position relative to the mounting bracket. Fit the assembly to the vehicle by reversing the procedure given for removal. noting that a new hose securing clip should be used.

2 Check the condition of all pipes. hoses. and connections; renew if necessary Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Locate the fuel evaporative control canister. Withdraw the fuel tank evaporative hose from the canister and connect it to the test equipment shown in figure 83·8. Apply air pressure to the fuel tank hose via the test equipment until a reading of 380 mm ( 1 5 in) H20 is attained and close the pressure supply. After 5 minutes again check the pressure reading. this should not have fallen by more than 12,7 mm(0.5 in). If the pressure drop is more than 12,7 mm (0.5 in), progressively treat all joints in the system with soap solution to detect air leaks. Rectify any air leaks and again leak check the system. During the 5 minutes leak down, visually inspect the hoses. pipes, and connections of the system that are routed under the car. Commence where the hose exits from the body adjacent to the left-hand rear road spring Fig. B3·8 Leak check test equipment and follow the system to the control canister. 1 Connection to fuel tank/canister hose Ensure that the hoses are secure in the mounting 2 Pump clips. 3 One-way pressure valve When the system is satisfactory. detach the test equipment and connect the hose to the control canister. Secure the hose with a new clip. 1 2 3

3 Check the purge flow rate Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Remove the retaining clip from the purge line restrictor hose. Disconnect the hose at the purge line restrictor. Leave the restrictor in the hose to the engine (see fig. 83·9}. Connect a rotameter assembly RH 8725 into the line, between the restrictor and the open pipe to the valance connection. Connect an impulse tachometer to the engine in Fig. B3·9 Disconnecting the purge line accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1 Hose from canister Start the engine. Raise the engine speed to 2500 2 Restrictor rev/min and note the flow reading on the rotameter. 3 Hose to throttle body this should be between 35 ftl/h and 55 ftl/h. If the purge flow rate is outside the limits specified, refer to the Workshop Manual TSD 4400, Chapter U.

Engine 1 Change the engine oil The sump should be drained when the engine is warm. preferably aher the car has completed a run. To drain the oil. position the car over a pit or on a ramp. Place a container in position beneath the drain plug situated on the right·hand side of the sump (see fig. B3-1 OJ. Remove the drain plug and allow the oil to drain from the sump. Fig. B3· 10 Engine sump drain plug

TSD 4406

Printed in England July l 985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B3-8

Do not flush the sump with paraffin or petrol. Place a container under the filter to collect any oil Fit the drain plug ensuring that the washer is that may be spilt. correctly positioned and in good condition. Remove the filter by unscrewing it in an anti Fill the engine sump with recommended lubricant clockwise direction (see fig. B3-1 1 ). until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Thoroughly clean the filter seating face on the Carry out the full oil level check procedure as engine. described under Check the engine oil level. Lightly smear the rubber sealing ring on the new filter with clean engine oil. 2 Renew the engine oil filter Screw the filter onto the pedestal until the rubber Drain the engine oil as described under Change the seal contacts the sealing face then tighten the filter a engine oil. further half turn; do not overtighten. Fill the engine with clean engine oil until the MAX level is reached.on the dipstick. Run the engine and check the filter joint for leakage. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the enAine oil level.

Check the engine oil level In order to obtain an accurate indication of the oil level. ensure that the car is standing on level ground. Check the oil level by means of the dipstick marked ENGINE (see fig. B3-1 2). It is recommended that the oil level is checked when the engine is cold. If the engine has been running. sufficient time should elapse after it has Fig. 83-11 Engine oil filter location stopped to allow the oil to drain into the sump. Do not check the oil level with the engine running. To replenish the sump with oil. open the filler cap marked ENGINE (see fig. B3-12). Add clean oil to the engine and after allowing sufficient time for the oil to reach the sump check that the oil is up to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. Important The engine lubrication system incorporates a thermostatically controlled oil cooler, therefore if the oil has been drained from the engine the following additional procedure must be carried out to ensure the correct oil level is obtained. Carry out the normal topping-up procedure as described previously to obtain the maximum oil level reading on the dipstick. Drive the car to enable the engine oil to attain the temperature required to actuate the oil cooler Fig. B3-12 Engine oil filler and dipstick thermostat. To ascertain that the thermostat has actuated, a rise in the temperature of the oil cooler return pipe (see fig. B3-13). can be felt. This temperature rise occurs as hot oil begins to flow from the oil filter housing, where the thermostat is situated, to the oil cooler mounted in front of the coolant radiator matrix. Do not attempt to attain the required engine oil temperature rise with the car stationary. When it has been ascertained that the engine oil has been passing through the cooler. thus filling this part of the lubrication system. check the oil level in the normal manner as described previously.

3 Check the drive belts Before commencing to adjust the drive belts inspect them for signs of wear or cracking. Any belts found Fig. B3· 13 Engine oil cooler return pipe unsatisfactory should be renewed.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B3 B3·9

If after adjustmP.nt, a matched pair of belts have a marked vanation in tension. a new pair should be fitted. Always renew both belts in a matched pair even if only one belt is faulty. Two belt tension loads are specified; a new belt load for replayement (new) belts and a retensioning load for belts which are satisfactory for further service. The belt tensions must be checked at a point midway between two pulleys (see fig. B3· 14) by use of a belt tension meter or by applying a spring balance to give a 9,50 mm (0.375 in) belt deflection at a specified load. The variation in the spring balance loads for similar belt tension meter loads is due to the varying lengths of belt between individual belt centres. Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent belt slip.

Crankshaft to coolant pump Load may be applied on either side of the belt run. Fig. B3-14 Engine drive belt adjustment and tension check points New belt load Belt tension meter 2 7 .2 kgf to 31, 7 kgf (60 lbf to 70 lbf) Slacken the setscrew securing the adjustment Spring balance 7 .5 kgf to 8.2 kgf strut to the front mounting plate, also the nut and bolt ( 1 6.5 lbf to 18 lbf) in the adjustment slot. Pivot the alternator tQ adjust Retensioning load the belt tension then tighten the nut and bolt in- the Belt tension meter 22.7 kgf to 27,2 kgf adjustment slot. Check the belt tension and repeat (50 lbf to 60 lbf) adjustment if necessary. Spring balance 6,8 kgf 7,5 kgf When the tension is correct finally tighten the (15 lbf to 16.5 lbf) remaining setscrews and check the tension again.

The tension of this matched pair of belts is Crankshaft to steering pump/refrigeration adjusted by altering the position of the jockey pulley compressor (see fig. 83-14). Load must be applied on the top run of the belts. Each Slacken the nut and setscrew securing the jockey belt to be checked individually. pulley arm. Pivot the jockey pulley to adjust the belt tension then tighten the nut and setscrew. Check the New belt load belt tension and repeat the adjustment procedure if Belt tension meter 40.8 kgf to 45,4 kgf necessary. · (90 lbf to 100 lbf) Spring balance 6,3 kgf to 7, 7 kgf ( 14 lbf to 1 7 lbf) Coolant pump to alternator Load may be applied on either side of the belt run. Retensioning load Belt tension meter 36.3 kgf to 40,8 kgf New belt load (80 lbf to 90 lbf) Belt tension meter 36.3 kgf to 40,8 kgf Spring balance 4.1 kgf to 6.3 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf) (9 lbf to 14 lbf) Spring balance 5.0 kgf to 5.9 kgf ( 1 1 lbf to 1 3 I bf) The tension of this matched pair of belts is adjusted by altering the position of the steering pump Retensioning load (see fig. B3-14). Slacken the setscrew in the steering Belt tension meter 31. 7 kgf to 36.3 kgf pump mounting bracket slot situated below the pump (70 lbf to 80 lbf) pulley. Spring balance 4.1 kgf to 5,0 kgf Slacken the pump pivot setscrew and the union (9 lbf to 11 lbfJ on the supply hose at the rear of the pump. Pivot the pump to adjust the belt tension then The tension of the belt is adjusted by altering the tighten the setscrew ·in the adjustment slot. Check the position of the alternator {see fig. 83· 14). belt tension and adjust again if necessary. When the Slacken the setscrew securing the alternator at the tension is correct tighten the pivot setscrew and again upper mounting point. check the belt tension. Finally tighten the supply hose

TSO 4408

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 83-10

connection: ensuring that the soft rubber protective Unscrew the worm drive clip securing the engine sleeve has clearance or minimal contact with the intake hose to the air cleaner. Detach the hose. coolant pump to manifold elbow. Support the air cleaner housing and release the three toggle clips securing the housing to the valance. 4 Renew the air filter element Carefully free the joint, then move the housing Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, late Corniche, and towards the engine and withdraw the housing and air all Continental filter element from the car. The air filter element is situated in the air intake Remove the filter element from the housing. housing at the front right-hand side of the engine Ensure that the inside of the air cleaner housing compartment (see fig. 83-15). {both the sections removed and the fixed sections in To gain access to the element, unfasten the two the valance) is clean. toggle clips retaining the air blending valve housing to Inspect the joint seals for serviceability. Renew if the air cleaner housing. Carefully free the joint and necessary. move the housing away from the air cleaner. Two types of filter element have been fitted. a tubular type, open at both ends or a conical type with the small end of the cone closed. Dependent on the type of filter element to be fitted proceed as follows.

Tubular type Enter the new element into the wing valance. Fit the air cleaner housing to the wing valance. Ensure that it is located inside the valance retaining clamp ring. Hold the rubber seal in position over the housing spigot by placing the fingers of one hand through the air intake aperture and onto the seal. To allow the housing to pass over the end of the filter, it will be necessary to slightly withdraw the element during this operation. Fig. 83·15 Air filter (Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Whilst ensuring that both the air filter element and Mulsanne, late Corniche, and all sealing ring are correctly positioned on the housing Continental) spigot. fit the assembly to the wing valance. Align the three housing toggle clips with their respective securing points. Fasten the toggle clips. Fit the remaining components by reversing the removal procedure.

Conical type Locate the large end of the new filter element onto the locating spigot on the inside of the removable half of the housing. Carefully position the housing and filter onto the valance allowing the filter to pass into the valance mounted section of the housing. Locate the small (blank) end of the filter into the spigot in the valance housing. Align the three housing toggle clips with their respective securing points. Special care should be taken during these operations to ensure that the paper element is not damaged during insertion. Ensure that the fitter is correctly positioned on the location spigots, then secure the three toggle clips. It is essential that the filter is correctly located on the spigots before the toggle clips are fastened down, otherwise there is a serious risk of crushing the filter element Fit the remaining components by reversing the removal procedure.

1\602 Early Corniche and all Camargue The air filter element is situated in the air intake Fig. 83-16 Air filter (early Corniche and housing at the front right-hand side of the engine Camargue) compartment (see fig. 83-16}.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 83 83-11

To gain access to the element, unscrew the worm drive clip securing the intake hose to the air meter inlet duct. Withdraw the hose. Unscrew the knurled securing setscrew situated on the side of the assembly. Withdraw the cover. Unscrew the hexagonal nut from the centre stud. Withdraw the end plate, filter element and second end plate. fit the new element to the assembly by reversing the removal procedure. Refer to figure 83-16 for the correct assembly sequence.

5 Renew the sparking plugs Sparking plug type Champion RN 12YC or RN 12Y Plug gap setting 0,89 mm (0.035 in) Fig. B3-17 Distributor lubrication point Before removing the sparking plugs the surrounding area should be thoroughly cleaned to prevent the ingress of foreign matter when the plugs are removed. Fit the new plugs ensuring that the gaps are correctly set and that each plug is fitted with a sealing washer. Torque tighten each plug to between 18 Nm and 23 Nm ( 1,8 kgf m and 2,3 kgf m. 13 tbf ft and 1 7 lbf ft).

6 Lubricate the distributor (1981/82 model year cars only) Lubrication of the spindle is the only routine maintenance required. To carry out this operation remove the moulded Fig. B3· 18 Idle speed adjustment top cover of the distributor and the rotor arm. Do not remove the cover from the distributor baseplate (see fig. 83-1 7). the front cylinder on the right-hand side of the engine Lubricate the spindle shaft bearings by applying when viewed from the driver's seat. two drops of engine oil to the felt pad situated beneath Important the rotor arm. If the ignition timing is to be set. ensure that the Clean and fit the rotor arm. sparking plugs are in good condition before running Clean the terminal posts and cover. Fit the cover the engine; if they require cleaning or renewal, ensure ensuring that it is correctly located on the distributor that the gaps are set correctly (see Operation 5, base. Renew the sparking plugs).

7 Lub

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors limited 1985 B3-12

Direct the flashing light of the stroboscope onto Stan the engine, ensure that normal operating the crankshaft damper timing marks and timing temperature is attained and apply a vacuum of 355,60 pointer; the pointer is positioned on the left-hand side mm Hg ( 14 in Hg) to the capsule. of the crankshaft damper when viewed from the Set the engine speed to 1450 rev/min (reduce driver's seat. from a higher speed to 1450 rev/min). If the timing pointer does not coincide with the Check that the ignition timing has retarded l 6°btdc mark on the crankshaft damper adjust the between 10° and 14° from the setting noted upon ignition timing as follows. completion of Operation 9. Disconnect the vacuum Release the clamp screw on the distributor and pump. rotate the head of the distributor in the appropriate Allow the engine to return to the idle speed and direction until the correct timing is obtained. Clockwise set this to 650 rev/min using the idle speed rotation of the distributor head advances the ignition adjustment screw on top of the throttle body. and conversely anti-clockwise rotation retards the Direct the timing light onto the timing marks on ignition. the crankshaft damper. The timing should now be Tighten the clamp screw and check that the between tdc and 8° btdc. ignition timing is between 14° and l 6°btdc at 1450 Connect a vacuum pump to the distributor rev/min (again reduce from a higher speed to 1450 vacuum advance hose. Apply an initial vacuum of 635 rev/min). mm Hg (25 in Hg) and then reduce the vacuum to 508 mm Hg (20 in Hg) and maintain it. Adjust the 10 Check the operation of the ignition distributor idle speed to 650 rev/min. vacuum advance/retard mechanism Check that the ignition timing has advanced by After completing Operation 9 continue as follows. between 1o• and 14° from the setting noted j Connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum retard previously (timing between tdc and 8° btdc). side of the capsule; ensuring that the hose normally Stop the engine, remove the test equipment and connected to the capsule remains blanked off. reconnect all hoses in their correct positions.

11 Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary Ensure that the usual workshop safety precautions are carried out and that an impulse tachometer is fitted to the engine in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. To set the idle speed, ensure that the engine has stabilized at its normal operating temperature. This can be achieved by allowing the engine to run at idle speed for at least 1 5 minutes after the thermostat has opened. The opening of the thermostat can be detected by a sudden rise in the temperature of the 0 thermostat elbow pipe. ,!-...-4---1----1-3 5 Disconnect the purge line at the restrictor. Leave D the restrictor fitted into the hose to the engine (see fig. B3·9). Disconnect the oxygen sensor cable situated in the rear left-hand corner of the engine companment (see fig. B3-3). Ensure that the automatic air conditioning system is off. Set the engine idle speed to 650 rev/min by turning the adjustment screw situated on top of the throttle body (see fig. B3-18). .• s -•O Connect the purge line hose and the oxygen .,o ,10 0 10 20 BC ,601 ·40 I 30 I ' • ' ' sensor cable to their respective connections. H'I< 60!< 4&'l, is.• .fol( i~" 20l( .... ct" Note Connecting the purge line may increase the idle speed Fig. B3-19 Anti-freeze connection chart to give a and connecting the oxygen sensor cable will tend to 50% solution restore normal idle speed. Do not attempt to correct A Acceptable service range of concentration these small variations in idle speed. B Freezing point of coolant C Percentage concentration Engine cooling system D Volume of 100% anti-freeze to be added 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration to maintain a 50% solution after removal The cooling system is filled initially with a coolant of the same volume of old coolant solution comprising equal parts of UT 184 (BP· Hythe

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 83 B3·13

Chemicals) or Prestone II and water. This mixture gives frost protection down to a temperature of .37•c (·35°F). The coolant should contain fifty percent of an approved anti-freeze at all times. This not only provides frost protection but also prevents corrosion of the coolant passages and raises the boiling temperature of the coolant The anti-freeze concentration should be checked in both the expansion bottle (where fitted) and the radiator. If the strength of the coolant requires increasing, sufficient coolant should be drained from the radiator and replaced with undiluted anti-freeze (see fig. \ 83-1 9). Afterwards run the engine until normal ,'J, operating temperature is attained and the anti-freeze I has become thoroughly mixed with the coolant. Stop the engine and again check the concentration in the radiator. i An acceptable 1evel of anti-freeze concentration is 1981 /85 modell year between 45% and 50%. Therefore, as a hydrometer may be inaccurate where readings above 40% are Fig. B3·20 Oil pressure switches and transmitter expected. it is recommended that a refractometer is arrangements used. For details refer to Chapter L of the Workshop Manual. If a refractometer is not available and a hydrometer has to be used. a scale reading of between 1.06 and 1,07 should be obtained with the coolant at room temperature for the mixture to be correct.

2 Check the coolant level Warning Both types of cooling system become pressurized during engine running. therefore, extreme care should be taken when removing the radiator cap from a warm or hot radiator.

Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, late Corniche, and all Continental Routine check Fig. B3-21 Coolant expansion bottle (Silver To check the level outside a normal service schedule Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, late (e.g. Regular maintenance) and when no cooling/ Corniche, and all Continental) heating system fault is reported or suspected, proceed as follows. Check the coolant level in the translucent If the engine is hot ensure that the coolant level expansion bottle (see fig. B3-21 ). If the level is low or in the translucent expansion bottle is at the MAX the bottle is empty, add coolant to bring the level up to mark. Top-up if necessary and replace the expansion the MIN mark. bottle cap. Ensure that the engine is not hot (to allow safe If the engine is cold ensure that the coolant level removal of the radiator cap). in the translucent expansion bottle is half-way between Remove the radiator cap in three stages as the MIN and MAX marks. Top-up if necessary and follows. replace the expansion bottle cap. Turn the cap slowly anti-cloqkwise until a check If the coolant level in the expansion bottle is either position is reached. Wait until any pressure in the below the MIN mark or there is no coolant in the system has been released. Press down on the cap and expansion bottle. carry out the following Full check continue to turn it anti-clockwise until the cap is procedure. released. Full check Check the coolant level in the radiator. This should Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position be half-way up the filler neck. and apply the parking brake. If the coolant level in the radiator is correct, fit the Remove the gear range selector cut•out from the radiator cap by pressing it firmly down and turning it fuseboard. fully clockwise.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 83·14

Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in Allow approximately one minute for the system to accordance with the Routine check procedure. attain the required setting, then check that all air is If the coolant level in the radiator is low but visible being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is and no cooling/heating system fault is reported or delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets}. suspected top-up the system using the following This procedure opens the heater water tap and procedure. If however the coolant is not visible or a ensures that the cooling system can be correctly cooling/heating system leak is reported or suspected, checked. the system should have any faults rectified and then Switch off the ignition. be pressure tested prior to carrying out the topping·up Remove the radiator cap. If the engine is hot. procedure. muffle the cap with a thick c!oth and grpdually turn the Top-up the radiator until the coolant is half-way up cap anti-clockwise until the pressure is released, then the filler neck. remove the cap. Start and run the engine. If the coolant level is low, top-up the radiator Turn the air conditioning system function control header tank with the correct anti-freeze/water mixture. fully clockwise to the defrost position. The correct level is when the coolant reaches the Set the air conditioning system override switch to rubber seal in the filler neck. Fit the filler cap. the AUTO position. Allow at least one minute for the air conditioning 3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness system to stabilize, then check to ensure that all air is Examine all the coolant hose connections for signs of being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is leakage and check the worm drive clips for tightness. delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). Never overtighten a clip in an attempt to seal a leaking This procedure opens the heater system water tap. connection. Run the engine, without the radiator pressure cap In the event of a hose connection leaking when fitted, until normal operating temperature is attained. the worm drive clips have been tightened, drain the Top-up the coolant level in the radiator during this cooling system to a level below the leaking hose. time. Remove and inspect the hose and its connecting Switch off the engine. component for signs of damage. If necessaiy renew Fit the radiator pressure cap by pressing it firmly the faulty component and refill the system with coolant down and turning it fully clockwise. as described in Renew the coolant. Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in accordance with the Routine check procedure. 4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses Inspect all coolant hoses for signs of deterioration, Early Corniche and all Camargue cracking, weak spots. etc. Any faulty hose should be Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position removed and a new hose fitted. When renewing a and apply the parking brake. hose always ensure that it does not foul other Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the components and that it is not kinked so as to cause fuseboard. complete or partial restriction of coolant flow. Start the engine and turn the air conditioning function control clockwise to the defrost position and 5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose set the upper system mode override switch to the Drain the coolant system as described in Renew the AUTO position. coolant, but do not remove the engine crankcase drain plugs. Disconnect the heater tap feed hose from the engine and heater tap (see fig. B3-22}; remove the hose. Fit the new hose; ensure that the hose is free from any sharp bends that may restrict coolant flow. Fill the engine coolant system as described in Renew the coolant. Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the gear range selector lever is in the Park position. Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the fuseboard. Start and run the engine; check the coolant hose for leaks. Switch off the ignition and fit the gear range selector cut-out.

6 Renew the coolant Drive the car onto a ramp; move the gear range selector to the Park position and apply the parking Fig. 83·22 Heater tap feed hose brake.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B3 83-15

Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the fuseboard. Disconnect the Lucar connection from the pressure switch situated on the oil filter mounting/take-off flange (see fig. B3·20). This will allow the air conditioning system to be operated without running the engine. Switch on the ignition and rotate the air conditioning function switch to the windscreen defrost position, also set the upper system mode override switch to the AUTO position. Wait approximately one minute for the system to attain the required setting and observe that all the air is being directed to the windscreen. This procedure opens the heater water tap and ensures the system can be completely drained. Switch off the ignition. Place a container beneath the radiator drain tap to collect the coolant Connect a length of hose onto the Fig. 83·23 Crankcase drain plug ('B bank shown) drain tap to direct.the coolant into the container. Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator pressure cap. temperature is attained; switch off the engine and top Open the radiator drain tap and allow the coolant up the expansion bottle to the maximum level. to drain from the radiator. Allow the engine to cool down. Carefully remove When the radiator has completely drained place a the radiator pressure cap and ensure the radiator is container beneath the crankcase drain plugs. Remove completely full of coolant. Top-up to half·way up the the drain plugs from the crankcase (see fig. B3·23) radiator filler neck if necessary. Fit the radiator and allow the residue of coolant to drain from the pressure cap. crankcase. Connect the Lucar connection previously Renew the washers on the drain plugs and fit the disconnected from the pressure switch adjacent to the plugs into the crankcase. oil filter mountingpake·off flange (see fig. B3·20). Renew the washers on the drain plugs and fit the Note plugs into the crankcase. For the coolant system to operate correctly, i.e. for To drain the coolant remaining in the expansion coolant to pass into the expansion bottle when hot and bottle (Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, late be drawn back into the radiator during cooling, the top Comiche, and all Continental) disconnect the of the radiator must not contain an air pocket. connection hose from the radiator filler neck and allow the coolant to drain from the expansion bottle into the 7 Reverse flush the coolant system container. When the coolant has drained connect the Drain the engine coolant system as described in hose to the radiator filler neck. Renew the coolant Check all hoses for serviceability and renew as Remove the top and bottom hoses from the necessary. radiator matrix. Fill the system with fresh coolant of the specified Fit a waste pipe to the upper (inlet) connection of concentration as follows. the radiator. Ensure the radiator drain tap is closed. Apply mains water under pressure through the Slowly fill the radiator with coolant, thus reducing lower (outlet) connection of the radiator. This should the possibility of air locks in the system. remove all loose sediment in approximately 30 Start and run the engine for a minimum of 10 minutes. minutes with the radiator pressure cap removed. Aher Do not under any circumstances use an running for five minutes ensure that warm air is alkaline compound or detergent to clean the passing up the windscreen from the demister ducts. system. Such compounds have a detrimental Top-up the radiator as necessary to ensure there is chemical action on aluminium alloys. always coolant in the top tank of the radiator. Remove the engine coolant drain plugs from the Ensure that the thermostat has opened; indicated crankcase. by a rapid warming of the top radiator hose. Remove the thermostat as described in Renew the Switch off the engine and top-up the radiator to thermostat then replace the cover. half·way up the filler neck. Fit the pressure cap. Fit a suitable pipe to the drain plug aperture and Applicable to Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, Mulsanne. apply mains water pressure to each aperture in turn. late Corniche. and all Continental. Flush for approximately 30 minutes. or until the Fill the expansion bottle to a level midway water runs clear of foreign matter. between the maximum and minimum levels indicated Fit the drain plugs and a new thermostat by on the bottle. reversing the procedure for removal. Start and run the engine until normal running To flush the heater system, detach the heater at

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1 985 83-16 the water tap and disconnect the return hose at the Open the radiator drain tap and allow sufficient coolant pump. coolant to drain from the system for the coolant level fit a waste pipe to the disconnected heater feed to fall below that of the thermostat housing. Close the hose. drain tap and remove the hose previously attached. flush the matrix for.approximately 30 minutes. Disconnect the electrical connector from the Examine the coolant hoses for deterioration or thermostat housing cover. damage and renew as necessary. Unscrew the four setscrews from the thermostat Connect alt hoses and fill the system with the housing cover. recommended coolant mixture as described under Remove the thermostat housing cover. The cover Renew the coolant can be moved away from the housing without detaching the outlet hose. 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator and lift the thermostat from the housing (see fig. refrigeration condenser 83·.24). Using a pressure hose pipe, flush the radiator and Remove the old gasket material from the condenser matrices. thermostat housing and cover. Ensure that no material Hold the nose of the hose pipe close to the back enters the thermostat housing. of the radiator matrix and allow the water to pass Check that the two faces are clean and dry. between the veins of the matrix. Slowly move the hose Insert a new thermostat into the housing. over the whole matrix area until all foreign matter Place a new gasket in position on the housing and (insects. etc.) have been flushed clear. Care must be fit the cover. Secure the cover using the four taken to ensure that the end of the hose does riot setscrews. damage the matrix face during this operation. Connect the electrical connection removed from the thermostat housing. 9 Renew the thermostat Top-up the cooling system with the correct Disconnect the battery coolant mixture as described under Renew the coolant. Place a container beneath the radiator. Attach a length of hose to the radiator drain tap to direct the Torque converter transmission coolant into the container. It is absolutely essential when adding fluid to. or Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator working on the torque converter transmission that pressure cap. great attention is paid to cleanliness. The smallest particle of dirt in the transmission fluid could interfere with the correct operation of the unit. It is important for efficient operation of the torque converter transmission that only an approved fluid is used (see Chapter A).

1 Check the transmission fluid level The fluid level can only be checked accurately when the car is standing on a level surface. the engine is running at idle speed. and transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature, approximately 77°C ( 170°F} The dipstick and filler tube are situated on the right-hand side of the engine compartment. On Silver Spirit, Silver Spur. and Mulsanne cars, remove the protective cover (if fined) from the windscreen wiper mechanism to gain access to the dipstick. Ensure that the following safety procedure is undertaken to isolate the mechanism prior to removing the cover. Ensure that the windscreen wiper switch situated on the facia is in the off position. Remove a windscreen wiper relay, preferably number three, situated adjacent to the windscreen washer reservoir (see fig. 83-25). To remove the relay, pull it vertically from its mounting. On all cars, always clean the top of the dipstick before removing it from the filler tube. As an initial check, the fluid level may be checked after starting from cold as follows. Apply the parking brake. Fig. B3-24 Thermostat housing assembly Start and run the engine for three to four minutes

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B3 83-17

at fast-idle speed, with the gear range selector in the Park position. Reduce the engine speed to slow idle. Whilst sitting in the driving seat, firmly apply the footbrake and move the gear range selector through the full range of gear positions pausing briefly in each range. Return the selector to the Park position. Immediately check the fluid level with the engine running at idle speed. The level should be up to the circular dimple situated below the FILL mark on the dipstick or 10 mm (0.375 in) below the MIN mark. dependent on the type of dipstick fitted (see fig. B3-25). Top-up to this level if necessary. After this initial check a further check should be carried out as follows. Drive the car for approximately 24 kilometres (15 miles) of highway/motorway driving or 16 kilometres ( 10 miles) of city driving. This should ensure the transmission has reached normal operating temperature. It is essential that this temperature is attained. Do not top-up the fluid level to the MAX mark on the dipstick when the fluid is only warm, as this will result in an overfill situation when the normal operating temperature is attained. Overfilling will result in fluid being discharged from the transmission B breather pipe. Position the car on a level surface, firmly apply the parking brake and select Park with the gear selector lever. Carry out the procedure described for the initial check. With the transmission fluid at normal operating temperature the level of the fluid should be between the FILL and MAX HOT marks or the MIN and MAX Fig. 83-25 Transmission filler tube and dipstick marks ( see fig. B3-2 5) dependent on the type of A Windscreen wiper motor relay dipstick fitted. 8 Original dipstick markings If necessary add fluid by pouring it down the filler C Revised dipstick markings tube, with the engine still running, until the fluid is to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill When the fluid level is correct switch off the engine and fit the windscreen wiper mechanism cover and relay.

2 Renew the transmission fluid Position the car on a ramp or over a pit Place a clean container having a minimum capacity of 3 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt} under the nut which secures the transmission fluid filler tube to the sump (see fig. 83-26). From within the engine compartment remove the transmission dipstick as described under Check the transmission fluid level. Slacken the setscrew securing the filler tube to the engine. Unscrew the nut securing the filler tube to the Fig. B3·26 Transmission drain point side of the transmission sump (see fig. B3·26). Withdraw the filler tube from the sump and move it to Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip one side to allow the fluid to drain into the container. to the engine. After draining the sump, ensure that the filler tube Add 2,8 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt) of an approved is clean then fit it to the sump and tighten the drain fluid to the sump. pouring the fluid down the filler nut. tube.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 83-18

Check the fluid level as described under Check the transmission fluid level.

3 Fit a new intake strainer Drain the transmission sump as described under the heading Renew the transmission fluid, then proceed as follows. Remove the setscrews securing the transmission sump and lower the sump. Drain any oil from the sump and discard the gasket. Unscrew the setscrew securing the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission; remove the strainer assembly (see fig. B3-27). Remove the intake pipe from the strainer and Fig. 83-27 Transmission intake strainer removal discard the strainer. Clean the transmission sump and the intake pipe with paraffin and dry with compressed air. Fit a new rubber 'O' ring to the intake pipe and lubricate the ·o· ring with clean transmission fluid. Ensure that a new rubber seal is fitted to the pipe ' .bore in the new intake strainer. then fit the intake pipe . I to the strainer. Fit the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission and torque tighten the securing setscrew to 14 Nm {1.4 kgf m. 10 lbf ft). Fit the transmission sump using a new gasket and torque tighten the sump setscrews to 1 6 Nm ( 1, 7 kgf m, 1 2 lbf ft). Fit the oil filler tube into the sump and tighten the nut. Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip to the engine. Add 4,5 litres (8 Imp pt. 9.6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump, pouring the fluid down the filler tube, then follow the fluid level checking procedure described under Check the transmission fluid level.

4 lubricate the gear range selector control rod Lubricate the clevis pins in the control rod linkage at Fig. 83-28 Propeller shaft grease point the left-hand side of the transmission, with a few drops of clean engine oil. Also lubricate the manual shaft where it enters the transmission casing.

Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints {if applicable) A grease nipple is fitted to the universal joint at each end of the shaft (see fig. 83-28). Using a suitable grease gun lubricate each joint with an approved grease. On cars fitted with a rubber jointed propeller shaft lubrication is not required.

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Remove the level plug located in the rear face of the final drive casing {see fig. 83-29). The oil in the casing should be up to the level plug orifice. tf necessary, to~up with an approved oil. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint Fig. B3-29 Final drive drain and filler/level points washer.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B3 83-19

2 Renew the final drive oil It is advisable to carry out this operation when the oil is warm. e.g. immediately after the car has completed a run. Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and clean the area around the drain and level plugs (see fig. B3-29). Place a container beneath the drain plug, then remove both the drain and level plugs. When the oil has drained, fit the drain plug complete with a new joint washer. Using a syringe, fill the casing to the level plug orifice with an approved oil (see Chapter A); approximately 2.3 litres (4.0 Imp pt, 4.8 US pt) of oil will be required. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint washer and check for leaks. Fig. 83-30 Steering pump filler/dipstick 3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint covers The drive-shaft constant velocity joints are enclosed by convoluted seals which retain the joint lubricant. If upon inspection a seal is found to be leaking or damaged the joint should be inspected and a new seal fitted as described in Chapter J of the Workshop Manual.

Steering system 1 Check the steering pump fluid level Remove the filler cap from the steering pump reservoir and check that the fluid level is at least up to the FULL COLD mark on the integral dipstick. If necessary, top up to this level with approved fluid (see fig. B3·30). Start and run the engine until it reaches normal W28G operating temperature. approximately 77°C (170°F), then stop the engine. Fig. B3·31 Track rod ball joints Remove the filler cap and check the fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, add an approved fluid to raise the level to the FULL HOT mark on the dipstick; do not overfill. Ensure that the filler cap is securely replaced.

2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints (if applicable) If grease nipples are fitted to the ball joints at the ends of the track rods. they should be lubricated until a slight swelling of the joint seal is evident. Take care not to damage or displace the seals.

3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers Examine the condition of the rubber cover seals on the ball joints (see fig. B3-31 ). If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition new parts should be fitted as necessary. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

4 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the Fig. B3·32 Front suspension ball joints

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 83-20

rack and pinion unit and check the tightness of the unless the rubber seal covers are damaged. seal clips. If on inspection the covers are found to be If the seals are satisfactory, tighten the clips as damaged or in poor condition. the ball joints should be necessary. removed and new joints and seals fitted as necessary. If the convoluted seals are found to be damaged For full information refer to Chapter H of the or in poor condition, the rack and pinion unit should be Workshop Manual. removed from the car and new seals fitted. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop 2 Check the condition of the rear strut Manual. convoluted seals Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the Suspension rear suspension struts (see fig. B3-33). 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor covers conditi9n. the struts should be removed. as described The front suspension ball joints (see fig. B3-32) are in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual, and new seals packed with grease on initial assembly and should not fitted. normally require attention between service overhauls 3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Disconnect the actuation links from the height control valves and the rear suspension trailing arms at the ball joints (see fig. B3-34). Note from which side each link is taken. Clean the ball joints then lubricate with an l approved grease. Do not alter the length of the actuation link. Connect the actuation link to the height control valve and the trailing arm from which it was removed. Adjust the joint to obtain complete movement without free play.

Brake and hydraulic systems

WARNING

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section BJ B3·21

components which have been in contact )Nith contaminated mineral oil. Brake fluids and mineral oil are immiscible and with large amounts of contamination separation of the fluids will occur on standing, due to the greater density of the conventional fluids. A further indication of the mixing of conventional brake fluid and mineral oil is its cloudy appearance. To carry out contamination tests a kit is available from Rolls·Royce Motors Limited, part number RH 2841 and should be used as follows. Switch on the ignition and depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until both low pressure warning panels illuminate. Continue to pump the pedal for at least a further 20 applications to ensure that all the accumulator mineral oil is returned to the reservoir. Clean the area around each hydraulic reservoir filler cap and then remove the cap. Ensure that the components in the test kit are clean and dry. Using the sampling tube provided, extract 50 ml of mineral oil from the top and bottom of each reservoir. Place the samples into the individual clean dry containers. Shake each sample taken to ensure it is well mixed. Pour 10 ml of each sample into clean test tubes (do not mix the samples together). Using the dispenser. add two drops of the red dye solution contained in the kit into each 10 ml sample. Cork the test tubes and shake them thoroughly. Leave the samples to settle for at least 30 minutes. Examine each sample.

Sample diagnosis On adding the red dye solution and the subsequent mixing. the green colour of the mineral oil will change to a reddish brown. This does not indicate contamination of the hydraulic system mineral oil. Contamination can only be confirmed by the formation of a cloudy red mass which will begin to senle towards the bonom of the tube if left to stand for at least 30 minutes. Fig. 83·35 Access to the hydraulic system If the sample in the test tube on addition of the reservoirs dye turns red but remains clear it indicates that the A Original filler cap sample is not contaminated. B Specialized filler cap The volume of red mass which will eventually settle to the bottom of the test tube indicates the amount of contamination within the hydraulic system should be obtained by sending a sample to Rolls· mineral oil. Royce Motors (if in the United Kingdom) or to a Complete separation of the two liquids may take a chemical analysis laboratory. considerable amount of time. for example a very small Before attempting any work on a hydraulic system percentage of contamination may tak.e more than personnel must be fully conversant with the seven days to completely separate. precautions required to ensure adequate safety and If contamination is suspected, a more thorough correct system operation. test can be undertaken, details of which are given in Refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Important If contamination is suspected, but difficult to Always seal each reservoir cap after it has been diagnose, due to the small amount of contaminant that confirmed that the systems are not contaminated and may be present. or any doubt exists, confirmation all work on the systems has been completed.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Aoyce Motors Limited 1985 B3·22

1 Check the mineral oil level in the reservoirs allow the mineral oil to flow from the accumulator The mineral oil reservoirs for hydraulic systems are spheres back to the reservoirs. located in the engine compartment (see fig. 83·35). Drain the mineral oil from the reservoirs and clean To check the oil level. first depressurize the the reservoirs as described in Chapter G of the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until Workshop Manual. the two warning panels illuminate. Run the engine for After the system has completely drained. close all approximately four minutes to charge the system~ and the bleed screws and ensure that any distrubed pipes then stop the engine. The mineral oil in both reservoirs are connected and correctly torque tightened. should be up to the FULL marks on the level indicator Fill the reservoirs with fresh hydraulic system plate. mineral oil (see fig. B3·35 and Chapter A) until the If the reservoirs require topping-up, ensure that levels in the reservoirs are slightly above the topping· the tops of the reservoirs and the filler caps are clean, up marks on the indicator plate. then add an approved hydraulic system mineral oil (see Run the engine for four minutes, with the car Chapter Al as necessary. unladen, then top-up to the FULL level mark; never It is important that only approved hydraulic allow the mineral oil levels to fall below the minimum system mineral oil is used and that exceptional level marks. cleanliness is obs&rved when topping-up the Check for leaks. especially around the unions of hydraulic systems. any pipes which have been disturbed. Under no circumstances should a conven· Finally, bleed the hydraulic systems as described tional (i.e. RR363 or Universal) type brake fluid be in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. used. Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic After topping-up ensure that the filler caps are System Mineral Oil for system replenishment, are clean. then fit them securely to the reservoirs Of insert fitted adjacent to the battery. the blanking plug dependent upon the type of filler cap fitted. 3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic hoses System Mineral Oil for system replenishment, are Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and check the fitted adjacent to the battery. condition of the hydraulic system pipes and hoses. Examine the metal pipes for signs of corrosion, 2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil particularly those in an exposed position. Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Examine the hoses for chafing or surface cracking. Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as Faulty pipes and hoses should be replaced as follows. described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic systems by attaching a tube to each bleed point. then 4 Renew the accumulator to body. trailing arms opening the bleed screws and allowing the mineral oil to body, and sub-frame to body hoses (if fitted) to drain from the circuits. The bleed screws are located Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in on each accumulator. on each pair of brake calipers. on Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as the deceleration conscious pressure limiting valve and follows. on each rear suspension strut Of each inner rear wing Fit a hose clamp to each of the intermediate hoses from the suspension strut A drain tube is not required of the accumulator retum pipes to prevent the flow of at the accumulator bleed screws as these are an mineral oil from the reservoirs. integral part of the accumulators and when opened Thoroughly clean the areas around the connections of the two accumulator to body. trailing arms to body, and sub-frame to body hoses (see figs. 83-36, 83-37, and B3·38). Remove the respective hoses noting the following. To avoid contamination fit the new hose immediately after removing the old one; alternatively fit approved blanks to the open ports until the new hoses are fitted. Before fitting a new hose ensure that it is thoroughly clean and conforms with the hydraulic systems mineral oil requirements. When fitting the new hoses, ensure that they are routed to clear other components and that clearance is maintained during full suspension movement. Tighten the pipe nuts to the torque settings given in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. After fitting the new hoses, check for leaks and bleed the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G Fig. 83·36 Hydraulic accumulator to body hoses of the Workshop Manual.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B3 83-23

5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses To renew the hydraulic system hoses follow the same basic procedure described under the heading Renew the accumulator to body, trailing arms to body, and sub frame to body hoses.

8 Renew the brake caliper seals To renew the caliper piston seals it is necessary to remove the brake calipers from the car. For full instructions. refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. 6 5 4 W29

9 Check the parking brake pads for wear Fig. 83-39 Parking brake mechanism Securely chock the front wheels then raise the rear of 1 Actuation rod the car. Place sill blocks under the rear body sills and 2 Centralizing straps also support the rear trailing arms. Do not allow the 3 Parking brake pads suspension struts to support the full suspension load. 4 Brake disc Remove the rear wheels and release the parking 5 Adjuster clicker block brake to the off position. 6 Adjuster

TSD 4406

Printed in Enghmd July 1985 © Aolls·ftoyce Motors Limited 1985 83-24

Disconnect the caliper actuation rod from the locate the pads into position and hook the springs caliper lever (see fig. 83-39). onto the caliper. Unscrew and remove the caliper adjuster and Complete the assembly by reversing the removal collect the adjuster clicker plate. · procedure, then adjust the calipers as described under Unhook the pad retention springs from each pad, the heading Adjust the parking brake. noting the larger spring is fitted to the inner pad. Note . Remove the pads from the caliper. If new parking brake pads have been fitted, the Check the thickness of the lining material on each following bedding-in procedure should be carried out pad. Pads which are worn to within 1.6 mm (0.062 in) after adjusting the parking brake. or less of the steel backing plate should be renewed. Drive the car at approximately 48 km/h (30 To fit the pads. attach the retention springs then mile/h) and apply the parking brake to bring the car to rest; it is important that this is done gently and progressively. The parking brake must not be applied fully and no attempt should be made to lock the wheels. This operation should be carried out nine times, allowing at least one minute to elapse between stops to prevent the discs overheating. Finally adjust the caliper as described under the heading Adjust the parking brake.

10 Adjust the parking brake Ensure that the parking brake is in the off position. j Adjust the rear cables at the adjusters (see fig. 83-40) so that the caliper operating levers return to their off-stops under the influence of their return springs with no appreciable slackness in the cables. Note The cables must be adjusted so that the equalizer link on the intermediate linkage (see fig. 83-40) lies at right-angles with the centre line of the car with the parking brake in the off position.

To check the cable adjustment, adjust both rear cables at the equalizer link until the caliper off-stops are just clear of the calipers. Measure the gap produced at each off-stop and lengthen the cables by this amount. With the cables correctly adjusted. check that the centralizing straps (see fig. B3-39} are pushing the pads away from the discs when the parking brake is in Fig. B3-40 Parking brake rear cable adjustment the off position. If not, remove the nut and bolt securing point the straps, bend the straps outward (i.e. away from the disc) then refit them. Ensure that the straps are pushed downward towards the adjusting nut whilst tightening the nut and bolt securing them to the caliper. Check that the distance between the pad and the disc are the same on each side of the caliper; if not. reset the centralizing straps. Raise each rear wheel in turn so that it is free to rotate and adjust each caliper as follows. Tum the caliper adjuster (see fig. B3-39) clockwise until the pads just grip the disc; at this point it should only just be possible to rotate the road wheel by hand. Turn the adjuster anti-clockwise a quarter turn (i.e. three clicks on the nut) to obtain the minimum clearance between the pads and disc.

11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Lubricate the parking brake linkage clevis pins,fulcrum pins, and the Fig. 83-41 Main fuel filter rear cable adjusters with approved grease.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B3 B3·25

Fuel system Safety precautions It is important that before a fuel line is opened or the fuel tank is drained or siphoned, the workshop safety precautions given in Chapter A and Chapter U of the Workshop Manual are strictly observed.

1 Renew the main fuel filter The main fuel filter is situated on the car body frame (see fig. B3·41 ). It is a sealed unit and no attempt should be made to clean the element. At the appropriate service interval change the main fuel filter. Depressurize the system (see Chapter U) and A0518 unscrew the inlet and outlet pipe connections. Slacken the worm drive clip retaining the assembly Fig. B3-42 lntank fuel filter to the mounting bracket and withdraw the filter at::sembly. Unscrew the unions fitted into both ends of the Check the complete fuel system for leaks and filter and discard the assembly. rectify as necessary. Fit the new filter assembly by reversing the removal procedure, noting the direction of flow arrow marked on the outside of the casing. Electrical system When carrying out the above operation at 80 000 1 Check the state of charge of the battery kilometres (48 000 miles) or four years and subsequent Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, late Corniche, and periods, the intank fuel filter situated on the underside all Continental cars. of the fuel tank (see fig. 83·42) should also be removed The battery is situated in the luggage compartment and cleaned as follows. stowage well. To gain access to the battery, turn back Disconnect the battery. the carpet from the right-hand side of the luggage Drain or siphon the fuel tank. compartment Lift out the stowage well lid and the Place a container beneath the fuel intank filter to cover from around the battery. collect the residue of fuel from the tank when the filter is removed. Disconnect the hose from the intank filter outlet Early Corniche and all Camargue pipe. The battery is mounted on the right·hand side of the Remove the circlip retaining the filter and carefully luggage compartment. To gain access to the battery withdraw the filter from the tank. turn back the carpet and remove the trim from around Clean the filter mesh by washing in clean fuel. the battery, the trim is secured by contact strip on Examine the filter for serviceability and renew if Comiche and two turn fasteners on Camargue. Unclip necessary. the battery cover retaining strap and lift off the cover. Fit the filter by reversing the removal procedure. To check the specific gravity of the battery Always use a new seal on the filter body. electrolyte on these models. it is necessary to remove Ensure that the fuel drained from the fuel tank is the battery from the car as follows. Ensure the ignition free from foreign matter. then return it to the fuel tank. is switched off. then disconnect the battery leads. Check the fuel filter and the pipe connections that Remove the battery clamp and lift the battery from its have been disconnected, for leaks. cradle.

2 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel Battery electrolyte check tank hose; renew as necessary Applicable to batteries with removable cell vent To enable the filler head to fuel tank hose to be cover(s}. examined, it is necessary to remove the rear a. Electrolyte specific gravity check. suspension gas spring. Remove the vent cover(s) from the top of the battery. For details of the procedure required reference Using a hydrometer check the specific gravity of should be made to Chapter U of the Workshop the electrolyte in each cell and compare the readings Manual. obtained with the following tables. Caution 3 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes The electrolyte in the battery is a corrosive acid. Oo not Carefully examine all the flexible fuel pipes throughout allow the electrolyte to come into contact with the the fuel system. Renew any pipes which have become eyes, skin, fabric, or paintwork. Flush any contacted damaged or deteriorated to an unserviceable condition. areas immediately and thoroughly with water. If the Before renewing any pipes depressurize the eyes are effected. flush for at least 1 5 minutes and system (see Chapter U}. obtain prompt medical attention.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1 985 83-26

Chloride battery Before a voltage reading is taken on batteries that have recently received a charge, the residual effects of Air temperature below 32°C (90°F) the surface charge on the battery plates must be removed to avoid a false reading. This surface charge Specific Gravity Condition of Battery can be removed by applying an electrical load to the 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged battery {e.g. by either connecting a high rate discharge 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged tester for 15 seconds or if the battery is fitted to a car. 1.090 to 1.11 0 Fully discharged switching on the headlamps for one minute). After· wards, allow the battery to stand for a further one Air temperature above 32°C (90°F) minute before a voltage reading is taken. Specific Gravity Condition of Battery Compare the reading obtained with the following 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged table to ascertain the state of charge. 1.150 to 1. 1 70 Half discharged 1.070 to 1.090 Fully discharged Voltage State of charge 12.8 100% Lucas or Varta battery 12.6 82% 12.5 75% Air temperature below 27°C (80°F) 12.4 60%

Specific Gravity Condition of Battery A minimum reading of 12.5 volts (corresponding 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged to 75% charge) is acceptable. Below this reading the 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged battery should be recharged. Instructions for charging 1.090 to 1.110 Fully discharged are provided on the battery label. Air temperature above 27°C (80°F) 2 Clean and check the battery terminals The top of the battery should always be kept clean and Specific Gravity Condition of Battery dry. 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged If corrosion of the battery leads or terminals has 1. 1 30 to 1 . 1 50 Half discharged occured it should be removed as follows. 1.050 to 1.070 Fully discharged Disconnect the battery leads and using hot water or a dilute solution of ammonia carbonate. wash them If the specific gravity reading of all the cells is thoroughly until all corrosion has been removed. uniform and within the range 1.240 to 1.270 the Finally wash with clean water to remove the ammonia battery is in an acceptable state of charge. If the carbonate solution. readings are uniform but below 1.220 the battery Remove any corrosive deposit from the terminal should be recharged. Always remove the battery from posts using a cloth moistened with ammonia the car for recharging. carbonate solution then wash with clean water. If the specific gravity of the electrolyte in one cell Dry the battery leads and terminal posts. Connect differs markedly from the others (i.e. the reading is the battery leads to the terminal posts. Liberally coat 0.040 or more. lower than the remainder). then a the terminals with petroleum jelly. defect must be suspected and rectified as necessary. b. Electrolyte level check 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation Ensure that the battery is in a high state of charge (see Actuate the respective switches and check for lamp Electrolyte specific gravity check). illumination and function (i.e. turn flashers, headlamp The level of the battery electrolyte on each cell dip/main beam, etc.). should be approximately 5 mm {0.250 in) above the The respective facia tell•tales should also be tops of the separators (Lucas or Varta battery) or checked for illumination during these operations. contacting the blue bar situated above the separators With the lighting switch in the Park and.Head (Chloride battery). position, switch on the ignition. Check the facia If the electrolyte level is low top-up using distilled instruments for illumination; the panel illumination water until the level is attained. Do not overfill. dimming switch should also be checked for correct Always ensure the top of the battery is clean prior operation. to removal of the vent cover. 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation Battery voltage check Before carrying out the following checks firmly apply Applicable to sealed for life {maintenance free) the parking brake; ensure the gear range selector is in batteries the Park position and remove the gear range selector The state of charge of a ·sealed for lite· battery can isolator from the fuseboard. only be checked by taking a voltage reading at the battery terminals. using either a digital voltmeter or Ignition and oil warning lamps multimeter. The instrument used must be accurate to Turn the ignition key to the RUN position, the ignition within 0. 1 volts. and oil pressure warning lamps should illuminate.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 83 83-27

Start the engine. both lamps should extinguish; switch Check the operation of the front compartment off th~ ignition. personal lamps as follows. When the ignition key is turned to the ACC position Withdraw the main lighting switch; the front the ignition warning lamp only should illuminate. section of the driver's roof lamp should illuminate. Operate the map lamp switch, th~ front section of Warning panel cluster lamps the front passenger's roof lamp should illuminate. Move the gear range selector lever to the D position (do On 1985/86 model year cars fitted with vanity not inse~ the gear range selector isolator). mirror illumination, move the switch to the mirror Apply the footbrake then turn the ignition key to the position. Lower the passenger's sun visor; the lamp start position. All the warning panel cluster lamps situated above the visor should illuminate. should illuminate. With the ignition held in the start Withdraw the visor from its retaining clip; the lamp position, turn the main lighting switch to the Park and should extinguish. The lamp should also extinguish Head positions; the intensity of illumination of the ice when the visor is moved to its raised position, even and low fuel warning panels should reduce. Switch off when the switch is on. the ignition and lighting switch. The operation of the rear roof lamps should be The hydraulic system warning panel situated at the checked by operating the switches situated on the rear top of the warning panel cluster should also be checked compartment vanity mirror surrounds. as follows. Press the upper portion of the three position Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. switch; the front section of the respective roof lamp Depressurize the hydraulic system by actuating the should illuminate. Press the lower portion of the switch brake pedal between 50 and 60 times. The two brake and the rear section of both rear roof lamps should pressure warning panels should illuminate. illuminate. With the switch in the central position both When the panels have illuminated start and run the lamps should be off. Repeat the operation on the engine. Both panels should extinguish after opposite side of the car. approximately two minutes indicating that the hydraulic On Camargue cars press the outer of the two systems are pressurized. Switch off the ignition. switches situated in the arm rest; this should illuminate the rear section of both rear roof lamps. Pressing the inner switch should illuminate the front Fasten seat belt warning lamp section of the respective roof lamps. Repeat the To check the seat belt warning lamp, open and close operation on the opposite side of the car. each door in turn; observe the lamp operation. The seat belt warning panel should illuminate whenever a door is opened and extinguish Corniche Saloon cars Ensure the doors are fully closed and the interior approximately seven seconds after the door is closed. lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the Note rear section of the four roof lamps should illuminate. AU doors must be fully closed for the lamp to extinguish Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain (i.e. not on first catch). illuminated for approximately seven seconds then extinguish. Repeat the check with the passenger door. Hazard warning indicator When carrying out these checks also ensure that the Depress the hazard warning switch, check that all the door open warning lamp and step lamp are illuminated turn indicators and the facia warning lamp are flashing. when the door is open. Check the operation of the rear companment roof 5 Check all interior lamps for operation lamps by operating the three position switch situated Ensure all the doors are fully closed and the interior in each arm rest. ensuring that the car doors are lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the rear closed. section of the central roof lamps should illuminate. Fully Press the outer section of the switch, the front close the door; the roof lamps should remain section of the respective roof lamp should illuminate. illuminated for approximately seven seconds. Press the inner section of the switch, the rear section On 1985/86 model year cars the rear roof lamps of both rear roof lamps should illuminate. With the and footwell lamps should also illuminate when the door switch in the central position both roof lamps should is opened. If the gear selector lever is moved from the be off. Park position on these cars. with the ignition key in the Repeat the check on the opposite switch. RUN position, the lamps will extinguish immediately all Check the front companment roof lamps as the doors are closed. When carrying out this operation described in the section for cars. other than Corniche. also check that the door open warning lamp and step lamp are illuminated with the door in the open position. Convertible cars These lamps should extinguish immediately the door is Seven interior lamps are provided, one in each door, fully closed. two in the hood above the rear window. one in the Repeat the check on the remaining door(s). front face of each rear seat outer arm rest and one Note above the facia stowage companment. If the doors are only closed to the first catch position Open the driver's door; both roof lamps, the lamp the lamps should remain illuminated. in each rear arm rest and the lamp in each door should

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Aovce Motors Limited 1985 B3·28

illuminate. Fully close the door, the lamps should all a. Driver's side of the windscreen. Lift the wiper arm extinguish. except the rear roof lamps which should from the windscreen. Push half of the blade away from remain illuminated for approximately seven seconds. the arm. until the blade is released from its location Repeat this procedure with the passenger door. clip. To fit the new blade, position it on the wiper arm Withdraw the main lighting switch; both rear roof and press it firmly into the location clip. lamps should illuminate. b. On the passenger's side of the windscreen, lift the Operate the facia switch marked MAP; the lamp . wiper arm from the windscreen and pivot the blade situated above the facia stowage compartment should through 180°. Press the small release tag. situated on illuminate. the underside of the blade pivot block and push the With the doors closed, operate the switches blade out of the crooked end of the wiper arm. situated in the end of the arm rest. The rear roof lamp Withdraw the wiper blade from the arm. Fit the new and rear compartment arm rest lamp situated on the blade by reversing the removal procedure. same side of the car as the switch should illuminate. Note Care must be taken during these operations to ensure 6 Check the horns for operation that the wiper arm is not allowed to spring back onto Examine the electrical connections to each horn to the windscreen when the blade has been removed, ensure they are in good condition. Clean the horns and otherwise damage to the windscreen could occur. remove any foreign matter that may have collected in the horn trumpets. 9 Check the windscreen wash/wipe and Switch on the ignition; press the horn button headlamps power wash for correct operation several times to ensure the horn button is making a Before carrying out the following check ensure that the good contact and that both horns are functioning windscreen is clean. ) correctly each time it is pressed. Switch on the ignition and press the windscreen wash/wipe switch. The windscreen wipers should 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp operate and the fluid from the washer jets should washer reservoirs impinge on the windscreen approximately 419 mm Windscreen washer reservoir. ( 16.5 in) from the centre line of the windscreen and The filler is located in the engine compartment. 190 mm (7.5 in) below the windscreen top finisher. Remove the filler cap and add the correct mixture of The wash/wipe function should continue until the windscreen washer fluid and distilled water to the switch is released. reservoir until the maximum level is attained. On release of the push button switch the washer Topping-up level should cease while the wipers should continue for Cars with the reservoir situated in the engine approximately four strokes before returning to the park compartment • bottom of filler neck. position. Cars with the reservoir situated beneath the wing • Turn the main lighting switch to the HEAD 44,0 mm ( 1. 7 50 in) below the filler neck. position. The headlamps cleaning function (if fitted) Headlamp washer reservoir. will only operate when the headlamps are illuminated. On 1985/86 model year Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Press the wash/wipe switch. The headlamp brushes Mulsanne cars a headlamp washer system is fitted. and washer jets should operate until the switch is The reservoir is housed under the front right·hand released, the brush giving one full wipe cycle after the wing and the filler is located in the engine jet flow has ceased. compartment towards the front of the car. On cars fined with power wash the jets should The reservoir should be topped-up with clean only operate for half a second when the wash/wipe water until the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler switch is depressed. To repeat the wash it will be neck. necessary to release then depress the switch again. During winter conditions, a solution of 30% However, the windscreen wash/wipe function will isopropyl alcohol and 70% water should be used. This continue to operate as described previously while the mixture will provide frost protection down to a switch is held depressed. temperature of approximately - l0°C (14° F). 10 Check the alternator for correct operation 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper For details. of the alternator test procedure and brush blades renewal, reference should be made to Chapter M of Lift the wiper arms and blades from the windscreen the Workshop Manual. and inspect them for wear or damage. Renew the blades if necessary. To remove a blade, lift the wiper arm away from Automatic air conditioning system the windscreen then press the small tab situated in the 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from end of the arm to release the blade. Check that the obstruction new blade is secured by the retaining catch then Check the air intake grilles and foam filters situated return the blade to the windscreen. behind the bonnet, for obstruction (i.e. leaves. dirt, On late Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne etc.). Carefully remove the grille retaining screws. lift cars the wiper blade removal procedure is as follows. the grilles and filters from the body and clean all parts

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 83 83·29 including the air intake ducts; also ensure the duct drain tubes are free from obstruction.

2 Check the refrigeration system for correct operation For details of the procedure required to carry out this operation reference should be made to Chapter C of the Workshop Manual.

Body 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat belts The following checks should be carried out on the front and rear retractable seat belts. Fully withdraw the seat belt from the reel; examine the webbing for any signs of wear or damage. Fig. B3-43 Power operated hood reservoir Allow the belt to return to the stowed position. To check the operation of the retractable belt. fit Check the condition of the spare wheel as the belt and then give the webbing of the diagonal belt described under the heading Wheels. a sharp pull. Ensure that the belt locks and lhen Fit the spare wheel onto the carrier. Ensure that returns to the normal roller action immediately the belt the inflation valve is in line with the inflation trap in is released. the luggage compartment floor. then fully raise the With the fastening tongue of the belt locked in the carrier. retaining clasp; ensure the tongue is securely held and Fasten the spare wheel retainer (if fitted),and fit is released immediately the release button marked the tyre inflation trap rubber and carpet. PRESS is operated. The alternative method of checking the seat belts 3 Check the fluid level in the power operated is to select an open stretch of road. then. when the hood reservoir road is free from any potential danger. accelerate the Convertible cars car to 15 mile/h (24 km/h) and brake sharply from The level of the fluid in the hydraulic pump reservoir this speed; ensure that the belt locks and then must be checked with the hood in the fully open subsequently releases. If this method of test is used. it ( down) position. will be necessary to carry a passenger(s) to enable the The fluid reservoir is situated adjacent to the passenger seat belts to be tested. stowage recess below the luggage compartment floor Check the rear seat lap belt for condition and similar to that shown in figure B4-43. correct locking and release. To gain access to the reservoir, turn back the Report any defects to the owner. carpet on the right-hand side of the luggage When seat belt replacement is necessary only compartment to expose the recess covers; remove the belts approved by Rolls-Royce Motors Limited should covers. be fitted. Unscrew the reservoir filler cap and check the fluid level. The correct level is 25 mm ( 1.0 in) below 2 Check that all body drains are free from the filler neck. obstruction If necessary top-up the reservoir with an approved Examine the body drain holes; remove any foreign fluid. Under no circumstances must a castor oil matter that may be obstructing the holes. Take care based fluid be used. not to damage the paintwork. Wheels 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering 1 Check all tyre pressures bolt Check the tyre pressures including th~ spare when the Turn back the carpet on the luggage compartment tyres are cold; adjust if necessary. The inflation floor to expose the spare wheel inflation trap and spare pressure of the spare tyre should be adjusted to the wheel carrier lowering bolt head. Remove the inflation highest tyre pressure (i.e. rear wheel). trap cover; if a spare wheel retainer is fitted, it should Do not check the pressures when the tyres are be released. warm (e.g. after the vehicle has completed a journey). Rotate the spare wheel bolt anti-clockwise until Always ensure that the valve caps are fitted after the carrier is fully lowered. Remove the spare wheel checking. from the carrier. Lubricate the carrier lowering bolt using a 2 Check the condition and tread depth of the recommended lubricant. Raise and lower the carrier to tyres distribute the lubricant over the full length of the Examine the tyres. including the spare, for any signs of carrier bolt. damage or tyre wall cracking, etc.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Aolls·Aovce Motors Limited 1985 BJ-30

Carefully remove any stones or other objects that may be lodged in the tyre treads. Check the depth of tread at several points around each wheel using a tread depth gauge. To enable a visual check to be made. tread depth indicators are incorporated into the tyre construction. These indicators are integral moulded ribs, spaced at intervals around the circumference of the tyre and extend across the full width of the tread in all primary grooves. When one or more of these indicators are flush with the tread. only 1,6 mm {1/1e in) or less of tread depth remains. If the condition of the tyres is not satisfactory or the tread depths do not conform to the legal requirements of the country in which the car is operating, the owner should be notified and asked to authorize the fitting of new tyres. For full information on tyre fitting, balancing, etc., reference should be made to Chapter R of the Workshop Manual.

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance On completion of the respective service schedule operations, carefully road test the car for satisfactory performance. If new brake pads have been fitted, the running-in and bedding procedures should be carried out as described under. Check the brake disc pads for wear and Check the parking brake pads for wear. When the road test has been completed, the car should be fully inspected for any leaks. fouls. etc .• and rectified as necessary. The transmission fluid level. should be finally checked immediately after the test. while the fluid is at normal running temperature and topped-up if necessary (see Check the transmission fluid level). Ensure that all controls, door handles. steering wheel, etc.• are clean and that any dirt which may be attributed to the service schedule is completely removed.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 84-1

Service schedule procedures Cars conforming to North American specifications·

Contents Pages Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1981 /1987 (inclusive) model year cars 84-3 84-3 B4-3 The model year of these cars can be identified by the tenth letter of the vehicle identification number (VIN), as follows. 1981=8 (*SCAZS42A38CX01011*I 1982=C (*SCAZS42A7CCX05001 *l 1983=D (*SCAZS42A0DCX07805*) 1984=E (*SCAZS42AOECX08597*) 1985=F (*SCAZS42A3FCX12001*) 1986=G (*SCAZS42A4GCX13871*I 1987=H (*SCAZS42A5HCX16348*)

TSD 4406

Printed in England June 1986 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1 986 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 84-3

Service schedule procedures 1981/1987 (inclusive) model year cars

WARNING

Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM} to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Br:ake Fluids (Castro! RR363, Universal, or any other type}. The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification Fig. B4·1 Crankcase breather - 'A' bank to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, ,pipes, etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil Lamp units system. For details of correct component identification Weekly; check the lamp units for operation; rectify any reference should be made to Chapter G of the faults. Workshop Manual. Always ensure that a sealed container of Tyre pressures Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted Weekly; check the tyre pressures including the spare; adjacent to the battery. adjust if necessary. Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the systems when work is being carried out. Windscreen and headlamp washer reservoir(s) Weekly; check the washer fluid level; top-up if General information necessary. The information contained in this chapter should be used in conjunction with the service schedule charts Hydraulic reservoirs and Workshop Manuals. Monthly; check the level of hydraulic mineral oil in the The following are the Workshop Manual reservoirs. publications to which reference should be made. Depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, and Mulsanne from the brake pedal until the low brake pressure warning ·vehicle identification number (VIN) panels on the facia illuminate. Continue to pump the *SCAZS0000ACH01001* and Corniche/Continental pedal for at least a further 20 applications to ensure from (VIN) *SCAZD0006CCH05037*, publication complete depressurization. Start and run the engine number TSD 4400. for four minutes with the car unladen, prior to Corniche prior to vehicle identification number checking the level. Top-up if necessary to the indicated (VIN}* SCAZD0006CCH0503 7* and Camargue. maximum level. Use only f.iydraulic System Mineral publication number TSD 4200. Oil (LHM). Refer to page 84-22 for further information ?efore carrying out this operation. Car protection Prior to commencing a service schedule the car Engine cooling system should be suitably protected. For this purpose car Every three months; check the coolant level. If protection kit RH 2662. wing covers RH 2684, and necessary top-up with the correct anti•freeze/water wing cover liners RH 2685 should be used. mixture {see page B4·14).

Regular maintenance Crankcase emission control system In addition to the service schedules listed. the 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame traps following maintenance should be carried out Crankcase emissions are controlled by two separate breather pipes. Engine From the rear of 'A' bank cylinder head a moulded Weekly or every 500 miles (800 kilometres) rubber hose connects the crankcase to the air intake whichever is the earlier; check the engine oil by means housing, immediately upstream of the air meter but of the dipstick: top-up if necessary. downstream of the air cleaner/silencer assembly.

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1986 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1986 B4-4

From the front of ·e· bank cylinder head a second Slacken the worm drive clips securing the ends of moulded rubber tube connects the crankcase via the the breather hose. free the joints and withdraw the oil filler (which has a sealed cap) to a pipe leading to hose. the plenum chamber. This pipe assembly incorporates Unscrew the three setscrews securing the a restrictor to control the flow. breather take-off flange to the crankcase connection. When fitting the flame trap assemblies, the Withdraw the three setscrews and collect the longer assembly should be fitted to the 'B' bank washer fitted under the head of each one. oil filler connection. Lift the solenoid bracket from the vicinity of the connection. Crankcase breather 'A' bank · To service Free the joint and lift the elbow casting from the Withdraw the windscreen wiper motor relay (wiper 3) engine. Discard the gasket. (see fig. 84-28. item A) situated on a bracket adjacent Invert the casting and remove the circlip. Collect to the windscreen washer reservoir. the retaining washer and withdraw the flame trap Remove the cover from the windscreen wiper assembly. drive mechanism to gain access to 'A' bank crankcase Wash the flame trap in clean fuel and dry With breather connection. compressed air. Locate the crankcase breather connection at the Clean any deposits from inside the breather hose. rear of 'A' bank cylinder head. Fit the 'A' bank breather by reversing the procedure given for removal. noting that a new gasket should be fitted between the breather elbow casting and the engine.

Crankcase breather '8' bank· To service Slacken the worm drive clip securing the hose from the auxiliary air valve to the metal breather pipe. Withdraw the hose. Slacken the worm drive clip securing each end of the rubber breather hose and free both hose joints. Unscrew the two setscrews securing the metal breather pipe to the plenum chamber. Collect the washers. _withdraw the pipe and discard the gasket. Withdraw both the metal breather pipe and the rubber breather hose. Unscrew the setscrew securing the adapter housing to the oil filler. Collect the washer and earth Fig. B4-2 Crankcase breather - 'B' bank braid (if fitted}. Withdraw the housing (slight resistance may be felt due to the rubber sealing ring). Remove the flame trap assembly. Wash the flame trap assembly in clean fuel and dry with compressed air. Clean any deposit from inside the breather pipe and hose. Inspect the inside of the metal pipe to ensure that the restrictor is not blocked. Assemble the 'B' bank breather by reversing the removal procedure noting that a new gasket should be fitted between the metal pipe and the plenum chamb~r. Ensure that the rubber ·o· ring on the oil filler connection is in good condition and that the earth braid (if fitted) is fitted to the retaining setscrew. Fig. B4·3 Oxygen sensor connection

Exhaust emission control system 1 Renew the oxygen sensor and reset the elapsed mileage indicator ( 1981 /86 model year cars only) Renew the oxygen sensor (1987 model year cars only) Oxygen sensor

• h' .-:-.-:,,:,•,: • ••, :;<:;.,:~-~ V: On 1981/86 model year cars the oxygen sensor has a single cable connector. The cable from the electronic Fig. 84·4 Oxygen sensor control unit to the connector block is blue.

June 1986 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B4 84--5

On 1987 model year cars the oxygen sensor has a 3-pin connector. The sensor cable from the electronic control unit to the connector block is light green. From inside the engine compartment locate the oxygen sensor cable(s) where it exits from the loom adjacent to the left-hand blower motor {see fig. 84-3). Unclip the cable(s) and carefully ease it upwards until the moulded junction piece, connecting the cables is visible. Note the run of the cables and disconnect them at the junction block. Fig. 84-5 Elapsed mileage indicator From beneath the car, clean the area around the A Reset button oxygen sensor before it is unscrewed and discarded. Before fitting the new oxygen sensor, carefully smear Never-seez assembly compound onto the th.reads. Important Do not allow the assembly compound to contact the exhaust gas slots (the slotted shield below the threaded portion). otherwise damage to the oxygen sensor and catalytic converter may result.

Screw the oxygen sensor into the exhaust pipe and tighten to between 50 Nm and 60 Nm (5, 1 kgf m and 6, 1, kgf m, 37 lbf ft and 44 lbf ft). Feed the oxygen sensor cable upwards into the engine compartment, adjacent to the left-hand blower motor. Connect the cables at the junction block and suitably clip the cables to the loom. Fig. B4-6 Exhaust gas recirculation system Ensure that any free cable is clipped in the engine 1 ·s· bank exhaust manifold take-off point compartment. The cable should be reasonably taut 2 Exhaust gas recirculation (E.G.R.) valve under the car, otherwise loose cable could foul the hot 3 E.G.R. cut-off solenoid exhaust pipe and become damaged. Important Unscrew the long setscrew that forms the lower Always ensure that the correct design of oxygen mounting for the auxiliary air valve. Withdraw the sensor is fitted. setscrew and collect the washer and distance pieces. 1 981/86 mode I year ca rs - sing le cable type. Unscrew the nut from the E.G.R. valve top mount 1987 model year cars - triple cable type. collect the washer. Withdraw the heatshield. Elapsed mileage indicator (1981/86 model year Detach the vacuum signal hose from the E.G.R. cars only) valve. Open the luggage compartment. Unscrew the lower retaining nut and collect the Release the Tenax clip situated adjacent to the washer. right-hand rear lamps access point. Note Unscrew the Pozidriv screws securing the side The valve upper securing nut is unscrewed to remove panel carpet in position. Unscrew sufficient screws to the heatshield. allow the rear of the carpet panel to be moved inwards Withdraw the valve and discard the gasket. to reveal the elapsed mileage indicator (see fig. 84-5). There are two E.G.R. pipes joined together Firmly depress the reset button. adjacent to the auxiliary air valve by a sealing ring and Switch on the ignition. split clamp. Start and run the engine, noting that as the oxygen Lower pipe sensor reaches its normal operating temperature the Locate the joint adjacent to the auxiliary air valve, warning lamp on the facia is extinguished. unscrew the two nuts and collect the washers. Free Stop the engine and fit the carpet panel. the clamp and withdraw the bolts together with both halves of the clamp bracket Collect the sealing ring. 2 Remove and clean the E.G.R. valve and feed Unscrew the two nuts from the exhaust manifold pipes (see fig. B4-6) joint. Free the joint. withdraw the pipe and discard the Unscrew the setscrew retaining the heatshield to the gasket plenum chamber cover. collect the washer. Upper pipe Unscrew the setscrew securing the heatshield to Unscrew the two setscrews securing the pipe flange the top of the plenum chamber, collect the large to the plenum chamber; collect the washers from the diameter washer. setscrews.

TSO 4406

Printed in England June 1986 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1 986 B4·6

Withdraw the pipe and discard the gasket. Start and run the engine until normal operating With a suitable scraper, remove all carbon from temperature is attained. the valve, mounting flange faces, plenum chamber Ensure that the engine has run at least 1 5 connection, distribution pipes, and joint faces. minutes after the engine coolant thermostat has Using a wire brush fitted into a portable drill opened. complete the cleaning operations. Allow the engine to return to the idle speed. Before fitting the components to the engine, Increase the engine speed slowly noting the thoroughly blow out the components with compressed operation of the E.G.R. valve. air to remove all carbon particles. The E.G.R. valve should commence to open at Fit the components by reversing the procedure between 1550.rev/min and 1850 rev/min. given for removal, noting the following points. Ensure that the valve pintle is secure on the valve ~.. Check the condition and tension of the air stem. pump drive belt Always use new gaskets. Before commencing to adjust the drive belt inspect it for signs of wear or cracking. If the belt is found 3 Check the E.G.R. valve for correct operation unsatisfactory it should be renewed. The operation of the E.G.R. valve only requires The belt tension must be checked at a point checking under no load conditions. as follows. midway between the two pulleys (see fig. 84· 7) by Connect an electric impulse tachometer to the use of a belt tension meter or by applying a spring engine in accordance with the manufacturer's balance to give a 9.50 mm (0.375 in) belt deflection instructions. at a specified load. Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied and Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent that the gear range selector is in the Park position. belt slip.

Coolant pump to air pump Load may be applied on either side of the belt run.

New belt and retensioning load Belt tension meter 18, 1 kgf to 22. 7 kgf (40 lbf to 50 lbf) Spring balance 3,6 kgf to 5.9 kgf (8 lbf to 1 3 lbf) The tension of the belt is adjusted by altering the position of the air pump. Slacken the air pump pivot setscrew. Slacken the setscrew securing the air pump to the adjustment strut. Slacken the adjustment strut pivot setscrew. Turn the air pump around its pivot point to adjust Fig. B4-7 Air pump drive belt adjustment and the belt tension and tighten the setscrew in the tension check point adjustment strut slot. Check the belt tension and repeat the adjustment operation if necessary. When the belt tension is correct tighten the remaining two setscrews.

5 Check the air injection system for leaks and correct operation System operation Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Disconnect the hoses from the air injection manifolds (see fig. B4-8) and suitably blank the manifold connections. It may be necessary to slacken the setscrew securing the air switching valve mounting bracket, so that the valve assembly can be swivelled to gain access to the connections. If preferred, it is permissible to remove the short hose to ·A' bank manifold. Locate the blue oxygen sensor cable where it exits Fig. 84·8 Air injection system manifolds from the loom adjacent to the left·hand blower motor disconnected and blanked {see fig. 84·3).

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B4 84•7

Ease the cable upwards until the white moulded junction piece, connecting the blue cable to the black cable is visible. Disconnect the oxygen sensor at this junction, ensuring that the black cable remains taut beneath the car. Start the engine and measure the time taken from the end of the engine cranking to the switching of the air delivery from the air injection hoses. This should be between 90 seconds and 150 seconds. Check both the air switching valve solenoid and the engine running sensor/electronic timer assembly if the switching of the air is outside the specified times. If no air is delivered towards the air manifolds, refer to the Workshop Manual TSD 4400. Chapter U. Fig. B4-9 Air injection system switching valve to Connect both the blue and the black oxygen air cleaner hose disconnected for sensor cables. leak check Continue to run the engine until normal operating temperature is attained. Stop the engine. Start and run the engine. ensure that the oxygen sensor warning lamp is extinguished within a few seconds and at exactly the same time the injected air is switched from the air manifolds to the air cleaner (this can be detected by a change in the sound of the air discharge). If the engine is not at normal operating temperature and the oxygen sensor warning lamp takes more than 90 seconds to extinguish. the air may be switched to the air cleaner before the warning lamp is extinguished. If this happens ensure that the engine is fully warmed-up and repeat the operation. If at any time the oxygen sensor warning lamp is extinguished and the air is not switched from the manifolds to the air cleaner, there is a fault and serious damage to the catalytic converter could result if the Fig. B4·10 Fuel evaporative emission control engine is run in this condition. Refer to the Workshop canister and mounting bracket Manual TSO 4400, Chapter U for details of the setscrews rectification procedure. and continue the examination. Repeat this procedure System leak check until the inspection of the system is complete. Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. If an air leak is suspected it is permissible to coat Visually inspect the condition of all hoses, pipes. the suspect component with a soap solution. soap and joints associated with the air injection system. bubbles will confirm an air leak. locate the blue oxygen sensor cable where it exits Fit the disconnected hose to the air switching from the loom adjacent to the left•hand blower motor valve and secure by tightening the worm drive clip. (see fig. 84·3). Ease the cable upwards until the white moulded Fuel evaporative emission control system junction piece, connecting the blue cable to the black 1 Renew the evaporative emission control cable is visible. Disconnect the oxygen sensor at this canister junction, ensuring that the black cable remains taut Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. beneath the car. Locate the control canister under the left-hand Disconnect the hose from the air switching valve front wing ( see fig. 84-1 0). Using the special pliers to the air cleaner, at the valve (see fig. 84·9). RH 8090 remove the securing clip from the canister Start and run the engine. end of the fuel tank to canister flexible hose. Listen carefully for any evidence of an air leak Withdraw both hoses fitted to the control canister. from the system. After 1 1h minutes to 2!/2 minutes the Label each one to facilitate assembly. air will be switched from the air manifolds towards the Unscrew the four setscrews retaining the control air cleaner. This change can be detected by the noise canister in position (see fig. 84-1 OJ. Support the the air will make as it leaves the open connection of weight of the canister before the last setscrew is the air switching valve. removed. Collect the washer fitted under the head of When the air is switched towards the air cleaner, each setscrew. stop the engine. Wait a few seconds. start the engine Withdraw the control canister from under the wing.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B4-8

Note the position of the control canister in relation 2 Check the condition of all pipes, hoses, and to the mounting bracket and unscrew the retaining connections worm drive clip. Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Fit the new canister to the mounting bracket and Locate the fuel evaporative emission control tighten the retaining worm drive clip canister. Ensure that the canister is in the correct position Withdraw the fuel tank evaporative hose from the relative to the mounting bracket. canister and connect it to the test equipment shown in Fit the assembly to the vehicle by reversing the figure 84-11. procedure given for removal, noting that a new hose Apply air pressure to the fuel tank hose via the securing clip should be used. test equipment until a reading of 380 mm {15 in} H20 is attained and close the pressure supply. Aher five minutes again check the pressure 1 reading, this should not have fallen by more than 1 2, 7 mm (0.5 in). If the pressure drop is more than 12,7 mm (0.5 in). progressively treat all joints in the system with soap solution to detect air leaks. Rectify any air leaks and again leak check the system. During the five minutes leak down, visually inspect the hoses, pipes. and connections of the system that are routed under the car. Commence where the hose exits . \ from the body adjacent to the left•hand rear road spring and follow the system to the control canister. Ensure that the hoses are secure in the mounting clips. When the system is satisfactory, detach the test equipment and connect the hose to the control canister. Secure the hose with a new clip.

3 Check the purge flow rate Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Remove the retaining clip from the purge line restrictor hose. Disconnect the hose at the purge line restrictor. Leave the restrictor in the hose to the engine (see fig. B4-12J. Connect a rotameter assembly RH 8725 into the line, between the restrictor and the open pipe to the Fig. B4-11 Leak check test equipment valance connection. 1 Connection to fuel tank/cannister hose Connect an impulse tachometer to the engine in 2 Pump accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3 One-way pressure valve Start the engine. Raise the engine speed to 2 500 rev/min and note the flow reading on the rotameter. this should be between 35 h3/h and 55 ft3/h. If the purge flow rate is outside the limits specified, refer to the Workshop Manual TSO 4400, Chapter U.

Engine 1 Change the engine oil The sump should be drained when the engine is warm. preferably after the car has completed a run. To drain the oil, position the car over a pit or on a ramp. Place a container in position beneath the drain plug situated on the right-hand side of the sump (see fig. 84-13). Remove the drain plug and allow the oil to Fig. 84·12 Disconnecting the purge line drain from the sump. , Hose from canister Do not flush the sump with kerosene or fuel. 2 Restrictor Fit the drain plug ensuring that the washer is 3 Hose to throttle body correctly positioned and in good condition.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B4 B4·9

Fill the engine sump with recommended lubricant until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

2 Renew the engine oil filter Drain the engine oil as described under Change the engine oil. Place a container under the filter to collect any oil that may be spilt. Remove the filter by unscrewing it from the engine in an anti-clockwise direction (see fig. B4·14). Thoroughly clean the filter seating face on the engine. Lightly smear the rubber sealing ring on the new filter with clean engine oil. Screw the filter onto the pedestal until the rubber seal contacts the sealing face then tighten the filter a further half turn; do not overtighteo. Fill the engine with clean engine oil until the MAX Fig. 84-13 Engine sump drain plug level is reached on the dipstick. Run the engine and check the filter joint for leakage. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

Check the engine oil level In order to obtain an accurate indication of the oil level, ensure that the car is standing on level ground. Check the oil level by means of the dipstick marked ENGINE (see fig. B4·15). It is recommended that the oil level is checked when the engine is cold. If the engine has been running, sufficient time should elapse after it has stopped to allow the oil to drain into the sump. Do not check the oil level with the engine running. To replenish the sump with oil. open the filler cap marked ENGINE (see fig. 84-15). Add clean oil to the engine and after allowing sufficient time for the oil to reach the sump check that the oil is up to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. Important The engine lubrication system incorporates a thermostatically controlled oil cooler, therefore if the oil has been drained from the engine the following Fig. 84-14 Engine oil filter location additional procedure must be carried out to ensure the correct oil level is obtained. Carry out the normal topping-up procedure as part of the lubrication system, check the oil level in the described previously to obtain the maximum oil level normal manner as described previously. reading on the dipstick. Drive the car to enable the engine oil to attain the 3 Check the drive belts temperature required to actuate the oil cooler Before commencing to adjust the drive belts inspect thermostat them for signs of wear or cracking. Any belts found To ascertain that the thermostat has actuated. a unsatisfactory should be renewed. rise in the temperature of the oil cooler return pipe If after adjustment. a matched pair of belts have a (see fig. B4· 16) should be felt. This temperature rise marked variation in tension, a new pair should be occurs as hot oil begins to flow from the oil filter fitted. Always renew both belts in a matched pair even housing. where the thermostat is situated. to the oil if only one belt is faulty. cooler mounted in front of the coolant radiator matrix. Two belt tension loads are specified; a new belt Do not attempt to attain the required engine oil load for replacement (new) belts and a retensioning temperature rise with the car stationary. load for belts which are satisfactory for further service. When it has been ascertained that the engine oil The belt tensions must be checked at a point has been passing through the cooler. thus filling this rn idway between two pulleys ( see fig. B4· 1 7) by use

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B4-10

of a belt tension meter or by applying a spring balance to give a 9.50 mm (0.375 in) belt deflection at a specified load. The variation in the spring balance loads for similar belt tension meter loads is due to the varying length·of belt between individual belt centres. Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent belt slip.

Crankshaft to coolant pump Load may be applied on either side of the belt run.

New belt load Belt tension meter 2 7.2 kgf to 31, 7 kgf (60 lbf to 70 lbf) Spring balance 7 ,5 kgf to 8,2 kgf ( 16.5 lbf to 18 lbf)

Fig. B4· 15 Engine oil filler and dipstick Retensioning load Belt tension meter 22, 7 kgf to 2 7,2 kgf (50 lbf to 60 lbf) Spring balance 6,8 kgf to 7 ,5 kgf (15 lbf to 16.5 lbf)

The tension of this matched pair of belts is adjusted by altering the position of the jockey pulley ( see fig. B4· 1 7). Slacken the nut and setscrew securing the jockey pulley arm. Pivot the jockey pulley to adjust the belt tension then tighten the nut and setscrew. Check the belt tension and repeat the adjustment procedure if necessary.

Fig. B4-16 Engine oil cooler return pipe Coolant pump to alternator Load may be applied on either side of the belt run.

New belt load Belt tension meter 36,3 kgf to 40,8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf) Spring balance 5,0 kgf to 5,9 kgf (11 lbf to 13 lbf)

Retensioning load Belt tension meter 31, 7 kgf to 36,3 kgf (70 lbf to 80 lbf) Spring balance 4, 1 kgf to 5,0 kgf (9 lbf to 11 lbf)

The tension of the belt is adjusted by altering the position of the alternator ( see fig. B4-1 7 ). Slacken the setscrew securing the alternator at the upper mounting point. Slacken the setscrew securing the adjustment strut to the front mounting plate. also the nut and bolt in the adjustment slot. Pivot the alternator to adjust the belt tension then tighten the nut and bolt in the adjustment slot. Check the belt tension and repeat the adjustment if necessary. Fig. B4·17 Engine drive belt adjustment and When the tension is correct finally tighten the tension check points remaining setscrews and check the tension again.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 84-11

Crankshaft to steering pump/refrigeration compressor Load must be applied on the top of the belts. Each belt to be checked individually.

New belt load Belt tension meter 40.8 kgf to 45,5 kgf (90 lbf to 100 lbf) Spring balance 6,3 kgf to 7. 7 kgf ( 1 4 lbf to 17 lbf)

Retensioning load Belt tension meter 36.3 kgf to 40.8 kgf (80 tbf to 90 lbf) Spring balance 4, 1 kgf to 6.3 kgf (9 lbf to 14 lbf} Fig. B4· 18 Air filter (Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, late Corniche. and all The tension of this matched pair of belts is Continental) adjusted by altering the position of the steering pump (see fig. 84-17). Slacken the setscrew in the steering pump mounting bracket slot situated below the pump pulley. Slacken the pump pivot setscrew and the union on the supply hose at the rear of the pump. Pivot the pump to adjust the belt tension then tighten the setscrew in the adjustment slot. Check the belt tension and adjust again if necessary. When the tension is correct tighten the pivot setscrew and again check the belt tension. Finally tighten the supply hose connection; ensuring that the soft rubber protective sleeve has clearance or minimal contact with the coolant pump to manifold elbow.

4 Renew the air filter element Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, Mulsanne. late Corniche, and all Continental. The air filter element is situated in the air intake housing at the front right-hand side of the engine compartment (see fig. 84-18). To gain access to the element unfasten the two toggle clips retaining the air blending valve housing to the air cleaner housing. Carefully free the joint and move the housing away from the air cleaner. Unscrew the worm drive clip securing the engine intake hose to the air cleaner. Detach the hose. Support the air cleaner housing and unfasten the \>1902 three toggle clips securing the housing to the valance. Cc1refully free the joint, then move the housing Fig. B4-19 Air filter ( Early Cornie he and all towards the engine and withdraw the housing and air Camargue filter element from the car. Remove the filter element from the housing. Ensure that the inside of the air cleaner housing Tubular type (both the sections removed and fixed section in the Enter the new element into the wing valance. valance) is clean. Fit the air cleaner housing to the wing valance. Inspect the joint seals for serviceablity. Renew if Ensure that it is located inside the valance retaining necessary. clamp ring. Hold the rubber seal in position over the Two types of filter element have been fitted. a housing spigot by placing the fingers of one hand tubular type, open at both ends or a conical type with through the air intake aperture and onto the seal. the small end of the cone closed. To allow the housing to pass over the end of the Dependent on the type of filter element to be filter. it will be necessary to slightly withdraw the fitted proceed as follows. element during this operation.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 84-12

Whilst ensuring that both the air filter element and Fit the new element to the assembly by reversing sealing ring are correctly positioned on the housing the removal procedure. Refer to figure B4-19 for the spigot. fit the assembly to the wing valance. correct assembly sequence. Align the three housing toggle clips with their respective securing points. :=asten the toggle clips. 5 Renew the sparking plugs Fit the remaining components by reversing the Sparking plug type Champion RN 12 YC or AN 12 Y removal procedure. Plug gap setting 0,89 mm (0.035 in). Before removing the sparking plugs the Conical type surrounding area should be thoroughly cleaned to Locate the large end of the new filter element prevent the ingress of foreign matter when the plugs onto the locating spigot on the inside of the removable are removed. half of the housing. Fit the new plugs ensuring that the gaps are Carefully position the housing and filter onto the correctly set and that each plug is fitted with a sealing valance allowing the filter to pass into the valance washer. mounted section of the housing. Locate the small Torque tighten each plug to between 18 Nm and (blank} end of the filter into the spigot in the valance 23 Nm (1.8 kgf m and 2,3 kgf m. 13 lbf ft and 17 lbf housing. Align the three housing toggle clips with their ft). respective securing points. Special care should be taken during these operations to ensure that the paper 6 Lubricate the distributor (1981/82 model year element is not damaged during insertion. cars only) Ensure that the filter is correctly positioned on the Lubrication of the spindle is the only routine location spigots, then secure the three toggle clips. It mai~tenance required. is essential that the filter is correctly located on the To carry out this operation remove the moulded spigots before the toggle clips are fastened down, top cover of the distributor and the rotor arm. Do not otherwise there is a serious risk of crushing the filter remove the cover from the distributor baseplate (see element. fig. B4-20). Fit the remaining components by reversing the Lubricate the spindle shaft bearings by applying removal procedure. two drops of engine oil to the felt pad situated beneath the rotor arm. Early Corniche and all Camargue Clean and fit the rotor arm. The air filter element is situated in the air intake Clean the terminal posts and cover. Fit the cover housing at the front right-hand side of the engine ensuring that it is correctly located on the distributor compartment (see fig. 84-19). base. To gain access to the element. unscrew the worm drive clip securing the intake hose to the air meter 7 Lubricate the accelerator linkage inlet duct Withdraw the hose. Lubricate all the accelerator linkage ball joint pivots Unscrew the knurled securing setscrew situated and clevis pins. on the side of the assembly. Examine the ball knuckle joints for wear and Withdraw the cover. adjust if necessary. Renew any worn clevis pins. Unscrew the hexagonal nut from the centre stud. Examine the linkage for correct operation. For Withdraw the end plate, filter element. and second end details of linkage setting procedure reference should plate. be made to the Workshop Manual TSO 4400. Chapter U.

8 Check the ignition timing Ignition timing is carried out on A 1 cylinder and should be 15°btdc at 1450 rev/min; A 1 cylinder is the front cylinder on the right-hand side of the engine when viewed from the driver's seat. Important If the ignition timing is to be set, ensure that the sparking plugs are in a good condition before running the engine; if they require cleaning or renewal, ensure that the gaps are set correctly (see Operation 5, Renew the sparking plugs}.

To check the ignition timing commence by running the engine until normal operating temperature is attained. Switch off the engine. Connect a stroboscope and a tachometer to the Fig. 84-20 Distributor lubrication point engine as described in the instructions supplied with ( 1981 /82 model year cars only) the respective equipment.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B4 84·13

On no account must the stroboscope timing lamp positive feed be connected to the ignition coil. The positive feed should be taken from a known 12 volt connection. If the ignition vacuum retard system is in operation ( 1 981/82 model year cars only), disconnect the vacuum hose from the distributor side of the vacuum retard solenoid and fit a blank to the solenoid valve connection. All cars, disconnect the vacuum advance hose from on top of the throttle housing connection and blank off the throttle housing connection. Start and run the engine at a speed of 1450 rev/min. When setting the engine speed reduce from Fig. 84-21 Idle speed adjustment a higher speed to 1450 rev/min. Direct the flashing light of the stroboscope onto the crankshaft damper timing marks and timing Pints L1tru pointer; the pointer is positioned on the left-hand side 11m1,1) of the crankshaft damper when viewed from the 11 $ driver· s seat. y If the timing pointer does not coincide with the 10 $' 60 15"btdc mark on the crankshaft damper adjust the IQ ignition timing as follows. Release the clamp screw on the distributor and rotate the head of the distributor in the appropriate direction until the correct timing is obtained. Clockwise rotation of the distributor head advances the ignition and conversely anti-clockwise rotation retards the /--+--+-~:+;is ignition. D Tighten the clamp screw and check that the A ignition timing is between 14" and 1 s·btdc at 1450 rev/min (again reduce from a higher speed to 1450 rev/min).

9 Check the operation of the ignition distributor vacuum advance mechanism. Also check the retard mechanism if it is connected After completing Operation 8 continue as follows. •c -•~ -•o B{ ·• .s"'"o'+-: --••i:-0--f...:_:.:;30-+ ; "'.,+o- ..,..., '--.,01--""",-+o-,-'--,..-o.....c,r--'20 Vacuum retard mechanism 1981 /82 model year 1 1 5s1' so" 4°S4' C ,O" 3!>% 3o,- 2f:i% io4' cars only S60S If the ignition vacuum retard system is in operation, connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum retard side of Fig. 84-22 Anti-freeze correction chart to give the capsule, ensuring that the hose normally a 50% solution connected to the capsule remains blanked off. A Acceptable service range of concentration Start the engine. ensure that normal operating B Freezing point of coolant temperature is attained. apply a vacuum of 355,60 C Percentage concentration mm Hg ( 14 in Hg) to the capsule. D Volume of 100% anti-freeze to be Set the engine speed to 1450 rev/min (reduce added to maintain a 50% solution after from a higher speed to 1450 rev/min). removal of the same volume of old Check that the ignition timing has retarded coolant first between 10° and 14• from the setting noted upon completion of Operation 8. Disconnect the vacuum Connect a vacuum pump to the distributor pump and connect the hose. vacuum advance side of the capsule. Apply an initial Vacuum advance mechanism (All cars) vacuum of 635 mm Hg (25 in Hg) and then reduce Allow the engine to return to the idle speed and set the vacuum to 508 mm Hg (20 in Hg) and maintain it. this to 650 rev/min using the idle speed adjustment Adjust the idle speed to 650 rev/min. screw on top of the throttle body. Ensure that the Check that the ignition timing has advanced by engine speed does not dip below 650 rev/min. between 1 O" and 14° from the setting noted Direct the timing light onto the timing marks on previously (timing between tdc and s· btdc). the crankshaft damper. The timing should now be Stop the engine, remove the test equipment and between tdc and 8° btdc. reconnect all hoses in their correct positions.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Rovce Motors Limited 1985 84-14

10 Check the engine idle speed The anti-freeze concentration should be checkei:l in Ensure that the usual workshop safety precautions are both the expansion bottle (where fitted) and the radiator. carried out and that an impulse tachometer is fitted to If the strength of the coolant requires increasing, the engine in accordance with the manufacturer's sufficient coolant should be drained from the radiator instructions. and replaced with undiluted anti-freeze (see fig. To set the idle speed, ensure that the engine has B4-22). Afterwards run the engine until normal stabilized at its normal operating temperature. This can operating temperature is attained and the anti-freeze has be achieved by allowing the engine to run at idle become thoroughly mixed with the coolant Stop the speed for at least 1 5 minutes after the thermostat has engine and again check the concentration in the opened. The opening of the thermostat can be radiator. detected by a sudden rise in the temperature of the An acceptable level of anti-freeze concentration is thermostat elbow pipe. between 45% and 50%. Therefore, as a hydrometer Disconnect the purge line at the restrictor. Leave may be inaccurate where readings above 40% are the restrictor fitted into the hose to the engine (see fig. expected. it is recommended that a refractometer is 84-12). used. Disconnect the oxygen sensor cable situated in For details refer to Chapter l of the appropriate the rear left-hand corner of the engine compartment Workshop Manual. (see fig. B4-3). If a refractometer is not available and a hydrometer Ensure that the automatic air conditioning system has to be used. a scale reading of between 1 ,06 and is off. 1,07 should be obtained with the coolant at room Set the engine idle speed to 650 rev/min by temperature for the mixture to be correct. turning the adjustment screw situated on top of the throttle body (see fig. 84-21 ). 2 Check the coolant level Connect the purge line hose and the oxygen sensor Warning cable to their respective connections. Both types of cooling system become pressurized Note during engine running, therefore. extreme care Connecting the purge line may increase the idle speed should be taken when removing the radiator cap and connecting the oxygen sensor cable will tend to from a warm or hot radiator. restore normal idle speed. Do not attempt to correct these small variations in idle speed. Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, late Corniche. and all Continental Engine cooling system Routine check 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration To check the level outside a normal service schedule The cooling system is filled initially with a coolant (e.g. Regular maintenance) and when no cooling/ solution comprising equal parts of UT 184 (BP - Hythe heating system fault is reported or suspected, proceed Chemicals) or Prestone II and water. This mixture gives as follows. frost protection down to a temperature of ·37"C (-35°F). If the engine is hot ensure that the coolant level The coolant should contain fifty percent of an in the translucent expansion bottle is at the MAX approved anti-freeze at all times. This not only provides mark. Top-up if necessary and replace the expansion frost protection but also prevents corrosion of the bottle cap. coolant passages and raises the boiling temperature of If the engine is cold ensure that the coolant level the coolant. in the translucent expansion bottle is half-way between the MIN and MAX marks. Top-up if necessary and replace the expansion bottle cap. If the coolant level in the expansion bottle is either below the MIN mark-or there is no coolant in the expansion bottle, carry out the following Full check procedure.

July 1985 SERVtCE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B4 B4·15

Turn the cap slowly anti-clockwise until a check position is reached. Wait until any pressure in the system has been released. Press down on the cap and continue to turn it anti•clockwise until the cap is released. Check the coolant level in the radiator. This should be half·way up the filler neck. If the coolant level in the radiator is correct, fit the radiator cap by pressing it firmly down and turning it fully clockwise. Top,up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in accordance with the Routine check procedure. If the coolant level in the radiator is low but visible and no cooling/heating system fault is reported or suspected top,up the system using the following procedure. If however the coolant is not visible or a coolant/heating system leak is reported or suspected, the system should have any faults rectified and then be pressure tested prior to carrying out the topping·up Fig. B4·24 Heater tap feed hose procedure. Top,up the radiator until the coolant is half-way up the filler neck. Start and run the engine. Turn the air conditioning system function control fully clockwise to the defrost position. Set the air conditioning system override switch to the AUTO position. Allow at least one minute for the air conditioning system to stabilize. then check to ensure that all air is being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). This procedure opens the heater system water tap. Run the engine, without the radiator pressure cap fitted, until normal operating temperature is attained. Top-up the coolant level in the radiator during this time. Switch off the engine. Fit the radiator pressure cap by pressing it firmly down and turning it fully clockwise. Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in accordance with the Routine check procedure. Fig. B4·25 Oil pressure switch and transmitter Early Corniche and all Camargue Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position and apply the parking brake. remove the cap. Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the If the coolant level is low, top-up the radiator fuseboard. header tank with the correct anti-freeze/water mixture. Start the engine and turn the air conditioning The correct level is when the coolant reaches the function control clockwise to the defrost position and rubber seal in the filler neck. Fit the filler cap. set the upper system mode override switch to the AUTO position. 3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness Allow approximately one minute for the system to Examine all the coolant hose connections for signs of attain the required setting, then check that all air is leakage and check the worm drive clips for tightness. being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is Never overtighten a clip in an attempt to seal a leaking delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). connection. This procedure opens the heater water tap and In the event of a hose connection leaking when ensures that the cooling system can be correctly the worm drive clips have been tightened, drain the checked. cooling system to a level below the leaking hose. Switch off the ignition. Remove and inspect the hose and its connecting Remove the radiator cap. If the engine is hot. component for signs of damage. If necessary renew muffle the cap with a thick cloth and gradually turn the the faulty component and refill the system with coolant cap anti-clockwise until the pressure is reduced. then as described in Renew the coolant.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B4-16

4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses Wait approximately one minute for the system to Inspect all coolant hoses for signs of deterioration, attain the required setting and observe that all the air cracking, weak spots. etc. Any faulty hose should be is being directed to the windscreen. This procedure removed and a new hose fitted. When renewing a opens the heater water tap and ensures the system hose always ensure that it does not foul other can be completely drained. components and that it is not kinked so as to cause Switch off the ignition. complete or partial restriction of coolant flow. Place a container beneath the radiator drain tap to collect the coolant. Connect a length of hose onto the 5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. Drain the coolant system as described in Renew the Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator coolant but do not remove the engine crankcase drain pressure cap. plugs. Open the radiator drain tap and allow the coolant Disconnect the heater tap feed hose from the to drain from the radiator. engine and heater tap (see fig. B4·24); remove the When the radiator has completely drained place a hose. container beneath the crankcase drain plugs. Remove Fit the new hose; ensure that the hose is free the drain plugs from the crankcase (see fig. 84·26) from any sharp bends that may restrict coolant flow. and allow the residue of coolant to drain from the Fill the engine coolant system as described in crankcase. Renew the coolant. Renew the washers on the drain plugs and fit the Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the plugs into the crankcase. gear range selector lever is in the Park position. To drain the coolant remaining in the expansion Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the bottle (Silver Spirit, Silver Spur. Mulsanne, late fuseboard. Comiche, and all Continental) disconnect the Start and run the engine; check the coolant hose connection hose from the r-adiator filler neck and allow for leaks. the coolant to drain from the expansion bottle into the Switch off the ignition and fit the gear range container. When the coolant has drained connect the selector cut•out. hose to the radiator filler neck. Check all hoses for serviceability and renew as 6 Renew the coolant necessary. Drive the car onto a ramp; move the gear range Fill the system with fresh coolant of the specified selector to the Park position and apply the parking concentration as follows. brake. Ensure the radiator drain tap is closed. Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the Slowly fill the radiator with coolant, thus reducing fuseboard. the possibility of air locks in the system. Disconnect the Lucar connection from the pressure Start and run the engine for a minimum of 10 switch situated on the oil filter take-off flange (see minutes with the radiator pressure cap removed. After fig. B4-25}. This will allow the air conditioning system running for five minutes ensure that warm air is to be operated without running the engine. passing up the windscreen from the demister ducts. Switch on the ignition and rotate the air Top-up the radiator as necessary to ensure there is conditioning function switch to the windscreen defrost always coolant in the top tank of the radiator. position. also set the upper system mode override Ensure that the thermostat has opened; indicated switch to the AUTO position. by a rapid warming of the top radiator hose. Switch off the engine and top-up the radiator to half-way up the filler neck. Fit the pressure cap. Applicable to Silver Spirit, Silver Spur. Mulsanne, late Comiche, and all Continental. Fill the expansion bottle to a level midway between the maximum and minimum levels indicated on the bottle. Start and run the engine until normal running temperature is attained; switch off the engine and top up the expansion bottle to the maximum level. Allow the engine to cool down. Carefully remove the radiator pressure cap and ensure the radiator is completely full of coolant. Top-up to half-way up the radiator filler neck if necessary. Fit the radiator pressure cap. Connect the Lucar connection previously disconnected from the pressure switch adjacent to the oil filter take-off flange (see fig. 84-25). Fig. 84·26 Crankcase drain plug ('B' bank Note shown) For the coolant system to operate correctly, i.e. for

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 B4-17 coolant to pass into the expansion bottle when hot and be drawn back into the radiator during cooling. the top of the radiator must not contain an air pocket.

7 Reverse flush the coolant system Drain the engine coolant system as described in Renew the coolant. Remove the top and bottom hoses from the radiator matrix. Fit a waste pipe to the upper (inlet) connection of the radiator. Apply mains water under pressure through the lower (outlet) connection of the radiator. This should remove all loose sediment in approximately 30 minutes. Do not under any circumstances use an alkaline compound or detergent to clean the system. Such compounds have a detrimental chemical action on aluminium alloys. Remove the engine coolant drain plugs from the crank.case. Remove the thermostat as described in Renew the thermostat, then replace the cover. Fit a suitable pipe to the drain plug aperture and apply mains water pressure to each aperture in turn. Flush for approximately 30 minutes. or until the water runs clear of foreign matter. Fit the drain plugs and a new thermostat by reversing the procedure for removal. To flush the heater system. detach the heater at the water tap and disconnect the return hose at the Fig. B4-27 Thermostat housing assembly coolant pump. Fit a waste pipe to the disconnected heater feed hose. to fall below that of the thermostat housing. Close the Flush the matrix for approximately 30 minutes. drain tap and remove the hose previously attached. Examine the coolant hoses for deterioration or Disconnect the electrical connector from the damage and renew as necessary. thermostat housing cover. Connect all hoses and fill the system with the Remove the bolt from the air switching valve recommended coolant mixture as described under bracket and the four setscrews from the thermostat Renew the coolant. housing cover. Collect the bracket. Remove the thermostat housing cover. The cover 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator and can be moved away from the housing without refrigeration condenser detaching the outlet hose. Using a pressure hose pipe. flush the radiator matrix Lift the thermostat from the housing (see and condenser matrix. fig. B4-27). Hold the nose of the hose pipe close to the back Remove the old gasket material from the of the radiator matrix and allow the water to pass thermostat housing and cover. Ensure that no material between the veins of the matrix. Slowly move the hose enters the thermostat housing. over the whole matrix area until all foreign matter Check that the two faces are clean and dry. (insects, etc.} have been flushed clear. Care must be Insert a new thermostat into the housing. taken to ensure that the end of the hose does not Place a new gasket in position on the housing and damage the matrix face during this operation. fit the cover. Connect the air switching valve bracket. Connect the electrical connection removed from 9 Renew the thermostat the thermostat housing. Disconnect the battery. Toirup the cooling system with the correct Place a container beneath the radiator. Attach a coolant mixture as described under Renew the coolant. length of hose to the radiator drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. Torque converter transmission Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator It is absolutely essential when adding fluid to, or pressure cap. working on the torque converter transmission that Open the radiator drain tap and allow sufficient great attention is paid to cleanliness. The smallest coolant to drain from the system for the coolant level particle of dirt in the transmission fluid could interfere

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 84-18

with the correct operation of the unit 1 Check the transmission fluid level It is important for efficient operation of the torque The fluid level can be checked accurately when the car converter transmission that only an approved fluid is is standing on a level surface, the engine is running at used (see Chapter A). idle speed, and the transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature, approximately 77°C (170"F). The dipstick and filler tube are situated on the right-hand side of the engine compartment. On Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne cars remove the protective cover (if fitted) from the windscreen wiper mechanism to gain access to the dipstic~. Ensure that the following safety procedure is undertaken to isolate the mechanism prior to removing the cover. Ensure that the windscreen wiper control switch situated on the facia is in the off position. Rel')'love a windscreen wiper relay. preferably number three, situated adjacent to the windscreen washer reservoir (see fig. B4-28). To remove the relay pull it vertically from its mounting. On all cars, always clean the top of the dipstick before removing it from the filler tube. As an initial check. the fluid level may be checked after starting from cold as follows. Apply the parking brake. Start and run the engine for three to four minutes at fast-idle speed, with the gear range selector in the Park position. Reduce the engine speed to slow idle. Whilst sitting in the driving seat firmly apply the footbrake and move the gear range selector through the full range of gear positions pausing briefly in each range. Return the selector to the Park position. 8 Immediately check the fluid level with the engine running at idle speed. The level should be up to the circular dimple situated below the FILL mark on the dipstick or 10 mm (0.375 in) below the MIN mark, dependent on the type of dipstick fitted (see fig. 84-28). Top-up to this level if necessary. C A0513 After this initial check a further check should be carried out as follows. fig. B4-28 Transmission filler tube and dipstick Drive the car for approximately 24 kilometres (15 A Windscreen wiper motor relay miles) of highway/motorway driving or 16 kilometres B Original dipstick markings ( 10 miles) of city driving. This should ensure the C Revised dipstick markings transmission has reached normal operating temperature. It is essential that this temperature is / attained. Do not top-up the fluid level to the MAX / mark on the dipstick when the fluid is only warm, as this will result in an over-fill situation when the normal operating temperature is attained. Overfilling will result in fluid being discharged from the transmission I~ breather pipe. /1 Position the car on a level surface, firmly apply the parking brake and select Park position with the gear selector lever. 1! Carry out the procedure described for the initial check. With the transmission fluid at normal operating temperature the level of the fluid should be between W272 the FILL and MAX HOT marks or the MIN and MAX marks (see fig. 84-28} dependent on the type of Fig. B4-29 Transmission drain point dipstick fitted.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 84-19

lf necessary add fluid by pouring it down the filler tube, with the engine still running. until the fluid is to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. When the fluid level is correct, switch off the engine and fit the windscreen wiper mechanism cover and relay.

2 Renew the transmission fluid Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Place a clean container having a minimum capacity of 3 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt) under the nut which secures the transmission fluid filler tube to the sump (see fig. B4·29). From within the engine compartment. remove the transmission dipstick as described under Check the transmission fluid level. Fig. B4·30 Transmission intake strainer removal Slacken the setscrew securing the filler tube to the engine. Unscrew the nut securing the filler tube to the side of the transmission sump (see fig. B4-29). Withdraw the filler tube from the sump and move it to one side to allow the fluid to drain into the container. After draining the sump. ensure that the filler tube is clean then fit it to the sump and tighten the drain nut. Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip to the engine. Add 2,8 litres (5 Imp pt. 6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump. pouring the fluid down the filler tube. Check the fluid level as described under Check the transmission fluid level.

3 Fit a new intake strainer Drain the transmission sump as described under the heading Renew the transmission fluid, then proceed as follows. Remove the setscrews securing the transmission sump and lower the sump. Drain any fluid from the sump and discard the Fig. B4·31 Propeller shaft grease point gasket. Unscrew the setscrew securing the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission; remove the strainer assembly (see fig. B4-30). Remove the intake pipe from the strainer and discard .the strainer. Clean the transmission sump and the intake pipe with kerosene and dry with compressed air. Fit a new rubber ·o· ring to the intake pipe and lubricate the ·o· ring with clean transmission fluid. Ensure that a new rubber seal is fitted to ~he pipe bore in the new intake strainer. then fit the intake pipe to the strainer. Fit the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission and torque tighten the securing setscrew to 14 Nm (1.4 kgf m. 10 lbf ft). Fit the transmission sump using a new gasket and torque tighten the sump setscrews to 16 Nm ( 1. 7 kgf m, 1 2 lbf ft). Fit the oil filler tube into the sump and tighten the nut. Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip Fig. B4·32 Final drive drain and filler/level to the engine. points

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 84-20

4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod Lubricate the clevis pins in the control rod linkage at the left-hand side of the transmission, with a few drops of clean engine oil. Also lubricate the manual shaft where it enters the transmission casing.

Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints (if applicable) A grease nipple is fitted to the universal joint at each end of the shaft (see fig. 84-31 ). Using a suitable grease gun lubricate each joint with an approved grease. Fig. B4-33 Steering pump filler/dipstick On cars fitted with a rubber jointed propeller shaft lubrication is not required.

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Remove the level plug located in the rear face of the final drive casing (see fig. 84-32). The oil in the casing should be up to the level plug orifice. If necessary, top-up with an approved oil. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint washer.

2 Renew the final drive oil It is advisable to carry out this operation when the oil is warm, e.g. immediately after the car has completed 1'1716 a run. Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and clean Fig. 84-34 Track rod ball joints the area around the drain and level plugs (see fig. 84-32). Place a container beneath the drain plug, then remove both the drain and level plugs. When the oil has drained, fit the drain plug complete with a new joint washer. Using a syringe, fill the casing to the level plug orifice with an approved oil (see Chapter A); approximately 2,3 litres (4.0 Imp pt. 4.8 US pt) of oil will be required. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint washer and check for leaks.

3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint covers The drive-shaft constant velocity joints are enclosed by convoluted seals which retain the joint lubricant. If upon inspection a seal is found to be leaking or damaged the joint should be inspected and a new seal fitted as described in Chapter J of the Workshop Manual.

Steering system 1 Check the steering pump fluid level Remove the filler cap from the steering pump reservoir Fig. 84-35 Front suspension ball joints and check that the fluid level is at least up to the FULL

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B4 B4·21

COLD mark on the integral dipstick. If necessary, top up to this level with approved fluid (see fig. 84·33). Start and run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. approximately 77°C (170°F) then stop the engine. Remove the filler cap and check the fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, add an approved fluid to raise the level to the FULL HOT mark on the dipstick; do not overfill. Ensure that the filler cap is securely replaced.

2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints (if applicable) If grease nipples are fitted to the ball joints at the ends of the track rods. they should be lubricated until a slight swelling of the joint seal is evident. Take care not to damage or displace the seals.

3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers Examine the condition of the rubber cover seals on the ball joints (see fig. 84-34). If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition new parts should be fitted as necessary. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

4 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the Fig. B4-36 Rear suspension strut rack and pinion unit and check the tightness of the seal clips. If the seals are satisfactory. tighten the clips as necessary. If the convoluted seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the rack and pinion unit should be removed from the car and new seals fitted. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers The front suspension ball joints (see fig. B4-35} are packed with grease on initial assembly and should not normally require attention between service overhauls unless the rubber seal covers are damaged. Fig. B4·37 Height control valve actuation link If on inspection the covers are found to be joints damaged or in poor condition. the ball joints should be removed and new joints and seals fitted as necessary. 3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints For full information refer to Chapter H of the Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Disconnect Workshop Manual. the actuation links from the height control valves and the rear suspension trailing arms at the ball joints (see 2 Check the condition of the rear strut fig. 84-37). Note from which side each link is taken. convoluted seals Clean the ball joints then lubricate with an Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the approved grease. rear suspension struts (see fig. B4-36). Do not alter the length of the actuation link, If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor Connect the actuation link to the height control condition. the struts should be removed.as described valve and the trailing arm which was removed. in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual, and new seals Adjust the joint to obtain complete movement fitted. without free play.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B4-22

Brake and hydraulic systems Pour 10 ml of each sample into clean test tubes (do not mix the samples together). Using the dispenser, add two drops of the red dye solution contained in the kit into each 10 ml sample. Cork the test tubes and shake them thoroughly. WARNING Leave the samples to settle for at least 30 minutes. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to Examine each sample. replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids(Castrol RR363, Sample diagnosis Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of On adding the red dye solution and the subsequent brake fluid. even in very small amounts, will cause mixing. the green colour of the mineral oil will change component failure necessitating extensive rectification to a reddish brown. This does not indicate to the braking and levelling systems of the car. contamination of the hydraulic system mineral oil. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, Contamination can only be confirmed by the pipes. etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil formation of a cloudy red mass which will begin to system. For details of correct component identification settle towards the bottom of the tube if left to stand reference should be made to Chapter G of the for at least 30 minutes. Workshop Manual. If the sample in the test tube on addition of the Always ensure that a sealed container of dye turns red but remains clear it indicates that the Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted sample is not contaminated. adjacent to the battery. The volume of red mass which will eventually Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the settle to the bottom of the test tube indicates the systems when work is being carried out. amount of contamination within the hydraulic system mineral oil. In order to protect against claims of liability for Complete separation of the two liquids may take a hydraulic system contamination, it is recommended considerable amount of time, for example a very small that the hydraulic system mineral oil is tested for percentage of contamination may take more than contamination prior to work being undertaken, seven days to completely separate. preferably in the presence of the owner or his/her If contamination is suspected, a more thorough representative. test can be undertaken, details of which are given in It is important that the test is carried out even Chapter G of tha Workshop Manual. when the hydraulic system mineral oil is to be If contamination is suspected, but difficult to renewed as this will not prevent the deterioration of diagnose, due to the small amount of contaminant that components which have been in contact with may be present or any doubt exists, confirmation contaminated mineral oil. should be obtained by sending a sample to Rolls Brake fluids and mineral oil are immiscible and Royce Motors (if in the United Kingdom) or to a with large amounts of contamination separation of the chemical analysis laboratory. fluids will occur on standing. due to the greater Before attempting any work on a hydraulic system density of the conventional fluids. A further indication personnel must be fully conversant with the of the mixing of conventional brake fluid and mineral precautions required to ensure adequate safety and oil is its cloudy appearance. correct system operation. To carry out contamination tests a kit is available Refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. from Rolls-Royce Motors Limited, part number Important RH 2841 and should be used as follows. Always seal each reservoir cap after it has been Switch on the ignition and depressurize the confirmed that the systems are not contaminated and hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until all work on the systems has been completed. both low pressure warning panels illuminate. Continue to pump the pedal for at least a further 20 applications 1 Check the mineral oil level in the reservoirs to ensure that all the accumulator mineral oil is The mineral oil reservoirs for the hydraulic systems are returned to the reservoir. located in the engine compartment (see fig. B4·38). Clean the area around each hydraulic reservoir To check the oil level, first depressurize the filler cap and then remove the cap. hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until Ensure that the components in the test kit a're the two warning panels illuminate. Start and run the clean and dry. engine for approximately four minutes to charge the Using the sampling tube provided, extract 50 ml systems and then stop the engine. The mineral oil in of mineral oil from the top and bottom of each both reservoirs should be up to the FULL marks on reservoir. the level indicator plate. Place the samples into the individual clean dry If the reservoirs require topping-up, ensure that containers. the tops of the reservoirs and the filler caps are clean, Shake each sample taken to ensure it is well then add an approved hydraulic system mineral oil (see mixed. Chapter A) as necessary.

July 198S SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 B4-23

It is important that only approved hydraulic system mineral oil is used and that exceptional cleanliness is observed when topping-up the hydraulic systems. Under no circumstances should a conventional (i.e. RR363 or Universal) type brake fluid be used. After topping-up, ensure that the filler caps are clean, then fit them securely to the reservoirs or insert the blanking plug dependent upon the type of filler cap fitted. Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic System Mineral Oil for system replenishment, are fitted adjacent to the battery.

2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as follows. Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic systems by attaching a tube to each bleed point then opening the bleed screws and allowing the mineral oil to drain from the circuits. The bleed screws are located on each accumulator. on each pair of brake calipers, on the deceleration conscious pressure limiting valve and on each rear suspension strut (or each inner rear wing from the suspension strut). A drain tube is not required at the accumulator bleed screws as these are an integral part of the accumulators and when opened allow the mineral oil to flow from the accumulator spheres back to the reservoirs. Drain the mineral oil from the reservoirs and clean the reservoirs as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. After the system has completely drained. close aH the bleed screws and ensure that any disturbed pipes are connected and correctly torque tightened. Fill the reservoirs with fresh hydraulic system mineral oil (see fig. B4-38 and Chapter A) until the levels in the reservoirs are slightly above the topping· up marks on the indicator plate. Run the engine for four minutes with the car unladen, then top-up to the FULL level mark; never Fig. 84·38 Access to the hydrau lie system allow the mineral oil levels to fall below the minimum reservoirs level marks. A Original filler cap Check for leaks, especially around the unions of B Specialized filler cap any pipes which have been disturbed. Finally, bleed the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic System Mineral Oil, for system replenishment, are fitted adjacent to the battery.

3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and check the condition of the hydraulic system pipes and hoses. Examine the metal pipes for signs of corrosion, particularly those in an exposed position. Examine the hoses for chafing or surface cracking. Faulty pipes and hoses should be replaced as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Fig. 84-39 Hydraulic accumulator to body hoses

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 84·24

4 Renew the accumulator to body, trailing arms Tighten the pipe nuts to the torque settings given to body, and sub-frame to body hoses {if fitted} in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in After fitting the new hoses. check for leaks and Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as bleed the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G: follows. of the Workshop Manual. Fit a hose clamp to each of the intermediate hoses of the accumulator return pipes to prevent the flow of mineral oil from the reservoirs. 5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses Thoroughly clean the areas around the connections To renew the hydraulic system hoses follow the same of the two accumulator to body, trailing arms to body, basic procedure described under the heading Renew and sub-frame to body hoses (see figs. 84·39, 84·40, the accumulator to body, trailing arms to body, and and 84·41 ). sub-frame to body hoses. Remove the respective hoses noting the following. To avoid contamination fit the new hose 6 Check the brake disc pads for wear immediately after removing the old one; alternatively Remove the wheel discs and slacken the wheel nuts fit approved blanks to the open ports until the new approximately half a turn. hoses are fitted. Jack up the car and support with stands and sill Before fitting a new hose ensure that it is blocks. thoroughly clean and conforms with the hydraulic Remove the road wheels and examine all the disc systems mineral oil requirements. brake pad linings. When fitting the new hoses, ensure that they are The brake pads must be renewed when the brake routed to clear other components and that clearance is pad linings are worn to within 3, 18 mm (0.125 in) of maintained during full suspension movement. the steel backing plates. The pads should also be renewed if this minimum thickness is likely to be achieved before the next service check. To renew the brake pads. refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. If new brake pads are to be fitted which have different recommended linings from those on the old pads. the disc faces should be cleaned prior to fitting the new pads. All traces of the old pad lining material should be removed by hand rotating the disc whilst applying coarse grade emery cloth to the disc faces. Do not emery the disc faces radially. Always ensure that the pads fitted to all six brake calipers have the same type and grade of pad lining. Fit the road wheels and lower the car. If new brake pads have been fitted. an initial running-in period of between 700 miles and 800 miles ( 1100 kilometres and 1300 kilometres) should be observed. During this running-in period the brakes Fig. B4-40 Trailing arm to body hydraulic hoses should not be applied harshly or for prolonged periods from high ~peeds except in an emergency. Towards the end of the running-in period. the force with which the brakes are applied may be progressively increased.

7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust excluders (when changing brake pads) The condition of the caliper dust seals should be checked whenever the brake pads are removed. Inspect the seals for signs of damage. heat hardening, or general deterioration and renew if necessary. When fitting new seals. ensure that the seal retaining clips are correctly located.

8 Renew the brake caliper seals To renew the caliper piston seals it is necessary to remove the brake calipers from the car. For full instructions, refer to Chapter G of the B4-41 Sub-frame to body hydraulic hoses Workshop Manual.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 84-25

9 Check the parking brake pads for wear 2 3 Securely chock the front wheels then raise the rear of the car. Place sill blocks under the rear body sills and also support the rear trailing arms. Do not allow the suspension struts to support the full suspension load. Remove the rear wheels and release the parking brake to the off position. Disconnect the caliper actuation rod from the caliper lever (see fig. 84-42). Unscrew and remove the caliper adjuster and collect the adjuster clicker plate. Unhook the pad retention springs from each pad, noting the larger spring is fitted to the inner pad. Remove the pads from the caliper. Check the thickness of the lining material on each pad. Pads which are worn to within 1,5 mm 6 5 4 W290 (0.062 in) or less of the steel backing plate should be renewed. Fig. B4·42 Parking brake mechanism To fit the pads, attach the retention springs then 1 Actuation rod locate the pads into position and hook the springs 2 Centralizing straps onto the caliper. 3 Parking brake pads Complete the assembly by reversing the removal 4 Brake disc procedure, then adjust the calipers as described under 5 Adjuster clicker block the heading Adjust the parking brake. 6 Adjuster Note If new parking brake pads have been fitted, the following bedding-in procedure should be carried out aher adjusting the parking brake.

Drive the car at approximately 30 mile/h (48 km/h) and apply the parking brake to bring the car to rest; it is important that this is done gently and progressively. The parking brake must not be applied fully and no attempt should be made to lock the wheels. This operation should be carried out nine times, allowing at least one minute to elapse between stops to prevent the discs overheating. Finally adjust the caliper as described under the heading Adjust the parking brake. Fig. B4-43 Parking brake rear cable adjustment point 10 Adjust the parking brake Ensure that the parking brake is in the off position. Adjust the rear cables at the adjusters (see fig. from the disc) then refit them. Ensure that the straps 84-43) so that the caliper operating levers return to are pushed downward towards the adjusting nut their off-stops under the influence of their return whilst tightening the nut and bolt securing them to the springs with no appreciable slackness in the cables. calrper. Note Check that the distance between the pad and the The cables must be adjusted so that the equalizer link disc are the same on each side of the caliper; if not. on the intermediate linkage (see fig. B4·43) lies at reset the centralizing straps. right-angles with the centre line of the car with the Raise each rear wheel in turn so that it is free to parking brake in the off position. rotate and adjust each caliper as follows. Turn the caliper adjuster (see fig. 84-42) To check the cable adjustment. adjust both rear clockwise until the pads just grip the disc; at this point cables at the equalizer link until the caliper off-stops it should only just be possible to rotate the road wheel are just clear of the calipers. Measure the gap by hand. Turn the adjuster anti-clockwise a quarter produced at each off-stop and lengthen the cables by turn (i.e. three clicks on the nut) to obtain the this amount. minimum clearance between the pads and disc. With the cables correctly adjusted, check that the centralizing straps (see fig. B4·42) are pushing the 11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage pads away from the discs when the parking brake is in Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Lubricate the the off position. If not. remove the nut and bolt parking brake linkage clevis pins, fulcrum pins. and the securing the straps, bend the straps outward (i.e. away rear cable adjusters with approved grease.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 B4-26

Fuel system the underside of the fuel tank (see Fig. B4-45) should Safety precautions also be removed and cleaned as follows. It is important that before a fuel line is opened or the Disconnect the battery. fuel tank is drained or siphoned. the workshop safety Drain or siphon the fuel tank. precautions given in Chapter A and Chapter U of the Place a container beneath the fuel intank filter to Workshop Manual are strictly observed. collect the residue of fuel from the tank when the filter is removed. 1 Renew the main fuel filter Disconnect the hose from the intank filter outlet The main fuel filter is situated on the car body frame pipe. (see fig. B4-44). It is a sealed unit and no attempt Remove the circlip retaining the filter and carefully should be made to clean the element. withdraw the filter from the tank. At the appropriate service interval change the Clean the filter mesh by washing it in clean fuel. main fuel filter. Examine the filter for serviceability and renew if Depressurize the system (see Chapter U) and necessary. unscrew the inlet and outlet pipe connections. Fit the filter by reversing the removal procedure. Slacken the worm drive clip retaining the Always use a new seal on the filter body. assembly to the mounting bracket and withdraw the Ensure that the fuel drained from the fuel tank is filter assembly. free from foreign matter, then return it to the fuel tank. Unscrew the unions fitted into both er.ds of the Check the fuel filter and the pipe connections that filter and discard the assembly. have been disconnected. for leaks. Fit the new filter assembly by reversing the removal procedure. noting the direction of flow arrow 2 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel marked on the outside of the casing. tank hose; renew as necessary When carrying out the above operation at 60 000 To enable the filler head to fuel tank hose to be miles (96 000 kilometres) or six years and examined, it is necessary to remove the rear subsequent periods. the intank fuel filter situated on suspension gas spring. For details of the procedure required reference should be made to Chapter U of the Workshop Manual.

3 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes Carefully examine alt the flexible fuel pipes throughout the fuel system. Renew any pipes which have become damaged or deteriorated to an unserviceable condition. Before renewing any pipes depressurize th.e system (see Chapter U). Check the complete fuel system for leaks and rectify as necessary.

Electrical system 1 Check the state of charge of the battery Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, Mulsanne, late Corniche, and Fig. 84-44 Main fuel filter all Continental. The battery is situated in the luggage compartment stowage well. To gain access to the battery. turn back the carpet from the right-hand side of the luggage compartment. Lift out the stowage well lid and the cover from around the battery.

Early Corniche and all Camargue The battery is mounted on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment. To gain access to the battery turn back the carpet and remove the trim from around the battery, the trim is secured by contact strip on Corniche and two turn fasteners on Camargue. Unclip the battery cover retaining strap and lift off the cover. To check the specific gravity of the battery electrolyte on these models, it is necessary to remove the battery from the car as follows. Ensure the ignition A0616 is switched off. then disconnect the battery leads. Remove the battery clamp and lift the battery from its Fig. 84-45 lntank fuel filter cradle.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 B4-27

Battery electrolyte check The level of the battery electrolyte in each cell Applicable to batteries with removable cell vent should be approximately 5 mm (0.250 in) above the cover(s). tops of the separators ( Lucas or Varta battery) or a. Electrolyte specific gravity check. contacting the blue bar situated above the separators Remove the vent covers from the top of the battery. (Chloride battery). Using a hydrometer check the specific gravity of If the electrolyte level is low top-up using distilled the electrolyte in each cell and compare the readings water until the level is attained. Do not overfill. obtained with the following tables. Always ensure the top of the battery is clean prior Caution to removal of the vent cover. The electrolyte in the battery is a corrosive acid. Do not allow the electrolyte to come into contact with the Battery voltage check eyes. skin, fabric, or paintwork. Flush any contacted Applicable to sealed for life (maintenance free) areas immediately and thoroughly with water. If the batteries. eyes are effected. flush for at least 15 minutes and The state of charge of a sealed for life battery can obtain prompt medical attention. only be checked by taking a voltage reading at the battery terminals, using either a digital voltmeter or Chloride battery multimeter. The instrument used must be accurate to within 0.1 volts. Air temperature below 32°C (90°F) Before a voltage reading is taken on batteries that have recently received a charge. the residual effects of Specific Gravity Condition of Battery the surface charge on the battery plates must be 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged removed to avoid a false reading. This surface charge 1. 1 80 to 1.200 Half discharged can be removed by applying an electrical load to the 1.090 to 1.110 Fully discharged battery (e.g. by either connecting a high rate discharge tester for 1 5 seconds or if the battery is fitted to a car, Air temperature above 32°C (90°F) switching on the headlamps for one minute). After wards, allow the battery to stand for a further one Specific Gravity Condition of Battery minute before a voltage reading is taken. 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged Compare the reading obtained with the following 1. 1 50 to 1. 1 70 Half discharged table to ascertain the state of charge. 1.070 to 1.090 Fully discharged Voltage State of charge Lucas or Varta battery 12.8 100% 12.6 82% Air temperature below 27°C (80°F) 12.5 75% 12.4 60% Specific Gravity Condition of Battery 1.2 70 to 1.290 Fully charged A minimum reading of 12.5 volts (corresponding 1.1 80 to 1 .200 Half discharged to 75% charge) is acceptable. Below this reading the 1.090 to 1.110 Fully discharged battery should be recharged. Instructions for charging are provided on the battery label.

Air temperature above 27°C (80°F) 2 Clean and check the battery terminals The top of the battery should always be kept clean and Specific Gravity Condition of Battery dry. 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged If corrosion of the battery leads or terminals has 1.130 to L1 50 Half discharged occured it should be removed as follows. 1.050 to 1.070 Fully discharged Disconnect the battery leads and using hot water or a dilute solution of ammonia carbonate, wash them thoroughly until all corrosion has been removed. If the specific gravity reading of all the cells is Finally wash with clean water to remove the ammonia uniform and within the range 1.240 to 1.2 70 the carbonate solution. battery is in an acceptable state of charge. If the Remove any corrosive deposit from the terminal readings are uniform but below 1.220 the battery posts using a cloth moistened with ammonia should be recharged. Always remove the battery from carbonate solution then wash with clean water. the car for recharging. Ory the battery leads and terminal posts. Connect If the specific gravity of the electrolyte in one cell the battery leads to the terminal posts. Liberally coat differs markedly from the others (i.e. the reading is the terminals with petroleum jelly. 0.040 or more, lower than the remainder), then a defect must be suspected and rectified as necessary. 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation b. Electrolyte level check Actuate the respective switches and check for lamp Ensure that the battery is in a high state of charge (see illumination and function (i.e. turn flashers. headlamp Electrolyte specific gravity check). dip/main beam, etc.).

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 84-28

The respective facia tell-tales should also be The buzzer should operate if the driver's door is checked for illumination during these operations. opened when the ignition key is in the switchbox. With the lighting switch in the Park and Head .. ·. position. switch on the ignition. Check the facia 5 Check all interior lamps for operation instruments for illumination; the panel illumination Ensure all the doors are fully closed and the interior dimming switch should also be checked for correct lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the operation. rear section of the central roof lamps should illuminate;, Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain . 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation illuminated for approximately seven seconds. Before carrying out the following checks firmly apply On 1985/86 model year cars the rear roof lamps the parking brake; ensure the gear range selector is in and footwell lamps should also illuminate when the the Park position and remove the gear range selector door is opened. If the gear selector lever is moved isolator from the fuseboard. from the Park position on these cars, with the ignition key in the RUN position, the lamps will extinguish Ignition and oil warning lamps immediately all the doors are closed. When carrying Turn the ignition key to the RUN position, the ignition out this operation also check that the door open and oil pressure warning lamps should illuminate. Start warning lamp and step larrip are illuminated with the the engine, both lamps should extinguish; switch off door in the open position. These lamps should the ignition. extinguish immediately the door is fully closed. When the ignition key is turned to the ACC position Repeat the check on the remaining door(s). the ignition warning lamp only should illuminate. Note If t.he doors are only closed to the first catch position Warning panel cluster lamps the lamps should remain illuminated. Move the gear range selector lever to the D position Check the operation of the front compartment {do not insert the gear range selector isolator). personal lamps as follows. Apply the footbrake then turn the ignition key to Withdraw the main lighting switch; the front the start position. All the warning panel cluster lamps section of the driver· s roof lamp should illuminate. should illuminate. With the ignition held in the start Operate the map lamp switch, the front section of position, turn the main lighting switch to the Park and the front passenger's roof lamp should illuminate. Head positions; the intensity of illumination of the ice On 1985/86 model year cars fitted with vanity and low fuel warning panels should reduce. Switch off mirror illumination, move the switch to the mirror the ignition and lighting switch. position. Lower the passenger's sun visor; the lamp The hydraulic system warning panel situated at situated above the visor should illuminate. the top of the warning panel cluster should also be Withdraw the visor from its retaining clip; the checked as follows. lamp should extinguish. The lamp should also Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. extinguish when the visor is moved to its raise·d Depressurize the hydraulic system by actuating position, even when the switch is on. the brake pedal between 50 and 60 times. The two The operation of the rear roof lamps should be brake pressure warning panels should illuminate. checked by operating the switches situated on the rear When the panels have illuminated start and run compartment vanity mirror surrounds. the engine. Both panels should extinguish after Press the upper portion of the three position approximately two minutes indicating that the switch; the front section of the respective roof lamp hydraulic systems are pressurized. Switch off the should illuminate. Press the lower portion of the ignition. switch and the rear section of both rear roof lamps should illuminate. With the switch in the central Fasten seat belt warning lamp position both lamps should be off. Repeat the To check the seat belt warning lamp, open and close operation on the opposite side of the car. each door in turn; observe the lamp operation. The seat belt warning panel should illuminate On Camargue cars press the outer of the two whenever a door is opened and extinguish switches situated in the arm rest; this should approximately seven seconds after the door is closed. illuminate the rear section of both rear roof lamps. Note Pressing the inner switch should illuminate the front All doors must be fully closed for the lamp to section of the respective roof lamps. Repeat the extinguish (i.e. not on first catch). operation on the opposite side of the car.

Hazard warning indicator Corniche Saloon cars Depress the hazard warning switch, check that all the Ensure the doors are fully closed and the interior turn indicators and the facia warning lamp are flashing. lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the rear section of the four roof lamps should illuminate. Key warning buzzer Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain In addition to the facia warning lamps, ensure that the illuminated for approximately seven seconds then ignition key warning buzzer is operating correctly. extinguish. Repeat the check with the passenger door.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 B4·29

When carrying out these checks also ensure that the Mulsanne cars a headlamp washer system is fitted. door open warning lamp and step lamp are illuminated The reservoir is housed under the front right-hand when the door is open. wing and the filler is located in the engine Check the operation of the rear compartment roof compartment towards the front of the car. lamps by operating the three position switch situated The reservoir should be topped-up with clean in each arm rest. ensuring that the car doors are water until the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler closed. neck. Press the outer section of the switch. the front During winter conditions, a solution of 30% section of the respective roof lamp should illuminate. isopropyl alcohol and 70% water should be used. This Press the inner section of the switch. the rear section mixture will provide frost protection down to a of both .rear roof lamps should illuminate. With the temperature of approximately -10°C ( 14° F). switch in the central position both roof lamps should be off. 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper Repeat the check on the opposite switch. blades Check the front compartment roof lamps as Lift the wiper arms from the windscreen and inspect described in the section for cars. other than Corniche. them for wear or damage. Renew the blades if necessary. Convertible cars To remove a blade, lift the wiper arm away from Seven interior lamps are provided. one in each door, the windscreen then press the small tab situated in the two in the hood above the rear window, one in the end of the arm to release the blade. Check that the front face of each rear seat outer arm rest and one new blade is secured by the retaining catch then above the facia stowage compartment. return the blade to the windscreen. Open the driver's door; both roof lamps. the lamp On late Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne in each rear arm rest and the lamp in each door should cars the wiper blade removal procedure is as follows. illuminate. Fully close the door, the lamps should all a. Driver's side of the windscreen. Lift the wiper arm extinguish, except the rear roof lamps which should from the windscreen. Push half of the blade away from remain illuminated for approximately seven seconds. the arm, until the blade is released from its location Repeat this procedure with the passenger door. clip. To fit the new blade, position it on the wiper arm Withdraw the main lighting switch; both rear roof and press it firmly into the location clip. lamps should illuminate. b. On the passenger side of the windscreen, lift the Operate the facia switch marked MAP; the lamp wiper arm from the windscreen and pivot the blade situated above the facia stowage compartment should through 180". Press the small release tag, situated on illuminate. the underside of the blade pivot block and push the With the doors closed, operate the switches blade out of the crooked end of the wiper arm. situated in the end of the arm rest. The rear roof lamp Withdraw the wiper blade from the arm. Fit the new and rear compartment arm rest lamp situated on the blade by reversing the removal procedure, same side of the car as the switch should illuminate. Note Care must be taken during these operations to ensure 6 Check the horns for operation that the wiper arm is not allowed to spring back onto Examine the electrical connections to each horn to the windscreen when the blade has been removed. ensure they are in good condition. Clean the horns and othervvise damage to the windscreen could occur. remove any foreign matter that may have collected in the horn trumpets. 9 Check the windscreen wash/wipe and Switch on the ignition; press the horn button headlamps power wash for correct operation several times to ensure the horn button is making a Before carrying out the following check ensure that the good contact and that both horns are functioning windscreen is clean. correctly each time it is pressed. Switch on the ignition and press the windscreen wash/wipe switch. The windscreen wipers should 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp operate and the fluid from the washer jets should washer reservoirs impinge on the windscreen approximately 419 mm Windscreen washer reservoir. (16.5 in) from the centre line of the windscreen and The filler is located in the engine compartment. 190 mm (7.5 in) below the windscreen top finisher. Remove the filler cap and add the correct mixture of The wash/wipe function should continue until the windscreen washer fluid and distilled water to the switch is released. reservoir until the maximum level is attained. On release of the push button switch the washer Topping-up level should cease while the wipers should continue for Cars with the reservoir situated in the engine approximately four strokes before returning to the park compartment· bottom of filler neck. position. Cars with the reservoir situated beneath the wing • Turn the main lighting switch to the HEAD position. 44.0 mm ( 1. 7 50 in) below the filler neck. The headlamps cleaning function (if fitted) will only Headlamp washer reservoir. operate when the headlamps are illuminated. Press the On 1985/86 model year Silver Spirit Silver Spur, and wash/wipe switch. the power wash jets should

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors limited 1985 84-30

operate for half a second when the wash/wipe switch The alternative method of checking the seat belts is depressed. To repeat the wash it will be necessary is to select an open stretch of road. then, when the to release and then depress the switch again. road is free from any potential danger. accelerate the car to 1 5 mile/h (24 km/h) and brake sharply from 10 Check the alternator for correct operation this speed; ensure that the belt locks and then For details of the alternator test procedure and brush subsequently releases. If this method of test is used. it renewal. reference should be made to Chapter M of will be necessary to carry a passenger(s) to enable the the Workshop Manual. passenger seat belts to be tested. Check the rear seat lap belt for condition and correct locking and release. Automatic air conditioning system Report any defects to the owner. 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from When seat belt replacement is necessary only obstruction belts approved by Rolls-Royce Motors Limited should Check the air intake grilles and foam filters situated be fitted. behind the bonnet, for obstruction (i.e. leaves. dirt, etc.). Carefully remove the grille retaining screws. lift .2 Check that all body drains are free from the grilles and filters from the body and clean all parts obstruction including the air intake ducts; also ensure the duct Examine the body drain holes; remove any foreign drain tubes are free from obstruction. matter that may be obstructing the holes. Take care not to damage the paintwork. 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct operation 3 Lubri1.:ate the spare wheel carrier lowering For details of the procedure required to carry out this bolt operation reference should be made to Chapter C of Turn back the carpet on the luggage compartment the Workshop Manual. floor to expose the spare wheel inflation trap and spare wheel carrier lowering bolt head. Remove the inflation Body trap cover; if a spare wheel retainer is fitted. it should 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat be released. belts Rotate the spare wheel bolt anti·clockwise until The following checks should be carried out on the the carrier is fully lowered. Remove the spare wheel front and rear retractable seat belts. from the carrier. Fully withdraw the seat belt from the reel; Lubricate the carrier lowering bolt using a examine the webbing for any signs of wear or damage. recommended lubricant. Raise and lower the carrier to Allow the belt to return to the stowed position. distribute the lubricant over the full length of the To check the operation of the retractable belt. fit carrier bolt. the belt and then give the webbing of the diagonal belt Check the condition of the spare wheel as a sharp pull. Ensure that the belt locks and then described under the heading Wheels. returns to the normal roller action immediately the belt Fit the spare wheel onto the carrier. Ensure that is released. the inflation valve is in line with the inflation trap in With the fastening tongue of the belt locked in the the luggage compartment floor. then fully raise the retaining clasp; ensure the tongue is securely held and carrier. is released immediately the release button marked Fasten the spare wheel retainer (if fitted),and fit PRESS is operated. the tyre inflation trap rubber and carpet.

4 Check the fluid level in the power operated hood reservoir Convertible cars The level of the fluid in the hydraulic pump reservoir must be checked with the hood in the fully open (down) position. The fluid reservoir is situated adjacent to the stowage recess below the luggage compartment floor similar to that shown in figure 84-46. To gain access to the reservoir, turn back the carpet on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment to expose the recess covers; remove the covers. Unscrew the reservoir filler cap and check the fluid level. The correct level is 25 mm ( 1.0 in) below the filler neck. If necessary top·up the reservoir with an approved fluid. Under no circumstances must a castor oil Fig. B4-46 Power operated hood reservoir based fluid be used.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 84 84-31

Wheels 1 Check all tyre pressures Check the tyre pressures including the spare when the tyres are cold; adjust if necessary. The inflation pressure of the spare tyre should be adjusted to the highest tyre pressure {i.e. rear wheel). Do not check the pressures when the tyres are warm (e.g. after the vehicle has run). Always ensure that the valve caps are fined after checking.

2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres Examine the tyres, including the spare, for any signs of damage or tyre wall cracking, etc. Carefully remove any stones or other objects that may be lodged in the tyre treads. Check the depth of tread at several points around each wheel using a tread depth gauge. To enable a visual check to be made. tread depth indicators are incorporated into the tyre construction. These indicators are integral moulded ribs. spaced at intervals around the circumference of the tyre and extend across the full width of the tread in all primary grooves. When one or more of these indicators are flush with the tread. only 1,6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread depth remains. If the condition of the tyres is not satisfactory or the tread depths do not conform to the legal requirements of the country in which the car is operating, the owner should be notified and asked to authorize the fitting of new tyres. For full information on tyre fining. balancing. etc. reference should be made to Chapter R of the Workshop Manual.

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance On completion of the respective service schedule operations. carefully road test the car for satisfactory performance. If new brake pads have been fined. the running-in and bedding procedures should be carried out as described under, Check the brake disc pads for wear and Check the parking brake pads for wear. When the road test has been completed. the car should be fully inspected for any leaks, fouls, etc., and rectified as necessary. The transmission fluid level, should be finally checked immediately after the test, while the fluid is at normal running temperat1:1re and topped-up if necessary (see Check the transmission fluid level). Ensure that all controls. door handles. steering wheel, etc., are clean and that any dirt which may be attributed to the service schedule is completely removed.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1 985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85 85-1

Service schedule procedures Cars conforming to Middle East Countries specifications

Contents Pages Silver Spirit· Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1984 model year cars. B5-3 1985/86 model year cars 85-3 B5-3 B5·3 85·3

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85 B5·3

Service schedule procedures 1984/86 model year cars

Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids (Castro! RR363, Universal. or any other type). The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, pipes, etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil system. For details of correct component identification reference should be made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Always ensure that a sealed container of Hydraulic System Mineral Oil { LHM) is fitted adjacent to the battery. Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the systems when work is being carried out.

General i!'tformation These service schedule procedures are applicable to the following cars. 1984 model year Silver Spirit, Silver Spu'r, and Mulsanne (except Turbo) cars. 1985/86 model year Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Fig. 85·1 Crankcase breather tube flame trap Mulsanne (except Turbo), Corniche, Continental, and Camargue cars. Lamp units The information contained within this chapter Weekly; check the lamp units for operation; rectify any should be used in conjunction with the service faults. schedule charts and Workshop Manual TSO 4400. For Camargue cars, also refer to Workshop Tyre pressures Manual TSD 4200. Weekly; check the tyre pressures including the spare; adjust if necessary. Car protection Prior to commencing a service schedule the car should Windscreen and headlamp washer reservoir(s) be suitably protected. For this purpose car protection Weekly; check the washer fluid level; top-up if kit RH 2662, wing covers RH 2684, and wing cover necessary. liners RH 2685 should be used. Hydraulic reservoirs Regular maintenance Monthly; check the level of hydraulic mineral oil in the In addition to the service schedules listed, the reservoirs. following maintenance should be carried out. Depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until the low brake pressure warning Engine panels on the facia illuminate. Continue to pump the Weekly or every 800 kilometres (500 miles) pedal for at least a further 20 applications to ensure whichever is the earlier: check the engine oil by means complete depressurization. Start and run the engine of the dipstick; top-up if necessary. for four minutes with the car unladen, prior to

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 85-4

checking the level. Top-up if necessary to the indicated maximum level.Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM). Refer to page B5-18 for further information before carrying out this operation.

Engine cooling system Every three months; check. the coolant level. If necessary top-up with the correct anti-freeze/water mixture ( see page B5· 10).

Fig. 85-2 Choke butterfly housing adapter Crankcase emission control system 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame trap The engine crankcase is ventilated through a breather tube connected to the carburetter air induction system. A flame trap in the form of filter gauze is fined into the system at the rear of 'A' bank cylinder head (see fig. 85-1) and ~hould be cleaned as follows. Withdraw the windscreen wiper motor relay (wiper 3) (see fig. 85-22. item A) situated on a bracket adjacent to the windscreen washer reservoir. Remove the cover from the windscreen wiper drive mechanism to gain access to the crankcase breather connection. Disconnect the breather hose from the flame trap housing. Remove the three setscrews from the housing cover and remove the cover. Remove the circlip retaining the gauze filter Fig. 85-3 Fuel evaporative emission control situated on the underside of the housing cover. canister and mounting bracket Thoroughly clean the gauze with a suitable setscrews cleaning solvent and dry using compressed air. Ensure that the breather pipe and housing are also 1 clean. Fit the filter gauze and housing cover by reversing the removal procedure. 111..--.-v 2 Clean the choke butterfly housing adapter The adapter is situated on the choke butterfly housing and is part of the crankcase breather system (see fig. B5-2). To clean the adapter remove the retaining setscrew and detach the adapter from the breather pipe. ) Clean the adapter using a recommended cleaning solvent and ensure that the holes are free of obstruction; dry using compressed air. Ensuring that the ·o· ring is in good condition, fit the adapter by reversing the removal procedure.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5 85·5

Collect the washer fitted under the head of each setscrew. Withdraw the control canister from under the wing. Note the position of the control canister in relation to the mounting bracket and unscrew the retaining worm drive clip. Fit the new canister to the mounting bracket and tighten the retaining worm drive clip. Ensure that the canister is in the correct position relative to the mounting bracket. Fit the assembly to the vehicle by reversing the procedure given for removal. noting that new hose securing clips should be used.

2 Check the condition of all pipes, hoses, and connections Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Locate the fuel evaporative control canister. Withdraw the fuel tank evaporative hose from the canister and connect it to the test equipment shown in Fig. B5·5 Purge line restrictor figure B5·4. Apply air pressure to the fuel tank hose via the test equipment until a reading of 380 mm (15 in} H20 is attained and close the pressure supply. After five minutes again check the pressure reading. this should not have fallen by more than 12,7 mm (0.5 in). If the pressure drop is more than 12, 7 mm (0.5 in). progressively treat all joints in the system with soap solution to detect air leaks. Rectify any air leaks and again leak check the system. During the five minutes leak down. visually inspect the hoses, pipes, and connections of the system tint are routed under the car. Commence where the hose exits from the body adjacent to the left·hand rear road spring arid follow the system to the control canister. Ensure that the hoses are secure in the mounting Fig. 85·6 Engine sump drain plug clips. · When the system check is satisfactory, detach the test equipment and connect the hose to the control Engine canister. Secure the hose with a new clip. 1 Change the engine oil The sump should be drained when the engine is 3 Check the purge flow rate warm. preferably after the car has completed a run. Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. To drain the oil. position the car over a pit or on a Remove the retaining clip from the purge line ramp. restrictor hose. Place a container in position beneath the drain Disconnect the hose at the purge line restrictor. plug situated on the right-hand side of the sump (see Leave the restrictor in the hose to the engine (see fig. 85·6). Remove the drain plug and allow the oil to fig. B5·5). drain from the sump. Connect a rotameter assembly RH 8725 into the Do not flush the sump with paraffin or petrol. line, between the restrictor and the open pipe to the Fit the drain plug ensuring that the washer is valance connection. correctly positioned and in good condition. Connect an impulse tachometer to the engine in Fill the engine sump with recommended lubricant accordance with the manufacturer· s instructions. until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Start and run the engine at 650 rev/min; the Carry out the full oil level check procedure as reading on the flowmeter should be between described under. Check the engine oil level. (50 ft3/h and 70 ft3/h). If the purge flow rate is outside the limits 2 Renew the engine oil filter specified, refer to the Workshop Manual TSD 4400, Drain the engine oil as described under Change the Chapter U. engine oil.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B5·6

Place a container under the filter to collect any oil Remove the filter by unscrewing it from the that may be spilt. engine in an anti·clockwise direction {see fig. 85, 7). Thoroughly clean the filter seating face on the engine. Lightly smear the rubber sealing ring on the new filter with clean engine oil. Screw the filter onto the pedestal until the rubber seal contacts the sealing face then tighten the filter a further half turn; do not overtighten. Fifi the engine with clean engine oil until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Run the engine and check the filter joint for leakage. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

Check the engine oil level In order to obtain an accurate indication of the oil level. ensure that the car is standing on level ground. Check the oil level by means of the dipstick marked ENGINE (see fig. 85·8). It is recommended that the oil level is checked when the engine is cold. If the engine has been ·1 running, sufficient time should elapse after il has stopped to allow the oil to drain into the sump. Do not check the oil level with the engine running. Fig. 85·7 Engine oil filter location To replenish the sump with oil, open the filler cap marked ENGINE (see fig. 85·8). Add clean oil to the engine and after allowing sufficient time for the oil to reach the sump check that the oil is up to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. Important The engine lubrication system incorporates a thermostatically controlled oil cooler. therefore if the oil has been drained from the engine the following additional procedure must be carried out to ensure the correct oil level is obtained. Carry out the normal topping-up procedure as described previously to obtain the maximum oil level reading on the dipstick. Drive the car to enable the engine oil to attain the temperature required to actuate the oil cooler thermostat. To ascertain that the thermostat has actuated, a Fig. 85·8 Engine oil filler and dipstick rise in the temperature of the oil cooler return pipe (see fig. 85·9) can be felt. This temperature rise occurs as hot oil begins to flow from the oil filter housing, where the thermostat is situated, to the oil cooler mounted in front of the coolant radiator matrix. Do not attempt to attain the required engine oil temperature rise with the car stationary. When it has been ascertained that the engine oil has been passing through the coe>ler, thus filling this part of the 1.ubrication system, check the oil level in the normal manner as described previously.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85 B5·7 fitted. Always renew both belts in a matched pair even if only one belt is faulty. Two belt tension loads are specified; a new belt load for replacement (new) belts and a retensioning load for belts which are satisfactory for further service. The belt tension must be checked at a point midway between two pulleys (see fig. 85· 10) by use of a belt tension meter or by applying a spring balance to give a 9,50 mm (0.375 in) belt deflection at a specified load. The variation in the spring balance loads for similar belt tension meter loads is due to the varying lengths of belt between individual belt centres. Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent bait slip.

Crankshaft to coolant pump Load may be applied on either side of the belt run.

New belt load Belt tension meter 2 7,2 ·kgf to 31 ,7 kgf (60 lbf to 70 lbf) Spring balance 7,5 kgf to 8.2 kgf (16.5 lbf to 18 !bf) Fig. B5-10 Engine drive belt adjustment and tension check joints Retensioning load Belt tension meter 22.7 kgf to 27.2 kgf (50 lbf to 60 lbf) Spring balance 6.8 kgf to 7 ,5 kgf (15 lbf to 16.5 lbf)

The tension of this matched pair of belts is adjusted by altering the position of the jockey pulley (see fig. 85·10). Slacken the nut and setscrew securing the jockey pulley arm. Pivot the jockey pulley to adjust the belt tension then tighten the nut and setscrew. Check the belt tension and repeat the adjustment procedure if necessary.

Coolant pump to alternator Load may be applied on either side of the belt run.

New belt load Belt tension meter 36,3 kgf to 40.8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf} Spring balance 5.0 kgf to 5.9 kgf {11 lbf to 13 lbf) Fig. B5·11 Air filter (Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, Bentley Eight, Comiche, Retensioning load and Continental) Belt tension meter 31,7 kgf to 36,3 kgf {70 lbf to 80 lbf) Spring balance 4, 1 kgf to 5,0 kgf the belt tension then tighten the nut and bolt in the {9 lbf to 11 lbf) adjustment slot Check the belt tension and repeat the adjustment if necessary. The tension of the belt is adjusted by altering the When the tension is correct finally tighten the position of the alternator (see fig. B5· 10). remaining setscrews and check the tension again. Slacken the setscrew securing the alternator at the upper mounting point. Crankshaft to steering pump/refrigeration Slacken the setscrew securing the adjustment compressor strut to the front mounting plate, also the nut and bolt Load must be applied on the top run of the belts. Each in the adjustment slot. Pivot the alternator to adjust belt to be checked individually.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1 985 B5·8

New belt load (see fig. 85-1 0). Slacken the setscrew in the steering Belt tension meter 40.8 kgf to 45,5 kgf pump mounting bracket slot situated below the pump (90 lbf to 100 lbf) pulley. Spring balance 6,3 kgf to 7.7 kgf Slacken the pump pivot setscrew and the union (14 lbf to 17 lbf) on the supply hose at the rear of the pump. Pivot the pump to adjust the belt tension then Retensioning load tighten the setscrew in the adjustment slot. Check the Belt tension meter 36,3 kgf to 40,8 kgf belt tension and adjust again if necessary. Whe~ the (80 lbf to 90 lbf) tension is correct tighten the pivot setscrew and again Spring balance 4, 1 kgf to 6.3 kgf check the belt tension. Finally tighten the supply hose (9 lbf to 14 lbf) connection; ensuring that the soft rubber protective sleeve has clearance or minimal contact with the The tension of this matched pair of belts is coolant pump to manifold elbow. adjusted by altering the position of the steering pump 4 Renew the air filter element Silver Spirit. Silver Spur, Mulsanne, Bentley Eight, Corniche. and Continental The air filter element is situated in the air intake housing at the front right-hand side of the engine compartment ( see fig. B5-1 1 }. To gain access to the element unfasten the two toggle clips retaining the air blending valve housing to the air cleaner housing. Carefully free the joint and move the housing away from the air cleaner. Unscrew the worm drive clip securing the engine intake hose to the air cleaner. Detach the hose. Support the air cleaner housing and unfasten the three toggle clips securing the housing to the valance. Carefully free the joint. then move the housing towards the engine and withdraw the housing and air filter element from the car. Remove the filter element from the housing. Ensure that the inside of the air cleaner housing (both the section removed and the fixed section in the wing valance) is clean. Inspect the joint seals for serviceability. Renew if necessary. Fit the new filter element as follows. Locate the large end of the new filter element W888 onto the locating spigot on the inside of the removable half of the housing. Fig. 85-12 Air filter (Camargue) Carefully position the housing and filter onto the valance allowing the filter to pass into the valance mounting section of the housing. Locate the small (blank) end of the filter into the spigot in the valance housing. Align the three housing toggle clips with their respective securing points. Special care should be taken during these operations to ensure that the paper element is not damaged during insertion. Ensure that the filter is correctly positioned on the location spigots. then secure the three toggle clips. It is essential that the filter is correctly located on the spigots before the toggle clips are fastened down, otherwise there is a serious risk of crushing the filter element. Fit the remaining components by reversing the removal procedure. Camargue The air filter element is situated in the air intake housing at the front right-hand side of the engine Fig. 85-1 3 SU Carburetter damper compartment ( see fig. B5· 1 2).

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85 85-9

To gain access to the element, unscrew the worm drive clip securing the intake hose to the carburetters inlet duct. Withdraw the hose. Unscrew the knurled securing setscrew situated on the side of the assembly. Withdraw the cover. Unscrew the hexagonal nut from the centre stud. Withdraw the end plate. filter element. and second end plate. Fit the new element to the assembly by reversing the removal procedure. Refer to figure 85-12 for the correct assembly sequence.

5 Check the carburetter damper oil level The upper portion of the guide spindle, attached to the air valve piston in each carburetter is hollow and should contain the same type of oil as used in the engine. Fig. B5-14 Choke stove pipe restrictor union To ~heck the oil level. unscrew the cap and withdraw the damper from the air valve piston (see fig. 85-13). Toirup the damper reseivoir with clean Before removing the sparking plugs the engine oil to approximately 13 mm (0.50 in) from the surrounding area should be thoroughly cleaned to top of the tube. Fit the damper into the tube and prevent the ingress of foreign matter when the plugs screw the cap firmly into position. are removed. Fit the new plugs ensuring that the gaps are 6 Check the float chamber depression; adjust if correctly set and that each plug is fitted with a sealing necessary washer. For details of the procedure necessary to carry out this Torque tighten each plug to between 18 Nm and operation reference should be made to Chapter U of 23 Nm (1.8 kgf m and 2.3 kgf m. 13 lbf ft and the Workshop Manual. 17 lbf ft).

7 Check for correct choke operation and choke 10 Lubricate the accelerator and carburetter stove pipe flow; rectify if necessary linkage Apply the parking brake and ensure that the gear Lubricate all the accelerator linkage and carburetter range selector lever is in the Park position. Remove the ball joints, pivots, and clevis pins. gear range thermal cut-out from the fuseboard. Examine the ball knuckle joints for wear and Start and run the engine until normal operating adjust if necessary. Renew any worn clevis pins. temperature is attained. Stop the engine. Examine the linkage for correct operation. For Connect an impulse tachometer to the engine in details of linkage setting procedures refer to Chapter U acccordance with the manufacturer's instructions. of the Workshop Manual TSD 4400. Disconnect the stove pipe union at the intake elbow and connect a flowmeter to the pipe using 11 Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary connector RH 8945. The flowmeter must be a The ignition is timed on A 1 cylinder which is located rotameter type capable of measuring 2,9 m3/h at the front left-hand side of the engine (viewed from (1 00 ft3 /h). the front of the car). Start and run the engine at idle speed (650 Note rev/min); observe the flowmeter. a correct reading is If the ignition timing is to be set, ensure that the between 0,79 m3/h and 0,89 m3/h {28 ft3/h and sparking plugs are in good condition before running 32 ft3/h). the engine; if they require cleaning or renewal. ensure If the reading is outside the prescribed limits. that the gaps are correctly set {see Operation 9. reference should be made to Chapter U of the Renew the sparking plugs}. Workshop Manual. To check the ignition timing commence by 8 Check the choke fast-idle speed; adjust if running the engine until normal operating temperature necessary is attained and the choke fast-idle is in the off position. For full details of choke fast-idle settings reference Switch off the engine. should be made to Chapter U of the Workshop Manual. Connect a stroboscope and a tachometer to the engine as described in the instructions supplied with 9 Renew the sparking plugs the respective equipment. Sparking plug type Champion RN 12 YC or RN 12 Y Disconnect the hose from the vacuum advance Plug gap setting 0,76 mm (0.030 in} capsule and blank the hose.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls· Royce Motors Limited 1985 B5·10

Start the engine and adjust ~he throttle stop screw pointer; the pointer is positioned on the right·hand · to give an idle speed of 21 00 rev/min. When setting side of the crankshaft damper when viewed from the the engine idle speed reduce from a higher speed to front of the engine. 2100 rev/min. If the timing pointer does not coincide with the Direct the flashing light of the stroboscope onto 20° btdc mark on the crankshaft damper adjust the the crankshaft damper timing marks and timing ignition timing as follows. Release the clamp screw on the distributor and rotate the head of the distributor in the appropriate direction until the correct timing is obtained. Clockwise rotation of the distributor head advances the ignition and conversely anti-clockwise rotation retards the ignition. After adjustment has been carried out tighten the clamp screw and again check to ensure that the timing has not altered whilst tightening the clamp screw. Set the engine idle speed to 650 rev/min. Direct the flashing light of the stroboscope onto the crankshaft damper timing marks and timing pointer. Check that the ignition timing is approximately 2• - 6° btdc. Stop the engine and remove all the test

equipment \ Ensure that all hoses are fitted to their respective I connections. Disconnect the hose from the vacuum manifold to the intake sensor and connect a suitable length of Fig. 85·15 Hot idle mixture compensator feed hose between this hose and the distributor vacuum capsule.

Prnu. UttH Start and run the engine at 650 rev/min, check llm~ l that the ignition timing has advanced to between 18" btdc and 26° btdc.

15 Check the engine idle speed; adjust if nec::essary Ensure that the engine is at normal operating temperature and that the choke fast-idle is in the off position. The air conditioning system must be switched off and a tachometer connected to the engine in accordance with the manufacture(s instructions. J.--l.--.---+-3.6 Stop the engine, remove the air intake and blank 0 off the hot idle compensator feed drilling (see fig. 85· 1 5); replace the air intake. Start the engine and, if necessary. adjust the 1 engine idle speed to 650 rev/min, using the throttle stop screw. Stop the engine and remove the air intake. Remove the blank from the hot idle compensator feed drilling and fit the air intake. Detach the test equipment ... s ·•O BC ,501 • 0 , 30 .IQ Engine cooling system I ·?O I 0 I I 20 1 &"G'l io"' '5" 40"' 3°6" 30" is" 20'4 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration C .... The cooling system is filled initially with a coolant solution comprising equal parts of UT 184 (BP· Hythe Fig. BS·16 Anti-freeze correction chart to give a Chemicals) or Prestone II and water. This mixture 50% s ');L!tion gives frost protection down to a temperature of A Acceptable service range of concentration -37°C (-35°F). B Freezing point of coolant The coolant should contain fifty percent of an C Percentage concentration approved anti·freeze at all times. This not only D Volume of 1 00% anti-freeze to be added provides frost protection but also prevents corrosion of to maintain a 50% solution after removal the coolant passages and raises the boiling temperature of the same volume of old coolant of the coolant

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5 B5-11

The anti-freeze concentration should be checked in both the expansion bottle (where fitted) and the radiator. If the strength of the coolant requires increasing, sufficient coolant should be drained from the radiator and replaced with undiluted anti-freeze {see fig. B5· 16). Afterwards run the engine until normal operating temperature is attained and the anti-freeze has become thoroughly mixed with the coolant. Stop the engine and again check the concentration in the radiator. An acceptable level of anti-freeze concentration is between 45% and 50%. Therefore. as a hydrometer may be inaccurate where readings above 40% are Fig. 85-17 Coolant expansion bottle (Silver expected, it is recommended that a refractometer is Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, used. Corniche, and Continental) For details refer to Chapter L of the Workshop Manual. Turn the cap slowly anti-clockwise until a check If a refractometer is not available and a position is reached. Wait until any pressure in the hydrometer has to be used. a scale reading of between system has been released. Press down on the cap and 1.06 and 1.07 should be obtained with the coolant at continue to turn it anti-clockwise until the cap is room temperature for the mixture to be correct. released. Check the coolant level in the radiator. This should 2 Check the coolant level be half·way up the filler neck. Warning If the coolant level in the radiator is correct, fit the The cooling system becomes pressurized during radiator cap by pressing it firmly down and turning it engine running, therefore. extreme care should be fully clockwise. taken when removing the radiator cap from a Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in warm or hot radiator. accordance with the Routine check procedure. If the coolant level in the radiator is low but visible Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, Bentley Eight, and no cooling/heating system fault is reported or Corniche, and Continental suspected top-up the system using the following Routine check procedure. If however the coolant is not visible or a To check the level outside a normal service schedule coolant/heating system leak is reported or suspected, (e.g. Regular maintenance) and when no cooling/ the system should have any faults rectified and then heating system fault is reported or suspected. proceed be pressure tested prior to carrying out the topping-up as follows. procedure. If the engine is hot ensure that the coolant level Top-up the radiator until the coolant is half-way up in the translucent expansion bottle is at the MAX the filler neck. mark. Top-up if necessary and replace the expansion Start and run the engine. bottle cap. Turn the air conditioning system function control If the engine is cold ensure that the coolant level fully clockwise to the defrost position. in the translucent expansion bottle is half-way between Set the air conditioning system override switch to the MIN and MAX marks. Top-up if necessary and the AUTO position. replace the expansion bottle cap. Allow at least one minute for the air conditioning If the coolant level in the expansion bottle is either system to stabilize, then check to ensure that all air is below the MIN mark or there is no coolant in the being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is expansion bottle, carry out the following Full check delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). procedure. This procedure opens the heater system water tap. Run the engine, without the radiator pressure cap Full check fitted, until normal operating temperature is attained. Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position Top-up the coolant level in the radiator during this and apply the parking brake. time. Remove the gear range selector cut·out from the Switch off the engine. fuseboard. Fit the radiator pressure cap by pressing it firmly Check the coolant level in the translucent expansion down and turning it fully clockwise. bottle ( see fig. B5-17). If the level is low or the bottle is Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in empty, add coolant to bring the level up to the MIN mark. accordance with the Routine check procedure. Ensure that the engine is not hot (to allow safe removal of the radiator cap). Camargue Remove the radiator cap in three stages as Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position follows. and apply the parking brake.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B5-12

Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the fuseboard. Start the engine and turn the air conditioning function control clockwise to the defrost position and set the upper system mode override switch to the AUTO position. Allow approximately one minute for the system to attain the required setting. then check that all air is being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is delivered from the lower system and facia outlets). This procedure opens the heater water tap and ensures that the cooling system can be correctly checked. Switch off the ignition. Remove the radiator cap. If the engine is hot, muffle the cap with a thick cloth and gradually turn the cap anti-clockwise until the pressure is reduced, then Fig. B5-18 Heater tap feed hose remove the cap. If the coolant level is low, top-up the radiator header tank with the correct anti-freeze/water mixture. The correct level is when the coolant reaches the rubber seal in the filler neck. Fit the filler cap.

3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness Examine all the coolant hose connections for signs of leakage and check the worm drive clips for tightness. Never over tighten a clip in an attempt to seal a leaking connection. In the event of a hose connection .leaking when the worm drive clips have been tightened. drain the cooling system to a level below the leaking hose. Remove and inspect the hose and its connecting component for signs of damage. If necessary renew the faulty component and refill the system with coolant as described in Renew the coolant.

4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses Inspect all coolant hoses for signs of deterioration. Fig. 85-19 Oil pressure switches and transmitter cracking, weak spots, etc. Any faulty hose should be arrangements removed and a new hose fitted. When renewing a hose always ensure that it does not foul other components and that it is not kinked so as to cause complete or partial restriction of coolant flow.

5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose Drain the coolant system as described in Renew the coolant. but do not remove the engine crankcase drain plugs. Disconnect the heater tap feed hose from the engine and heater tap (see fig. B5-18); remove the hose. Fit the new hose; ensure that the hose is free from any sharp bends that may restrict coolant flow. Fill the engine coolant system as described in Renew the coolant. Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the gear range selector lever is in the Park position. Fig. 85-20 Crankcase drain plug ('B' bank Remove the gear range selector cut•out from the shown) fuse board.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5 85-13

Start and run the engine; check the coolant hose for leaks. Switch off the ignition and fit the gear range selector cut·out.

6 Renew the coolant Drive the car onto a ramp; move the gear range selector to the Park position and apply the parking brake. Remove the gear range selector cut·out from the fuseboard. Disconnect the Lucar connection from the pressure switch situated on the oil filter mounting/take-off flange (see fig. 85-19). This will allow the air conditioning system to be operated without running the engine. Switch on the ignition and rotate the air conditioning function switch to the windscreen defrost position. also set the upper system mode override switch to the AUTO position. Wait approximately one minute for the system to attain the required setting and observe that all the air is being directed to the windscreen. This procedure opens the heater water tap and ensures the system can be completely drained. Switch off the ignition. Place a container beneath the radiator drain tap to collect the coolant. Connect a length of hose onto the drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator pressure cap. Open the radiator drain tap and allow the coolant to drain from the radiator. When the radiator has completely drained place a container beneath the crankcase drain plugs. Remove the drain plugs from the crankcase (see fig. B5-20) Fig. B5-21 Thermostat housing assembly and allow the residue of cooiant to drain from the crankcase. half·way up the filler neck. Fit the pressure cap. Renew the washers on the drain plugs and fit the Fill the expansion bottle (except Camargue) to a plugs into the crankcase. level midway between the maximum and minimum To drain the coolant remaining in the expansion levels indicated on the bottle. bottle (except Camargue) disconnect the connection Start and run the engine until normal engine hose from the radiator filler neck and allow the coolant running temperature is attained; switch off the engine to drain from the expansion bottle into the container. and top-up the expansion bottle to the maximum level. When the coolant has drained connect the hose to the Allow the engine to cool down. Carefully remove radiator filler neck. the radiator pressure cap and ensure the radiator is Check all hoses for serviceability and renew as completely full of coolant. Top-up to half-way up the necessary. radiator filler neck if necessary. Fit the radiator Fill the system with fresh coolant of the specified pressure cap. concentration as follows. Connect the Lucar connection previously Ensure the radiator drain tap is closed. disconnected from the pressure switch adjacent to the Slowly fill the radiator with coolant. thus reducing oil filter take-off flange (see fig. B5-19). the possibility of air locks in the system. Note Start and run the engine for a minimum of 1 0 For the coolant system to operate correctly, i.e. for minutes with the radiator pressure cap removed. After coolant to pass into the expansion bottle when hot and running for five minutes ensu,e that warm air is be drawn back into the radiator during cooling, the top passing up the windscreen from the demister ducts. of the radiator must not contain an air pocket. Top-up the radiator as necessary to ensure there is always coolant in the top tank of the radiator. Ensure that the thermostat has opened; indicated 7 Reverse flush the coolant system by a rapid warming of the top radiator hose. Drain the engine coolant system as described in Switch off the engine and top-up the radiator to Renew the coolant.

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Aolls·Royce Motors Limited 1985 BS-14

Remove the top and bottom hoses from the To flush the heater system, detach the heater at radiator matrix. the water tap and disconnect the retur11 hose at the Fit a waste pipe to the upper (inlet) connection of coolant pump. the radiator. Fit a waste pipe to the disconnected heater feed Apply mains water under pressure through the hose. lower (outlet) connection of the radiator. This should Flush the matrix for approximately 30 minutes. remove all loose sediment in approximately Examine the coolant hoses for d.eterioration or 30 minutes. damage and renew as necessary. Do not under any circumstances use an Connect all hoses and fill the system with the alkaline compound or detergent to clean the recommended coolant mixture as described under system. Such compounds have a detrimental Renew the coolant chemical action on aluminium alloys. Remove the engine coolant drain plugs from the 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator and crankcase. refrigeration condenser Remove the thermostat as described in Renew the Using a pressure hose pipe, flush the radiator matrix thermostat, then replace the cover. and condenser matrix. Fit a suitable pipe to the drain plug aperture and Hold the nose of the hose pipe close to the back apply mains water pressure to each aperture in turn. of the radiator matrix and allow the water to pass Flush for approximately 30 minutes, or until the between the veins of the matrix. Slowly move the hose water runs clear of foreign matter. over the whole matrix area until all foreign matter Fit the drain plugs and a new thermostat by (insects, etc.) have been flushed clear. Care must be reversing the procedure for removal. taken to ensure that the end of the hose does not damage the matrix face during this operation.

9 Renew the thermostat Disconnect the battery. Place a container beneath the radiator. Attach a length of hose to the radiator :drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator pressure cap. Open the radiator drain tap and allow sufficient coolant to drain from the system for the coolant level to fall below that of the thermostat housing. Close the drain tap and remove the hose previously attached. Disconnect the electrical connector from the thermostat housing cover. Remove the bolt from the air intake elbow and the four setscrews from the thermostat housing cover. Collect the bracket Remove the thermostat housing cover. The cover can be moved away from the housing without detaching the outlet hose. Lift the thermostat from the housing ( see fig. 85-21 ). C Remove the old gasket material from the thermostat housing and cover. Ensure that no material enters the thermostat housing. Check that the two faces are clean and dry. Insert a new thermostat into the housing. Place a new gasket in position on the housing and fit the cover and air intake elbow bracket Connect the D A0635 elbow to the bracket Connect the electrical connection removed from Fig. 85-22 Transmission filler tube and dipstick the thermostat housing. A Removing the windscreen wiper Top-up the cooling system with the correct mechanism cover. The arrow indicates coolant mixture as described under Renew the coolant the wiper relay removed 8 Withdrawing the dipstick from the Torque converter transmission filler tube It is absolutely essential when adding fluid to, or C Original dipstick markings working on the torque converter transmission that 0 Revised dipstick markings great attention is paid to cleanliness. The smallest

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5 85-15

particle of dirt in the transmission fluid could interfere with the correct operation of the unit It is important for the efficient operation of the torque converter transmission that only an approved fluid is used (see Chapter A).

1 Check the transmission fluid level The fluid level can only be checked accurately when the car is standing on a level surface, the engine is running at idle speed and the transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature, approximately 77°C (170°F). The dipstick and filler tube are situated on the right·hand side of the engine compartment. On Silver Spirit Silver Spur, and Mulsanne. and Bentley Eight cars. remove the protective cover from Fig. 85·23 Transmission drain point the windscreen wiper mechanism to gain access to the dipstick. Ensure that the following safety procedure is undertaken to isolate the mechanism prior to removing Carry out the procedure described for the initial the cover. check.. Ensure that the windscreen wiper control switch With the transmission fluid at normal operating situated on the facia is in the off position. Remove a temperature the level of the fluid should be between windscreen wiper relay, preferably number three, the FILL and MAX HOT marks or the MIN and MAX situated adjacent to the windscreen washer resentoir marks (see fig. 85-22) dependent on the type of {see fig. B5-22). To remove the relay, pull it vertically dipstick fitted. from its mounting. If necessary add fluid by pouring it down the filler Always clean the top of the dipstick before tube. with the engine still running, until the fluid is to removing it from the filler tube. the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill As an initial check, the fluid level may be checked When the fluid level is correct. switch off the after starting from cold as follows. engine and fit the windscreen wiper mechanism cover Apply the pa.king brake. and relay. Start and run the en~ine for three to four minutes at fast-idle speed. with the gear range selector in the 2 Renew the transmission fluid Park position. Reduce the engine speed to slow idle. Position the car on a ramp or over a pit Whil~t sitting in the driving seat firmly apply the Place a clean container having a minimum capacity footbrake and move the gear range selector through of 3 litres (5 Imp pt 6 US pt) under the nut which the full range of gear positions pausing briefly in each secures the transmission fluid filler tube to the sump range. Return the selector to the Park position. (see fig. B5-23). Immediately check the fluid level with the engine From within the engine compartment. remove the running at idle speed. transmission dipstick as described under Check the The level should be up to the circular dimple transmission fluid level. situated below the FILL mark on the dipstick or Slacken the setscrew securing the filler tube to 10 mm {0.375 in} below the MIN mark. dependent the engine. on the type of dipstick fitted (see fig. B5-22). Unscrew the nut securing the filler tube to the Top-up to this level if necessary. side of the transmission sump (see fig. B5·23). After this initial check a further check should be Withdraw the filler tube from the sump and move it to carried out as follows. one side to allow the fluid to drain into the container. Drive the car for approximately 24 kilometres (15 After draining the sump, ensure that the filler tube miles) of highway/motorway driving or 16 kilometres is clean then fit it to the sump and tighten the drain (10 miles) of city driving. This should ensure the nut transmission has reached normal operating Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip temperature. to the engine. It is essential that this temperature is Add 2,8 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt) of an approved attained. Do not top-up the fluid level to the MAX fluid to the sump. pouring the fluid down the filler mark on the dipstick when the fluid is only warm, as tube. this will result in an over-fill situation when the normal Check the fluid level as described under Check the operating temperature is attained. Overfilling will result transmission fluid level. in fluid being discharged from the transmission breather pipe. 3 Fit a new intake strainer Position the car on a level surface, firmly apply the Drain the transmission sump as described under the parking brake and select Park position with the gear heading Renew the transmission fluid. then proceed as selector lever. follows.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors· Limited 1985 BS-16

Remove the setscrews securing the transmission Remove the intake pipe from the strainer and sump and lower the sump. discard the strainer. Drain any oil from the sump and discard the Clean the transmission sump and the intake pipe gasket. with paraffin and dry with compressed air. Unscrew the setscrew securing the intake strainer Fit a new rubber 'O' ring to the intake pipe and ·and pipe assembly to the transmission; remove the lubricate the ·o· ring with clean transmission fluid. strainer assembly {see fig. B5·24). Ensure that a new rubber seal is fitted to the pipe bore in the new intake strainer, then fit the intake pipe to the strainer. Fit the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the transmission and torque tighten the securing setscrew to 14 Nm {1.4 kgf m, 10 lbf ft). Fit the transmission sump using a new gasket and torque tighten the sump setscrews to 1 6 Nm ( 1. 7 kgf m, 12 lbf ft). Fit the oil filler tube into the sump and tighten the nut. Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip to the engine. Add 4.5 litres (8 Imp pt, 9.6 US pt) of an approved fluid to the sump, pouring the fluid down the filler tube, then follow the fluid level checking procedure described under Check the transmission fluid level. Fig. B5·24 Transmission intake strainer removal 4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod lubricate the clevis pins in the control rod linkage at the left-hand side of the transmission, with a few drops of clean engine oil. Also lubricate the manual shaft where it enters the transmission casing.

2 Renew the final drive oil Fig. B5·25 Final drive drain and filler/level points It is advisable to carry out this operation when the oil is warm, e.g. immediately after the car has completed a run. Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and clean the area around the drain and level plugs (see fig. B5·25). Place a container beneath the drain plug, then remove both the drain and level plugs, When the oil has drained, fit the drain plug complete with a new joint washer. Using a syringe, fill the casing to the level plug orifice with an approved oil; approximately 2.3 litres (4.0 Imp pt, 4.8 US pt) of oil will be required. Fit the level plug complete with a new joint washer and check for leaks.

3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint covers The drive-shaft constant velocity joints are enclosed by Fig. BS-26 Steering pump filler/dipstick convoluted seals which retain the joint lubricant If

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5 85-17

upon inspection a seal is found to be leaking or damaged the joint should be inspected and a new seal should be fitted as described in Chapter J of the Workshop Manual.

Steering system 1 Check the steering pump fluid level Remove the filler cap from the steering pump reseivoir and check that the fluid level is at least up to the FULL COLD mark on the integral dipstick. If necessary, top up to this level with approved fluid (see fig. B5·26). Start and run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. approximately 77°C (170°F). then stop the engine. Remove the filler cap and check the fluid level in .the reservoir. If necessary, add an approved fluid to raise the level to the FULL HOT mark on the dipstick; Fig. 85-27 Front suspension ball joints do not overfill. Ensure that the filler cap is securely replaced.

2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints {if applicable) If grease nipples are fitted to the ball joints at the ends of the track rods, they should be lubricated until a slight swelling of the joint seal is evident Take care not to damage or displace the seals.

3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers Examine the condition of the rubber cover seals on the ball joints. If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition new parts should be fitted as necessary. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.·

4 Check the condition of the steering rack

convoluted seals 1'11110 Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the rack and pinion unit and check the tightness of the seal clips. Fig. B5-28 Rear suspension strut If the seals are satisfactory, tighten the clips as necessary. If the convoluted seals are found to be damaged 2 Check the condition of the rear strut or in poor condition. the rack and pinion unit should be convoluted seals removed from the car and new seals fitted. For full Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop rear suspension struts (see fig. 85-28). Manual. If the seals are found to be damaged, or in poor condition. the struts should be removed, as described Suspension in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual, and new seals 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint fitted. covers The front suspension ball joints (see fig. 85·27) are 3 Lubricate the height controt valve ball joints packed with grease on initial assembly and should not Position th'e car on a ramp or over a pit. Disconnect normally require attention between service overhauls the actuation links from the height control valves and unless the rubber seal covers are damaged. rear suspension trailing arms at the ball joints (see fig. If on inspection the covers are found to be B5·29). Note from which side each link is taken. damaged or in poor condition, the ball joints should be Clean the ball joints then lubricate with an removed and new joints and seals fitted as necessary. approved grease. For full information refer to Chapter H of the Do not alter the length of -the actuation link. Workshop Manual. Connect the actuation link to the height control

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B5·18

valve and the trailing arm from which it was removed. fluids will occur on standing, due to the greater Adjust the joint to obtain complete movement density of the conventional fluids. A further indication without free play. of the mixing of conventional brake fluid and mineral oil is its cloudy appearance. To carry out contamination tests a kit is available Brake and hydraulic systems from Rolls-Royce Motors Limited, part number RH 2841 and should be used as follows. Switch on the ignition and depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until both low pressure warning panels illuminate. Continue to pump the pedal for at least a further 20 applications WARNI NG to ensure that all the accumulator mineral oil is returned to the reservoir. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to Clean the area around each hydraulic reservoir replenish the braking and levelling systems. filler cap and then remove the cap. !Do not use Brake Fluids {Castrol RR363, Ensure that the components in the test kit are Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of clean and dry. brake fluid, even in very small amounts. will cause Using the sampling tube provided, extract 50 ml component failure necessitating extensive rectification of mineral oil from the top and bottom of each to the braking and levelling systems of the car. reservoir. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, Place the samples into the individual clean dry pipes, etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil containers. system. For details of correct component identification Shake each sample taken to ensure it is well reference should be made to Chapter G of the mixed. Workshop Manual. Pour 10 ml of each sample into clean test tubes Always ensure that a sealed container of (do not mix the samples together). Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted Using the dispenser, add two drops of the red dye adjacent to the battery. solution contained in the kit into each 10 ml sample. Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the Cork the test tubes and shake them thoroughly. systems when work is being carried out. Leave the samples to settle for at least 30 minutes. Examine each sample. In order to protect against claims of liability for hydraulic system contamination. it is recommended Sample diagnosis that the hydraulic system mineral oil is tested for On adding the red dye solution and the subsequent contamination prior to work being undertaken, mixing. the green colour of the mineral oil will change preferably in the presence of the owner or his/her to a reddish brown. This does not indicate representative. contamination of the hydraulic system mineral oil. It is important that the test is carried out even Contamination can only be confirmed by the when the hydraulic system mineral oil is to be formation of a cloudy red mass which will begin to renewed as this will not prevent the deterioration of settle towards the bottom of the tube if left to stand components which have been in contact with for at least 30 minutes. contaminated mineral oil. If the sample in the test tube on addition of the Brake fluids and mineral oil are immiscible and dye turns red but remains clear it indicates that the with large amounts of contamination separation of the sample is not contaminated. The volume of red mass which will eventually settle to the bottom of the test tube indicates the amount of contamination within the hydraulic system mineral oil. Complete separation of the two liquids may take a considerable amount of time. for example a very small percentage of contamination may take more than seven days to completely separate. If contamination is suspected, a more thorough test can be undertaken, details of which are given in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. . If contamination is suspected, but ditticult to diagnose, due to the small amount of contaminant that may be present, or any doubt exists, confirmation should be obtained by sending a sample to Rolls· Fig. B5·29 Height control valve actuation link Royce Motors (if in the United Kingdom) or to a joints chemical analysis laboratory.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85 B5·19

Before attempting any work on a hydraulic system personnel must be fully conversant with the precautions required to ensure adequate safety and correct system operation. Refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Important Always seal each reservoir cap after it has been confirmed that the systems are not contaminated and all work on the systems has been completed.

1 Check the mineral oil level in the reservoirs The mineral oil reseivoirs for the hydraulic systems are located in the engine compartment (see fig. B5·30). To check the oil level, first depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until the two warning panels illuminate. Start and run the engine for approximately four minutes to charge the systems and then stop the engine. The mineral oil in both reservoirs should be up to the FULL marks on the level indicator plate. If the reservoirs require topping-up. ensure that the tops of the reservoirs and the filler caps are clean, then add an approved hydraulic system mineral oil (see Chapter A) as necessary. It is important that only app1·oved hydraulic system mineral oil is used and that exceptional cleanliness is observed when topping-up the hydraulic systems. Under no circumstances should a conventional (i.e. RR363 or Universal) type brake fluid be used. After topping-up ensure that the filler caps are clean, then fit them securely to the reservoirs or insert the blanking plug dependent upon the type of filler cap fitted. Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic System Mineral Oil for system replenishment, are fitted adjacent to the battery.

2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as follows. Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic systems by attaching a tube to each bleed point then opening the bleed screws and allowing the mineral oil Fig. B5-30 Access to the hydraulic systems to drain from the circuits. The bleed screws are located reservoirs on each accumulator, on each pair of brake calipers, on A Original filler cap the deceleration conscious pressure limiting valve and B Specialized filler cap on each rear suspension strut or each inner wing from the suspension strut. A drain tube is not required at the accumulator bleed screws as these are an integral levels in the reservoirs are slightly above the topping· part of the accumulators and when opened allow the up marks on the indicator plate. mineral oil to flow from the accumulator spheres back Aun the engine for four minutes, then top-up to to the reservoirs. the FULL level mark; never allow the mineral oil levels Drain the mineral oil from the reservoirs and clean to fall below the minimum level marks. the reservoirs as described in Chapter G of the Check for leaks, especially around the unions of Workshop Manual. any pipes which have been disturbed. After the system has completely drained, close all Finally, bleed the hydraulic systems as described the bleed screws and ensure that any disturbed pipes in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. are connected and correctly torque tightened. Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic Fill the reservoirs with fresh hydraulic system System Mineral Oil for system replenishment are mineral oil (see fig. B5-30 and Chapter A) until the fitted adjacent to the battery.

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 19~5 © Rons-Royce Motors Limited 1985 3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and check the condition of the hydraulic system pipes and hoses. Examine the metal pipes for signs of corrosion, particularly those in an exposed position. Examine the hoses for chafing or surface cracking. Faulty pipes and hoses should be replaced as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual.

4 Renew the accumulator to body. and trailing arms to body hoses Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as follows. Fit a hose clamp to each of the intermediate hoses Fig. 85-31 Hydraulic accumulator to body hoses of the accumulator return pipes to prevent the flow of mineral oil from the reservoirs. Thoroughly clean the areas around the connections of the two accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses (see figs. 85-31, and B5-32). Remove the respective hoses noting the following. To avoid contamination fit the new hose immediately after removing the old one; alternatively fit approved blanks to the open ports until the new hoses are fitted. Before fitting a new hose ensure that it is thoroughly clean and conforms with the hydraulic systems mineral oil requirements. When fitting the new hoses, ensure that they are routed to clear other components and that clearance is maintained during full suspension movement. Tighten the pipe nuts to the torque settings given fig. B5-32 Trailing arm to body hydraulic hoses in Chapter G of the Workshop .Manual. After fitting the new hoses, check for leaks and bleed the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual.

5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses To renew the hydraulic system hoses follow the same basic procedure described under the heading Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5 B5·21 pads, the disc faces should be cleaned prior to fitting the new pads. All traces of the old pad lining material should be removed by hand rotating the disc whilst applying course grade emery cloth to the disc faces. Do not emery the disc faces radially. Always ensure that the pads fitted to all six brake calipers have the same type and grade of pad lining. Fit the road wheels and lower the car. If new brake pads have been fitted, an initial running-in period of between 1100 kilometres and 1300 kilometres (700 miles and 800 miles} should be observed. During this running-in period the brakes should not be applied harshly or for prolonged periods from high speeds except in an emergency. Towards the end of the running-in period. the force with which the brakes are applied may be progressively increased.

7 Check the condition of the brake caliper d.ust excluders (when changing brake pads) The condition of the caliper dust seals should be checked whenever the brake pads are removed. Inspect the seals for signs of damage, heat hardening, or general deterioration and renew if necessary. When fitting new seals. ensure that the seal retaining clips are correctly located. Fig. 85·34 ParkinO brake rear cable adjustment point 8 Renew the brake caliper seals To renew the caliper piston seals it is necessary to remove the brake calipers from the car. Drive the car at approximately 48 km/h (30 For full instructions. refer to Chapter G of the mile/hi and apply the parking brake to bring the car to Workshop Manual. rest; it is important that this is done gently and progressively. The parking brake must not be applied 9 Check the parking brake pads for wear fully and no attempt should be made to lock the Secure!,;, chock the front wheels then raise the rear of wheels. This operation should be carried out nine the car. Place sill blocks under the rear body sills and times, allowing at least one minute to elapse between also support the rear trailing arms. Do not allow the stops to prevent the discs overheating. suspension struts to support the full suspension load. Finally adjust the caliper as described under the Remove the rear wheels and release the parking heading Adjust the parking brake. brake to the off position. Disconnect the caliper actuation rod from the 10 Adjust the parking brake caliper lever (see fig. B5·33). Ensure that the parking brake is in the off position. Unscrew and remove the caliper adjuster and Adjust the rear cables at the adjusters (see fig. collect the adjuster clicker plate. B5·34) so that the caliper operating levers return to Unhook the pad retention springs from each pad, their off-stops under the influence of their return noting the larger spring is fitted to the inner pad. springs with no appreciable slackness in the cables. Remove the pads from the caliper. Note Check the thickness of the lining material on each The cables must be adjusted so that the equalizer link pad. Pads which are worn to within 1,6 mm on the intermediate linkage {see fig. B5·34) lies at (0.062 in) or less of the steel backing plate should be right angles with the centre line of the car with the renewed. parking brake in the off position. To fit the pads, attach the retention springs then locate the pads into position and hook the springs To check the cable adjustment. adjust both rear onto the caliper. cables at the equalizer link until the caliper off·stops Complete the assembly by reversing the removal are just clear of the calipers. Measure the gap procedure. then adjust the calipers as described under produced at each off·stop and lengthen the cables by the heading Adjust the parking brake. this amount. Note With the cables correctly adjusted, check that the If new parking brake pads have been fitted. the centralizing straps {see fig. 85·33) are pushing the following bedding-in procedure should be carried out pads away from the discs when the parking brake is in after adjusting the parking brake. the off position. If not, remove the nut and bolt

TSD 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls·Royce Motors limited 1985 B5·22

securing the straps, bend the straps outward (i.e. away from the disc) then refit them. Ensure that the straps are pushed downward towards the adjusting nut whilst tightening the nut and bolt securing them to the caliper. Check that the distance between the pad and the ~0 disc are the same on each side of the caliper; if not ~ .::;;.. reset the centralizing straps. Raise each rear wheel in turn so that it is free to rotate and adjust each caliper as follows. Turn the caliper adjuster (see fig. B5·33) clock· wise until the pads just grip the disc; at this point it should only just be possible to rotate the road wheel by hand. Turn the adjuster anti-clockwise a quarter turn (i.e. three clicks on the nut) to obtain the minimum clearance between the pads and disc.

11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Lubricate the parking brake linkage clevis pins, fulcrum pins. and the rear cable adjusters with approved grease.

Y7 Fuel system Safety precautions Fig. B5-35 Main fuel filter It is important that whenever a fuel line is opened or the fuel tank drained, that the workshop safety precautions given in Chapter A of the Workshop Manual are strictly observed. 1 Renew the main filter element The main fuel filter; situated on the car body underframe, contains a disposable element. The following procedure should be carried out to renew the filter element (see fig. B5·35). Place a clean container beneath the filter to collect any fuel spillage. Remove the retaining bolt from the centre of the filter bowl. Separate the bowl from the filter head. Clean .the filter bowl using clean fuel. X470 Fit a new element and sealing rings by reversing the removal procedure noting the following. Fig. 85-36 lntank fuel fitter Do not overtighten the bowl securing bolt. After fitting the filter to the car, examine the fuel system for leakage and rectify as necessary. When carrying out the above operation at 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or four years and subsequent periods. the intank fuel filter situated on the underside of the fuel tank (see fig. 85·36) should also be removed and cleaned as follows. Disconnect the battery. Drain or siphon the fuel tank. Place a container beneath the intank filter to collect the residue of fuel from the tank when the filter is removed. Disconnect the hose from the intank filter outlet pipe. Remove the circlip retaining the filter and carefully withdraw the filter from the tank. Clean the filter mesh by washing it in clean fuel. Examine the filter for serviceability and renew if fig. B5-37 Fuel inlet filter necessary.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85 85-23

Fit the filter by reversing the removal procedure. Always use a new seal on the filter body. Ensure that the fuel drained from the fuel tank is free from foreign matter, then return it to the fuel tank. Check the fuel filter and the pipe connections that have been disconnected, for leaks.

2 Fit new paper filter elements to the carburetter fuel inlets Carry out this operation when the engine is cold. A paper filter element is fitted into the fuel intake filter housing on each carburetter. To renew a filter element proceed as follows. Remove the two screws from the top of the filter housing (see fig. B5·37). Using a% in UNF bolt screwed into the threaded Fig. 85-38 Fuel mixture weakening device filter hole in the plug. lift the plug from the housing. Withdraw the spring, retainer, and filter element Camargue from the housing; discard the filter element The battery is mounted on the right-hand side of the Fit the new filter element by reversing the removal luggage compartment To gain access to the battery procedure noting the following. turn back the carpet and remove the trim from around Ensure that the new filter element is fitted with its the battery, the trim is secured by two fasteners. open end towards the seating face in the housing. Unclip the battery cover retaining strap and lift off the Fit a new sealing ring to the sealing plug. cover. On completion check for any fuel leaks and rectify To check the specific gravity of the battery as necessary. electrolyte on these models, it is necessary to remove the battery from the car as follows. Ensure the ignition 3 Renew the fuel mixture weakening device is· switched off, then disconnect the battery leads. filter Remove the battery clamp and lift the battery from its The filter is situated on the left·hand valance of the cradle. engine compartment {see fig. 85·38). To remove the filter, disconnect the outlet hose Battery electrolyte check and then remove the two setscrews retaining the filter Applicable to batteries with removable cell vent assembly to the valance; discard the filter assembly. cover{s) Fit a new filter assembly by reversing the removal a. Electrolyte specific gravity check. procedure. Remove the vent covers from the top of the battery. Using a hydrometer check the specific gravity of the electrolyte in each cell and compare the readings 4 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel obtained with the following tables. tank hose; renew as necessary Caution To enable the filler head to fuel tank hose to be The electrolyte in the battery is a corrosive acid. Do not examined, it is necessary to remove the rear allow the electrolyte to come into contact with the suspension gas spring. For details of the procedure eyes, skin. fabric, or paintwork. Flush any contacted required reference should be made to Chapter U of the areas immediately and thoroughly with water. If the Workshop Manual. eyes are effected, flush for at least 1 5 minutes and obtain prompt medical attention. 5 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes Carefully examine all the flexible fuel pipes throughout Chloride battery the fuel system. Renew any pipes which have become damaged or deteriorated to an unserviceable condition. Air temperature below 32°C (90°F) Check the complete fuel system for leaks and rectify as necessary. Specific Gravity Condition of Battery 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged Electrical system 1. 18'0 to 1.200 Half discharged 1 Check the state of charge of the battery 1.090 to 1.110 Fully discharged Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, Corniche, and Continental. Air temperature above 32°C (90°F) The battery is situated in the luggage compartment stowage well. To gain access to the battery, turn back Specific Gravity Condition of Battery the carpet from the right-hand side of the luggage 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged compartment Lift out the stowage well lid and the 1.150 to 1.1 70 Half discharged cover from around the battery. 1.070 to 1.090 Fully discharged

TSD 4406

Lucas or Varta battery Voltage State of charge Air temperature below 21·c {SO"F) 12.8 100% 12.6 82% Specific Gravity Condition of Battery 12.5 75% 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged 12.4 60% 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged 1.090 to 1.110 Fully discharged 2 Clean and check the battery terminals Air temperature above 27"C (80°F) The top of the battery should always be kept clean and Specific Gravity Condition of Battery dry. 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged If corrosion of the battery leads or terminals has 1. 1 30 to 1 . 1 50 Half discharged occured it should be removed as follows. 1.050 to 1.070 Fully discharged Disconnect the battery leads and using hot water or a dilute solution of ammonia carbonate, wash them If the specific gravity reading of all the cells is thoroughly until all corrosion has been removed. uniform and within the range 1.240 to 1.270 the Finally wash with clean water to remove the ammonia battery is in an acceptable state of charge. If the carbonate solution. readings are uniform but below 1.220 the battery Remove any corrosive deposit from the terminal should be recharged. Always remove the battery from posts using a cloth moistened with ammonia the car for recharging. carbonate solution then wash with clean water. If the specific gravity of the electrolyte in one cell Dry the battery leads and terminal posts. Connect differs markedly from the others (i.e. the reading is the battery leads to the terminal posts. Liberally coat . ; 0.040 or more, lower than the remainder), then a the terminals with petroleum jelly. defect must be suspected and rectified as necessary. b. Electrolyte level check 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation Ensure that the battery is in a high state of charge (see Actuate the respective switches and check for lamp Electrolyte specific gravity check). illumination and function i.e. turn flashers. headlamp The level of the battery electrolyte on each cell dip/main beam, headlamp flash. When checking the should be approximately 5 mm (0.250 in) above the fog lamps the main lighting switch must be on. In the tops of the separators (Lucas or Varta battery) or Park position the front fog lamps (if fitted) must be contacting the blue bar situated above the separators switched on before the rear fog lamps will illuminate. (Chloride battery). When only the rear fog lamps are switched on If the electrolyte level is low top-up using distilled with the main lighting switch in the Head position, water until the level is attained. Do not overfill. these lamps will be extinguished when the headlamps Always ensure the top of the battery is clean prior are switched to main beam. If both front and rear fog to removal of the vent cover. lamps are in use the rear fog lamps will remain illuminated. Battery voltage check The respective facia tell·tales should also be Appl_icable to sealed for life (maintenance free) checked for illumination during these operations. batteries With the lighting switch in the Park and Head The state of charge of a 'sealed for life' battery can positions, switch on the ignition. Check the facia only be checked by taking a voltage reading at the instruments for illumination; the panel illumination battery terminals. using either a digital voltmeter or dimming switch should also be checked for correct multimeter. The instrument used must be accurate to operation. within 0.1 volts. Before a voltage reading is taken on batteries that 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation have recently received a charge. the residual effects of Before carrying out the following checks firmly apply the surface charge on the battery plates must be the parking brake; ensure the gear range selector is in removed to avoid a false reading. This surface charge the Park position and remove the gear range selector isolator from the fuseboard. · can be removed by applying an electrical load to the battery {e.g. by either connecting a high rate discharge Ignition and oil warning lamps tester for 1 5 seconds or if the battery is fitted to a car, Turn the ignition key to the RUN position, the ignition· switching on the headlamps for one minute). and oil pressure warning lamps should illuminate. Start Afterwards, allow the battery to stand for a further one the engine, both lamps should extinguish; switch off minute before a voltage reading is taken. the ignition. · A minimum reading of 12.5 volts (corresponding When the ignition key is turned to the ACC position to 75% charge) is acceptable. Below this reading the the ignition warning lamp only should illuminate. battery should be recharged. Instructions for charging are provided on the battery label. Warning panel ctuster lamps Compare the reading obtained with the following Move the gear range selector lever to the D position table to ascertain the state of charge (do not insert the gear range selector isolator).

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85 B5·26

Apply the footbrake then turn the ignition key to mirror illumination, move the switch to the mirror the start position. All warning panel cluster lamps position. Lower the passenger's sun visor; the lamp should illuminate. With the ignition held in the start situated above the visor should illuminate. position, turn the main lighting switch to the Park and Withdraw the visor from its retaining clip: the Head positions; the intensity of illumination of the ice lamp should extinguish. The lamp should also and low f_uel warning panels should reduce. Switch off extinguish when the visor is moved to its raised the ignition and lighting switch. position, even when the switch is on. The hydraulic system warning lamps situated at The operation of the rear roof lamps should be the top of the warning panel cluster should also be checked by operating the switches situated on the rear checked as follows. compartment vanity mirror surrounds. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Press the upper portion of the three position Depressurize the hydraulic systems by actuating switch; the front section of the respective roof lamp the brake pedal between 50 and 60 times. The two should illuminate. Press the lower portion of the brake pressure warning panels should illuminate. switch and the rear section of both rear roof lamps When the lamps have illuminated start and run should illuminate. With the switch in the central , the engine. Both lamps should extinguish after position both lamps should be off. Repeat the approximately two minutes indicating that the operation on the opposite side of the car. hydraulic systems are pressurized. Switch off the On Camargue cars press the outer of the two ignition. switches situated in the arm rest; this should illuminate the rear section of both rear roof lamps. Fasten seat belt warning lamp Pressing the inner switch should illuminate the front To check the seat belt warning lamp, open and close section of the respective roof lamps. Repeat the each door in turn; observe the lamp operation. operation on the opposite side of the car. The seat belt warning panel should illuminate whenever a door is opened and extinguish Convertible cars approximately seven seconds after the door is closed. Seven interior lamps are provided, one in each door, Note two in the hood above the rear window, one in the All doors must be fully closed for the lamp to front face of each rear seat outer arm rest, and one extinguish (i.e. not on first catch). above the facia stowage compartment Open the driver's door; both roof lamps, the lamp Hazard warning indicator in each rear arm rest and the lamp in each door should Depress the hazard warning switch, check that all the illuminate. Fully close the door, the lamps should all turn indicators and the facia warning. lamp are flashing. extinguish, except the rear roof lamps which should remain illuminated for approximately seven seconds. 5 Check all interior lamps for operation Repeat this procedure with the passenger door. Ensure all the doors are fully closed and the interior Withdraw the main lighting switch; both rear roof lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the lamps should illuminate. rear section of the central roof lamps should illuminate. Operate the facia switch marked MAP; the lamp Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain situated above the facia stowage compartment should illuminated for approximately seven seconds. illuminate. On 1985/86 model year cars the rear roof lamps With the doors closed. operate the switches and footwell lamps should also illuminate when the situated in the end of the arm rest. The rear roof lamp door is opened. If the gear selector lever is moved and rear compartment arm rest lamp situated on the from the Park position on these cars, with the ignition same side of the car as the switch should illuminate. key in the RUN µosition, the lamps will extinguish immediately all the doors are closed. When carrying 6 Check the horns for operation out this operation also check that the door open Examine the electrical connections to each horn to warning lamp and step lamp are illuminated with the ensure they are in good condition. Clean the horns and door in the open position. These lamps should remove any foreign matter that may have collected in extinguish immediately the door is fully closed. the horn trumpets. Repeat the check on the remaining door(s). Switch on the ignition; press the horn button Note several times to ensure the horn button is making a If the doors are only closed to the first catch position good contact and that both horns are functioning the lamps should remain illuminated. correctly each time it is pressed.

Check the operation of the front compartment 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp personal lamps as follows. washers reservoirs Withdraw the main lighting switch; the front Windscreen washer reservoir section of the driver's roof lamp should illuminate. The filler is located in the engine compartment. Operate the map lamp switch. the front section of Remove the filler cap and add the correct mixture of the front passenger's roof lamp should illuminate. windscreen washer fluid and distilled water to the On 1985/86 model year cars fitted with vanity reservoir until the maximum level is attained.

TSO 4406

Topping-up level - bottom of the filler neck. operate and the fluid from the washer jet should Headlamp washer reservoir impinge on the windscreen approximately 419 mm On .1985 model year Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, ( 1 6.5 in} from the centre line of the windscreen and Mulsanne, and Bentley Eight cars a headlamp washer 190 mm (7.5 in} below the windscreen t~p finisher. system is fitted. The reservoir is housed under the The wash/wipe function should continue until the front right-hand wing and the filler is located in the switch is released. engine companment towards the front of the car. On release of the push button switch the washer The reservoir should be topped-up with clean should cease while the wipers should continue for water until the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler approximately four strokes before returning to the park neck. position. During winter conditions, a solution of 30% Turn the main lighting switch to the HEAD isopropyl alchohol and 70% water should be used. position. The headlamps cleaning function will only This mixture will provide frost protection down th a operate when the headlamps are illuminated. Press the temperature of approximately -1 o•c (14 °F). wash/wipe switch, the power wash jets should only operate for half a second when the wash/wipe switch 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper is depressed. To repeat the wash it will be necessary blades and headlamp wash brushes (if fitted) to release and then depress the switch again. Lift the wiper arms from the windscreen and inspect The headlamp brushes and washer jets should them for wear or damage. Renew the blades if operate until the switch is released, the brush giving necessary. one full wipe cycle after the jet flow has ceased. To remove a blade, lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen then press the small tab situated in the 1 0 Check the alternator for correct operation ) end of the arm to release the blade retaining catch. For details of the alternator test procedure and brush Pull the blade from the arm and fit the new blade. renewal, reference should be made to Chapter M of Check that the new blade is secured by the retaining the Workshop Manual. catch then return the blade to the windscreen. On late Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, Mulsanne, and 11 Check the condition of the starter motor Bentley Eight cars the wiper blade re~oval procedure brushes and pinion is as follows. For details of the procedure required to carry out the a. Driver's side of the windscreen. Lift the wiper arm inspection of the starter motor brushes and pinion, from the windscreen. Push half of the blade away from reference should be made ot Chapter M of the the arm, until the blade is released from its location Workshop Manual. clip. To fit the new blade, position it on the wiper arm and press it firmly into the location clip. Automatic air conditioning system b. On the passenger's side of the windscreen, lift the 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from wiper arm from the windscreen and pivot the blade obstruction. backwards through 180°. Press the small release tag, Check the air intake grilles and foam filter, situated situated on the underside of the blade pivot block and behind the bonnet, for obstruction (leaves, dirt, etc.). push the blade out of the crooked end ot the wiper Carefully remove the grille retaining screws, lift the arm. Withdraw the wiper blade from the arm. Fit the grilles and filters from the body and clean all parts new blade by reversing the removal procedure. including the air intake ducts; also ensure the air Note intake duct drain tubes are free from obstruction. Care must be taken during these operations to ensure that the wiper arm is not allowed to spring back onto 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct the windscreen when ~he blade has been removed. operation otherwise damage to the windscreen could occur. For details of the procedure required to carry out this operation reference should be made to Chapter C of On Corniche, Continental. and Camargue cars the Workshop Manual. fitted with headlamp wash/wipe brushes, examine the brushes for wear or damage and renew if necessary. Body To renew a brush, carefully remove the retaining 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat nut from the spindle. Note the position of the brush belts then withdraw it from the splined spindle. Fit the new The following checks should be carried out on the br.ush by reversing the removal procedure ensuring front and rear retractable seat belts. that the brush is in the correct park position. Fully withdraw the seat belt from the reel; examine the webbing for any signs of wear or damage. 9 Check the windscreen wash/wipe and Allow the belt to return to the stowed position. headlamps power wash/wipe for correct operation To check the operation of the retractable belt fit Before carrying out the following check ensure that the the belt and then give the webbing of the diagonal belt windscreen is clean. a sharp pull. Ensure that the belt locks and then Switch on the ignition and press the windscreen returns to the normal roller action immediately the belt wash/wipe switch. The windscreen wipers should is released.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85 85-27

With the fastening tongue of the belt locked in the retaining clasp; ensure the tongue is securely held and is released immediately the release button marked PRESS is operated. The alternative method of checking the seat belts is to select an open stretch of road. then. when the road is free from any potential danger, accelerate the car to 24 km/h (15 .mile/h) and brake 'sharply from this speed; ensure that the belt locks and then subsequently releases. If this method of test is used, it will be necessary to carry a passenger(s) to enable the passenger seat belts to be tested. Check the rear seat l~p belt for condition and correct locking and release. Report any defects to the Owner. When seat belt replacement is necessary only belts approved by Rolls-Royce Motors Limited should Fig. B5-39 Power operated hood reservoir ~~~ .

2 Check that all body drains are free from If necessary top-up the reservoir with an approved obstruction fluid. Under no circumstances must a caster oil Examine the body drain holes; remove any foreign matter that may be obstructing the holes. Take care based fluid be used. not to damage the paintwork. Wheels 3 lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt 1 Check all tyre pressures Turn back the carpet on the luggage compartment Check the tyre pressures including the spare when the floor to .expose the spare wheel inflation trap and spare tyres are cold; adjust if necessary. The inflation wheel carrier lowering bolt head. Remove the inflation pressure of the spare tyre should be adjusted to the trap cover; if a spare wheel retainer is fitted, it should highest tyre pressure {i.e. rear wheel). be released. Do not check the pressures when the tyres are Rotate the s·pare wheel bolt anti-clockwise until warm (e.g. after the vehicle has run}. the carrier is fully lowered. Remove the spare wheel Always ensure that the valve caps are fitted after from the carrier. checking. · Lubricate the carrier lowering bolt using a recommended lubricant. Raise and lower the carrier to 2 Check the condition and tread depth of the distribute the lubricant over the full length of the tyres carrier bolt. Examine the tyres, including the spare, for any signs of Check the condition of the spare wheel as damage or tyre wall cracking, etc. described under the heading Wheels. Carefully remove any stones or other objects that Fit the spare wheel onto the carrier. Ensure that may be lodged in the tyre treads. the inflation valve is in line with the inflation trap in Check the depth of tread at several points around the luggage compartment floor, then fully raise the each wheel using a tread depth gauge. carrier. To enable a visual check to be made, tread depth Fasten the spare wheel retainer(if fitted}, and fit indicators are incorporated into the tyre construction. the tyre inflation trap rubber and carpet. These indicators are integral moulded ribs. spaced at intervals around the circumference of the tyre. and 4 Check the fluid level in the power operated extend across the full width of the tread in all primary hood reservoir grooves. When one or more of these indicators are Convertible cars flush with the tread. only 1.6 mm (1/,e in) or less of The level of the fluid in the hydraulic pump reservoir tread depth remains, and a new tyre is required. must be checked with the hood in the fully open If the condition of the tyres is not satisfactory or (down} position. tread depths do not conform to the legal requirements The fluid reservoir is situated adjacent to the of the country in which the car is operating, the owner stowage recess below the luggage compartment floor should be notified and asked to authorize the fitting of similar to that :~hown in figure 85-39. new tyres. To gain access to the reservoir, turn back the For full information on tyre fitting. balancing, etc .• carpet on the right-hand side of the luggage reference should be made to Chapter R of the compartment to expose the recess covers; remove the Workshop Manual. covers. Unscrew the reservoir filler cap and check the Test fluid level. The correct level is 25 mm (1.0 in) below 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance the filler neck. On completion of the respective service schedule

TSO 4406

Printed in England July 1985 © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1985 B5·28 operations, carefully road test the car for satisfactory performance. If new brake pads have been fitted, the running-in and bedding procedures should be carried out as described under, Check the brake disc pads for wear and Check the parking brake pads for wear. When the road test has been completed, the car should be fully inspected for any leaks, fouls, etc., and rectified as necessary. The transmission fluid level, should be finally checked immediately after the test, while the fluid is at normal running temperature and topped-up if necessary (see Check the transmission fluid level). Ensure that all controls, door handles, steering wheel. etc., are clean and that any dirt which may be attributed to the service schedule is completely removed.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5/1 B5/ 1·1

Service schedule procedures Cars conforming to Middle East Countries specifications

Contents Pages Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1985 model year cars. 85/1·3 1986 model year cars B5/1 ·3

TSO 4406

Service schedule procedures 1985 model year cars

WARNING

Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363. Universal. or any other type}. The use of any type of brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause component failure necessitating extensive rectification to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, pipes. etc.• that they are suitable for a mineral oil system. For details of correct component identification reference should be made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Always ensure that a sealed container of Fig. B5/1·1 Crankcase breather tube flame trap Hydraulic System Mineral Oil ( LHM) is fitted adjacent to the,battery. Windscreen and headlamp washer reservoirs Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the Weekly; check the washer fluid level; top-up if systems when work is being carried. out. necessary.

General information Hydraulic reservoirs The information contained in this chapter should be Monthly; check the level of hydraulic mineral oil in the used in conjunction with the service schedule chart reservoirs. (see Chapter G) and Workshop Manual publication Depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping number TSO 4400. ' the brake pedal until the low brake pressure warning panels on the facia illuminate. Continue to pump the Car protection pedal for at least a further 20 applications to ensure Prior to commencing a service schedule the car should complete depressurization. Start and run the engine be suitably protected. for this purpose car protection for four minutes with the car unladen, prior to kit AH 2662, wing covers RH 2684, and wing cover checking the level. Top-up if necessary to the indicated liners RH 2685 should be used. maximum level. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM). Refer to page B1/1 ·16 for further Regular maintenance information before cariying out this operation. In addition to the service schedules listed, the following maintenance should be carried out. Engine cooling system Every three months; check the coolant level. .If Engine necessary top-up with the correct anti-freeze/water Weekly or every 800 kilometres (500 miles) mixture {see page B5/1 ·8). whichever is the earlier; check the engine oil by means of the dipstick; top-up if necessary. Crankcase emission control system 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame trap Lamp units The engine crankcase is ventilated through a breather Weekly; check the lamp units for operation; rectify any tube connected to the air du.mp (recirculation) pipe. faults. A flame trap in the form of filter gauze is fitted into the system at the rear of 'A' bank cylinder head Tyre pressures (see fig. B5/1 ·1) and should be cleaned as follows. Weekly; check the tyre pressures including the spare; Withdraw the windscreen wiper motor relay adjust if necessary. {wiper 3) (see fig. B5/1 • 17, item A) situated on a

TSO 4406

bracket adjacent to the windscreen washer reservoir. Remove the remaining setscrew from the housing Remove the cover from the windscreen wiper cover. This setscrew also secures the ignition harness drive mechanism to gain access to the crankcase clamp. Carefully remove the housing cover and hose. breather connection. Remove the circlip retaining the filter gauze Disconnect the breather hose from the connection situated on the underside of the housing cover. on the air dump pipe. Remove the filter gauze and washer. Remove the setscrews securing the speed control Thoroughly clean the gauze with a suitable bellows or actuator mounting bracket, dependent on cleaning solvent and dry using compressed air. the type fitted, to the crankcase breather/flame trap Ensure that the breather pipe, housing, and cover housing. Move the bellows or actuator away from the are also clean. housing. Fit the filter gauze, housing cover, and speed control bellows or actuator by reversing the removal procedure.

Fuel evaporative emission control system 1 Renew the evaporative emission control canister Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Locate the control canister under the left-hand front wing {see fig. 85/1-2). Using the special pliers RH 8090 remove the securing clip from the canister end of the fuel tank to canister flexible hose. Withdraw the hoses fitted to the control canister. Label each one to facilitate assembly. Unscrew the four setscrews retaining the control canister in position (see fig. BS/1-2). Support the weight of the canister before the last setscrew is Fig. 85/1 -2 Fuel evaporative emission control removed. Collect the washer fitted under the head of canister and mounting bracket each setscrew. setscrews Withdraw the control canister from under the wing. Note the position of the control canister in relation , to the mounting bracket and unscrew the retaining worm drive clip. Fit the new canister to the mounting bracket and tighten the retaining worm drive clip. Ensure that the canister is in the correct position relative to the mounting bracket Fit the assembly to the vehicle by reversing the procedure given for removal, noting that new hose securing clips should be used.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5/1 85/1·5

exits f.rom the body adjacent to the left-hand rear road spring and follow the system to the control canister. Ensure that the hoses are secure in the mounting clips. When the system is satisfactory, detach the test equipment and connect the hose to the control canister. Secure the hose with a new clip.

3 Check the purge flow rate Carry out the usual workshop safety precautions. Remove the retaining clip from the purge line restrictor hose. Disconnect the hose at the purge line restrictor. Leave the restrictor in the hose to the engine (see fig. 85/1 ·4). Connect a rotarneter assembly RH 8725 into the line. between the restrictor and the open pipe to the valance connection. Connect an impulse tachometer to the engine in accordance with the manufacture(s instructions. Start and run the engine at 650 rev/min; there should be negligible purge flow shown on the meter. Raise the engine speed to 1000 rev/min and note the flow reading on the rotameter. this should be between 50 ft3/h and 70 ft3/h. Fig. B5/1·4 Checking the purge flow rate If the purge flow rate is outside the limits 1 Purge line restrictor specified, refer to the Workshop Manual TSO 4400, 2 Hose to engine Chapter U. 3 Hose from canister

Engine 1 Change the engine oil The sump should be drained when the engine is warm, preferably after the car has completed a run. To drain th~ oil, position the car over a pit or on a ramp. Place a container in position beneath the drain plug situated on the right-hand side of the sump (see fig. 85/1-5}. Remove the drain plug and allow the oil to drain from the sump. Do not flush the sump with paraffin or petrol. Fit the drain plug ensuring that the washer is correctly positioned and in good condition. Fill the engine sump with recommended lubricant until the MAX level is reached on the dipstick. Carry out the full oil level check procedure as described under Check the engine oil level.

2 Renew the engine oil filter Drain the engine oil as described under Change the engine oil. Fig. B5/1-5 Engine sump drain plug Place a c~,ntainer under the filter to collect any oil that may be spilt. Remove the filter by unscrewing it from the level is reached on the dipstick. Run the engine and engine in an anti-clockwise direction (see fig. 85/1 ·6). check the filter joint for leakage. Thoroughly clean the fil~er seating face on the Carry out the full oil level ~heck procedure as engine. described under Check the engine oil level. Lightly smear the rubber sealing ring on the new filter with clean engine oil. Check the engine oil level Screw the filter onto the pedestal until the rubber In order to obtain an accurate indication of the oil level. seal contacts the sealing face, then tighten the filter a ensure that the car is standing on level ground. Check further half turn: do not overtighten. the oil level by means of the dipstick marked ENGINE Fill the engine with clean engine oil until the MAX (see fig. 85/1-7).

TSD 4406

It is recommended that the oil level is checked when the engine is cold. If the engine has been running, sufficient time should elapse after it has stopped to allow the oil to drain into the sump. Do not check the oil level with the engine running. To replenish the sump with oil, open the filler cap marked ENGINE (see fig. B5/1-7). Add clean oil to the engine and after allowing sufficient time for the oil to reach the sump, check that the oil is up to the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill. Important The engine lubrication system incorporates a thermostatically controlled oil cooler, therefore if the oil has been drained from the engine the following additional procedure must be carried out to ensure the correct oil level is obtained. Carry out the normal topping-up procedure as described previously to obtain the maximum oil level reading on the dipstick. Drive the car allowing the turbocharger to come into operation, thus enabling the engine oil to attain the temperature required to actuate the oil cooler Fig. 85/1 ·6 Engine oil filter location thermostat. To ascertain that the thermostat has actuated, a rise in the temperature of the oil cooler return pipe (see fig. B5/1·8) can be felt. This temperature rise occurs as hot oil begins to flow from the oil filter housing, where the thermostat is situated. to the oil cooler mounted in front of the coolant radiator matrix. Do not attempt to attain the required engine oil temperature rise with the car stationary. When it has been ascertained that the engine oil has been passing through the cooler, thus filling this part of the lubrication system, check the oil level in the normal manner as described previously.

3 Check the drive belts Before commencing to adjust the drive belts inspect them for signs of wear or cracking. Any belts found unsatisfactory should be renewed. If after adjustment, a matched pair of belts have a marked variation in tension. a new pair should be fitted. Always renew both belts in a matched pair, even Fig. 85/1 • 7 Engine oil filler and dipstick if only one belt is faulty. Two belt tension loads are specified; a new belt load for replacement (new) belts and a retensioning load for belts which are satisfactory for further service. The belt tension must be checked at a point midway between two pulleys by use of a belt tension meter. Belt dressing must not be applied to prevent belt slip.

Crankshaft to coolant pump/steering pump The belt tension meter reading should be as follows. New belt 36,3 kgf to 40,8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf), Retensioned belt 31, 7 kgf to 36,3 kgf ( 70 lbf to 80 lbf). The tension of this matched pair of belts is adjusted by altering the position of the steering pump. Slacken the setscrew securing the steering pump Fig. 85/1 ·8 Engine oil cooler return pipe mounting bracket pivot and the clamping setscrew on

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5/1 85/1-7

the belt tensioner situated below the steering pump (see fig. BS/1 ·9). Carefully adjust the tensioner until the correct belt tension is attained. When the belt tension is correct, tighten the tensioner clamp and mounting bracket pivot setscrews. If the alternator belt is to be adjusted the mounting bracket pivot setscrew can remain slack until adjustment has been carried out. Ensure the belt tension is still correct when the steering pump is fully secured.

Crankshaft to coolant pump/alternator The belt tension meter reading should be as follows. New belt 36,3 kgf to 40,8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf). Retensioned belt 31. 7 kgf to 36,3 kgf ( 70 lbf to 80 lbf}. The belt tension is adjusted by altering the position of alternator. Slacken the alternator mounting setscrew and the clamping setscrew on the belt tensioner situated above the alternator (see fig. B5/1-9). Carefully adjust the tensioner until the correct belt tension is attained. Fig. 85/1 ·9 Engine drive belt adjustment points When the belt tension is correct, tighten the belt Inset· Refrigeration compressor rear tensioner clamping setscrew and alternator mounting pivot setscrew. Ensure the belt tension is still correct when the alternator is fully secured.

Crankshaft to refrigeration compressor The belt tension meter reading shoutd be as follows, New belt 36,3 kgf to 40,8 kgf (80 lbf to 90 lbf). Retensioned belt 31, 7 kgf to 36,3 kgf (70 lbf to 80 lbf). The belt tension is adjusted by altering the position of the refrigeration compressor. Slacken the compressor pivot bolts at the front and rear of the compressor and the belt tensioner clamping setscrew (see fig. 85/1-9). Carefully adjust the tensioner until the correct belt tension is attained. When the belt tension is correct. tighten the belt tensioner clamping setscrew and the compressor pivot bolts. Ensure the belt tension is still correct when the compressor is fully secured. Fig. 85/1·10 Engine air intake filter (Air intake trunk disconnected) 4 Renew the air filter element The air filter element is situated in the air intake housing at the front right-hand side of the engine three toggle clips securing the housing to the valance. compartment (see fig. 85/1-10). Carefully free the joint, then move the housing To gain access to the element. unfasten the two towards the engine and withdraw the housing filter toggle clips retaining the air intake trunk to the element from the car. housing. · Remove the filter element from the housing. Carefully free the joint and move the trunk away It should be noted that the design of the air intake from the housing. filter is such that dirt and foreign matter will be Unscrew the worm drive clip securing the collected on the inside of the filter element. turbocharger intake trunk to the air intake housing. Ensure that the inside of the air cleaner housing Detach the trunk. (both the section removed and the fixed section in the Support the air intake housing and release the valance) is clean.

TSD 4406

Inspect the joint seals for serviceability. Renew if 5 Check the choke idle speed necessary. For full details of choke fast-idle settings reference Fit the new filter element as follows. should be made to Chapter K of the Workshop Manual. locate the large end of the new filter element onto the locating spigot on the inside of the removable 6 Renew the sparking plugs half of the housing. Sparking plug type NGK BPR 5 ES or Champion Carefully position the housing and filter onto the RN 11 YC valance allowing the filter to pass into the valance Plug gap setting 0.76 mm (0.030 in) mounting section of the housing. Locate the small Before removing the sparking plugs the (blank) end of the filter into the spigot in the valance surrounding area should be thoroughly cleaned to housing. Align the three housing toggle clips with their prevent the ingress of foreign matter when the plugs respective securing points. Special care should be are removed. taken during these operations to ensure that the paper Fit the new plugs ensuring that the gaps are element is not damaged during insertion. correctly set and that each plug is fitted with a sealing Ensure that the filter is correctly positioned on the washer. Torque tighten each plug to between 18 Nm location spigots, then secure the three toggle clips. It and 23 Nm (1.8 kgf m and 2.3 kgf m. 13 lbf ft and is essential that the fitter is correctly located on the 17 lbf ft}. spigots before the toggle clips are fastened down. otherwise there is a serious risk of crushing the filter 7 Lubricate the accelerator and carburetter element linkage Fit the remaining components by reversing the Lubricate all the accelerator and carburetter linkage removal procedure. ball joints. pivots, and clevis pins. Examine the ball joints for wear and adjust if necessary. Renew any worn clevis pins. Examine the linkage for correct operation. For details of linkage setting procedures reference should

Pints Litres. be made to Chapter K of the Workshop Manual. (Imp. 8 Check the ignition timing For details of the ignition timing settings and procedures reference should be made to Chapter K of the Workshop Manual.

9 Check the engine idle speed For full details of carburetter settings reference should be made to Chapter K of the Workshop Manual.

Engine cooling system 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration The cooling system is filled initially with a coolant solution comprising equal parts of UT184 (BP· Hythe Chemicals) or Prestone JI and water. This mixture gives frost protection down to a temperature of -37°C (-35°F). The coolant should contain fifty percent of an ,.s approved anti-freeze at all times. This not only l+--1--1~~4-~-l-~-+~I OS provides frost protection but also prevents corrosion of 05 ,a ~o · 30 ZS -20 ,16 .,o the coolant passages and raises the boiling s(; ;o, , 4 0 20 .,o 0 10 I 20 temperature of the coolant. ' 30 I ' 1 s's" s·o,. 4'5lo; 40lo. 3's% :io" is'-' io" .... The anti-freeze concentration should be checked C in both the expansion bottle and the radiator. If the strength of the coolant requires increasing, Fig. B5/1 ·11 Anti-freeze correction chart to give sufficient coolant should be drained from the radiator a 50% solution and replaced with undiluted anti-freeze (see fig. A Acceptable service range of B5/1 • 11 ). Afterwards run the engine until normal concentration operating temperature is attained and the anti-freeze 8 Freezing point of coolant has become thoroughly mixed with the coolant Stop C Percentage concentration the engine and again check the concentration in the D Volume of 1 00% anti-freeze to be radiator. added to maintain a 50% solution An acceptable level of anti-freeze concentration is after removal of the same volume of between 45% and 50%. Therefore. as a hydrometer old coolant may be inaccurate where readings above 40% are

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5/1 85/1·9 expected. it is recommended that a refractometer is used. For details refer to Chapter L of the Workshop Manual. If a refractometer is not available. and a hydrometer has to be used, a scale reading of between 1,06 and 1,07 should be obtained. with the coolant at room temperature for the mixture to be correct.

2 Check the coolant level Warning The cooling system becomes pressuri~ed during engine running, therefore, extreme care should be taken when removing the radiator cap from a warm or hot radiator.

Routine check To check the level outside a normal service schedule (e.g. Regular maintenance) and when no cooling/ heating system fault is reported or suspected, proceed as follows. If the engine is hot ensure that the coolant level in the translucent expansion bottle is at the MAX Fig. B5/1-12 Coolant expansion bottle mark. Top-up if necessary and replace the expansion bottle cap. If the engine is cold ensure that the coolant level procedure. If however the coolant is not visible or a in the translucent expansion bottle is half-way between coolant/heating system leak is reported or suspected, the MIN and MAX marks. Top-up if necessary and the system should have any faults rectified and then replace the expansion bottle cap. be pressure tested prior to carrying out the topping-up 'If the coolant level in the expansion bottle is either procedure. below the MIN mark or there is no coolant in the Top-up the radiator until the coolant is half-way up expansion bottle, carry out the following Full check the filler neck. procedure. Start and run the eng'ine. Turn the air conditioning system function control Full check fully clockwise to the defrost position. Ensure the gear range selector is in the Park position Set the air conditioning system override switch to and apply the parking brake. the AUTO position. Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the Allow at least o·ne minute for the air conditioning fuseboard. system to stabilize. then check to ensure that all air is Check the coolant level in the translucent expansion being directed towards the windscreen (i.e. no air is bottle (see fig. B5/1-12). If the level is low or the bottle delivered from the lower system and the facia outlets). is empty. add coolant to bring the level up to the MIN This procedure opens the heater system water tap. mark. Run the engine. without the radiator pressure cap Ensure that the engine is not hot (to allow safe fitted. until normal operating temperature is attained. removal of the radiator cap). Top-up the coolant level in the radiator during this Remove the radiator cap in three stages as time. follows. Switch off the engine. Turn the cap slowly anti-clockwise until a check Fit the radiator pressure cap by pressing it firmly position is reached. Wait until any pressure in the down and turning it fully clockwise. system has been released. Press down on the cap and Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in continue to turn it anti-clockwise until the cap is accordance with the Routine check procedure. released. Check the coolant level in the radiator. This should 3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness be half-way up the filler neck. Examine all the coolant hose connections for signs of If the coolant level in the radiator is correct. fit the leakage, and check the worm drive clips for tightness. radiator cap by pressing it firmly down and turning it Never overtighten a clip in an attempt to seal a leaking fully clockwise. connection. Top-up the coolant level in the expansion bottle in In the event of a hose connection leaking when accordance with the Routine check procedure. the worm drive clips have been tightened. drain the If the coolant level in the radiator is low but visible cooling system to a level below the leaking hose. and no cooling/heating system fault is reported or Remove and inspect the hose and its connecting suspected top-up the system using the following component for signs of damage. If necessary renew

TSO 4406

the faulty component and refill the system with coolant as described in Renew the coolant

4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses Inspect all coolant hoses for signs of deterioration, cracking, weak spots, etc. Any faulty hose should be removed and a new hose fitted. When renewing a hose always ensure that it does not foul other components and that it is not kinked so as to cause complete or partial restriction of the coolant flow.

5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose Drain the coolant system as described in Renew the coolant. but do not remove the engine crankcase drain plugs. Disconnect the heater tap feed hose from the engine and heater tap (see fig. 85/1-13); remove the hose. Fit the new hose; ensure that the hose is free from any sharp bends that may restrict coolant flow. Fill the engine coolant system as described in Fig. B5/1·13 Heater tap feed hose Renew the coolant. Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the gear range selector lever is in the Park position. Remove the gear range selector cut-out from the fuseboard. Start and run the engine; check the coolant hose for leaks. Switch off the ignition and fit the gear range selector cut·out.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5 B5/1-11 and allow the residue of coolant to drain from the crankcase. Renew the washers on the drain plugs and fit the plugs into the crankcase. To drain the coolant remaining in the expansion bottle disconnect the connection hose from the radiator filler neck and allow the coolant to drain from the expansion bottle into the container. When the coolant has drained connect the hose to the radiator filler neck. Check all hoses for seiviceability and renew as necessary. Fill the system with fresh coolant of the specified concentration as follows. Ensure the radiator drain tap is closed. Slowly fill the radiator with coolant, thus reducing the possibility of air locks in the system. Start and run the engine for a minimum of 10 minutes with the radiator pressure cap removed. After running for five minutes ensure that warm air is passing up the windscreen from the demister ducts. Top-up the radiator as necessary to ensure there is always coolant in the top tank of the radiator. Ensure that the thermostat has opened; indicated by a rapid warming of the top radiator hose. Switch off the engine and top-up the radiator to half-way up the filler neck. Fit the pressure cap. Fill the expansion bottle to a level midway between the maximum and minimum levels indicated Fig. 85/1-16 Thermostat housing assembly on the bottle. Start and run the engine until normal running temperature is attained; switch off the engine and top Remove the engine coolant drain plugs from the up the expansion bottle to the maximum level. crankcase. Allow the engine to cool down. Carefully remove Remove the thermostat as described in Renew the the radiator pressure cap and ensure the radiator is thermostat. then replace the cover. Fit a waste pipe to completely full of coolant. Top-up to half-way up the the cover outlet. radiator filler neck if necessary. Fit the r~diator Fit a suitable pipe to the drain plug aperiure and pressure cap. apply mains water pressure to each aperture in turn. Connect the Lucar connection previously Flush for approximately 30 minutes, or until the disconnected from the pressure switch (see fig. water runs clear of foreign matter. BS/1-14). Fit the drain plugs and a new thermostat by Note reversing the procedure for removal. For the coolant system to operate correctly, i.e. for To flush the heater system. detach the heater at coolant to pa:5s into the expansion bottle when hot and the water tap and disconnect the return hose at the be drawn back into the radiator during cooling, the top coolant pump. of the radiator must not contain an air pocket. Fit a waste pipe to the disconnected heater feed hose. 7 Reverse flush the coolant system Flush the matrix for approximately 30 minutes. Drain the engine coolant system as described in Examine the coolant hoses for deterioration or Aenew the coolant. damage and renew as necessary. Remove the top and bottom hoses from the Connect all hoses and fill the system with the radiator matrix. recommended coolant mixture as described under Fit a waste pipe to the upper (inlet) connection of Renew the coolant. the radiator. Apply mains water under pressure through the 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator, oil lower (outlet} connettion of the radiator. This should cooler, and refrigeration condenser remove all loose sediment in approximately 30 Using a pressure hose pipe, flush the radiator, oil minutes. cooler. and condenser matrices. Do not under any circumstances use an Hold the nose of the hose pipe close to the back alkaline compound or detergent to clean the of the radiator matrix and allow the water to pass system. Such compounds have a detrimental between the veins of the matrix. Slowly move the hose chemical action on aluminium alloys. over the whole matrix area until all foreign matter

TSD 4406

(insects. etc.) have been flushed clear. Care must be taken to ensure that the end of the hose does not damage the matrix face during this operation.

9 Renew the thermostat Disconnect the battery. Place a container beneath the radiator. Attach a length of hose to the radiator drain tap to direct the coolant into the container. Carefully unscrew and remove the radiator pressure cap. Open the radiator drain tap and allow sufficient coolant to drain from the system for the coolant level to fall below that of the thermostat housing. Close the drain tap and remove the hose previously attac~ed. Disconnect the electrical connector from the thermostat housing cover. Remove the setscrews securing the thermostat housing cover. Remove the cover. The cover can be moved away from the housing without detaching the outlet hose. Lift the thermostat from the housing (see fig. 65/1-16). Remove the old gasket material from the C thermostat housing and cover. Ensure that no material enters the thermostat housing. Check that the two faces are clean and dry. lnser1 a new thermostat into the housing. Place a new gasket in position on the housing and fit the cover. Connect the electrical connection removed from D A0635 the housing cover. Top-up the cooling system ~ith the correct Fig. 85/1 • 1 7 Transmission filler tube and coolant mixture as described under Renew the coolant. dipstick A Removing the windscreen wiper mechanism cover. The arrow Torque converter transmission indicates the wiper motor relay It is absolutely essential when adding fluid to, or removed working on the torque converter transmission that B Withdrawing the dipstick from the great attention is paid to cleanliness. The smallest filler tube particle of dirt in the transmission fluid could interfere C Original dipstick markings with the correct operation of the unit. D Revised dipstick markings It is important for the efficient operation of the torque convertflr transmission that only an approved fluid is used (see Chapter A).

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5/1 B5/1·13

situated adjacent to the windscreen washer reservoir (see fig. B5/1·l 7). To r~move the relay, pull it vertically from its mounting. Always clean the top of the dipstick before removing it from the filler tube. As an initial check, the fluid level may be checked after starting from cold as follows. Apply the parking brake. Start and run the engine for three to four minutes at fast·idle speed. with the gear range selector in the Park position. Reduce the engine speed to slow idle. Whilst sitting in the driving seat firmly apply the footbrake and move the gear range selector through the full range of gear positions pausing briefly in each range. Return the selector to the Park position. Immediately check the fluid level with the engine Fig. 85/1·19 Transmission intake strainer running at idle speed. removal The level should be up to the circular dimple situated below the FILL mark on the dipstick or 10 mm (0.375 in) below the MIN mark, dependent on the type of dipstick fitted (see fig. B5/1 · 1 7}. Slacken the setscrew securing the filler tube to Top-up to this level if necessary. the engine. After this initial check a further check should be Unscrew the nut securing the filler tube to the carried out as follows. side of the transmission sump (see fig. B5/1 • 18). Drive the car for approximately 24 kilometres (15 Withdraw the filler tube from the sump and move it to miles} of highway/motorway driving or 16 kilometres one side to allow the fluid to drain into the container. (10 miles} of city driving. This should ensure the After draining the sump, ensure that the filler tube transmission has reached normal operating is clean then fit it to the sump and tighten the drain tam peratu re. nut It is essential that this temperature is Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip attained. Do not top-up the fluid level to the MAX to the engine. mark on the dipstick when the fluid is only warm, as Add 2.8 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt) of an approved this will result in an over-fill situation when the normal fluid to the sump, pouring·the fluid down the filler tube. operating temperature is attained. Overfilling will result Check the fluid level as described under Check the in fluid being discharged from the transmission transmission fluid level. breather pipe. Position the car on a level surface, firmly apply the 3 Fit a new intake strainer parking brake and select Park with the gear selector Drain the transmission sump as described under the lever. heading Renew the transmission fluid, then proceed as Carry out the procedure described for the initial follows. check. Remove the setscrews securing the transmission With the transmission fluid at normal operating sump and lower the sump. temperature the level of the fluid should be between Drain any fluid from the sump and discard the the Fl LL and MAX HOT marks or the MIN and MAX gasket. marks (see fig. B5/1 · 17) dependent on the type of Unscrew the setscrew securing the intake strainer dipstick fitted. and pipe assembly to the transmission; remove the If necessary add fluid by pouring it down the filler strainer assembly (see fig. 85/1 · 19). tube, with the engine still running, until the fluid is to Remove the intake pipe ·from the strainer and the MAX mark on the dipstick. Do not overfill discard the strainer. When the fluid level is correct, switch off the Clean the transmission sump and the intake pipe engine and fit the windscreen wiper mechanism cover with paraffin and dry with compressed air. and relay. Fit a new rubber ·o· ring to the intake pipe and lubricate the 'O' ring with clean transmission fluid. 2 Renew the transmission fluid Ensure that a new rubber seal is fitted to the pipe Position the car on a famp or over a pit bore in the new intake strainer. then fit the intake pipe Place a clean container having a minimum capacity to the strainer. of 3 litres (5 Imp pt, 6 US pt) under the nut which Fit the intake strainer and pipe assembly to the secures the transmission fluid filler tube to the sump transmission and torque tighten the securing setscrew (see fig. B5/1·18). to 14 Nm (1.4 kgf m. 10 lbf ft). From within the engine compartment, remove the Fit the transmission sump using a new gasket and transmission dipstick as described under Check the torque tighten the sump setscrews to 16 Nm transmission fluid level. ( 1,7 kgf m, 1 2 lbf ft).

TSO 4406

Fit the oil filler tube into the sump and tighten the approved fluid to the sump, pouring the fluid down the nut Tighten the setscrew securing the filler tube clip filler tube, then follow the fluid level checking to the engine. procedure described under Check the transmission Add 4,5 litres (8 Imp pt, 9.6 US pt} of an fluid level.

Propeller shaft 1 lubricate the universal joints A grease nipple is fitted to the universal joint at each end of the shaft (see fig. B5/1-20). Using a suitable grease gun, lubricate each joint with an approved grease.

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Remove the level plug located in the rear face of the final drive casing (see fig. 85/1-21 ). The oil in the casing should be up to the level plug orifice. If necessary, top-up with an approved oil. Fig. B5/1 -20 Propeller shaft grease point Fit the level plug complete with a new joint washer.

2 Renew the final drive oil It is advisable to carry out this operation when the oil is warm, e.g. immediately after the car has completed a run. Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and clean the area around the drain and level plugs (see fig. B5/1-21 ). Place a container beneath the drain plug. then remove both the drain and level plugs. When the oil has drained, fit the drain plug complete with a new joint washer. Using a syringe. fill the casing to the level plug orifice with an approved oil (see Chapter A), approximately 2,3 litres (4.0 Imp pt, 4.8 US pt) of oil will be required. Fig. 85/1-21 Final drive drain and filler/level Fit the level plug complete with a new joint points washer and check for leaks.

Steering system 1 Check the steering pump fluid level Remove the filler cap from the steering pump reservoir (see fig. B5/1-22) and check that the fluid level is at least up to the FULL COLD mark on the integral dipstick. If necessary. top-up to this level with Fig. 85/1-22 Steering pump filler/dipstick approved fluid.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5/1 85/1-15

Start and run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, approximately 77°C (170°F), then stop the engine. Remove the filler cap and check the fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, add an approved fluid to raise the level to the FULL HOT mark on the dipstick; do not overfill. Ensure that the filler cap is securely replaced.

2 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers Examine the condition of the rubber cover seals on the steering ball joints (see fig. 85/1-23}. If the seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition they should be removed and the ball joint Fig. 85/1-23 Track rod ball joints examined for wear and damage. Fit new parts as necessary. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

3 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the rack and pinion unit and check the tightness of the seal clips. If the seals are satisfactory, tighten the clips as necessary. If the convoluted seals are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the rack and pinion unit should be removed from the car and new seals fined. For full information refer to Chapter N of the Workshop Manual.

Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers Fig. 85/1-24 Front suspension ball joints The front suspension ball joints (see fig. B5/1-24) are packed with grease on initial assembly and should not normally require attention between service overhauls unless the rubber seal covers are damaged. If on inspection the covers are found to be damaged or in poor condition, the ball joints should be removed and new joints and seals fitted as necessary. For full information refer to Chapter H of the Workshop Manual.

2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted seals Examine the condition of the convoluted seals on the rear suspension struts (see fig. 85/1-25). If the seals are found to be damaged, or in poor condition. the struts should be removed. as described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual, and new seals fitted.

3 lubricate the h.eight control valve ball joints Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Disconnect the actuation links from the height control valves and rear suspension trailing arms at the ball joints (see fig. Bo/1 ·26}. Note from which side each link is taken. Clean the ball joints then lubricate with an approved grease. Do not alter the length of the actuation link. Fig. B5/1-25 Rear suspension strut

-:-so ~405

Connect the actuation link to the height control components which have been in contact with valve and the trailing arm from which it was removed. contaminated mineral oil. Adiust the joints to obtain complete movement Brake fluids and mineral oil are immiscible and without free play. with large amounts of contamination separation of the fluids will occur on standing, due to the greater Brake and hydraulic systems density of the conventional fluids. A further indication of the mixing of conventional brake fluid and mineral oil is its cloudy appearance. To carry out contamination tests a kit is available from Rolls-Royce Motors Limited, part number WARNING RH 2841 and should be used as follows. Switch on the ignition and depressurize the Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until replenish the braking and levelling systems. both low pressure warning panels illuminate. Continue Do not use Brake Fluids (Castro! RR363, to pump the pedal for at least a further 20 applications Universal. or any other type). The use of any type of to ensure that all the accumulator mineral oil is brake fluid. even in very small amounts, will cause returned to the reservoir. component failure necessitating extensive rectification Clean the area around each hydraulic reservoir to the braking and levelling systems of the car. filler cap and then remove the cap. Always ensure before fitting any seals. hoses. Ensure that the components in the test kit are pipes. etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil clean and dry. system. For details of correct component identification Using the sampling tube provided, extract 50 ml reference should be made to Chapter G of the of mineral oil from the top and bottom of each Workshop Manual. reservoir. Always ensure that a sealed container of Place the samples into the individual clean dry Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted containers. adjacent to the battery. Shake each sample taken to ensure it is well Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the mixed. systems when work i~ being carried out. .Pour 10 ml of each sample into clean test tubes (do i,·ot mix the samples together). In order to protect against claims of liability for Using the dispenser, add two drops of the red dye hydraulic system contamination. it is recommended solution contained in the kit into each 10 ml sample. that the hydraulic system mineral oil is tested for Cork the test tubes and shake them thoroughly. contamination prior to work being undertaken, Leave the samples to settle for at least 30 preferably in the presence of the owner or his/her minutes. representative. Examine each sample. It is important that the test is carried out even when the hydraulic system mineral oil is to be Sample diagnosis renewed as this will not prevent the deterioration of On adding the red dye solution and the subsequent mixing. the green colour of the mineral oil will change to a reddish brown. This does not indicate contamination of the hydraulic system mineral oil. Contamination can only be confirmed by the formation of a cloudy red mass which will begin to settle towards the bottom of the tube, if left to stand for at least 30 minutes. If the sample in the test tube on addition of the dye turns red but remains clear it indicates that the sample is not contaminated. The volume of red mass which will eventually settle to the bottom of the test tube indicates the amount of contamination within the hydraulic system mineral oil. Complete separation of the two liquids may take a considerable amount of time. for example a very small percentage of contamination may take more than seven days to completely separate. If contamination is suspected, a more thorough test should be undertaken, details of which are given in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. If contamination is suspected, but difficult to Fig. B5/1 ·26 Height control valve ball joints diagnose, due to the small amount of contaminant that

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5/1 B5/1·17

may be present or any doubt exists, confirmation should be obtained by sending a sample to Rolls· Royce Motors (if in the United Kingdom) or to a chemical analysis laboratory. Before attempting any work on a hydraulic system personnel must be fully conversant with the precautions required to ensure adequate safety and correct system operation. Refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Important Always seal each reservoir cap after it has been confirmed that the systems are not contaminated and all work on the systems has been completed.

1 Check the reservoir mineral oil level The mineral oil reservoirs for the hydraulic systems are located in the engine compartment (see fig. B5/1·27). To check the oil level, first depressurize the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until tl:le two warning panels illuminate. Start and run the engine for approximately four minutes with the car unladen to charge the systems and then stop the Fi9. 85/1·27 Access to the hydraulic system engine. The mineral oil in both reseivoirs should be up reservoirs to the FULL marks on the level indicator plate. If the reservoirs require topping-up, ensure that the tops of the reservoirs and the filler caps are clean, mineral oil (see fig. 85/1·27 and Chapter A) until the then add an approved hydraulic system mineral oil (see levels of the reservoirs are slightly above the topping· Chapter A) as necessary. up marks on the indicator plate. It is important that only approved hydraulic Run the engine for four minutes, with the car system mineral oil is used and that exceptional unladen, then top-up to the FULL level mark; never cleanliness is observed when topping-up the allow the mineral oil levels to fall below the minimum hydraulic systems. level marks. Under no circumstances should a conventional Check for leaks, especially around the unions of (i.e. RR363 or Universal) type brake fluid be used. any pipes which have been disturbed. After topping-up, insert the blanking plug. Finally, bleed the hydraulic systems as described Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. System Mineral Oil, for system replenishment. are Ensure that the containers of new Hydraulic fitted adjacent to the battery. System Mineral Oil for system replenishment. are fitted adjacent to the battery. 2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in 3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as hoses follows. Position the car on a ramp or over a pit and check the Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic condition of the hydraulic system pipes and hoses. systems by attaching a tube to each bleed point then Examine the metal pipes for signs of corrosion, opening the bleed screws and allowing the mineral oil particularly those in an exposed position. to drain from the circuits. The bleed screws are located Examine the hoses for chafing or surface cracking. on each accumulator. on each pair of brake calipers. on Faulty pipes and hoses should be replaced as the deceleration conscious pressure limiting valve, and described in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. on each rear wing from the rear suspension strut A drain tube is not required at the accumulator bleed 4 Renew the accumulator to body. and trailing screws as these are an integral part of the arms to body hoses . -.. accumulators and when opened allow the mineral oil Depressurize the hydraulic systems as described in to flow from the accumulator spheres back to the Chapter G of the Workshop Manual and proceed as reservoirs. follows. Drain the mineral oil from the reservoirs and clean Fit a hose clamp to each of the intermediate hoses the reservoirs as described in Chapter G of the of the accumulator return pipes to prevent the fiow of Workshop Manual. mineral oil from the reseivoirs. After the system has completely drained, close all Thoroughly clean the areas around the the bleed screws and ensure that any disturbed pipes connections of the two accumulator to body and are connected and correctly torque tightened. trailing arms to body hoses (see figs. 85/1 ·28, and Fill the reservoirs with fresh hydraulic system B5/1-29).

TSD 4406

Remove the respective hoses noting the following. To avoid contamination fit the new hose immediately after removing the old one; alternatively fit approved blanks to the open ports until the new hoses are fitted. Before fitting a new hose ensure that it is thoroughly clean and conforms with the hydraulic systems mineral oil requirements. When fitting the new hoses. ensure that they are routed to clear other components and that clearance is maintained during full suspension movement. Tighten the pipe nuts to the torque settings given in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. After fitting the new hoses. check for leaks and bleed the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G Fig. B5/1·28 Accumulator to body hoses of the Workshop Manual.

5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses To renew the hydraulic system hoses follow the same basic procedure described under the heading Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses.

Fig. 85/1 -30 Parking brake mechanism 7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust 1 Actuation rod excluders (when changing brake pads) 2 Centralizing straps The condition of the caliper dust seals should be 3 Parking brake pads checked whenever the brake pads are removed. 4 Brake disc Inspect the seals for sighs of damage, heat 5 Adjuster clicker block hardening, or general deterioration and renew if 6 Adjuster necessary.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section B5/1 B5/1·19

When fitting new seals, ensure that the seal retaining clips are correctly located.

8 Renew the brake caliper seals To renew the caliper piston seals it is necessary to remove the brake calipers from the car. For full instructions. refer to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual.

9 Check the parking brake pads for wear Securely chock the front wheels then raise the rear of the car. Place sill blocks under the rear body sills and also support the rear trailing arms. Do not allow the suspension struts to support the full suspension load. Remove the rear wheels and release the parking brake to the off position. Disconnect the caliper actuation rod from the caliper lever (see fig. BS/1-30). Unscrew and remove the caliper adjuster and collect the adjuster clicker plate. Unhook the pad retention springs from each pad, noting the larger spring is fitted to the inner pad. Remove the pads from the caliper. Check the thickness of the lining material on each pad. Pads which are worn to within 1,6 mm (0.062 in) or less of the steel backing plate should be renewed. Fig. 85/1-31 Parking brake rear cable adjustment To fit the pads. attach the retention springs then point locate the pads into position and hook the springs onto the caliper. Complete the assembly by reversing the removal are just clear of the calipers. Measure the gap procedure, then adjust the calipers as described under produced at each off-stop and lengthen the cables by the heading Adjust the parking brake. this amount. Note With the cables correctly adjusted. check that the If new parking brake pads have been fitted, the centralizing straps (see fig. B5/1-30) are pushing the following bedding-in procedure should be carried out pads away from the discs when the parking brake is in after adjusting the parking brake. the off position. If not, remove the nut and bolt securing the straps. bend the straps outward (i.e. away Drive the car at approximately 48 km/h (30 from the disc} then refit them. Ensure that the straps mile/h) and apply the parking brake to bring the car to are pushed downward towards the adjusting nut rest; it is important that this is done gently and whilst tightening the nut and bolt securing them to the progressively. The parking brake must not be applied caliper. fully and no attempt should be made to lock the Check that the distance between the pad and the wheels. This operation should be carried out nine disc are the same on each side of the caliper; if not. times. allowing at least one minute to elapse between reset the centralizing straps. stops to prevent the discs overheating. Raise each rear wheel in turn so that it is free to Finally adjust the caliper as described under the rotate and adjust each caliper as follows. heading Adjust the parking brake. Turn the caliper adjuster (see fig. B5/l-30) clock wise until the pads just grip the disc; at this point it 10 Adjust the parking brake should only just be possible to rotate the road wheel Ensure that the parking brake is in the off position. by hand. Turn the adjuster anti-clockwise a quarter Adjust the rear cables at the adjusters (see fig. turn (i.e. three clicks on the nut) to obtain the BS/1-31) so that the caliper operating levers return to minimum clearance between the pads and disc. their off-stops under the influence of their return springs with no appreciable slackness in the cables. 11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage Note Position the car on a ramp or over a pit. Lubricate the The cables must be ·adjusted so that the equalizer link parking brake linkage clevis pins, fulcrum pins. and the on the intermediate linkage (see fig. B5/1 ·31) lies at rear cable adjusters with approved grease. right angles with the centre line of the car with the parking brake in the off position. Fuet system Safety precautions To check the cable adjustment. adjust both rear It is important that before a fuel line is opened or the cables at the equalizer link until the caliper off-stops fuel tank drained or siphoned. that the workshop

TSD 4406

safety precautions given in Chapter A of the Workshop Manual are strictly observed.

1 Renew the main fuel filter The main fuel filter is situated on the car underframe (see fig. BS/1 ·32). It is a sealed unit and no attempt should be made to clean the element. At the appropriate service interval change the main fuel filter. Place a container beneath the filter to collect any fuel that drains from the filter. Carefully remove the inlet and outlet pipe connections from the filter. Slacken the worm drive clip retaining the filter to the mounting bracket and withdraw the filter. Remove the unions fitted into both ends of the filter and discard the filter. Clean and fit the unions together with new sealing Fig. 85/1 ·32 Main fuel filter washers into the new filter. Fit the new filter by reversing the removal procedure noting the direction of flow arrow marked on the outside of the filter casing. When carrying out the above operation at the 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or four years schedule and subsequent periods, the intank fuel filter situated on the underside of the fuel tank (see fig. B5/1 ·33) should also be removed and cleaned as follows. Disconnect the battery. Drain or siphon the fuel tank. Place a container beneath the fuel intank filter to collect the residue of fuel from the tank when the filter is removed. Disconnect the hose from the intank filter outlet A0691 pipe. Remove the circlip retaining the filter and carefully Fig. B5/1 ·33 lntank fuel filter withdraw the filter from the tank. Clean the filter mesh by washing it in clean fuel. Examine the filter for serviceability and renew if necessary. Fit the filter by reversing the removal procedure. Always use a new seal on the filter body. Ensure that the fuel drained from the fuel tank is free from foreign matter. then return it to the fuel tank. Check the fuel filter and any pipe connections that have been disconnected, for leaks.

2 Clean the carburetter fuel inlet filter Carry out this operation when the engine is cold. Remove the setscrews securing the air chest cover. lift off the cover and gasket. Unscrew the fuel inlet pipe from the adapter on the front of the air chest (see fig. B5/1 ·34). Remove the three setscrews securing the aperture plate and withdraw the plate off the fuel inlet adapter. Carefully remove the inlet addpter from the carburetter, discard the sealing washer. Withdraw the fuel filter. taking care not to lose the small spring situated at the inner end. Clean the filter by washing in clean fuel. Fit the filter and components removed by Fig. B5/1 ·34 Carburetter inlet filter reversing the removal procedure noting the following.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85/1 BS/1-21

Ensure that the spring is located correctly in the Lucas or Varta battery inner end of the filter with the larger diameter of the Air temperature below 2 7°C (80°F) spring seated on the filter. Fit a new sealing washer and ring onto the inlet Specific Gravity Condition of Battery adapter and a new gasket to the aperture plate. 1.270 to 1.290 Full charged Prior to fitting the air chest cover, start the engine 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged and check the fuel inlet pipe and adapter for leaks; 1 .090 to 1. 110 Fully discharged rectify as necessary. Fit the cover using a new sealing gasket. Always Air temperature above 2 7°C {80°F) ensure that the air chest is free of foreign matter prior Specific Gravity Condition of Battery to fitting the cover. 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged 1.130 to 1.150 Half discharged 3 Fit a new filler head to fuel tank hose 1.050 to 1.070 Fully discharged To enable the filler head to fuel tank hose to be renewed it is necessary to remove the rear It the specific gravity reading of all the cells is suspension gas spring. For details of the procedure uniform and within the range 1.240 to 1.270 the required, reference should be made to Chapter K of battery is in an acceptable state of charge. If the the Workshop Manual. readings are uniform but below 1.220 the battery should be recharged. Always remove the battery from 4 Examine al& flexible fuel pipes the car for recharging. Carefully examine all the flexible fuel pipes throughout If the specific gravity of the electrolyte in one cell the fuel system. Renew any pipes which have become differs markedly from the others (i.e. the reading is damaged or deteriorated to an unserviceable condition. 0.040 or more, lower than the remainder}, then a Check the complete fuel system for leaks and defect must be suspected and rectified as necessary. rectify as necessary. b. Electrolyte level check Ensure that the battery is in a high state of charge (see Electrical system Electrolyte specific gravity check}. 1 Check the state of charge of the battery The level of the battery electrolyte in each cell The battery is situated on the right-hand side of the should be approximately 5 mm (0.250 in) above the luggage compartment To gain access to the battery tops of the separators (Lucas or Varta battery) or turn back the carpet and remove the trim from around contacting the blue bar situated above the separators the battery. Unclip the battery cover retaining strap (Chloride battery). and lift off the cover. If the electrolyte level is low top-up using distilled water until the level is attained. Do not overfill. Battery electrolyte check Always ensure the top of the battery is clean prior Applicable to batteries with removable cell vent cover( s) to removal of the vent cover. a. Electrolyte specific gravity check. Remove the vent cover(s) from the top of the battery. Battery voltage check Using a hydrometer check the specific gravity of Applicable to sealed for life (maintenance free) batteries the electrolyte in each cell and compare the readings The state of charge of a · sealed for life' battery can obtained with the following tables. only be checked by taking a voltage reading at the Caution battery terminals. using either a digital voltmeter or The electrolyte in the battery is a corrosive acid. Do not multimeter. The instrument used must be accurate to allow the electrolyte to come into contact with the within 0.1 volts. eyes. skin, fabric. or paintwork. Flush any contacted Before a voltage reading is taken on batteries that areas immediately and thoroughly with water. If the have recently received a charge. the residual effects of eyes are effected, flush for at least 15 minutes and the surface charge on the battery plates must be obtain prompt medical attention. removed to avoid a false reading. This surface charge can be removed by applying an electrical load to the Chloride battery battery (e.g. by either connecting a high rate discharge Air temperature below 32°C (90°F) tester for 1 5 seconds or if the battery is fitted to a car. Specific Gravity Condition of Battery switching on the headlamps for one minute). After 1.270 to 1.290 Fully charged wards, allow the battery to stand for a further one 1.180 to 1.200 Half discharged minute before a voltage reading is taken. 1.090 to 1. 11 0 Fully discharged Compare the reading obtained with the following table to ascertain the state of charge Air temperature above 32°C (90°F) Voltage State of charge Specific Gravity Condition of Battery 12.8 100% 1.220 to 1.240 Fully charged 12.6 82% 1.1 50 to 1.170 Half discharged 12.5 75% 1.070 to 1.090 Fully discharged 12.4 60%

TSO 4406

A minimum reading of 12.5 volts (corresponding should illuminate. With the ignition held in the start to 75% charge) is acceptable. Below this reading the position, turn the main lighting switch to the Park and battery should be recharged. Instructions for charging Head positions; the intensity of illumination of the ice are provided on the battery label. and low fuel warning panels should reduce. Switch off the ignition and lighting switch. 2 Clean and check the battery terminals The hydraulic system warning lamps situated at The top of the battery should always be kept clean and the top of the warning panel cluster should also be dry. checked as follows. If corrosion of the battery leads or terminals has Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. occured it should be removed as follows. Depressurize the hydraulic systems by actuating Disconnect the battery leads and using hot water the brake pedal between 50 and 60 times. The two or a dilute solution of ammonia carbonate, wash them brake pressure warning panels should illuminate. thoroughly until all corrosion has been removed. When the lamps have illuminated start and run Finally wash with clean water to remove the ammonia the engine. Both lamps should extinguish aft~r carbonate solution. approximately two minutes indicating that the Remove any corrosive deposit from the terminal hydraulic systems are pressurized. Switch off the posts using a cloth moistened with ammonia ignition. carbonate solution then wash with clean water. Dry the battery leads and terminal posts. Connect Fasten seat belt warning lamp the battery leads to the terminal posts. Liberally coat To check the seat belt warning lamp, open and close the terminals with petroleum jelly. each door in turn; observe the lamp operation. The seat belt warning panel should illuminate 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation whenever a door is opened and extinguish Actuate the respective switches and check for lamp approximately seven seconds after the door is closed. illumination and function i.e. turn flashers, headlamp Note dip/main beam. headlamp flash. When checking the All doors must be fully closed for the lamp to fog lamps the main lighting switch must be on. In the extinguish (i.e. not on first catch). Park position the front fog lamps must be switched on before the rear fog lamps will illuminate. Hazard warning indicator When only the rear fog lamps are switched on Depress the hazard warning switch, check that all the with the main lighting switch in the Head position, turn indicators and the facia warning lamp are flashing. these lamps will be extinguished when the headlamps are switched to main beam. If both front and rear fog 5 Check all interior lamps for operation lamps are in use the rear fog lamps will remain Ensure all the doors are fully closed and the interior illuminated. lamps are extinguished. Open the driver's door; the The respective facia tell-tales should also be rear section of the central roof lamps should illuminate. checked for illumination during these operations. Fully close the door; the roof lamps should remain With the lighting switch in the Park and Head illuminated for approximately seven seconds. positions, switch on the ignition. Check the facia The rear roof lamps should also illuminate when instruments for illumination; the panel illumination the door is opened. If the gear selector lever is moved dimming switch should also be checked for correct from the Park position with the ignition key in the operation. RUN position, the lamps will extinguish immediately all the doors are closed. When carrying out this 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation operation also check that the door open warning lamp Before carrying out the following checks firmly apply and step lamp are illuminated with the door in the the parking brake; ensure the gear range selector is in open position. These lamps should extinguish the Park position and remove the gear range selector immediately the door is fully closed. isolator from the fuseboard. Repeat the check on the remaining door(s). Note Ignition and oil warning lamps If the doors are only closed to the first catch position Turn the ignition key to the RUN position, the ignition the lamps should remain illuminated. and oil pressure warning lamps should illuminate. Start the engine, both lamps should extinguish; switch off Check the operation of the front companment the ignition. personal lamps as follows. When the ignition key is turned to the ACC position Withdraw the main lighting switch; the front the ignition warning lamp only should illuminate. section of the driver's roof lamp should illuminate. Operate the map lamp switch. the front section of Warning panel cluster lamps the front passenger's roof lamp should illuminate. Move the gear range selector lever to the 'D' position To check the vanity mirror illumination, move the (do not insert the gear range selector isolator). switch to the mirror position. Lower the passenger's Apply the footbrake then turn the ignition key to sun visor; the lamp situated above the visor should the start position. All warning panel cluster lamps illuminate.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section 85/1 85/1·23

Withdraw the visor from its retaining clip; the Note lamp should extinguish. The lamp should also Care must be taken during these operations to ensure extinguish when the visor is moved to its raised that the wiper arm is not allowed to spring back onto position, even when the switch is on. the windscreen when the blade has been removed, The operation of the rear roof lamps should be otherwise damage to the windscreen cou.ld occur. checked by operating the switches situated on the rear compartment vanity mirror surrounds. 9 Check the windscreen wash/wipe and Press the upper portion of the three position headlamps power wash for correct operation switch; the front section of the respective roof lamp Before carrying out the following check ensure that the should illuminate. Press the lower portion of the windscreen is clean. switch and the rear section of both rear roof lamps Switch on the ignition and press the windscreen should illuminate. With the switch in the central wash/wipe switch. The windscreen wipers should position both lamps should be off. Repeat the operate and the fluid from the washer jet should operation on the opposite side of the car. impinge on the windcreen approximately 419 mm ( 16.5 in) from the centre line of the windscreen and 6 Check the horns for operation 190 mm (7.5 in) below the windscreen top finisher. Examine the electrical connections to each horn to The wash/wipe function should continue until the ensure they are in good condition. Clean the horns and switch is released. remove any foreign matter that may have collected in On release of the push button switch the washer the horn trumpets. should cease while the wipers should continue for Switch on the ignition; press the horn button approximately four strokes before returning to the park several times to ensure the horn button is making a position. good contact and that both horns are functioning Turn the main lighting switch to the HEAD correctly each time it is pressed. position. The headlamp cleaning function will only operate when the headlamps are illuminated. Press the 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp wash/wipe switch, the power wash jets should only washers reservoirs operate for half a second when the wash/wipe switch Windscreen washer reservoir is depressed. To repeat the wash it will be necessary The filler is located in the engine compartment. to release and then depress the switch again. Remove the filler cap and add the correct mixture of windscreen washer fluid and distilled water to the 10 Check the alternator for correct operation reservoir until the maximum level is attained. For details of the alternator test procedure and brush Topping-up level· bottom of the filler neck. renewal. reference should be made to Chapter M of Headlamp washer reservoir the Workshop Manual. The reservoir is housed under the front right·hand wing and the filler is located in the engine 11 Check the condition of the starter motor compartment towards the front of the car. brushes and pinion The reservoir should be topped-up with clean water For details of the procedure required to carry out the until the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler neck. inspection of the starter motor brushes and pinion, During winter conditions, a solution of 30% reference should be made to Chapter M of the isopropyl alchohol and 70% water should be used. Workshop Manual. This mixture will provide frost protection down to a temperature of approximately -10°C ( 14°F). Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from 8 Check the condition of the windsc;reen wiper obstruction. blades Check the air intake grilles and foam filter, situated Lift the wiper arms from the windscreen and inspect behind the bonnet, for obstruction (leaves, dirt etc.). them for wear or damage. Renew the blades if Carefully remove the grille retaining screws. lift the necessary. grilles and filters from the body and clean all parts To remove the wiper blades proceed as follows. including the air intake ducts; also ensure the air a. Driver's side of the windscreen. Lift the wiper arm intake duct drain tubes are free from obstruction. from the windscreen. Push half of the blade away from the arm. until the blade is released from its location 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct clip. To fit the new blade, position it on the wiper arm operation and press it firmly into the location clip. For details of the procedure required to carry out this b. On the passeng~r·s side of the windscreen, lift the operation reference should be made to Chapter C of wiper arm from the windscreen and pivot the blade the Workshop Manual. backwards through 180°. Press the small release tag, situated on the underside of the blade pivot block and Body push the blade out of the crooked end of the wiper 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat arm. Withdraw the wiper blade from the arm. Fit the belts new blade by reversing the removal procedure. The following checks should be carried out on the

TSD 4406

front and rear retractable seat belts. pressure of the spare tyre should be adjusted to the Fully withdraw the seat belt from the reel; highest tyre pressure (i.e. rear wheel). examine the webbing for any signs of wear or damage. Do not check the pressures when the tyres are Allow the belt to return to the stowed position. warm (e.g. after the vehicle has completed a journey). To check the operation of the retractable belt fit Always ensure that the valve caps are fitted after the belt and then give the webbing of the diagonal belt checking. a sharp pull. Ensure that the belt locks and then returns to the normal roller action immediately the belt 2 Check the condition and tread depth of the is released. tyres With the fastening tongue of the belt locked in the Examine the tyres, including the· spare, for any signs of retaining clasp; ensure the tongue is securely held and damage or tyre wall cracking. etc. is released immediately the release button marked Carefully remove any stones or other objects that PRESS is operated. may be lodged in the tyre treads. The alternative method of checking the seat belts Check the depth of tread at several points around is to select an open stretch of road, then, when the each wheel using a tread depth gauge. road is free from any potential danger, accelerate the To enable a visual check to be made, tread depth car to 24 km/h ( 15 mile/h) and brake sharply from indicators are incorporated into the tyre construction. this speed; ensure that the belt locks and then These indicators are integral moulded ribs, spaced at subsequently releases. If this method of test is used, it intervals around the circumference of the tyre, and will be necessary to carry a passenger(s) to enable the extend across the full width of the tread in all primary passenger seat belts to be tested. grooves. When one or more of these indicators are Check the rear seat lap belt for condition and flush with the tread. only 1,6 mm (1/,e in) or less of correct locking and release. tread depth remains. and a new tyre is required. Report any defects to the Owner. If the condition of the tyres is not satisfactory or When seat belt replacement is necessary only tread depths do not conform to the legal requirements belts approved by Rolls-Royce Motors Limited should of the country in which the car is operating, the owner be fitted. should be notified and asked to authorize the fitting of new tyres. 2 Check that all body drains are free from For full information on tyre fitting, balancing. etc., obstruction reference should be made to Chapter R of the Examine the body drain holes; remove any foreign Workshop Manual. matter that may be obstructing the holes. Take care not to damage the paintwork. Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering On completion of the respective service schedule bolt operations, carefully road test the car for satisfactory Turn back the carpet on the luggage compartment performance. floor to expose the spare wheel inflation trap and spare If new brake pads have been fitted, the running-in wheel carrier lowering bolt head. Remove the inflation and bedding procedures should be carried out as trap cover; if a spare wheel retainer is fitted, it should described under, Check the brake disc pads for wear be released. and Check the parking brake pads for wear. Rotate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt anti· When the road test has been completed, the car clockwise until the carrier is fully lowered. Remove the should be fully inspected for any leaks. fouls, etc.• and spare wheel from the carrier. rectified as necessary. Lubricate the carrier lowering bolt using a The transmission fluid level, should be finally recommended lubricant. Raise and lower the carrier to checked immediately after the test. while the fluid is at distribute the lubricant over the full length of the normal running temperature and topped·up if carrier bolt. necessary (see Check the transmission fluid level). Check the condition of the spare wheel as Ensure that all controls, door handles, steering described under the heading Wheels. wheel. etc., are clean and that any dirt which may be Fit the spare wheel onto the carrier. Ensure that attributed to the service schedule is completely ~he inflation valve is in line with the inflation trap in removed. the luggage compartment floor, then fully raise the carrier. Fasten the spare wheel retainer {if fitted}, and fit the tyre inflation trap rubber and carpet.

Wheels 1 Check all tyre pressures Check the tyre pressures including the spare when the tyres are cold; adjust if necessary. The inflation

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Chapter C

Service schedules Cars other than those conforming to an Australian, Japanese or North American specification

Contents Sections Silver Spirit M ulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur Cars from vehicle identification number*SCAZS0000ACH01001* C1 C1 C1 C1 Cars from vehicle identification number*SCBZSOT05CCH04233 * C1/1 C1/1 Cars conforming to a Middle East specification Silver Spirit, Silver Spur, and Mulsanne (excluding Turbo) from 1 984 model year refer to Chapter G. Corniche/Continental, Camargue, Mulsanne Turbo. and Bentley Turbo R from 1985 model year refer to Chapter G.

TSD 4406

Issue record sheet 1 April 1985 The dates quoted below refer to the issue date of individual pages within this chapter.

Sections I C1/1 Page No. Contents 1 Apr 85 Apr85 2 3 Apr 85 Apr 85 4 ____.;..;N ~ov.:....;:8...;.4--...:N:...:.o.::..v:.....::..84...:.______5 Nov 84 Nov 84 6 Nov 84 Sep 82 7 8 109 ------~ 1 1 12 13 14 ______~ 15 16 17 18 19 ______~ 20 21 22 23 25~-24 ------~ 26 27 28 29 ______~ 30 31 32 33 34 ______~ 35 36 37 38

4039 ------41 42 43 44 ______45 46 47 48

TS04406

Service schedules

Contents Pages Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur Cars from vehicle identification number *SCAZS0000ACH01001 ·,• C1·3 C1·3 C1·3 C1·3

TSD4406

Service schedules

Initial 3 months or 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) 1 6 months or 10 000 kilometres (6000 miles) A 1 year or 20 000 kilometres ( 12 000 miles) B AwARNING 1 Y2 years or 30 000 kilometres ( 18 000 miles) A 2 years or 40 000 kilometres (24 000 miles} C Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (lHM) to 2Yz years or 50 000 kilometres (30 000 miles} A replenish the braking and levelling systems. 3 years or 60 000 kilometres (36 000 miles) B Do not use Brake Fluids (Castro! RR363, 3Yz years or 70 000 kilometres (42 000 miles) A Universal. or any other type). The use of any type of 4 years or 80 000 kilometres ( 48 000 miles) C&D brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause 4Yz years or 90 000 kilometres (54 000 miles) A component failure necessitating extensive rectification 5 years or 100 000 kilometres (60 000 miles) 8 to the braking and levelling systems of the car. 5Yz years or 110 000 kilometres (66 000 miles) A Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, 6 years or 120 000 kilometres (72 000 miles) C pipes, etc. that they are suitable for a mineral oil 611.2 years or 130 000 kilometres (78 000 miles) A system. For details of correct component identification 7 years or 140 000 kilometres (84 000 miles) B reference should be made to Chapter G of the 7Yz years or 150 000 kilometres (90 000 miles} A Workshop Manual. 8 years or 160 000 kilometres (96 000 miles) C&E Always ensure that a sealed container of Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted Seasonal adjacent to the battery. Every year {Spring) F Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the Within the first year (Autumn) then every two years G systems when work is being carried out. Every 2 years (Autumn) H

Regular maintenance Operations to be carried out at weekly, monthly or The service schedule chart in this section three monthly intervals are specified in Chapter B. indicates the operations required to service the vehicle. When carrying out the schedules, reference should be Service recommendation made to Chapter B which describes the correct If the car is used for constant stop/start operations, procedure to be used for each operation. In order to the engine oil should be changed every 3 months or locate this information the operation numbers quoted 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) whichever is earlier. in the service schedule chart correspond with those in Chapter 8. It is important that. as certain maintenance items Time allowance in the service schedules are essential requirements to Schedule Time in hours conform with the Rolls-Royce Motors New Car 1 2.0 Warranty or with relevant emission control regulations, A 8.5 maintenance is carried out at the times specified. B 10.0 These items are indicated as follows. C 12.5 • Operations necessary to comply with Rolls-Royce D 5.5 Motors New Car Warranty during the warranty period. E 17.0 t Operations necessary to comply with the relevant F 1.5 Emission Control Regulations. These items must be G 1.0 carried out during the entire service life of the vehicle. H 2.5

Service schedules All service schedules should be carried out at the When replacing brake pads, drive belts, ball joints or appropriate time interval or mileage whichever is other items as a result of a service inspection, add the earlier. respective manhour schedule time. The service intervals and corresponding code If it is necessary to carry out the 3 months or letters used on the service schedule chart are as 5000 kilometres {3000 miles) service follows. recommendation the time allowance is 0.5 hour.

TSO 4406

Service schedule operations A B C D E F G H Car protection Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in Chapter B. --* -- * -- * --* --* --* -- * -- * --* Engine 1 * Change the engine oil. 2* Renew the engine oil filter. - *- --* - *- --* ------3 Check the engine oil level; top-up if necessary. * * * 4 Check the drive belts; adjust and renew if * * * necessary. - *- --* --* --* ------5'"t Renew the air filter element. - - -- * * ------6*t Clean the crankcase breather tube flame trap. * 7*t Clean the choke buttertly housing adapter (SU * carburetters}. 8*t Clean the air cleaner breather housing * * connection (Solex carburetter). 9*t Check the car~uretter damper oil level; top-up if * * necessary (SU carburetters). 1O*t Renew the sparking plugs. - - - *- --* --* ------* --* ------11 *t Lubricate the distributor (if applicable). * * 12 Lubricate the accelerator and carburetter linkage. ------13*t Check for correct choke operation and choke - *- - *- * -- -- stove pipe flow: rectify if necessary (SU carburetters). 14*t Check the float chamber depression; adjust if * necessary (SU carburetters). 15 t Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary. * * 16 t Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary. -- * * * ------*- * * ------1 7 t Check the choke idle speed; adjust if necessary. -- * * * ------Engine cooling system 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration; correct if necessary. ------2 Check the coolant level; top·up if necessary. ----* -- * -- * ------3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness. - - --* * * ------4* Examine the condition of all coolant hoses; * * * * renew as necessary. 5* Fit a new heater tap feed hose (irrespective of - - -- * * ------*-- * visual appearance). 6 Renew the coolant. * 7 Reverse flush the coolant system. ------* -- * 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator, and * refrigeration condenser. * * 9* Renew the thermostat. * Torque converter transmission 1 * Check the transmission fluid level; top-up if necessary. 2* Renew the transmission fluid. * * * * ------* -- * ------3* Fit a new intake strainer. * 4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod. * * * Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints (not applicable to rubber jointed propeller shaft). * Final drive unit 1"' Check the final drive oil level; top-up if necessary. * *

November 1984 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section Cl C1 - 1

Service Schedules From vehicle identification number *SCAZS0000ACH01001 *

Caution Seasonal The hydraulic systems of these cars are filled Every year {Spring} F with Castrol hydraulic system mineral oil. Within the first year (Autumn) then every two years G Hydraulic components within these Every 2 years {Autumn) H A systems are susceptible to contamination by conventional brake fluids. Before fitting any seals, hoses, Regular maintenance pipes, etc. always ensure that they are suitable for a Operations to be carried out at weekly, monthly or three mineral oil hydraulic system. monthly intervals are specified in Chapter B. The service schedule chart in this section indicates the operations required to service the vehicle. When Service recommendation carrying out the schedules, reference should be made to If the car is used for constant stop/start operations, the Chapter 8 which describes the correct procedure to be engine oil should be changed every 5000 kilometres used for each operation. In order to locate this inform· (3000 miles) or 3 months whichever is earlier. ation the operation numbers quoted in the service schedule chart correspond with those in Chapter B. Time allowance It is important that, as certain maintenance items in Schedule Time in hours the service schedules are essential requirements to I 2.0 conform with the Rolls-Royce Motors New Car Warranty A 8.5 or with relevant emission control regulations, maintenance B 10.0 is carried out at the times specified. These items are C 12:5 indicated as follows. D 5.5 • Operations necessary to comply with Rolls-Royce E 17.0 Motors New Car Warranty during the warranty period. F 1.5 t Operations necessary to comply with the relevant G 1.0 Emission Control Regulations. These items must be H 2.5 carried out during the entire service life of the vehicle. When replacing brake pads, drive belts, ball joints or other items as a result of a service inspection, add the Service schedules respective manhour schedule time. All service schedules should be carried out at the If it is necessary to carry out the 5000 kilometres appropriate mileage or time interval whichever is earlier. (3000 miles) or 3 months service recommendation the The service interv.als and corresponding code letters time allowance is 0.5 hour. used on the service schedule chart are as follows.

Initial 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) .or 3 months I 10 000 kilometres (6000 miles) or 6 months A 20 000 kilometres ( 12 000 miles} or 1 year B 30 000 kilometres (18 000 miles) or 1% years A 40 000 kilometres (24 000 miles) or 2 years C 50 000 kilometres (30 000 miles) or 2% years A 60 000 kilometres (36 000 miles) or 3 years B 70 000 kilometres (42 000 miles) or 3% years A 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or 4 years C&D 90 000 kilometres (54 000 miles) or 4% years A 100 000 kilometres (60 000 miles) or 5 years B 110 000 kilometres (66 000 miles) or 5% years A 120 000 kilometres (72 000 miles) or 6 years C 130 000 kilometres (78 000 miles) or 6% years A 140 000 kilometres (84 000 miles) or 7 years B 150 000 kilometres (90 000 miles) or 7% years A 160 000 kilometres {96 000 miles} or 8 years C&E

TSO 4406

Service schedule operations A B C D E F G H Car protection Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in Chapter B. * * * * * * * * * Engine 1 * Change the engine oil. 2* Renew the engine oil filter. * * * * ------3 Check the engine oil level; top-up if necessary. ----* * --* ------4 Check the drive belts; adjust and renew if -- * * * ------necessary. 5*t Renew the air filter element. --* --* --* --* ------6"t Clean the crankcase breather tube flame trap. ------* --* ------7*t Clean the choke butterfly housing adapter (SU * * carburetters). 8"t Clean the air cleaner breather housing connection * * (Solex carburetter). ------·------9*t Check the carburetter damper oil level; top·up if * * necessary (SU carburetters}. ------* * * ------10*t Renew the sparking plugs. ------* --* ------11 "t Lubricate the distributor. * 12 Lubricate the accelerator and carburetter linkage. * 13*t Check for correct choke operation and choke * * * stove pipe flow; rectify if necessary (SU carburet ters). ------14*t Check the float chamber depression; adjust if -- * ------necessary (SU carburetters). ------15 t Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary. ---- * --* ------* * --* ------16 t Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary. -- * * * ------17 t Check the choke idle speed; adjust if necessary. * * * Engine cooling system 1 Check the coolant specific gravity; correct if. necessary. 2 Check the coolant level; top-up if necessary. --- *- -- * --* ------·- - -- 3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness. --* * * ---- 4 * Examine the condition of all coolant hoses; * * * * renew as necessary. ------5* Fit a new heater tap feed hose (irrespective of * * * * visual appearance). . ) 6 Renew the coolant. ------* ------7 Reverse flush the coolant system * * 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator and * refrigeration condenser. * * 9* Renew the thermostat. * Torque converter transmission 1* Check the transmission fluid level; top-up if necessary 2* Renew the transmission fluid. --* --* --* --* ------3* Fit a new intake strainer. ------* --* ------4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod. -- - *------* --* --* ------Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints. * Final drive unit 1* Check the final drive oil level; top-up if necessary. ____ -*- - *- ______2* Renew the final drive oil. * 3 Grease the drive-shaft universal joints (if applicable). _ _ __ - *- ______SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section Cl C1·3

Service Scheduies From vehicle identification number * SCAZS0000ACH01001*

40 000 kilometres (24 000 miles) or 2 years C ,6. WARNING 50 000 kilometres {30 000 miles) or 21'2 years A 60 000 kilometres (36 600 miles) or 3 years B Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to 70 000 kilometres (42 000 miles) or 31'2 years A replenish the braking and levelling systems. SQ 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or 4 years C&D Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363, 90 000 kilometres (54 000 miles) or 4Yi years · A Universal. or any other type). The use of any type of 100 000 kilometres (60 000 miles) or 5 years B brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause 110 000 kilometres (66 000 miles) or 5}'2 years A component failure necessitating extensive rectification 120 000 kilometres (72 000 miles) or 6 years C to the brake and levelling systems of the car. 130 000 kilometres (78 000 miles) or 6Yi years A Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, 140 000 kilometres (84 000 miles) or 7 years B pipes. etc. that they are suitable for a mineral oil 150 000 kilometres (90 000 miles) or 7Yi years A system. For details of correct component identification 160 000 kilometres (96 000 miles) or 8 years C&E reference should be made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual. Seasonal Always ensure that a sealed container of Every yei:ir (Spring) . F Hydraulic System Mineral Oil {LHM) is fitted Within the first year (Autumn) then every two years G adjacent to the battery. Every 2 years (Autumn) H Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the systems when work is being carried out. Regular maintenance Operations to be carried out at weekly, monthly or The service schedule chart in this section three monthly intervals are specified in Chapter B. indicates the operations required to service the· vehicle. When carrying out the schedules, reference should be Service recommendation made to Chapter B which describes the correct If the car is used for constant stop/start operations, procedure to be used for each operation. In order to the engine oil should be changed every 5000 locate this information the operation numbers quoted kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months whichever is in the service schedule chart correspond with those in earlier. Chapter B. It is important that, as certain maintenance items Time allowance in the service schedules are essential requirements to Schedule Time in hours conform with the Rolls-Royce Motors New Car I 2.0 Warranty or with relevant emission control regulations, A 8.5 maintenance is carried out at the times specified. B 10.0 These items are indicated as follows. C 12.5 • Operations necessary to comply with Rolls-Royce D 5.5 Motors New Car Warranty during the warranty period. E 17.0 t Operations necessary to comply with the relevant F 1.5 Emission Control Regulations. These items must be G 1.0 carried out during the entire service life of the vehicle. H 2.5

Service schedules When replacing brake pads, drive belts, ball joints,or All service schedules should be carried out at the other items as a result of a service inspection. add the appropriate mileage or time interval whichever is respective manhour schedule time. earlier. If it is necessary to carry out the 5000 kilometres The !>ervi9e intervals and corresponding code (3000 miles) or 3 montl:ls service recommendation letters used ,on the service schedule chart are as the time allowance is 0,5 hour. follows.

Initial 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months I 10 000 kilometres (6000 miles) or 6 months A 20 000 kilometres ( 12 000 miles) or 1 year B 30 000 kilometres (18 000 miles) or 1Yi years A

TSO 4406

Service schedule operations A B C D E F G H Car protection Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in ChaP.ter B. * * -*--*- _:!!_ -*--*--*--*- Engine 1"' Change the engine oil. --* ----* * --* ------2• Renew the engine oil filter. -- -- 3 Check the engine oil level; top-up if necessary. -- * -- * -- * ------4 Check the drive belts; adjust and renew if ----* -- * -- * ------necessary. ------·------5"'t Renew the air filter element. --* - *- * * 6"t Clean the crankcase breather tube flame trap. ------* --* ------7"t Clean the choke butterfly housing adapter (SU * * carburetters). a•t Clean the air cleaner breather housing ---- * . * ~------~---- connection (Solex carburetter). 9*t Check the carburetter damper oil level; top-up if * * necessary (SU carburetters). 1O*t Renew the sparking plugs. * * * 1 1*t Lubricate the distributor. * * 12 Lubricate the accelerator and carburetter linkage. * * 13"'t Check for correct choke operation and choke -- * - *- - *------stove pipe flow; rectify if necessary (SU carburetters). 14*t Check the float chamber depression; adjust if * necessary (SU carburetters). * * 15 t Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary. ----* --* --* ------16 t Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary: * * * 17 t Check the choke idle speed; adjust if necessary. * * * Engine cooling system 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration; correct if necessary. 2 Check the coolant level; top·up if necessary. ----* --* --* ------3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness. ----* --* --* ------4• Examine the col')dition of all coolant hoses; * * * * renew as necessary. ------s• Fit a new heater tap feed hose (irrespective of -- * -- * ------* -- * visual appearance). 6 Renew the coolant. ------* " 7 Reverse flush the coolant system. ------~ * * 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator. and * refrigeration condenser. * * 9• Renew the thermostat. * Torque converter transmission 1 • Check the transmission fluid level; tor:rup if necessary. * * * * 2• Renew the transmission fluid. ____. -- * * ------3* Fit a new intake strainer. * 4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod. * * * Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints {not applicable to rubber jointed propeller shaft). * Final drive unit 1• Check the final drive oil level; top-up if necessary. ------* --* ------

September 1982 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section Cl C1 ·5

A B C D E F G H 2* Renew the final drive oil. 3 Grease the drive-shah universal joints (if * applicable). 4 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint * covers; renew if necessary. * * * Steering 1 Check the steering pump fluid level; top-up if necessary. 2• Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints (if --* --* --* --* ------applicable). 3• Check the condition of the steering ball joint * * covers; renew if necessary. 4* Check the condition of the steering rack * * * convoluted seals; renew if necessary. -- * * * ------Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers; renew the ball joints if necessary. 2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted * * * seals; renew if necessary. * * * 3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints. * * * Brake and hydraulic systems ( see page C1 · 1) 1 Check the resentoir mineral oil level; top-up if necessary. * * * 2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil. * * 3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses; renew as necessary. 4 Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms * * * to body hoses. 5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses. * 6* Check the brake disc pads for wear; renew if * necessary. 7• Check the condition of the brake caliper dust * * * excluders when changing brake pads; renew if necessary. 8 Renew the brake caliper seals. * * * 9" Check the parking brake pads for wear; renew if * necessary. ----* --* - *------10* Adjust the parking brake. ----* --* --* ------11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage. * * * Fuel system 1 Renew the filter element. 2*t Clean the carburetter fuel inlet filter(Solex * carburetter} 3•t Fit new paper filter elements to the carburetter * fuel inlets (SU carburetters). 4• Renew the fuel mixture weakening device filter * (SU carburetters). 5 Fit a new, filler head to fuel tank., hose. * 6 Examine all flexible fuel pipes; renew if * necessary. * 7 Test fuel pump for efficiency; renew if necessary. * Electrical system 1 • Check the state of charge of the battery; top-up the electrolyte level if necessary dependent on battery type. * * *

TSO 4406

A B C D E F G H 2 Clean and check the battery terminals. * * * 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary. 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation; -- * * * ------rectify if necessary. ------5 Check all interior lamps for operation; rectify if ----* * --* --- - necessary. 6 Check the horns for operation; rectify if -- * * * ------necessary. 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp washer ---*- * * ------reservoir. -- 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper -- * --* --* ------blades. and headlamp wash brushes (if fitted); renew if necessary. 9 Check the windscreen and headlamp wash/wipe * * * for correct operation; rectify if necessary. 10 Check the alternator for correct operation; renew -- * * * ------brushes if necessary. ------11 Check the condition of the starter motor brushes ----* * ------and pinion; renew if necessary. * Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from obstruction. 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct * operation; rectify if necessary. * Body 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat belts: report any defects to the Owner. 2 Check that all body drains are free from -- * * * ------obstruction. 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt. __ _ _ * * ______* *_

4 Convertible cars. Check the fluid level in the power operated hood reservoir; top-up if necessary. The hood should be in the fully down (open position). ______* ______

Wheels 1 Check all tyre pressures; adjust if necessary. __ * * * ______2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres; report any defects to the Owner. __ * * * ______

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance. * * * - *-~-*------Owners Service Schedule Record On completion of the required service schedule complete the respective voucher contained in the Owners Seivice Schedule and Record book. * * * * * -*--*-- *-- *-

November 1 984 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section C 1/1 C1 / 1-1

Service schedules

Contents Pages Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur Cars from vehicle identification numbeP\c·SCBZSOT05CCH04233 Cl/1 -3 C1 / 1-3

TS04406

Service schedules Bentley Mulsanne Turbo and Bentley Turbo R

Initial 3 months or 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) 1 6 months or 10 000 kilometres (6000 miles) A 1 year or 20 000 kilometres ( 1 2 000 miles) B WARNI NG 1 Yz years or 30 000 kilometres ( 1 8 000 miles) A 2 years or 40 000 kilometres (24 000 miles) C Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to 2Yz years or 50 000 kilometres (30 000 miles) A 3 years or 60 000 kilometres (36 000 miles) B replenish the braking and levelling systems. 3Yz years or 70 000 kilometres (42 miles) A Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363, 000 4 years or 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) C&D Universal. or any other type). The use of any type of 4Yz years or 90 000 kilometres (54 000 miles) A brake fluid, even in very small amounts. will cause 5 years or t 00 000 kilometres (60 000 miles) B component failure necessitating extensive rectification 5Yz years or 110 000 kilometres (66 000 miles) A to the braking and levelling systems of the car. 6 years or 120 000 kilometres {72 miles) Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, 000 C 6Yz years or 130 000 kilometres {78 000 miles) A pipes, etc. that they are suitable for a mineral oil 7 years or 140 000 kilometres (84 000 miles) B system. For details of correct component identification 7Yz years or 1 50 000 kilometres (90 000 miles) A reference should be made to Chapter G of the 8 years or 160 000 kilometres (96 000 miles} C&E Workshop Manual. Always ensure that a sealed container of Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted Seasonal adjacent to the battery. Every year (Spring} F Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the Within the first year (Autumn) then every two years G systems when work is being carried out. Every 2 years (Autumn) H

Regular maintenance Operations to be carried out at weekly, monthly or The service schedule chart in this section three monthly intervals are specified in Chapter B. indicates the operations required to service the vehicle. When carrying out the schedules, reference should be Service recommendation made to Chapter B which descri.bes the correct If the car is used for constant stop/start operations, procedure to be used for each operation. In order to the engine oil should be changed every 3 months or locate this information the operation numbers quoted 5000 kilometres {3000 miles) whichever is earlier. in the service schedule chart correspond with those in Chapter B. It is important that. as certain maintenance items in the service schedules are essential requirements to Time allowance conform with the Rolls-Royce Motors New Car Schedule Time in hours Warranty or with relevant emission control regulations, I 2.0 maintenance is carried out at the times specified. A 8.5 These items are indicated as follows. B 10.0 *Operations necessary to comply with Rolls-Royce C 12.5 Motors New Car Warranty during the warranty period. D 5.5 tOperations necessary to comply with the relevant E 17.0 Emission Control Regulations. These items must be F 1.5 carried out during the entire service life of the vehicle. G 1.0 H 2.5 Service schedules All service schedules should be carried out at the When replacing brake pads. drive belts, ball joints or appropriate time interval or mileage whichever is other items as a result of a service inspection, add the earlier. respective manhour schedule time. The service intervals and corresponding code If it is necessary to carry out the 3 months or letters used on the service schedule chart are as 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) service. follows. recommendation the time allowance is 0.5 hour.

TSO 4406

Service schedule operations A B C D E F G H Car protection ------Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in Chapter B. * * - *- - *- 2-- *- - *- - *- - *- Engine 1 * Change the engine oil. 2* Renew the engine oil filter. * * * * ------ 3 Check the engine oil level; top-up if necessary. ------* * --* ------4 Check the drive belts; adjust and renew if -- * * * ------necessary. 5*t Renew the air filter element. * * * * ------6*t Clean the crankcase breather flame trap. ---- * * ------7*t Renew the sparking plugs. ------* --* ------8 Lubricate the distributor (if applicable). ------* --* ------9 Lubricate the accelerator and carburetter linkage. - - --- *-- *------10t Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary. -- * * - *------11t Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary. -- * * - *------12t Check the choke idle speed; adjust if necessary. - - * * * ------*- ~ - *------Engine cooling system 1 Check the coolant anti-freeze concentration; correct if necessary. 2 Check the coolant level; top-up if necessary. --- *-- *- -*------3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness. -- * * * ------4* Examine the condition of all coolant hoses; * * * * ------renew as necessary. 5* Fit a new heater tap feed hose (irrespective of * * * * visual appearance). 6 Renew the coolant. ------* ------7 Reverse flush the coolant system. ------* -- * 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator, oil * cooler, and refrigeration condenser. 9* Renew the thermostat. * * ------* ------Torque converter transmission 1 * Check the transmission fluid level; top-up if necessary. 2* Renew the transmission fluid. * * * * ------ 3"' Fit a new intake strainer. ------* --* ------4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod. ------* ------* * * ------Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints. ------* ------Final drive unit 1* Check the final drive oil level; top-up if necessary. 2* Renew the final drive oil. ---- * * ------3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint * covers; renew if necessary. -- * * * ------Steering 1 Check the steering pump fluid level; top·up if necessary. 2* Check the condition of the steeririg ball joint * * * * ~------covers; renew if necessary. 3* Check the condition of the steering rack ----* --* --* ------convoluted seals; renew if necessary. ----* --* --* ------

November 1984 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section C1/1 C1/1·5 A B C D E F G H Suspension ------1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers; renew the ball joints if necessary. 2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted ----* --* - *------seals; renew if necessary. ------* * -- * ------3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints. ----* - *- --* ------Brake and hydraulic system (see page C1/1·2) 1 Check the reservoir mineral oil level; top·up if necessary. 2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil. ---*--- * --* ------3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses; * * renew as necessary. 4 Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms * * * to body hoses. -- 5 Renew all hydraulic system hoses. ------* - - -- 6"' Check the brake disc pads for wear; renew if * necessary. 1• Check the condition of the brake caliper dust -- * * - *------excluders when changing brake pads; renew if necessary. 8 Renew the brake caliper seals. . ------* * * - -- 9• Check the parking brake pads for wear; renew if * necessary. 1 O• Adjust the parking brake. -- * * * ------11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage. ------* __!___* ----*______------_

Fuel system 1 Renew the filter element. 2't Clean the carburetter fuel inlet filter * 3 Fit a new. filler head to fuel tank, hose. * 4 Examine all flexible fuel pipes; renew if * necessary. 5 Test fuel pump for efficiency; renew if * necessary. * Electrical system 1 * Check the state of charge of the battery; top-up the electrolyte level if necessary dependent on battery type. 2 Clean and check the battery terminals. ------* * --* ------3 Check all exterior lamps for operation; rectify if * * * necessary. 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation; * * * rectify if necessary. 5 Check all interior lamps for operation; rectify if * * * necessary. 6 Check the horns for operation; rectify if * * * necessary. 7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp washer * * * reservoir. 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wi~r ----* --* ----* ------blades, and headlamp wash brushes (if fitted); renew if necessary. 9 Check the windscreen and headlamp wash/wipe * * * for correct operation; rectify if necessary. 10 Check the alternator for correct operation; renew -- * * * ------brushes if necessary. 11 Check the condition of the starter motor brushes * * and pinion; renew if necessary. * TSO 4406

A B C D E F G H

Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grill is free from obstruction. 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct * operation; rectify if necessary. * Body 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat belts; report any defects to the Owner. 2 Check that all body drains are free from ----* -- * --* ------obstruction. * * 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt. * * Wheels 1 Check all tyre pressures; adjust rf necessary. 2 Cheek the condition and tread depth of the tyres; report any defects to the Owner.

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance. --* --* --* --* --* --* ------Owners Service Schedule Record On completion of the required service schedule complete the respective voucher contained in the Owners Service Schedule and Record book. * * * * * -*- ___.!._ -*--*-

September 1982 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Chapter D

Service schedules Cars conforming to Australian specifications

Contents Sections Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1981/1985 (inclusive) model year cars 01 D1 Dl 1986 model year cars 01/1

TS04406

Issue record sheet 1 July 1985

The dates quoted below refer to the issue date of individual pages within this chapter.

Sections Page No. Contents 1 Sep 84 Jul 85 2 Sep 84 Jul 85 3 Sep 84 Jul 85 4 Sep 84 Jul 85 ------''---....:._------5 Sep 84 Jul 85 6 Sep 84 7 8 109 ------11 12 13 14 ______15 16 17 18 2019 ------21 22 23 2425 ------26 27 28 3029 ------31 32 33 3534 ------36 37 38 4039 ------41 42 43 44 ______45 46 47 48

TSD4406

SeNice schedules 1981/82/83/84 model year cars

The Preventive maintenance service schedules WARNING listed thus(P) contain important servicing work recommended to secure the maximum life and efficiency for the car and will only be carried out on the owner's instructions. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to replenish the braking and levelling systems. All service schedules should be car.ried out at the Do not use Brake Fluids (Castro! RR363, appropriate mileage. Universal. or any other type). The use of any type of The service intervals and corresponding code brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause letters used on the service schedule chart are as component failure necessitating extensive rectification follows. to the brake and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses. Initial 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months I pipes. etc. that they are suitable for a mineral 011 10 000 kilometres (6000 miles) or 6 months A system. For details of correct component identification ·20 000 kilometres (12 000 miles) or 1 year B reference should be made to Chapter G of the 30 000 kilometres (18 000 miles} or 1Y:i years A Workshop Manual. 40 000 kilometres (24 000 miles) or 2 years C Always ensure that a sealed container of 50 000 kilometres (30 000 miles} or 2Yz years A Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted 60 000 kilometres (36 000 mjles) or 3 years B adjacent to the battery. 70 000 kilometres (42 000 miles) or 33'2 years A Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or 4 years D systems when work is being carried out 90 000 kilometres (54 000 miles) or 4Yz years A 100 000 kilometres (60 000 miles} or 5 years B The service schedule chart in this section 110 000 kilometres (66 000 miles} or 53'2 years A . indicates the operations required to service the vehicle. . 120 000 kilometres (72 000 miles) or 6 years C When carrying out the schedules. reference should be 130 000 kilometres (78 000 miles) or 63'2 years A made to Chapter B which describes the correct 140 000 kilometres (84 000 miles) or 7 years B procedure to be used for each operation. In order to 150 000 kilometres (90 000 miles) or 73'2 years A locate this information the operation numbers quoted 160 000 kilometres (96 000 miles) or 8 years D in the service schedule chart correspond with those in The service schedules are repeated after 160 000 Chapter B. kilometres (96 000 miles).

Service schedules Seasonal

The service schedules contain both the Essential and Preventive service schedules for complete ve!)icle E Service schedule maintenance. To be carried out at intervals of one year All work listed in the Essential maintenance service schedules should be carried out at the F Service schedule specified mileage intervals. To be carried out at intervals of two years The Essential maintenance service schedules are divided into two categories. G Service schedule To be carried out at intervals of four years (a) Service work listed thus("E) covers the servicing requirements for the emission control components H Service schedule and is required to comply with the emission To be carried out at intervals of eight years control regulations. This service work must be carried out during the entire life of the vehicle. Adverse condition maintenance When the car is operating continuously under adverse (b) Service work listed thus(E) covers the additional conditions, such as are experienced in cities and towns servicing required to comply with the Rolls-Royce where constant stopping and starting is the normal Motors Warranty or is considered essential rule, the engine oil should be changed every 5000 beyond the warranty period from a safety point of kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months whichever is the view. earlier.

TSD4406

Regular maintenance Operations to be carried out at weekly, monthly, or three monthly intervals are specified in Chapter B.

Time allowance Schedule Time in hours Essential Preventive I 1.75 0.30 A 2.00 1.50 B 5.50 1.50 C 8.75 2.00 D 12.00 2.00 E Nominal 1.00 F Nominal 3.50 G 4.50 3.50 H 13.00 3.50

When replacing brake pads, drive belts. ball joints, or other items as a result of a service inspection, add the respective man-hour schedule time. If it is necessary to carry out the 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months service recommendation • j the time allowance is 0.5 hour.

November 1983 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section D1 D1-3

Service schedule operations A B C D E F G H Car protection Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in Chapter B. EE EE EE EE E

Crankcase emission control system 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame traps ---- *E "E ~------2 Clean the choke butter11y housing adapter --__ 1_ ~ _:e_ ------

Exhaust emission control system Exhaust gas recirculation system 1 Remove and clean the E.G.R. valves and feed pipes ------1._ ------2 Clean the E.G.R. orifices in the carburetter Tee· piece "E 3 Check the E.G.R. valves for correct operation ------*E ------

Air injection system 4 Check the condition and tension of the drive belt; adjust or renew as necessery E __ *E *E *E ------5 Check the system for leaks and correct operation; renew any defective components ----·-- *E *E ______

Fuel evaporative emission control system 1 Renew the evaporative loss control cannister ------*E ------·- - 2 Check the condition of all pipes, hoses, and connections; renew if necessary. Pressure test the fuel tank and evaporative loss control line; rectify any leaks E __ *E *E "E ------3 Check the purge flow rate; rectify if necessary _e_.. -- ....:e_ 1------

Engine 1 Change the engine oil E *E *E *E *E ------2 Renew the engine oil filter -- *E *E *E *E ------3 Check the condition and tension of all drive belts; adjust or renew as necessary E E E E E ---~---- 4 Renew the air filter element --- - *E *E *E ------5 Check the oil level in the damper of each carburetter; top-up if necessary _E_ _f_ ..:e_ ~ _l_ ------6 Clean the carburetter air valve pistons ------*E *E ------7 Check the float chamber depression; adjust if necessary _E_ --..:e_ ....:e_ ..:e_ ------8 Check for correct choke operation and choke stove pipe flow; rectify if necessary E ____ *E *E ------9 Check the choke fast-idle speed; adjust if necessary E *E *E "E . "E *E "E 1 0 Renew the sparking plugs ------11 Lubricate the distributor ( 1 981 /82 model year cars only) *E *E *E 12 Lubricate the accelerator linkage -- p p p p ------13 Check the torque tightness of the exhaust manifold setscrews ____ *E *E *E ------14 Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary E __ *E *E * E ------15 Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary E __ *E *E "E ------

Engine cooling system 1 Check the anti-freeze concentration; correct if necessary -- p p p p ------2 Check the coolant level; top-up if necessary -- E E E E ----~--~ 3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness E p p p p ------

TSO 4406

A B C D E F G H 4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses; renew as necessary ---- E E E ----~--- 5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose (irrespective of visual appearance) ------E E ----~--- 6 Renew the coolant ------p p p p 7 Reverse flush the cooling system p p p ------8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator and refrigeration condenser ------p p p p 9 Renew the thermostat ------*E *E ------Torque converter transmission 1 Check the transmission fluid level; top-up if necessary E E ------2 Renew the transmission fluid --- - E E E ------3 Fit a new intake strainer ------E E ------4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod -- P. p p p ------

Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints (not applicable to a rubber jointed propeller shaft) ______E E ______

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level; top·up if necessary __ E E ------2 Renew the final drive oil ~----- E E ------3 Check the condition of the drive-shah joint covers; renew if necessary -- p p p p ------

Steering 1 Check the steering pump fluid level; top-up if necessary P E E E E ______2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints (if applicable) __ __ E E _f______3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers; renew if necessary ____ _E._ _f_ _e______4 Check the condition of the steering rack con_yoluted seals; renew if necessary. Ensure that the clips are tight __ __ E E E ______

$uspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers; renew the ball joints if necessary _ _ __ E E E ______2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted seals; renew if necessary -- p p p p ------3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints ------Brake and "'ydraulic systems ( see page D 1-1) 1 Check the. oil level in the reseryoirs; if necessary top-up with hydraulic system mineral oil __ E E E E ------2 Renew the hydrau.lic system mineral oil ------E ------3 Check the conditi_on of all brake pipes and hoses; renew as necessary -- E E E E ------4 Renew the accumulator to body, trailing arms to body, and sub-fra_rne te> body hoses ------E ------5 Renew all flexible hoses ------E E 6 Check the brake disc pads for wear; renew if necessary __ E E E E ------7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust excluders when changing brake pads; renew if E E E E necessary ------8 _Renew the brake caliper seals ------E

November 1983 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section D1 D1·5

A B C D E F G H 9 Check the parking brake pads for wear; renew if E E E E necessary -- E E E E -- 10 Adjust the parking brake 11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage -- p p p p ------

Fuel system 1 Renew the main fuel filter ------p p ------Remove. clean. and examine the intank fuel filter; renew if necessary ------E ------2 Fit new paper filter elements to the carburetter fuel inlets ------~~-~------3 Renew the fuel mixture weakening device filter ------*E *E _ _ ------4 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel tank hose; renew as necessary ------E E 5 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes; renew as necessary ------E -- E Electrical system 1 Check the battery electrolyte level and condition; top·up if necessary E -- E -- E -- E -- -- 2 Clean and check the battery terminals --__--P___ P _ _e_ __L______---- _ 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary --_f_ _e_ _e_ _e_ ------4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ------5 Check all interior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ------~ 6 Check the horns for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ------7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp washers reservoir -- E E E E ------8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper blades and headlamp wash brushes; renew if necessary --_f_ _e_ _e_ _.e_ ------9 Check the windscreen and headlamp wash/ wipe system for correct operation; rectify if necessary ~- p p p p ------10 Check the alternator for correct operation; renew brushes and slip rings if necessary ------_e_ _e_ _ - - --

Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from obstruction ------.....f...._ _e_ .....f...._ ___e._ 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct operation; rectify if necessary ------p p p p

Body 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat belts; report a~y defects to the owner -- p p p p ------p p p p 2 Check that all body drains are free from obstruction ------3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt p p p 4 Convertible cars Check the fluid level in the power operated hood reservoir; top-up if necessary. The hood should be in the fully down (open) position ------p p ----~---

Wheels 1 Check alt tyre pressures; adjust if necessary -- p p p p ------2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres; report any defects to the owner - - p p p _ P ______

TSD4406

A B C D E F G H Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance p p p p p ~--~~--~

Owner Service Schedule Record On completion of the required service schedule complete the respective voucher contained in the Owners Service Schedule and Record book. EE EE EE E E_J_

l j

) \

NOi/ember 1983 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section D1/1 01/1·1

Service schedules 1986 model year cars

The Preventive maintenance service schedules listed thus (Pl contain important servicing work WARNING recommended to secure the maximum life and efficiency for the car and will only be carried out on Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to the owner's instructions. replenish the braking and levelling systems. All service schedules should be carried out at the Do not use Brake Fluids (Castro! RR363, appropriate mileage or time interval whichever is Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of earlier. brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause The service intervals and corresponding code component failure necessitating extensive rectification letters used on the service schedule chart are as to the braking and levelling systems of the car. follows. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, Initial 5000 kilometres (3000 miles}· I pipes. etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil 12 000 kilometres (7500 miles) A system. For details of correct component identification 24 000 kilometres (15 000 miles) B reference should be made to Chapter G of the 36 000 kilometres (22 .500 miles) A Workshop Manual. 48 000 kilometres (30 000 miles) C Always ensure that a sealed container of 60 000 kilometres (37 500 miles) A Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted 72 000 kilometres (45 000 miles) B adjacent to the battery. 84 000 kilometres (52 500 miles) A Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the 96 000 kilometres (60 000 miles) D systems when work is being carried out. 108 000 kilometres (67 500 miles) A 120 000 kilometres (75 000 miles) B The service schedule chart in this section indicates 1 32 000 kilometres (82 500 miles) A the operations required to service the vehicle. When 144 000 kilometres {90 000 miles) C carrying out the schedules, reference should be made to 156 000 kilometres (97 500 miles) A Chapter B which describes the correct procedure to be 168 000 kilometres ( 105 000 miles) 8 used for each operation. In order to locate this 180 000 kilometres ( 112 500 miles) A information the operation numbers quoted in the service 192 000 kilometres ( 120 000 miles} D schedule chart correspond with those in Chapter B. The service schedules are repeated after 192 000 kilometres ( 120 000 miles).

Service schedules The service schedules contain both the Essential and Seasonal Preventive service schedules for complete vehicle E Service schedule maintenance. To be carried out at intervals of one year All work listed in the Essential maintenance service schedules should be carried out at the F Service schedule specified mileage/time intervals. To be carried out at intervals of two years

The Essential maintenance service schedules are G Service schedule divided into two categories. To be carried out at intervals of four years

(a) Service work listed thus (*E) cover~ the servicing H Service schedule requirements for the emission control components To be carried out at intervals of eight years and is required to comply with the emission control regulations. This service work must be Adverse conditions maintenance carried out during the entire life of the vehicle. When the car is operating continuously under adverse conditions, such as are experienced in cities and towns (b) Service work listed thus (E) covers the additional where constant stopping and starting is the normat servicing required to comply with the New Car rule, the engine oil should be changed every 5000 Warranty or is considered essential beyond kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months whichever is the the warranty period from a safety point of view. earlier.

TSO 4406

Regular maintenance Operations to be carried out at weekly, monthly. or three monthly intervals are specified in Chapter B.

Time allowance Schedule Time in hours Essential Preventive I 1.0 0.5 A 2.5 2.0 B 4.0 3.5 C 6.5 5.0 D 14.0 2.5 E Nominal 0.75 F Nominal 3.75 G 4.50 3.50 H 13.0 3.50

When replacing brake pads. drive belts. ball joints. or other items as a result of a service inspection. add the respective man-hour schedule time. If it is necessary to carry out the 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months service recommendation the time allowance is 0.5 hour.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section D1 /1 D1/1·3

Service schedule operations A B C D E F G H

Car protection Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in Chapter B. EE EE EE EE E

Crankcase emission control system 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame traps ------P E ------

Exhaust emission control system Exhaust system 1 Renew the oxygen sensor and reset the elapsed mileage indicator

Exhaust gas recirculation system 2 Remove and clean the E.G. R. valve and feed pipes ------E ------3 Check the E.G.A. valve for correct operation ------e ------

Air injection system 4 Check the condition and tension of the drive belt; adjust or renew as necessary ______*E E ______5 Check the system for leaks and correct operation; renew any defective components ______E ______

Fuel evaporative emission control system 1 Renew the evaporative emission control canister ------E ------2 Check the condition of all pipes. hoses, and connections; renew if necessary ---- p p E ------3 Check the purge flow rate; rectify if necessary ------p E ------

Engine 1 Change the engine oil *E *E •E *E E ______2 Renew the engine oil filter __ *E *E •e E ______3 Check the condition and tension of the drive belts; adjust or renew as necessary E E E E _ E ______4 Renew the air filter element ______~ _ E______5 Renew the sparking plugs ______~ _E______6 Lubricate the accelerator linkage P P P P 7 Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary _ _ __ P P E ------8 Check for correct operation of the vacuum advance mechanism ---~ p p E - --~~--- 9 Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary E __ P P E ---~~---

Engine cooling system 1 Check the anti-freeze concentration; correct if necessary ~- p p p p ~--~~--~ 2 Check the coolant level; top-up if necessary __ E E E E ------3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness E p p p p ------4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses; renew p E as necessary ~----- p E ~- -~ 5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose 6 Renew the coolant ------p p p p 7 Reverse flush the cooling system ------p p p 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator, oil cooler, and refrigeration condenser ~------p p p p 9 Renew the thermostat ~--~~- p E ~--~~--~

Torque converter transmission 1 Check the transmission fluid level; top-up if necessary E E ~ ------~-

TSD 4406

A B C D E F G H

2 Renew the transmission fluid ____ E E E ------3 Fit a new intake strainer ------E E ------4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod -- p p p p ------~

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level; top-up if necessary __ _ E__ E______2 Renew the final drive oil ______E E ______3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint covers; renew if necessary __ P P P P ______

Steering 1 Check the steering pump fluid level; top-up if necessary P E E E E ------2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints (if applicable) ---- E E E ------3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers; renew if necessary ---- E E E ------4 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals; renew if necessary. ---- E E E ------

Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers; renew the ball joints if necessary __ __ E E E ______2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted seals; renew if necessary -- p p p p ------~ 3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints ------p p ------

Brake and hydraulic systems (see page D1/1 • 1) 1 Check the oil level in the reservoirs; if necessary top-up with hydraulic system mineral oil __ E E E ______2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil ______E ______3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses; renew as necessary __ E E E E ------ 4 Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms E to body hoses ------E E 5 Renew all flexible hoses ------6 Check the brake disc pads for wear; renew if necessary ----E --E --E ---- E ------7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust excluders when changing brake pads; renew if necessary __ E E E E ------8 Renew the brake caliper seals ------E 9 Check the parking brake pads for wear; renew if necessary __ E E E E ------10 Adjust the parking brake -- E E E E ------~ 11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage -- p p p p ------~

Fuel system 1 Renew the main fuel filter ------E ------Remove. clean. and examine the intank fuel filter; renew if necessary ------E ------2 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel tank hose; renew as necessary ------E E 3 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes; renew as necessary ------E E Electrical system 1 Check the state of charge of the battery E E E E -- p p p p ------~ 2 Clean and check the battery terminals ------

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section Dl/1 01/1-5

A B C D E F G H

3 Check all exterior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ------4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- P P P P ------5 Check all interior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary __ P P P p ------6 Check the horns for operation; rectify if necessary _ _ P P P P ______7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp washer reservoirs __ E E E E ------8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper blades; renew if necessary -- p p p p ------9 Check the windscreen and headlamp wash/ wipe systems for correct operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ------10 Check the alternator for correct operation; renew brushes if necessary ------p p ------

Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from p obstruction p p p 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct operation; rectify if necessary ------p p p p

Body 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat belts; report any defects to the owner __ P P P _ P______2 Check that all body drains are free from obstruction ______P P P P 3 lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt __ __ P P P ______

Wheels 1 Ch.eek all tyre pressures; adjust if necessary ~- p p p p ~------~ 2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres; report any defects to the owner ~- p p p p ~ ------

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance p p p p p ------

Owner Service Schedule Record On completion of the required service schedule complete the respective voucher contained in the Owner's Service Schedule and Record book. EE EE EE EE E

TSO 4406

Service schedules Cars conforming to Japanese specifications

Contents Sections Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1981/1985 (inclusive) model year cars E1 E1 E1 1 986 model year cars El E1

TSO 4406

Issue record sheet 1 July 1985 The dates quoted below refer to the issue date of individual pages within this chapter.

Sections Page No. Contents 1 Ju185 2 Jul 85 3 Jul85 4 Jul85 5 ------Jul 85 6 7 8 109 ------11 12 13 14 ______15 16 17 18 20~19 ------21 22 23 2524 ------26 27 28 3029 ------31 32 33 35--34 ------36 37 38 39 ______40 41 42 43 44 ______~ 45 46 47 48

TSD4406

Service schedules 1981 /1986 "model year cars

The Preventive maintenance service schedules listed thus{P) contain important servicing work WARNING recommended to secure the maximum life and efficiency Use o~ly Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to for the car and will only be carried out on the owner· s replenish the braking and levelling systems. instructions. Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363. All service schedules should be carried out at the Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of appropriate mileage or time interval whichever is earlier. brake fluid. even in very small amounts, will cause The service intervals and corresponding code letters component failure necessitating extensive rectification used on the service schedule chart are as follows. to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, Initial 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months I pipes. etc.. that they are suitable for a mineral oil 10 000 kilometres (6000 miles) or 6 months A system. For details of correct compone~t identification 20 000 kilometres { 1 2 000 miles} or 1 year B reference should be made to Chapter G of the 30 000 kilometres { 1 8 000 miles) or 1 Yz years A Workshop Manual. 40 000 i<.ilometres (24 000 miles) or 2 years C Always ensure that a sealed container of 50 000 kilometres (30 000 miles) or 2!12 years A Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted 60 000 kilometres (36 000 miles) or 3 years B adjacent to the battery. 70 000 kilometres (42 000 miles) or 3% years A Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or 4 years D systems when work is being carried out. 90 000 kilometres (54 000 miles) or 4% years A 100 000 kilometres (60 000 miles) or 5 years B 110 000 kilometres (66 000 miles) or 5Yz years A The service schedule chart in this section indicates kilometres (72 miles) or 6 years C the operations required to service the vehicle. When 120 000 000 kilometres miles) or years carrying out the schedules, reference should be made to 130 000 (78 000 6Y:z A kilometres (84 miles) or years B Chapter B which describes the correct procedure to be 140 000 000 7 kilometres miles) or years used for each operation. In order to locate this 150 000 (90 000 7Y:z A kilometres miles) or years information the operation numbers quoted in the service 160 000 (96 000 8 D The service schedules repeated after schedule chart correspond with those in Chapter B. are 160 000 kilometres (96 000 miles).

Service schedules Seasonal The service schedules contain both the Essential and E Service schedule Preventive service schedules for complete vehicle To be carried out at intervals of one year maintenance. All work listed in the Essential maintenance service schedules should be carried out at the specified mileage/ F Service schedule time intervals. To be carried out at intervals of two years

The Essential maintenance service schedules are G Service schedule divided into two categories. To be carried out at intervals of four years

(a) Service work listed thus(*E) covers the servicing requirements for the emission control components H Service schedule and is required to comply with the emission To be carried out at intervals of eight years control regulations. This service work must be carried out during the entire life of the vehicle. Adverse conditions maintenance When the car is operating continuously under adverse (b) Service work listed thus (E) covers the additional conditions. such as are experienced in cities and towns servicing required to comply with the New Car where constant stopping and starting is the normal rule, Warranty or is considered essential beyond the engine oil should be changed every 5000 kilometres the warranty period from a safety point of view. (3000 miles) or 3 months whichever is the earlier.

TSO 4406

Regular maintenance Operations to be carried out at weekly, monthly, or three monthly intervals are specified in Chapter B.

Time allowance Schedule Time in hours Essential Preventive I 1.25 Nominal A 2.25 1.25 B 5.00 1.25 C 9.00 2.00 D 12.50 2.00 E Nominal 0.75 F Nominal · 3.75 G 4.50 3.75 H 13.00 3.75

When replacing brake pads, drive belts, ball joints, or other items as a result of a service inspection. add the respective man-hour schedule time. If it is necessary to carry out the 5000 kilometres I:. (3000 miles) or 3 months service recommendation ,} the time allowance is 0.5 hour.

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section E1 E1·3

SeNice schedule operations A B C D E F G H

Car protection Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in Chapter 8. e EE EE EE Ee

Crankcase emission control system 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame traps ____ •E •e •E _ _ ------

Exhaust emission control system Exhaust system 1 Renew the oxygen sensor Every 50 000 kilometres (30 000 miles) _____ *E 2 Fit a new catalytic converter ------3 Inspect the catalytic converter overheat thermo· couple and wiring, renew if there is visual evidence of damage ------*E ------4 Inspect the grass-fire heatshields for damage. Rectify or renew the shields to ensure that a minimum clearance of 5 mm (0.20 in) is main tained between the heatshields and the exhaust pipes *E *E *E *E

Exhaust gas recirculation system *E 5 Remove and clean the E.G.R. valve and feed pipes ------6 Check the E.G.R. valve for correct operation ------*E ------

Fuel evaporative emission control system 1 Renew the evaporative emission control canister *E 2 Check the condition of all pipes, hoses, and connections: renew if necessary E *E *E *E 3 Check the purge flow rate; rectify if necessary *E ____ *E *E ------

Engine 1 Change the engine oil _E_ *E *E *E *E ------2 Renew the engine oil filter -- *E *E *E *E ______3 Check the condition and tension of all the drive belts; adjust or renew as necessary __ E E E E ------4 Renew the air filter element *E *E *E 5 Renew the sparking plugs *E *E *E 6 Lubricate the distributor ( 1981 /82 model year cars only) *E *E *E ------7 Lubricate the accelerator linkage p p p p 8 Check the torque tightness of the exhaust manifold setscrews ------*E --*E -"E------9 Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary E __ *E *E *E ------10 Check for correct operation of the vacuum advance/retard mechanism ---- *E *E *E ------1 1 Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary E __ *E *E •e ------

Engine cooling system 1 Check the anti-freeze concentration; correct if necessary p p p p ------2 Check the coolant level; top-up if necessary -- E E E E ------3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness E p p p p ------4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses; renew as necessary ------E - E------5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose --_____E __ E____ _ 6 Renew the coolant ______P__ P_ P P 7 Reverse flush the cooling system ______P _ _ P_ _ P_

TSD4406

A B C D E F G H 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator, oil cooler (if fitted}, and refrigeration condenser ------p p p p 9 Renew the thermostat ______*E *E ------

Torque converter transmission 1 Check the transmission fluid level; top·up if necessary E E ------2 Renew the transmission fluid ---- E E E ------3 Fit a new intake strainer ------E E ------4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod -- p p p p ------

Propeller shaft 1 lubricate the universal joints (not applicable to a rubber jointed propeller shaft) ______E E ______

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level; top·up if necessary __ E E ______2 Renew the final drive oil ______E E ______3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint covers; renew if necessary __ _ P__ P__ P__ P______

Steering 1 Check the steering pump fluid level; top·up if necessary P E E E E ------2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints (if applicable) ---- E E E ------3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers;renew if necessary E E E 4 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals; renew if necessary ____ E E E ------Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers; renew the ball joints if necessary __ __ E E E ______2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted seals; renew if necessary p p p p ------p p ------~ 3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints

Brake and hydraulic systems (see page E 1 · 1) 1 Check the oil level in the reservoirs; if necessary top·up with hydraulic system mineral oil __ E E E ------2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil ------E------3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses; renew as necessary __ E E E E ------4 Renew the accumulator to body, trailing arms to body, and if fitted.the sub-frame to body hoses ------E ------5 Renew all flexible hoses ------E E 6 Check the brake disc pads for wear; renew if necessary __ E E E E ------7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust excluders when changing brake pads; renew if necessary __ E E E E ------8 Renew the brake caliper seals E ------9 Check the parking brake pads for wear; renew if necessary __ E E _ E _ E ------10 Adjust the parking brake E E E E p p p p -- 11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage ------

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section E1 E1·5

A B C D E F G H

Fuel system 1 Renew the main fuel filter E Remove. clean, and examine the intank fuel filter; ------renew if necessary ------E ------2 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel tank hose; renew as necessary E E 3 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes; renew as necessary ------E E

Electrical system E E E E 1 Check the state of charge of the battery ------2 Clean and check the battery terminals -- p p p p ------3 Check all exterior lamps for operation; rectify if p p p p necessary ------4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ------5 Check all interior lamps for operation; rectify if p p p p necessary ------6 Check the horns for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ------7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp washer (if fitted) reservoirs -- E E E E ------8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper blades renew if necessary -- p p p p ----~--- 9 Check the windscreen wash/wipe and headlamps wash (if fitted) systems for correct operation; rectify if necessary p p p p ------10 Check the alternator for correct operation; renew p p brushes if necessary ------Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from p p p p obstruction ------2 Check the refrigeration system for corre{:t operation; rectify if necessary p p p p

Body 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat belts; repon any defects to the owner -- p pp ·P ------2 Check that all body drains are free from obstruction ------p p p p 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt p p p 4 Convertible cars Check the fluid level in the power operated hood reseNoir; top-up if necessary. The hood should be in the fully down (open) position ------p p ------

Wheels 1 Check all tyre pressures; adjust if necessary -- p p p p ------2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres; p p p p report any defects to the owner ------Test p p p p 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance

Owner Service Schedule Record On completion of the required service schedule complete the respective voucher contained in the Owner's Service Schedule and Record book ___E__ E__ E__ E__ E__ E_ E E

TS04406

Service schedules Cars conforming to North American specifications

Contents Sections Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1981/1987 {inclusive) model year cars F1 F1 F1 The model year of these cars can be identified by the tenth letter of the vehicle identification number (VIN). as follows. 1981=8 (*SCAZS42A3BCX01011*) 1982=C . (*SCAZS42A7CCX05001 *I 1983=0 (*SCAZS42AODCX07805*) 1984=E ( *SCAZS42A0ECX08597 *) 1985=F (* SCAZS42A3FCX12001 *) 1986=G {* SCAZS42A4GCX1 3871 *} 1987=H (*SCAZS42A5HCX16348*)

TSD4406

Issue record sheet 1 June 1986 The dates quoted below refer to the issue date of individual pages within this chapter. ·

Sections F1 Page No. Contents 1 Jun 86 2 Jul 85 3 Jun 86 4 Jul 85 5 ------Jul 85 ------6 7 8 109 ------11 12 13 1514 ------16 17 18 2019 ------21 22 23 2524 ------26 27 28 30---29 ------~ 31 32 33 3534 ------36 37 38 39 ------40 41 42 43 44 ______45 46 47 48

TSD4406

Service schedules 1981/1987 (inclusive) model year cars

The Preventive maintenance service schedules list!:ld thus(P) contain important servicing work recommended to secure the maximum life and WARNING efficiency for the car and will only be carried out on Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil ( LHM) to the owner's instructions. replenish the braking and levelling systems. All service schedules should be carried out at the Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363, appropriate mileage or time interval whichever is earlier. Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of The service intervals and corresponding code brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause letters used on the service schedule chart are as component failure necessitating extensive rectification follows. to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Initial 3000 miles (5000 kilometres) I Always ensure before fitting any seals. hoses. 7500 miles ( 1 2 000 kilometres) A pipes, etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil 15 000 miles (24 000 kilometres) B system. For details of correct component identification 22 500 miles (36 000 kilometres) A reference should be made to Chapter G of the 30 000 miles (48 000 kilometres) C Workshop Manual. 37 500 miles (60 000 kilometres) A Always ensure that a sealed container of 45 000 miles (72 000 kilometres) B Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted 52 500 miles (84 000 kilometres) A adjacent to the battery. 60 000 miles (96 000 kilometres) D Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the The service schedules are repeated after 60 000 systems when work is being carried out miles (96 000 kilometres).

The service schedule chart in this section indicates the operations required to service the vehicle. When carrying out the schedules, reference should be made to Seasonal Chapter B which describes the correct procedure to be E Service schedule used for each operation. In order to locate this information To be carried out at intervals of one year the operation numbers quoted in the service schedule chart correspond with those in Chapter B. F Service schedule To be carried out at intervals of two years

Service schedules G Service schedule The service schedules contain both the Essential and To be carried out at intervals of four years Preventive service schedules for complete vehicle maintenance. H Service schedule All work listed in the Essential maintenance To be carried out at intervals of eight years service schedules should be carried out at the specified mileage/time intervals.

The Essential maintenance service schedules are Adverse conditions maintenance divided into two categories. When the car is operating continuously under adverse conditions, such as are experienced in cities and tQwns (a) Service work listed thus (*E) covers the servicing where constant stopping and starting is the normal requirements for the emission control components rule. the engine oil should be changed every 3000 and is required to comply with the emission miles (5000 kilometres} or 3 months whichever is the control regulations. This service work must be earlier. carried out during the entire life of the vehicle.

(b) Service work listed thus {El covers the additional servicing required to comply with the New Car Regular maintenance Warranty or is considered essential beyond the Operations to be carried out at weekly, monthly, or warranty period from a safety point of view. three monthly intervals are specified in Chapter B.

TSO 4406

Time allowance Schedule Time in hours Essential Preventive I 1.0 0.5 A 2.5 2.0 B 4.0 3.5 C 6.5 5.0 0 14.0 2.5 E Nominal 0.75 F Nominal 3.75 G 4.50 3.50 H 13.0 3.50

When replacing brake pads, drive belts, ball joints. or other items as a result of a service inspection, add the respective man-hour schedule time. If it is necessary to carry out the 3000 miles (5000 kilometres) or 3 months service recommendation the time allowance is 0.5 hour.

)

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section F1 F1 · 3

Service schedule operations A B C D E F G H

Car protection Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in Chapter B. E E E E . E_ E E E E

Crankcase emission control system 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame traps ------P E ------

Exhaust emission control system Exhaust system 1 Renew the oxygen sensor and reset the elapsed mileage indicator ( 1981 /86 model year cars only) ------~ _E_ ------ Renew the oxygen sensor (1987 model year cars only) __ ------__E_ ------Exhaust gas recirculation system 2 Remove and clean the E.G.R. valve and feed pipes ______- - E ------3 Check the E.G.R. valve for correct operation --__ - - -- E ------

Air injection system 4 Check the condition and tension of the drive belt; adjust or renew as necessary ______~ _ E______5 Check the system for leaks and correct operation; renew any defective components ______E ----____

Fuel evaporative emission control system 1 Renew the evaporative emission control canister ------E ------2 Check the condition of all pipes, hoses, and connections; renew if necessary ---- p p E ------3 Check the purge flow rate; rectify if necessary ------p E ------

Engine 1 Change the engine oil *E *E *E •E _ E ------2 Renew the engine oil filter -- *E *E *E E ------3 Check the condition and tension of the drive belts; adjust or renew as necessary E E E E E ------4 Renew the air filter element ------*E E ------5 Renew the sparking plugs ------*E E ------6 Lubricate the distributor (1981/82 model year cars only) ---- p p E ------p p p p 7 Lubricate the accelerator linkage 8 Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary ---- p p E ------9 Check for correct operation of the vacuum advance mechanism ---- p p E ------10 Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary E __ P _P_ E ------

Engine cooling system 1 Check the anti-freeze concentration; correct if necessary -- p p p p ------2 Check the coolant level; top-up if necessary -- E E E E ------E p p p p 3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness ------4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses; renew p E as necessary ------p E - - 5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose ------p p p p 6 Renew the coolant 7 Reverse flush the cooling system ------p p p ·a Remove foreign matter from the radiator, oil cooler (if fitted). and refrigeration condenser ------p p p p 9 Renew the thermostat ------p E ------

TS04406

A B C D E F G H Torque converter transmission 1 Check the transmission fluid level; top-up if necessary 2 Renew the transmission fluid E E ---E -- E E ------E- --E------3 Fit a new intake strainer == - - --p -- p -- p -- p ------4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod ------Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints (not applicable to a rubber jointed propeller shaft) E E ------Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level; top·up if necessary E E 2 Renew the final drive oil ------E E ------. 3 Check the condition of the drive-shaft joint covers: p p p p renew if necessary ------Steering 1 Check the steering pump fluid level; top·up if necessary P E E E E______2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints (if applicable) ------E -- E -- E ------3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers; renew if necessary ____ E E E ------4 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals; renew if necessary. ---- _E E E ------Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers; renew the ball joints if necessary ____ E E E ------2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted seals; renew if necessary -- p p p p ------3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints ------p p ------

Brake and hydraulic systems (see page F1·1) 1 Check the oil level in tbe reservoirs; if necessary top-up with hydraulic system mineral oil __ E E E ------2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil ------E ------3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses; renew as necessary __ E E E E ~------ 4 Renew the accumulator to body, trailing arms to body, and if fitted.the sub-frame to body hoses E ------E E - 5 Renew all flexible hoses ------6 Check the brake disc pads for wear; renew if necessary E E - E- E 7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust ------excluders when changing brake pads; renew if necessary E E E E ------E 8 Renew the brake caliper seals ---- 9 Check the parking brake pads for wear; renew if ------necessary __ E E E E ------10 Adjust the parking brake -- E E E E ------11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage -- p p p p ------Fuel system 1 Renew the main fuel filter E ------Remove, clean, and examine the intank fuel filter; renew if necessary ______E ______2 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel tank hose; renew as necessary ------E E

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section F1 Fl - 5

A B C D E F G H ------3 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes; renew as necessary ~------~------E E

Electrical system 1 Check the state of charge of the battery E E E E 2 Clean and check the battery terminals -- p p p p ~--~~--~ 3 Check all exterior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ~ - - ~---- 4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ---~~--- 5 Check all interior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ~---~--~ 6 Check the horns for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ------~ 7 Replenish the windscreen washer reservoir (and headlamps washer reservoir if fitted) __ E E E E ~---~--~ 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper blades; renew if necessary -- p p . p p ----~--- 9 Check the windscreen wash/wipe and the headlamps wash {if fitted} systems for correct operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ----~--~ 10 Check the alternator for correct operation; renew brushes if necessary ------p p ------

Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from obstruction ------~- p p p p 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct operation; rectify if necessary ------p p -L p

Body 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat belts; report any defects to the owner -- p p p p ------~ 2 Check that all body drains are free from obstruction ------p p p p 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt ---- p p p ------~ 4 Convertible cars Check the fluid level in the power operated hood reservoir; top-up if necessary. The hood should be p p in the fully down (open} position ------Wheels 1 Check all tyre pressures; adjust if necessary -- p p p p ----~--~ 2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres; report any defects to the owner ~- p p p p ------~

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance p p p p p ------~

Owner Service Schedule Record On completion of the required service schedule complete the respective service record contained in the Owner's Service Schedule and Record Book. EE EE EE EE E

TSO 4406

Service schedules Cars conforming to Middle East Countries specifications

Contents Sections Silver Spirit Mulsanne Bentley Bentley Corniche/ Camargue Mulsanne Turbo Eight Turbo R Continental Silver Spur 1984 model year cars G1 1985/86 model year cars G1 G1 G1 G1 1985 model year cars Gl/1 1986 model year cars G1/1

TSO 4406

Issue record sheet 1 July 1985 The dates quoted below refer to the issue date of individual pages within this chapter.

Sections lG1 IG1/1 Page No. Contents 1 Jul 85 Jul 85 2 3 Jul 85 Jul 85 4 Jul 85 Jul 85 5 ----Jul------85 Jul 85 ------6 7 8 109 ------~ 11 12 13 14 ______~ 15 16 17 18 19 ______~ 20 21 22 23 24 25 ------26 27 28 3029 ------31 3332 34 ______35 36 37 38 4039 ------41 42 43 44 ______~ 46 46 47 48

TS04406

Service schedules 1984/1986 model year cars

The Preventive maintenance service schedules listed thus(P) contain important servicing work recommended to secure the maximum life and WARNING efficiency for the car and will only be carried out on Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to the owner's instructions. replenish the braking and levelling systems. All service schedules should be carried out at the Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363, appropriate mileage or time interval whichever is earlier. Universal, or any other type). The use of any type of The service intervals and corresponding code brake fluid, even in very small amounts, will cause letters used on the service schedule chart are as component failure necessitating extensive rectification follows. to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, Initial 5000 kilometres {3000 miles) or 3 months I pipes, etc.• that they are suitable for a mineral oil 10 000 kilometres (6000 miles) or 6 months A system. For details of correct component identification 20 000 kilometres (12 000 miles) or 1 year B reference should be made to Chapter G of the 30 000 kilometres ( 18 000 miles) or 1 Y2 years A Workshop Manual. 40 000 kilometres (24 000 miles) or 2 years C Always ensure that a sealed container of 50 000 kilometres {30 000 miles) or 2Y2 years A Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted 60 000 kilometres (36 000 miles) or 3 years B adjacent to the battery. 70 000 kilometres (42 000 miles) or 3Yi years A Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or 4 years D systems when work is being carried out. 90 000 kilometres (54 000 miles) or 4Y2 years A 100 000 kilometres {60 000 miles) or 5 years B The service schedule chart in this section 110 000 kilometres (66 000 miles} or 5Y2 years A indicates the operations required to service the vehicle. 120 000 kilometres (72 000 miles) or 6 years C When carrying out the schedules, reference should be 130 000 kilometres (78 000 miles) or 6Y2 years A made to Chapter B which describes the correct 140 000 kilometres (84 000 miles) or 7 years B procedure to be used for each operation. In order to 150 000 kilometres (90 000 miles) or 7312 years A locate this information the operation numbers quoted 160 000 kilometres {96 000 miles} or 8 years O in the service schedule chart correspond with those in The service schedules are repeated after 1 60 000 Chapter 8. kilometres (96 000 miles).

The Essential maintenance service schedules are G Service schedule divided into two categories. To be carried out at intervals of four years

(a) Service work listed thus(*E) covers the servicing H Service schedule requirements for the emission control components To be carried out at intervals of eight years and is required to comply with the emission control regulations. This service work must be Adverse conditions maintenance carried out during the entire life of the vehicle. When the ear is operating continuously under adverse conditions. such as are experienced in cities and towns (b) Service work listed thus (E) covers the additional where constant stopping and starting is the normal servicing required to comply with the New Car rule, the engine oil should be changed every 5000 Warranty or is considered essential beyond the kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months whichever is the warranty period from a safety point of view. earlier.

TSD4406

Service schedule operations A B C D E F G H Car protection Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in Chapter 8. EE EE EE EE E

Crankcase emission control system 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube flame traps ____ ·e •e *E ______2 Clean the choke butterfly housing adapter ---- *E "E 1______

Fuel evaporative emission control system 1 Renew the evaporative emission control canister ------__ 1_ ------2 Check the condition of all pipes. hoses, and connections; renew if necessary. Pressure test the fuel tank and evaporative emission control line; rectify any leaks - --- *E *E *E ------3 Check the purge flow rate; rectify if necessary ------....:e_ ..:e_ ------

Engine 1 Change the engine oil E "E *E *E *E ------2 Renew the engine oil filter -- *E *E *E *E ------3 Check the condition and tension of all drive belts; adiust or renew as necessary E E E E E ------~ 4 Renew the air filter element ---- •e *E "E ------5 Check the oil level in the damper of each carburetter; top-up if necessary __ 1_ ~ ..:e_ ~ ------6 Check the float chamber depression; adjust if necessary ----~ ....:e_ ..:e_ ------7 Check for correct choke operation and choke stove pipe flow; rectify if necessary ------*E *E ------8 Check the choke fast-idle speed; adjust if necessary -- *E *E "E *E ------9 Renew the sparking plugs *E *E *E -- p p p p ------10 Lubricate the accelerator linkage 11 Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary -- *E *E *E *E ------12 Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary -- *E *E *E *E ------

Engine cooling system 1 Check the anti-freeze concentration; correct if necessary - - p p p p ------2 Check the coolant level; top-up if necessary ~- E E E E ------3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness E p p p p ------4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses; renew as necessary ~--- E E E ------5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose ------E E ------6 Renew the coolant --____----__------______pP_ p p 7 Reverse flush the cooling system 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator. oil cooler (if fitted}, and refrigeration condenser ------p p p 9 Renew the thermostat ------E E ------

Torque converter transmission 1 Check the transmission fluid level; top-up if necessary E E ------2 Renew the transmission fluid ------E -- E -- E ------3 Fit a new intake strainer ------E E ---~---- 4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod -- p p p p ~---~---

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level; top-up if necessary __ __ E ______2 Renew the final drive oil ______E E ______

TSO 4406

A B C D E F G H 3 Check the condition of the drive·shatt joint covers; renew if necessary - - P P P P ______

Steering 1 Check the steering pump fluid level; top-up if necessary --P -- E -- E -- E -- E ------2 Lubricate the steering linkage ball joints {if _____E___ E _ _e______applicable) 3 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers; renew if necessary --__E _ _.E_ __L_ _e_ ------4 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals; renew if necessary. -- E E E E ------

Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers; renew the ball joints if necessary __ E E E E ------2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted seals; renew if necessary -- p p p p ------3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints -- P p _ P ___P ______

Brake and hydraulic systems ( see page G 1-1) 1 Check the oil level in the reservoirs; if necessary top-up with hydraulic system mineral oil __ E E E ------2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil ------E ------3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses; renew as necessary ----E -- E -- E -- E ------4 Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms to body hoses ------E ------5 Renew all flexible hoses ------E 6 Check the brake disc pads for wear; renew if necessary ----E -- E -- E -- E ------7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust excluders when changing brake pads; renew if necessary E E E E 8 Renew the brake caliper seals ------E 9 Check the parking brake pads for wear; renew if E E E E necessary -- E E E E ------10 Adjust the parking brake ------11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage -- p p p p ------

Fuel system 1 Renew the main fuel filter element ------p p ------Remove. clean. and examine the intank fuel filter; renew if necessary ------E ------2 Fit new paper filter elements to the carburetter fuel inlets ------~ ...:.e._ ------3 Renew the fuel mixture weakening device filter ------"E •e ------4 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel tank hose; renew as necessary ------E E 5 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes; renew as necessary ----. ------E Electrical system 1 Check the state of charge of the battery E E E E ------2 Clean and check the battery terminals --__p _ __P _ __e_ ~ ------3 Check all exterior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p ~------4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- p p p p ------

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section G1 G1·5

A B C 0 E F G H

5 Check all interior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary -- P P P P ------6 Check the horns for operation; rectify if necessary __ P P P P ------7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp washer reservoirs _ _ E E _ E E ----~--~ 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper blades and headlamp wash brushes {if fitted); renew if necessary -- ____e_ __f_ ___L_ _e__ ------9 Check the windscreen and headlamp wash/ wipe systems for correct operation; rectify if necessary -- P P P J ------1 0 Check the alternator for correct operation; renew brushes if necessary ______L ______11 Check the condition of the starter motor brushes and pinion; renew if necessary ______------P

Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from obstruction ------___e__ __f_ ---L ___.e._ 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct operation; rectify if necessary ~---~--~~- p p p p

Body 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat belts; report any defects to the owner ~- p p p p ~---~--~ 2 Check that all body drains are free from obstruction p p p 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt p p p 4 Convertible cars Check the fluid level in the power operated hood reservoir; top-up if necessary. The hood should be in the fully down (open) position ~ --~~- p p ~---~--- Wheels 1 Check all tyre pressures; adjust if necessary ~- p p p p ~--~~--~ 2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres; report any defects to the owner p p p p

Test 1 Road test the car for satisfactory performance p p p p p ~--~~--~

Owner Service Schedule Record On completion of the required service schedule complete the respective service record contained in the Owner's Service Schedule and Record book. EE EE EE EE E

TSO 4406

Service schedules 1985/86 model year cars

The Preventive maintenance service schedules listed thus(P) contain important servicing work recommended to secure the maximum life and efficiency for the car and will only be carried out on WARNING the owner's instructions. Use only Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) to All service schedules should be carried out at the replenish the braking and levelling systems. appropriate mileage or time interval whichever is Do not use Brake Fluids (Castrol RR363, earlier. Universal. or any other type). The use of any type of The service intervals and corresponding code brake fluid. even in very small amounts, will cause letters used on the service schedule chart are as component failure necessitating extensive rectification follows. to the braking and levelling systems of the car. Always ensure before fitting any seals, hoses, Initial 5000 kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months I pipes, etc., that they are suitable for a mineral oil 10 000 kilometres (6000 miles} or 6 months A system. For details of correct component identification 20 000 kilometres ( 12 000 miles) or 1 year B reference should be made to Chapter G of the 30 000 kilometres ( 18 000 miles) or 1 Y:i years A Workshop Manual. 40 000 kilometres (24 000 miles) or 2 years C Always ensure that a sealed container of 50 000 kilometres (30 000 miles) or 2Yz years A Hydraulic System Mineral Oil (LHM) is fitted 60 000 kilometres {36 000 miles) or 3 years B adjacent to the battery. 70 000 kilometres (42 000 miles) or 3Yz years A Always ensure that no foreign matter enters the 80 000 kilometres (48 000 miles) or 4 years D systems when work is being carried out. 90 000 kilometres (54 000 miles) or 4Yz years A 100 000 kilometres {60 000 miles) or 5 years B The service schedule chart in this section 110 000 kilometres (66 000 miles) or 5Y2 years A indicates the operations required to service the vehicle. 120 000 kilometres (72 000 miles} or 6 years C When carrying out the schedules, reference should be 130 000 kilometres (78 000 miles} or 6Yz years A made to Chapter B which describes the correct 140 000 kilometres (84 000 miles) or 7 years B procedure to be used for each operation. In order to 150 000 kilometres (90 000 miles) or 7Yz years A locate this information the operation numbers quoted 160 000 kilometres (96 000 miles) or 8 years D in the service schedule chart correspond with those in The service schedules are repeated after 160 000 Chapter B. kilometres (96 000 miles).

Service schedules Seasonal The service schedules contain both the Essential and E Service schedule Preventive service schedules for complete vehicle To be carried out at intervals of one year maintenance. All work listed in the Essential maintenance F Service schedule service schedules should be carried out at the To be carried out at intervals of two years specified mileage/time intervals. The Essential maintenance service schedules are G Service schedule divided into two categories. To be carried out at intervals of four years

(a) Service work listed thus{*E) covers the servicing H Service schedule requirements for the emission control components To be carried out at intervals of eight years and is required to comply with the emission control regulations. This service work must be Adverse conditions maintenance carried out during the entire life of the vehicle. When the car is operating continuously under adverse conditions, such as are experienced in cities and towns (b) Service work listed thus (E) covers the additional where constant stopping and starting is the normal servicing required to comply with the New Car rule. the engine oil should be changed every 5000 Warranty or is considered essential beyond the kilometres (3000 miles) or 3 months whichever is the warranty period from a safety point of view. earlier.

TSD 4406

Service schedule operations A B C D E F G H Car protection Before commencing to carry out a service schedule the car should be suitably protected as described in Chapter B. E E E E E E E E E

Crankcase emission control system 1 Clean the crankcase breather tube and flame traps _ _ __ *E *E *E ______

Fuel evaporative emission control system 1 Renew the evaporative emission control canister *E 2 Check the condition of all pipes, hoses, and connections; renew if necessary. Pressure test the fuel tank and evaporative loss control line; rectify *E *E *E any leaks ------3 Check the purge flow rate and operation of the system *E *E

Engine 1 Change the engine oil E *E *E *E *E ------2 Renew the engine oil filter -- *E *E *E *E ------3 Check the condition and tension of all drive belts; adjust or renew as necessary E E E E E ~--~~--~ 4 Renew the air filter element ---- *E *E *E ------5 Check the choke idle speed; adjust if necessary -- *E *E *E *E ------6 Renew the sparking plugs ---- *E *E *E ------7 Lubricate the accelerator and carburetter linkage ~- p p p p ~--~~--~ 8 Check the ignition timing; adjust if necessary (Always use the full method as specified in the Workshop Manual} __ *E *E "E *E ------9 Check the engine idle speed; adjust if necessary -- *E *E *E •E ______

Engine cooling system 1 Check the anti-freeze concentration; correct if necessary ~- p p p p ~--~~---- 2 Check the coolant level; top-up if necessary ~- E E E E ~--~~--~ 3 Check all coolant hose clips for tightness E P p p p ~--~~--~ 4 Examine the condition of all coolant hoses; renew as necessary ~--~ E E E ~--~~--~ 5 Fit a new heater tap feed hose E E 6 Renew the coolant ~--~~--~~--~ p p p 7 Reverse flush the cooling system ~--~~--~~--~ p p p 8 Remove foreign matter from the radiator, oil cooler, and refrigeration condenser ~ - -~~--~~--~ p p p 9 Renew the thermostat ~--~~- E E ~--~~--~

Torque converter transmission 1 Check the transmission fluid level; top-up if necessary --E -- E ------2 Renew the transmission fluid ~--~ E E E ~--~~--~ 3 Fit a new intake strainer ~--~~- E E ~--~~--~ 4 Lubricate the gear range selector control rod ~- p p p p ~--~~--~

Propeller shaft 1 Lubricate the universal joints ______E E ______

Final drive unit 1 Check the final drive oil level; top-up if necessary __ __ E ______--__ 2 Renew the final drive oil ______E E ______3 Check the condition of the drive-shah joint covers; renew if necessary __ P P P P ------

TSD 4406

A B C D E F G H Steering 1 Check the steering pump fluid level; top-up if necessary --P -- E -- E -- E -- E ------2 Check the condition of the steering ball joint covers; renew if necessary ____E ___ E___ E___ E ______3 Check the condition of the steering rack convoluted seals; renew if necessary. __ E E E E ------

Suspension 1 Check the condition of the front ball joint covers; renew the ball joints if necessary _ _ __E _ __E___ E ___ E ____ _ 2 Check the condition of the rear strut convoluted p p p p seals: renew if necessary ------3 Lubricate the height control valve ball joints ----p -- p -- p -- p ------Brake and hydraulic systems (see page G 1/1 • 1) 1 Check the oil level in the reservoirs; if necessary top-up with hydraulic system mineral oil ______E E E -----E ______-----_ 2 Renew the hydraulic system mineral oil 3 Check the condition of all brake pipes and hoses; renew as necessary __ __E ___ E_ _ _E ___E ______4 Renew the accumulator to body and trailing arms E to body hoses ------E- 5 Renew all hydraulic system flexible hoses ------6 Check the brake disc pads for wear; renew if necessary __ E E E E ------7 Check the condition of the brake caliper dust excluders when changing brake pads: renew if E E E E necessary ------E 8 Renew the brake caliper seals ------9 Check the parking brake pads for wear; renew if necessary __ E E E E ------10 Adjust the parking brake E E E E 11 Lubricate the parking brake linkage -- p p p p ------

Fuel system 1 Renew the main fuel filter element p p Remove, clean, and examine the intank fuel filter; ------renew if necessary ------E------2 Clean the carburetter fuel inlet filter ------E E ---~~--- 3 Check the condition of the filler head to fuel tank hose; renew as necessary ------_ _ E E 4 Check the condition of all flexible fuel pipes; renew as necessary ------E

Electrical system 1 Check the state of charge of the battery ~- E E E E ~------2 Clean and check the battery terminals -- p p p p ------3 Check all exterior /amps for operation; rectify if necessary __ p P P P ______4 Check all facia warning lamps for operation; rectify if necessary __ p P P P ______5 Check all interior lamps for operation; rectify if necessary __ p p P P ______6 Check the horns for operation; rectify if necessary __ P P P P ______7 Replenish the windscreen and headlamp washer reservoirs __ E E E E ----~--- 8 Check the condition of the windscreen wiper blades; renew if necessary ~- p p p p ------

July 1985 SERVICE SCHEDULE MANUAL Section G 1/1 G1/1·5

A B C D E F G H

9 Check the windscreen and headlamp wash/ wipe systems for correct operation; rectify if necessary __ p P P p ______10 Check the alternator for correct operation; renew brushes if necessary ______p ______11 Check the condition of the starter motor brushes and pinion; renew if necessary ______p

Automatic air conditioning system 1 Check the scuttle intake grille is free from obstruction ______p P P P 2 Check the refrigeration system for correct operation; rectify if necessary ______P P P P

Body 1 Check the condition and operation of the seat belts; report any defects to the owner __ P P P P ______2 Check that all body drains are free from obstruction ______P P P 3 Lubricate the spare wheel carrier lowering bolt __ __ P P P ______

Wheels l Check all tyre pressures; adjust if necessary __ P P P P ______2 Check the condition and tread depth of the tyres; report any defects to the owner __ P P P P ______

Test l Road test the car for satisfactory performance P P P P P ______

Owner Service Schedule Record On completion of the required service schedule complete the respective voucher contained in the Owner's Service Schedule and Record book. E E E E E E E E E

TSO 4406